What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

WHAT'S NEW | PUBLICDocument Version: 1.0 – 2019-09-20

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

© 2

019

SAP

SE o

r an

SAP affi

liate

com

pany

. All

right

s re

serv

ed.

THE BEST RUN

Content

1 What's New. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

2 Asset Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172.1 Maintenance Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Actual Cost Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Maintenance Notification and Order: Change Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Find Maintenance Plans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Find Maintenance Plans: Viewing End Date for Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Find Maintenance Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Mass Time Confirmations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

2.2 Environment, Health, and Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Incident Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Health and Safety Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Environment Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

2.3 Resource Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Scheduling of Maintenance Order Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40New Features: Resource Scheduling for Maintenance Planners App. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42New Features: Schedule Maintenance Order Operations App. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43New Features: Maintenance Scheduling Board App. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44New Features: Manage Work Center Utilization App. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Visualization of Relationships between Order Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46New App: Assign Maintenance Order Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

2.4 Country/Region Specifics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482.5 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Preventive Maintenance (BJ2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

3 Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503.1 Name Changes for Finance Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503.2 Fiori Content for Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523.3 Value Help Authorizations in Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533.4 Financial Planning and Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Apps No Longer Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Business Catalogs for Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Overhead Cost Accounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Financial Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Product Costing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67Sales Accounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

2 P U B L I CWhat's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

Content

Budget Availability Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703.5 Accounting and Financial Close. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

General Ledger Accounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Asset Accounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Revenue Accounting and Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Joint Venture Accounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Joint Venture Accounting on Universal Journal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118Intercompany Matching and Reconciliation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Group Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Central Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Advanced Compliance Reporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

3.6 Treasury Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Cash and Liquidity Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Treasury and Risk Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Payments and Bank Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

3.7 Commodity Risk Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Configuration Settings for Commodities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198Exercise of Commodity Listed Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

3.8 Financial Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Invoice Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Receivables Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206Settlement Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Integration with SAP S/4HANA Contract Accounting (FI-CA) and SAP S/4HANA Cloud for Central Payment Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

3.9 Billing and Revenue Innovation Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Convergent Invoicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253Receivables Management and Payment Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254

3.10 Governance, Risk, and Compliance for Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262International Trade. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

3.11 Country/Region Specifics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2773.12 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Lease-In Accounting (1T6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277Period-End Closing - Plant (BEI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278Service Contract (21R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279Accounting for Incoming Sales Orders (2FD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280Basic Cash Operations (BFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281Advanced Bank Account Management (J77) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282Customs Management with SAP Global Trade Services (2U1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283Inventory Valuation for Year-End Closing (BEJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284Universal Allocation (2QL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285Provisioning of Overdue Receivables (2PD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Content P U B L I C 3

Financial Plan Data Upload from File (1HB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287Accounting and Financial Close (J58) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288Bank Integration with SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity (16R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289Lease-Out for Sublease Accounting (2SB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290Basic Credit Management (BD6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291Group Reporting - Financial Consolidation (1SG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292Restricted Party Screening with SAP Watch List Screening (1WE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293Purchase Order Accruals (2VB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294Embargo Control (1WC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295General Indirect Tax in the Canary Islands (3SS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296Key Risk Indicator Monitoring with SAP Risk Management (2U2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297Intercompany Reconciliation Process (40Y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297Profitability and Cost Analysis (J55) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298Legal Control (1W8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299Predictive Analytics Model Training - Finance (30K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300Joint Venture Accounting (3F7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301Advanced Cash Operations (J78) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302Overhead Cost Accounting (J54) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303Accounts Receivable (J59) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304Classification for Customs Tariff Number and Commodity Code (2U3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305Cash Application Integration (1MV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306Advanced Credit Management (1QM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307Accounts Payable (J60) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308Basic Bank Account Management (BFA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309Liquidity Planning (3L5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310Intrastat Processing (BDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311Lockbox (1JT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312Lease-Out Accounting (21Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313Group Reporting - Matrix Consolidation (3LX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Group Reporting - Predictive Consolidation (3JP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314Tax Service Integration (43D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315Digital Payments (1S2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316Group Reporting - Data from External Systems (2U6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317Lease-Out for Sublease Accounting - Group Ledger IFRS (2SA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318Preference Management with SAP Global Trade Services (3JX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319Continuous Control Monitoring with SAP Process Control (2OH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320Lease-In Accounting - Group Ledger IFRS (21P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321Actual Costing (33Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

4 Manufacturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3234.1 Manufacturing Execution for Discrete Industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Schedule Technical Completion Job for Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323


Content

Value Help Authorizations in Manufacturing Execution for Discrete Industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323Confirmation Settings for Discrete and Process Manufacturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

4.2 Manufacturing Execution for Process Industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326Confirmation Settings for Discrete and Process Manufacturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326

4.3 Production Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Maintain PIRs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327Rescheduling Check in the Managing Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328Situation Handling in the Manage Material Coverage App. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329Manage Planned Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329Convert Planned Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330Maintain MRP Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330Schedule Production. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331Monitor Work Center Schedules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332Schedule ATP Run for Production / Planned Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332API for Planned Orders (Read, Create, Update, Delete). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333Material Requirements Planning (MRP). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334Demand-Driven Replenishment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Suspend and Resume Proposal Runs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337BOM and BOM Usage in Network Graph. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337Average Daily Usage in Buffer Proposal Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338API for Buffer Profile (Read). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338API for Buffer Sizing (Read, Write, Update). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Predictive Material and Resource Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340Kanban. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

4.4 Quality Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Manage Defects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347Record Production Defects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Define Follow-Up Actions for Quality Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348Define Defect Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349Proposal of Defect Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349New Functions for Quality Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Manage Quality Tasks: Task Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350Manage Workflows for Quality Task Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351Flexible In-Production Inspection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351Value Help Authorizations in Quality Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352Record Inspection Results in Table Form. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353EWM-QM Integration Without Inspection Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354New Features for Record Inspection Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355Nonconformance Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356Nonconformance Detailed Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356


Defects in Quality Engineer Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3574.5 Country/Region Specifics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3574.6 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on Process Order (BJ8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357Analytics for Production Unit - Plan/Actual Production Cost (2QW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358Quality Management in Discrete Manufacturing (1E1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359Predictive Analytics Model Training - Supply Chain (20N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360Make-to-Order Production - Process Manufacturing (3OK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361Tank Trailer Filling with Residuals (42N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing (BJ5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363Mass Change Manufacturing Bill of Material for Production (3LP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364Make-to-Stock Production with Variant Configuration (21D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365Nonconformance Management (2QN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366Just-In-Time Supply to Customer from Stock (2EM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367Rework Processing - Work-in-Process (BJQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368Make-to-Stock with Co- and By-Products - Process Manufacturing (3L7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369Inbound Storage Tank Management - Process Manufacturing (3UK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Quality Management (2V0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on Production Order (2UG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372Change Manufacturing Bill of Material for Production (3LO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373Make-to-Order Production - Finished Goods Sales and Final Assembly (BJE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374Make-to-Order Production with Variant Configuration (1YT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375Manufacturing with Kanban Supply into Production (1E3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376Demand-Driven Replenishment Planning and Execution (2QI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377Production Capacity Evaluation (31L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378Production Capacity Leveling (3LQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379Make-to-Order Production - Semifinished Goods Planning and Assembly (1BM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 380Make-to-Stock with Silo Material - Process Manufacturing (3UL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381Demand-Driven Buffer Level Management (1Y2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

5 Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3835.1 Manufacturing Engineering and Process Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

Manage Production Operators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383Manage Production Versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384Monitor Shop Floor Master Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384Manage Engineering Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385Additional PEO Features in VEMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Manage Shop Floor Routings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386Manage Rework Routings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387Manage Planning Routings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388Manage Order-Specific Shop Floor Routings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389

5.2 Extended Production Process Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390


Content

5.3 Extended Production Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Production Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390Production Execution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

6 Just-In-Time Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3976.1 Next Generation Just-In-Time (JIT) Supply to Production. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

7 R&D/Engineering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3987.1 Enterprise Portfolio and Project Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Project Financial Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398Commercial Project Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

7.2 Integrated Product Development for Discrete Industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405Access Control Management for Change Master. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405Access Control Management for Bill of Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Assignment of Change Record to BOM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406Maintain Variable Size Item for BOM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407Deletion of Multiple BOM Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407Business Event Handling in Bill of Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Value Help Authorizations in Bill of Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408Document Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409Assignment of Phantom Items to Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410Define Phantom Items in Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410AVC - Enhanced Integration with Purchasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411AVC - Enhanced Integration with Production Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411AVC - Apply Mass Changes to Material Variant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Enterprise Search for Classification Characteristic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Enterprise Search for Classification Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413AVC - Handling Inconsistencies for Multi-level VC Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413AVC - Enhanced Functionality for Maintenance of Characteristic Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414Enhancements to Manage Engineering Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414AVC - Syntax Enhancements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415AVC - Enablement of BAdIs for the Advanced Configuration Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416Integration of Order Engineering Workbench. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416AVC - Enhancements for the Simulation Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

7.3 Integrated Product Development for Process Industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418Contribution-based Formulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418Usability Enhancements in Recipe Development. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419

7.4 Product Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420Foundation for Product Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420Product Marketability and Chemical Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430Dangerous Goods Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434Safety Data Sheet Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442


7.5 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446Recipe Handover to Production - Bill of Material (1QG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product (3FC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447Product Structure Template Management (35Q) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448Assess Marketability of a Product (31H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449Set up Configurable Bill of Material using Variant Configuration (22T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450Chemical Compliance Approval for Purchased Material And Supplier (31G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products (3VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452Specification Management for Recipes (1QA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452Product Structure Management (3ND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453Manage Documents (22P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454Bill of Material - Mass Change (1R5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455Engineering Bill of Material - Change Master Management (1R3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456Formulation - Recipe Development (1QC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457Requirements Driven Development (2G4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458Engineering Change Management with Change Records (1NF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

8 Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4618.1 Order and Contract Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Sales Master Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461Price Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463Sales Quotation Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467Sales Contract Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468Sales Order Management and Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474Sales Billing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485Solution Billing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496Incentive and Commission Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496Claims, Returns, and Refund Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497Sales Monitoring and Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500Enhancements to Functionality and Usability in Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514

8.2 Sales Force Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517Product Assistance for Sales Force Support Moved From Service to Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

8.3 Commodity Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517Integration with Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

8.4 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518Predictive Analytics Model Training - Sales (2YJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518Convergent Billing (1MC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519Accelerated Customer Returns (BKP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520Return Order Processing for Non-Stock Material (3TE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521Dangerous Goods in Sales (3G8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521Digital Payments - Sales (1Z1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522Presales Management (41V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523


Content

Sales Order Processing with Customer Down Payment (BKJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524Safety Data Sheets in Sales (3VQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525Chemical Compliance in Sales (31J) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

8.5 Country/Region Specifics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

9 Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5279.1 Service Contract Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

Price Adaptation for Service Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527Price Agreements in Service Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528Auto Renewal for Service Contract Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

9.2 Solution Quotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530OData API for Solution Quotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530Subscription-Related Items Enabled in Solution Quotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530

9.3 Business Solution Portfolios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531Business Solution Portfolios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

9.4 Case Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533Case Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

9.5 Cross Topics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534External References for Service Transactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534

9.6 Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535Integration with SAP Field Service Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535

9.7 Subscription Order Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535Solution Quotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535Allowances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536Variant Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537Subscription Item Quantity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538Account Split. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539Master Agreement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540

9.8 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541Service Order Management (41Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541Interaction Center Service Request Management (41W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542Service Contract Management (426) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

10 Sourcing and Procurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54410.1 Generic Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544

Configuration of the Flexible Workflow Made Easy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54410.2 Value Help Authorizations in Sourcing and Procurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54510.3 APIs for Integration with Sourcing and Procurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

SOAP APIS for Service Entry Sheets (External Services) - Renamed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546New SOAP APIs for Supplier Invoice Creation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547New SOAP API for Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548New OData API for Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549


Enhancements in OData API for Purchase Requisitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55010.4 Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

ALERT: End of Support for SAP Ariba Cloud Integration (CI) Solutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55110.5 Customizing and Business Add-Ins for Sourcing and Procurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55110.6 Commodity Procurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55810.7 Integration with Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55810.8 Sourcing and Contract Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

Source Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558Purchase Contract Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563

10.9 Operational Procurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566Enhancements to Create Purchase Requisition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566Enhancements to My Purchase Requisitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567Enhancements to Default Settings for Users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568Requirements Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569Purchase Order Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

10.10 Central Procurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579Central Purchasing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .579Mass Changes to Central Purchase Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584Enhancements in Manage Central Purchase Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585Central Procurement Operations Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586Central Purchasing Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588Manage Central RFQs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .589Manage Central Supplier Quotations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590Create Purchase Order from Central Supplier Quotation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

10.11 Invoice Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591Manage Supplier Invoices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591Create Supplier Invoices - Advanced. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593Edit Supplier Invoices Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594Park Supplier Invoices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595

10.12 Supplier Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59610.13 Obsolete Backend Roles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59610.14 Procurement Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597

Supplier Evaluation Score History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597View Document Type and Item Category Attributes in Analytics Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598Operational/Overall Supplier Evaluation by Top/Bottom 10 Suppliers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599Purchase Order Changes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599Purchase Requisition Average Approval Time – Flexible Workflow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600Situation Handling for Purchase Contract Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601Request for Quotation Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601Performance Optimization for Analytics Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .602

10.15 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .604


Content

Contingent Workforce Procurement via SAP Fieldglass (22K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604Procurement of Materials with Variant Configuration (2XU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605Central Purchase Contracts (2ME) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606Request for Price (1XF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607Analytics - Purchase Order Visibility and Procurement Spend (2QU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608Legal Content Management (1XV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609Intelligent Approval Workflow (43E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .610Prediction of Delivery Date for Purchase Order Items (3FY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611Central Sourcing (3ZF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612Procurement of Services (22Z) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612Blockchain-Verified RFQ Processing (3DT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613Supplier Evaluation and Performance Monitoring (SL4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614Central Purchasing (2XT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615Central Requisitioning (1XI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616Purchase Contract (BMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617Image-Based Buying (3UH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618


11 Supply Chain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62011.1 Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620

CDS Views for Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620API for Material Stocks (Replicate). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620Output Management for Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621Extensibility for Adobe Output Forms of Material Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622Goods Movement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623Inventory Analytics and Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629Physical Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638Batch Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642

11.2 Warehouse Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643Pack Warehouse Stock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643Process Warehouse Tasks - Picking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643Process Warehouse Tasks - Putaway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644Warehouse KPIs - Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645CDS Views for Warehouse Orders, Warehouse Tasks, and Outbound Delivery Orders. . . . . . . . . 645Warehouse Billing in Decentralized EWM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646Enhancements to Physical Inventory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647Distribution of Packing Instructions as Packaging Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648Enhancements to the Warehouse Management Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648Warehouse Kanban Supply into Production. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650Change Documents for Control Cycle in Warehouse Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650Change Documents for Fixed Storage Bin Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651Automatic Replication of Production Supply Area / Control Cycle Harmonization. . . . . . . . . . . 652


Stock Consolidation: Maximize Number of Free Bins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653Stock Consolidation: New Selection Criteria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654Stock Consolidation: Batch Consolidation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654Migration Objects for Scenario 'SAP EWM to Decentralized EWM'. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655EWM-QM Integration Without Inspection Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656Enhancement to the Counting of Inbound Deliveries (IOT 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658Scenario-Based Authorization Check for Enhanced Warehouse Number Checks and Activity Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658Authorization Object for Warehouse Requests with Warehouse Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660Distribution Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661Display Change Documents for Inspection Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663Synchronous Goods Movements from Repetitive Manufacturing into EWM embedded in SAP S/4HANA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663Integration of Quality Inspection Engine to Multiple Enterprise Management Systems. . . . . . . . 665Automatic Master Data Synchronization to Control QM Processes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665Decentralized EWM - Routes and Batches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666Decentralized EWM - Integration Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668

11.3 Delivery and Transportation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669Delivery Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669Transportation Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679

11.4 Advanced Order Promising/ATP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .694Configure Substitution Strategy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694Data Configuration for Backorder Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695Configure Custom BOP Sorting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696Monitor BOP Run. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697Data Configuration for Release for Delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698Configure Order Fulfillment Responsibilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699Release for Delivery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700Schedule Deletion of ATP Results Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700Manage Characteristic Catalogs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701Manage Product Allocation Sequences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702Product Allocation Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704OData APIs for Product Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705

11.5 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706Procurement of Direct Materials (J45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706Subcontracting (BMY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707Supplier Consignment (2LG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708Complementary Procurement Functions (2TW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709Quality Management for Complaints against Suppliers (2F9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery (2TX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711Consumable Purchasing (BNX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .712


Content


12 Sustainability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71412.1 Country/Region Specifics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714

13 Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71513.1 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715

Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from Staging (2Q2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from File (BH5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716Responsibility Determination (1NJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716

13.2 SAP S/4HANA Migration Cockpit – Transfer Data Directly from SAP Source System. . . . . . . . . . . . 71713.3 Country/Region Specifics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718

14 Cross Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71914.1 Master Data Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719

New Features in Mass Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71914.2 Master Data Governance, Consolidation and Mass Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719

New Features in Consolidation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 719New Features in Mass Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 720

14.3 Master Data Governance, Central Governance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721New Features for Master Data Governance for Business Partner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721New Features for Master Data Governance for Customer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 722New Features for Master Data Governance for Supplier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 723New Features for Master Data Governance for Financials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724New Features for Master Data Governance for Material. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724New Features for Master Data Governance Application Framework. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 726

14.4 Master Data Governance, Data Quality Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728Enable Automation with Rule Mining for Master Data Quality Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728Enable Data Quality Management for Business Partner Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728Extend Scope in Data Quality Management for Product Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729Deprecated and Successor Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729Enable Data Quality Management for Custom Object Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 730

14.5 Display Search Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73014.6 Shifted Gregorian Calendar Date. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73114.7 Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73214.8 Manage KPIs and Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73214.9 Responsibility Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73314.10 Manage Teams and Responsibilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73314.11 Situation Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73414.12 New Features for Situation Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73414.13 Legal Content Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736

Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform Legal Content Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 736


Enhancements in Manage Legal Transactions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737Enhancements in Legal Content Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 738Enhancements in Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .739Enhancements in Manage Legal Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739Enhancements in Manage Contexts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740Enhancements in Request Legal Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 740Manage Legal Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741Customizing and Business Add-Ins for Legal Content Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .742APIs for Integration with Legal Content Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .743

14.14 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744Situation Handling (31N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform (2OQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745Output Management (1LQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 745

14.15 Access Protection for Value Helps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74614.16 SAP CoPilot Skills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74714.17 Touch Enablement of the Classic UIs (SAP GUI for HTML, Web Dynpro). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74814.18 Country/Region Specifics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74914.19 What's New in ABAP Platform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 749

15 Country/Region Specifics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75115.1 Austria. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 751

Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75115.2 Argentina. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752

Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75215.3 Belgium. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754

Cross-Application Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75415.4 Brazil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755

Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 755Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .756

15.5 China. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .760Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .760

15.6 Denmark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 760Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .760

15.7 France. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761

15.8 Germany. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762Cross-Application Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762

15.9 India. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 763Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .763

15.10 Italy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .764

15.11 Japan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765


Content

Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .765

15.12 Mexico. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .766

Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .766

15.13 Netherlands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767

Cross-Application Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767

15.14 Norway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .768

15.15 Poland. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 770

Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .770

15.16 South Korea. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771

Cross-Application Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771

Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773

15.17 Spain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774

15.18 Switzerland. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776

Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 776

15.19 Thailand. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .778

Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 778

15.20 Turkey. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785

Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .785

15.21 #United States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 785

Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .785

16 Industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78716.1 Consumer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787

Retail and Fashion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787

16.2 Discrete Manufacturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818

16.3 Energy & Natural Resources. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818

Oil & Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 818

Utilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 823

Machine Learning for Implausible Meter Readings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .832

Machine Learning for Outsorted Billing Documents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833

16.4 Financial Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835

Banking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 835

Insurance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 842

16.5 Public Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 873

Defense & Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .873

Public Sector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 878

16.6 Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 881


1 What's New

What's New in SAP S/4HANA provides you with delta information on all new, changed or deleted features of this product. The What's New Viewer provides the same information in an interactive format.


What's New

https://help.sap.com/doc/474a13c5e9964c849c3a14d6c04339b5/100/en-US/8880de6dbfb94ea3b0de1f26b40816dc.html

2 Asset Management

2.1 Maintenance Operations

2.1.1 Actual Cost Analysis

This app supports you in monitoring and evaluating actual costs resulting from current maintenance orders. It enables you, for example, to analyze the actual costs for materials and labor in maintenance or to compare the total corrective and preventive actual maintenance costs during a selected time period. In addition, you can easily identify the maintenance activities leading to the highest costs or the parts of the asset that were particularly costly on inspections. Altogether, this analytical list page offers you multiple possibilities to evaluate actual maintenance costs stored in the Universal Journal Entry.

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Not applicable

Scope Item BH1 (Corrective Maintenance), BH2 (Emergency Maintenance), BJ2 (Preventive Maintenance)

Application Component PM (Plant Maintenance)

Available As Of SAP S/4HANA 1909

Additional Details

Filters allow you to analyze critical costs in a specific fiscal year from different perspectives, such as the order type, the construction type, the location, the planner group or the manufacturer. A condensed view enables you to identify and compare relevant areas within data sets using data visualization and business intelligence. On the other hand, you can also navigate directly to significant single instances. All this can be done seamlessly within one page that combines transactional and analytical data using chart and table visualization.

This app is available for the maintenance planner user role.

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Asset Management P U B L I C 17

Related Information

Actual Cost Analysis

2.1.2 Maintenance Notification and Order: Change Scheduling

With this product feature you can select several maintenance notifications in the Find Maintenance Notification app or several maintenance orders in the Find Maintenance Order app and set, overwrite or clear the values of the scheduling-related fields, such as the priority, the revision, the required start date and the required end date.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BH1 (Corrective Maintenance), BJ2 (Preventive Maintenance)



Effects on Existing Data

To set, overwrite or clear the values of scheduling-related fields, you open a popup by clicking on the new Change Scheduling button. The proposed field values on the corresponding popup reflect the existing field values in the selected maintenance notifications or maintenance orders. To assign different values, you can open the value help and choose a different field value from the dropdown list or clear the field value of optional fields.

Related Information

Find Maintenance NotificationFind Maintenance Order


Asset Management

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e72f747389b340229f7fa343975bfa57/1909.000/en-US/9a423967879e4b99bf8a55b0719370b9.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e72f747389b340229f7fa343975bfa57/1909.000/en-US/e994a057b4010322e10000000a44147b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e72f747389b340229f7fa343975bfa57/1909.000/en-US/46d4a057b76f9f2de10000000a44147b.html

2.1.3 Find Maintenance Plans

This app enables you to find and display maintenance plans. You can also view the properties of a maintenance plan.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BJ2 (Preventive Maintenance)



Related Information

Find Maintenance Plans

2.1.4 Find Maintenance Plans: Viewing End Date for Scheduling

With this feature, you can display validity data of the respective maintenance plan in the Find Maintenance Plans app. You can display the new fields End Date for Scheduling and Remaining Schedule Days as table columns. Moreover, for performance-based single cycle plans and strategy plans, you can also display the new fields End Counter for Scheduling, Remaining Counter and Counter Unit as table columns.

Technical Details

Type New




https://help.sap.com/viewer/e72f747389b340229f7fa343975bfa57/1909.000/en-US/d30af800338a47cf965ab5a39b7576ba.html



Additional Details

The end dates and end counters are not considered during the scheduling process if the respective maintenance plans have the maintenance plan category Outline Agreement. Moreover, the system does not consider the end date or end counter if the maintenance call object is a service order.


The Find Maintenance Plans app has been enhanced with the following fields, displayed as table columns:

● End Date for Scheduling● Remaining Schedule Days● End Counter for Scheduling (only for performance-based single cycle plans and strategy plans)● Remaining Counter (only for performance-based single cycle plans and strategy plans)● Counter Unit (only for performance-based single cycle plans and strategy plans)

Related Information

Find Maintenance Plans

2.1.5 Find Maintenance Items

This app enables you to find and display maintenance items. You can also view properties of a maintenance item.

Technical Details

Type New



Asset Management

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e72f747389b340229f7fa343975bfa57/1909.000/en-US/d30af800338a47cf965ab5a39b7576ba.html




Related Information

Find Maintenance Items

2.1.6 Mass Time Confirmations

With this feature, you can do the following:

● Download a template (spreadsheet) to record collective time confirmations.● Verify and upload collective time confirmations using the template.● Post collective time confirmations into the system.● Post collective time confirmations immediately as background jobs.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BH1 (Corrective Maintenance)

BH2 (Emergency Maintenance)

BJ2 (Preventive Maintenance)

Application Component PM


Additional Details

You can upload time confirmations in the Find Maintenance Order and Operation app. To upload time confirmations immediately as background jobs, select the Post Immediately check box.

When you upload time confirmations, you are taken to the Create Time Confirmations app where you can view the status of uploaded time confirmations. The time confirmations in the Ready tab are ready to be posted. The


https://help.sap.com/viewer/e72f747389b340229f7fa343975bfa57/1909.000/en-US/990ae6cd866f43819a4f2fc6df1f0d36.html

time confirmations in the Errors tab can be posted only after you correct the errors and validate them once again.

Related Information

Create Time ConfirmationsFind Maintenance Order and Operation

2.2 Environment, Health, and Safety

2.2.1 Incident Management

2.2.1.1 Injury/Illness Log

With this feature, you can enter and manage different kinds of medical assistance provided to employees at your company. You can record first aid and the treatment of minor injuries, as well as the treatment of pre-existing injuries and aid given to employees who are not feeling well. You can enter details such as provided medication, health center visits, and visits to physicians.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item Not applicable

Application Component EHS-SUS-IM (Incident Management)


Additional Details

In addition, this feature enables you to:

● Report an incident based on an injury/illness log entry.You can create an incident related to an existing injury/illness log entry and transfer the available data from the injury/illness log entry to the newly created incident using the data transfer function.


Asset Management

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e72f747389b340229f7fa343975bfa57/1909.000/en-US/746fa15a561e458f8c5007b0b3660fc6.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e72f747389b340229f7fa343975bfa57/1909.000/en-US/f3d4a057b76f9f2de10000000a44147b.html

● Create a medical service based on an injury/illness log entry.You can create a medical service for an injured person assigned to an injury/illness log entry. You can enter and manage data such as diagnoses, examination results, work restrictions for health reasons, and follow-up activities. This feature is available if the SAP EHS Management for SAP S/4HANA, occupational health application is implemented.

Effects on System Administration

The new role Employee - First Aid has been introduced for managing injury/illness log entries. The technical names are as follows:

● Front end: SAP_BR_EMPLOYEE_FIRST_AID● Back end: SAP_EHSM_HSS_EMPL_FIRST_AID

Effects on Customizing

For the new Injury/Illness Log functionality, the following Customizing activities have been added under Environment, Health and Safety Incident Management Injury/Illness Log :

● Define Entry Locations● Specify Types of Aid Given● Specify Injury/Illness Log Entry Types

Related Information

Injury/Illness LogManage Injury/Illness Log [page 23]Injury/Illness Log - Detailed Analysis [page 24]

2.2.1.2 Manage Injury/Illness Log

With this feature, you can enter and manage medical assistance provided to an injured or sick employee at your company. You can search for injury/illness log entries, create new entries, or edit existing ones.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/dea7018f3bff4587adce684371779cbf.html

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You can use the Manage Injury/Illness Log app to:

● Search for injury/illness log entries by multiple criteria.● Create injury/illness log entries.● Navigate to injury/illness log entries and edit their data.

Related Information

Injury/Illness Log

2.2.1.3 Injury/Illness Log - Detailed Analysis

With this feature, you can analyze injury/illness log entries. You can add several analysis steps to create an analysis path. With this analysis path, you can evaluate the data you need for information and reporting purposes.

Technical Details

Type New




Asset Management

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/dea7018f3bff4587adce684371779cbf.html



Additional Details

You can use the Injury/Illness Log - Detailed Analysis app to:

● View a graphical representation of injury/illness log entries grouped by various criteria.● Analyze injury/illness log entries by specific characteristics such as injury/illness classification, type, body

part, body side, or common characteristics such as location and date.

2.2.1.4 Task Calendar

With this feature, you can monitor tasks for your team in a calendar view. You can get an overview of existing task instances in a time schedule. Based on the overall schedule, status, and workload of the team members, you can adjust the plan by reassigning and rescheduling the tasks between assignees.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component EHS-SUS-FND (Sustainability Foundation)


Additional Details

You can use the Task Calendar app to:

● Get an overview of planned tasks based on the filtering criteria of your view.● Add and remove contacts in your calendar to manage the task plan for one or multiple teams.● Navigate to the Display Task Instance and Manage Task Definition apps for detailed management.● View contact details and task definition details directly from your calendar.


Related Information

Display Task InstanceManage Task Definition

2.2.1.5 Improved User Interface for Managing Summary Reports

The Manage Summary Reports app has been redesigned with an improved user interface and a simplified use of search criteria in the filter bar.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

You can use the Manage Summary Reports app to:

● Generate report forms for incidents, injuries, and illnesses in order to fulfill legal, regulatory, or company-specific reporting requirements.

● Search for and display generated incident summary reports that you want to make available internally in your company or submit to authorities, such as the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) in the United States.

2.2.1.6 Implementation Changes for the Report Incident Mobile App

You can now deploy the Report Incident app as a native mobile application using the SAP Web IDE, hybrid app toolkit add-on.


Asset Management

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/b3bae5daf6f741b79589f30280efaa34.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/efa2f95378b5498191abb1c30e30639b.html

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

Application Deployment

You can implement the app by using the SAP Web IDE, hybrid app toolkit add-on. This extension for SAP Web IDE enables developers to create, test, and build hybrid mobile applications. You can find more information on the SAP Help Portal under SAP Web IDE Hybrid Application Toolkit.

Additional Licenses Required

To implement the app, you need to subscribe to SAP Fiori Cloud or SAP Cloud Platform Mobile Services. For further information, please contact your SAP account executive.

Related Information

App Implementation: Report IncidentSAP Fiori CloudSAP Cloud Platform Mobile Services

2.2.1.7 Redesign of the Workflow for the EHS Incident Investigation Lifecycle

The workflow for the EHS incident investigation lifecycle has been redesigned and now uses a new workflow architecture. The end-to-end investigation process for incidents has not been changed.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/8e5c63b6470a4255861c259f3b2d9b41/LATEST/en-US/ee5b45f82bd845a2a9668e99213bdb3b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/c78744581efca007e10000000a441470.html

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Fcloudplatform.sap.com%2Fcapabilities%2Fproduct-info.SAP-Fiori-Cloud.28acbb28-3c61-4633-9880-a85e582d1aa6.html

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Fcloudplatform.sap.com%2Fcapabilities%2Fproduct-info.SAP-Cloud-Platform-Mobile-Services.fa29cea5-119c-487c-981a-488d6ee95edb.html

Technical Details

Type Changed






For more information on the required manual migration of incident investigation lifecycle processes to the new architecture, see SAP Note 2801072 .

For more information, see simplification item SI27: Logistics_EHS - Investigation Lifecycle Workflow .

2.2.2 Health and Safety Management

2.2.2.1 Enhancements in Chemical Business Object

With the enhancements to the chemical business object, you can now do the following:

● Maintain an extended set of physical/chemical properties● Maintain hazard classifications according to SARA/EPCRA

The new attributes are used in the following apps:.

● Mange Hazardous Substance Inventory● Search Hazardous Substance Inventory Data● Extract Data for SARA 312 Reports● Analyze SARA-Relevant Stock Details● Manage Safety Instructions● Manage Safety Instruction Text Blocks● Monitor Safety-Relevant Changes


Asset Management

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https://launchpad.support.sap.com/#/notes/2801072

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Flaunchpad.support.sap.com%2F%23sic%2FitemSet%28%2700109B131AF41ED9A289E61A1D9B00DB%27%2C%27false%27%29

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component EHS-BD


Additional Details

The physical and chemical properties node of the chemical business object has been extended with the following attributes:

● OpenCupFlashPointTempQty● OpenCupFlashPointTempUnit● OpenCupFlashPointTempOperator● DecompositionTemperatureQty● DecompositionTemperatureUnit● DynamicViscosityQty● DynamicViscosityUnit● KinematicViscosityQty● KinematicViscosityUnit● DustExplosionClass● ChemicalDensit● ChemicalDensityUnit

The basic information node of the chemical business object has been extended with the US_EPCRAIsExtremelyHzdsSubst attribute.

The chemical business object has been extended with the new SARA_CLASSIFICATION node. This node has the US_EPCRAHazardClass attribute.

Effects on Data Transfer

The new attributes can be transferred from the specification database via the existing transfer report R_EHFND_FILL_CHM_BY_EHS_SUBST.



You define the dust explosion classes in Customizing for Environment, Health, and Safety under Health and Safety Management Master Data Configuration Specify Dust Explosion ClassesChemicals Specify Physical and Chemical Data .

2.2.2.2 Manage Safety Instructions

With this app, you can now manage your safety instructions centrally. For every location, you can define an individual safety instruction structure. To fill the structure with the relevant data, you can use automatic functions to derive data from the chemical business object and at the same time you can add information manually wherever necessary.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component EHS-SUS-HS



Define your safety instruction structures in Customizing for Environment, Health, and Safety under Health and Safety Management Safety Instruction Configure Safety Instruction .

To adapt the data extraction from the chemical business object to the safety instructions, use the BAdI in Customizing for Environment, Health, and Safety under Health and Safety Management Safety Instruction

BAdI: Definition of Default Text and Images for Safety Instruction .

Related Information

Manage Safety InstructionsManaging Safety Instructions


Asset Management

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/dad1b9efb2e14143a0d63da5cde05e8d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/1fa235f3d7c2495f87897f83a8e7f34f.html

2.2.2.3 Manage Safety Instruction Text Blocks

With this feature, you can define and manage frequently used text snippets as text blocks to be used in your safety instructions created in the Manage Safety Instructions app.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Manage Safety Instruction Text Blocks

2.2.2.4 Manage Hazardous Substance Inventories

With this feature, you can keep track of all hazardous substances which are handled in the locations you are responsible for. An inventory is a list of hazardous substances that are used, handled, manufactured or stored at any location that you manage or control. It’s important and a legal requirement to know what hazardous substances you have in order to safely manage their risks to your workers and others who may be exposed to hazardous substances in your workplace. You can use the Manage Hazardous Substance Inventories app to create and maintain these inventories.

Technical Details

Type New




https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/901bb5e11c5c476c97b01b4931acaa9b.html



Additional Details

You can use the Search Hazardous Substance Inventory Data app to search through all hazardous substance inventories of your company.


Configure the settings for your hazardous substance inventories in Customizing for Environment, Health, and Safety under Health and Safety Management Hazardous Substance Inventories .

Related Information

Manage Hazardous Substance InventoriesPreparing and Using Hazardous Substance Inventories

2.2.2.5 Search Hazardous Substance Inventory Data

With this feature you can search data throughout all hazardous substance inventories of your Manage Hazardous Substance Inventories app in status Released and Historic.

Technical Details

Type New






Asset Management

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/cdec78a98e2242beaaabf7fff9308deb.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/5b1b543b2eaf405eb4b84c52dd806785.html

Related Information

Search Hazardous Substance Inventory Data

2.2.2.6 Extract Data for SARA 312 Reports

With this feature, you can prepare data you need for reports prescribed by the U.S. Superfund Amendments and Reauthorization Act (SARA) 312.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You can use the Analyze SARA-Relevant Stock Details app to further analyze stock details and stock development on substance or material level.


You can adapt the data extraction for SARA reports in Customizing for Environment, Health, and Safety under Health and Safety Management Hazardous Substance Inventories BAdI: Data Determination for SARA

Reporting .

Related Information

Extract Data for SARA 312 ReportsSetting Up Data Extraction for SARA 312 Reports


https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/c5716c88b8aa40088acfdedd71407165.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/34571f946f4e4ad7b0db424ef94f6621.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/93b7cb8d17e04e61a73f48c06f1340e9.html

2.2.2.7 Analyze SARA-Relevant Stock Details

With this feature, you can analyze stock details and stock development on substance or material level. You can get into details about stock amounts, have a close look at their development over a certain period, or analyze the detailed composition of a specific stock amount displayed in the Extract Data for SARA 312 Reports app.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Analyze SARA-Relevant Stock Details

2.2.2.8 Monitor Safety-Relevant Changes

This feature provides a work list of all changes to the substance master data that could have influence on the following processes:

● Hazardous Substance Inventories● Safety Instructions● Risk Assessments● Chemical Approvals

This app helps you to keep track of all changes, shows all relevant information to support your decision, and if the changes to the substance master data have an impact on your processes.

Technical Details

Type New


Asset Management

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/954bcc09d66645098daf8f4ccf094200.html






The report Update Safety-Relevant Changes (R_EHHSS_UPDATE_SRC_DATA) creates the database entries for the Monitor Safety-Relevant Changes app based on the change log information written for the chemical business object. For more information, see the report documentation.

NoteTo ensure that the data displayed in the Monitor Safety-Relevant Changes app is always up to date, run this report on a regular basis via a scheduled job.

Related Information

Monitor Safety-Relevant ChangesMonitoring Safety-Relevant Changes

2.2.3 Environment Management

2.2.3.1 Task Calendar

With this feature, you can monitor tasks for your team in a calendar view. You can get an overview of existing task instances in a time schedule. Based on the overall schedule, status, and workload of the team members, you can adjust the plan by reassigning and rescheduling the tasks between assignees.

Technical Details

Type New



https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/2e6741a509d64513b79ff50f1133e037.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/4f100da70ccc47c295394b427c48996e.html




Additional Details

You can use the Task Calendar app to:

● Get an overview of planned tasks based on the filtering criteria of your view.● Add and remove contacts in your calendar to manage the task plan for one or multiple teams.● Navigate to the Display Task Instance and Manage Task Definition apps for detailed management.● View contact details and task definition details directly from your calendar.

Related Information

Display Task InstanceManage Task Definition

2.2.3.2 My Data Collections

With this feature, you can record environment-related data in the environment management system for later processing.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component EHS-SUS-EM (Environment Management)



Asset Management

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/b3bae5daf6f741b79589f30280efaa34.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/efa2f95378b5498191abb1c30e30639b.html

Additional Details

You can use the My Data Collections app to:

● Get an overview of all active data collections you are responsible for. These data collections are organized in the All, Pending, and No Schedule tabs.

● Provide and save values for relevant data collection activities.● Export and import data collection values in a spreadsheet format.

2.2.3.3 Improvements to Air Emission Management

With the improvements to air emission management, you can now handle the chemical and physical properties master data in a single business object - chemical/physical property. You can use additional data sources in calculations. You can set up a location-based aggregation activity to be executed automatically.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

● The new chemical/physical property business object significantly improves the process of working with the master data across multiple applications, as it is no longer necessary to handle two separate objects. You can use the Manage Chemical/Physical Properties app to create, edit and delete records in the chemical/physical property business object.

● The records of the new chemical/physical property object could be assigned as property to both location and chemical objects. These properties can be used as input for calculations.

● The enablement of automatic location aggregation extends the chain of automatically executed activities.● You can perform location aggregations based on listed substance groups. If you select a listed substance

group as a subject for a location aggregation, the matching data section for this aggregation will also list the relevant data collections and calculations created for the listed substances belonging to the same group.



The following tables have been made obsolete:

● Chemical Physical Properties (EHFNDC_CHEM_PR)● Chemical Physical Properties – Translations (EHFNDC_CHEM_PR_T)● Chemical Physical Property Units (EHFNDC_CHEM_UNI)

Their data has been moved to the new chemical/physical property business object with the following report:

● Migrate chemical properties to physical/chemical properties (R_EHFND_CHEM_PROP_MIGRATION)


The following Customizing activity has been removed:

● Specify Chemical Properties (EHFND_CHEM_PR)

Customizing activity Specify Regulatory List Types (EHFND_REG_LISTS_TYPE) has been changed, so that it allows assignment of a chemical/physical property.

Related Information

Manage Chemical/Physical Properties

2.2.3.4 Improvements to Sampling Activity

With the improvements to sampling activity, you can now change the analytes of already initiated samplings in the Edit Compliance Scenario app. You can also use an operator (>, >=, <, <=) to submit sampling results that are outside of the detectable ranges. When you submit sampling result values outside of the detectable ranges, the value provided by the lab equipment is considered as a detection limit.

Technical Details

Type Changed

Functional Localization Not Applicable

Scope Item Not Applicable


Asset Management

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/72b96125108c4d238841626a4c788e43.html



Related Information

Edit Compliance Scenario

2.2.3.5 Content Update

With this feature, the content provided with the default delivery is updated with regulatory lists in the following chapters:

● AP-42 Compilation of Air Emissions FactorsIssuing Organization: United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)Paragraph: Chapter 7 Liquid Storage Tanks

● Australian National Greenhouse AccountsIssuing Organization: Australian Government - Department of the EnvironmentParagraph: Appendix 1 - Greenhouse Gas Global Warming Potentials

Technical Details

Type Changed





2.2.3.6 Additional Support

With these additional support features, the solution provides the following additional support:

● Archiving of transactional data for the compliance scenario is now supported. You can now remove large volumes of data when it is no longer needed.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b3596cc5dd5428d887966a4193ddc29/1909.000/en-US/f89f09dfda8a4a86bcb88ae28b220f06.html

● Converting SAP Environmental Compliance (EC) 3.0 to the environment management component (EM) of Environment, Health, and Safety in SAP S/4HANA 1909 is now supported to facilitate the onboarding of Environmental Compliance customers to SAP S/4HANA for environment management.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

● The 1909 release is the recommended target release for EC customers to perform data conversion to the environment management component (EM) of Environment, Health, and Safety in SAP S/4HANA. The release comes with a guide for such conversions. For more information, see SAP Note 2805204 .

2.3 Resource Scheduling

2.3.1 Scheduling of Maintenance Order Operations

The resource scheduling apps now cover the scheduling process end-to-end, from the monitoring of schedules in the Resource Scheduling for Maintenance Planners app to the tracking of schedule execution and schedule attainment in the Schedule Maintenance Order Operations app.

Technical Details

Type Changed




Asset Management


Application Component CA-RSH-EAM


Additional Details

The following list is a cross-app overview of what has been changed with regard to the scheduling of order operations:

● You can now create multiple schedules per week for any future calendar week.● We've introduced a status concept for schedules to represent the life cycle of a schedule. The schedule

statuses are: Scoping, Refinement, Frozen, Execution, Closed.● You can now freeze a schedule to lock it against further changes and to track schedule attainment once the

target week has started.● The scheduling logic has been enhanced as follows:

○ In addition to manually setting a start day, you can now use automatic scheduling and have the app find a start day for you.

○ In addition to finish-start (FS) relationships, start-start (SS) relationships are now also taken into account during scheduling.

● You now have more options to access the schedules you created:○ There's a new Schedule Maintenance Order Operations tile in the SAP Fiori launchpad.○ There's a new My Schedules card in the Resource Scheduling for Maintenance Planners app.○ In the Manage Work Center Utilization app, you can now add an Included in Schedule column to the list

of order operations. If an order operation is included in a schedule, you can directly navigate to the schedule from here.

○ You can use the enterprise search to quickly find and open a specific schedule.● In the Manage Work Center Utilization app, you can now change work center capacity for a specific target

week by adjusting the number of resources.

For more detailed information about what has changed in the individual apps, see the relevant links in the Related Information section.


● We've provided a Customizing activity for enabling the freezing of schedules. Although this setting isn't a prerequisite for using the apps, it's needed so that maintenance planners can track schedule execution and review schedule attainment.The activity is available in Customizing for Plant Maintenance and Customer Service under Maintenance and Service Processing Resource Scheduling Make Settings for Resource Scheduling .

● If you want app users to be able to use the enterprise search, make sure that the search is set up in your system.


Related Information

New Features: Resource Scheduling for Maintenance Planners App [page 42]New Features: Schedule Maintenance Order Operations App [page 43]New Features: Manage Work Center Utilization App [page 45]Information for Key Users

2.3.2 New Features: Resource Scheduling for Maintenance Planners App

The Resource Scheduling for Maintenance Planners app is your dashboard for monitoring key figures, such as work center utilization and number and priority of maintenance orders that you need to work on. As of this release, we've included two new cards for you.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

The My Schedules card shows your top 5 schedules that are either upcoming, in execution, or have just been closed. You can use this card to open the Schedule Maintenance Order Operations app.

The Unassigned Work card shows you how many hours of work in your work centers haven't yet been assigned to a person responsible. You can use this card to open the Assign Maintenance Order Operations app.

Related Information

Scheduling of Maintenance Order Operations [page 40]New App: Assign Maintenance Order Operations [page 47]Monitoring Key Figures for Your Work Centers


Asset Management

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/2b9a73570a380222e10000000a44147b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/64df14c7f7534e5eb7801ea58636a621.html

2.3.3 New Features: Schedule Maintenance Order Operations App

We've made extensive changes to the Schedule Maintenance Order Operations app. The app now covers the scheduling process end-to-end, from the initial setup and refinement of a schedule to the tracking of schedule attainment.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

We've restructured the user interface to accommodate new features related to scheduling. Here's an overview of the most important changes:

● When you open the app, a list of your schedules is shown. If you open a specific schedule, this list is shown as a side panel next to the schedule that is currently open.

● A schedule status is shown in the header area of a schedule. The schedule status determines which buttons and elements are available on the current screen.

● When setting up a schedule (that is, when the schedule status is Scoping and Refinement), you'll now see two tabs: List View and Graphical View.The list view is the default view that you know from earlier releases. The new graphical view allows you to visualize your schedule in a Gantt chart. You can also enable the display of relationships between order operations, which helps you to identify scheduling conflicts.

● In the Scoping phase, you'll see a new Change Work Center button. You can use this button to move order operations to another work center.

● A new Schedule Automatically button allows you to have the app find a start day for order operations.● In the list view, a filter button has been added. This button allows you to filter the order operations in your

schedule, for example, by processing status or planned start and end.● In the Refinement phase, in addition to the Set Start Day button, you can now use a calendar control to set

a start day for order operations.● A new Change Name and Add Description button allows you to change the name of a schedule and to add a

schedule description. This button is available in the Scoping and Refinement phases.● New buttons for freezing and deleting a schedule have been added. Freezing is required so that you can

track schedule execution once the target week starts.


● Once the target week starts, micro charts for tracking schedule attainment and the completion of order operations are shown in the schedule header.


The Open Weekly View button has been renamed to Go Back to Scoping.


The freezing of schedules must be enabled in Customizing. Although this setting isn't a prerequisite for using the apps, it's needed so that maintenance planners can track schedule execution and review schedule attainment.

To make the setting, go to Customizing for Plant Maintenance and Customer Service Maintenance and Service Processing Resource Scheduling Make Settings for Resource Scheduling .

Related Information

Scheduling Maintenance Order Operations

2.3.4 New Features: Maintenance Scheduling Board App

You can now enable the display of relationships. The visualization of relationships helps you to detect relationship violations and scheduling conflicts before dispatching order operations.

Technical Details

Type Changed






Asset Management

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/804350089a80410a9d0db069584d4cc8.html

Additional Details

You can enable the display of implicit and explicit relationships in the chart settings. The settings dialog provides two new options.

Related Information

Visualization of Relationships between Order Operations [page 46]

2.3.5 New Features: Manage Work Center Utilization App

We've made some changes to the Manage Work Center Utilization app. For example, you can now change work center capacity for a specific target week by adjusting the number of resources per work center. In addition, you can show a new column and filter to check if an order operation is already included in one or more schedules.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

You'll see the following changes on the user interface:

● In the table settings, you can add an Included in Schedule column to the list of order operations. This column shows you if you've already added an operation to one or more of your schedules. If one or more schedules are shown, you can directly open them from here.

● In the Adapt Filters dialog, you can add an Included in Schedule filter to the filter bar.● A new Change Work Center Capacity button is available next to the My Work Centers button. This button

opens a dialog in which you can change the number of resources per work center and shift for a specific target week.


● We've also adjusted the Add to Schedule dialog. This dialog opens when you select order operations for scheduling. You can now decide whether you want to create a new schedule or whether you would like to add the selected operations to an existing schedule.

Related Information

Setting Up Your Schedule

2.3.6 Visualization of Relationships between Order Operations

You can now enable the display of relationships in the Maintenance Scheduling Board app and in the Schedule Maintenance Order Operations app. The visualization of relationships helps you to detect relationship violations and scheduling conflicts before dispatching order operations.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You can enable the display of implicit and explicit relationships in the chart settings. In the Maintenance Scheduling Board app, the settings dialog provides two new options. In the Schedule Maintenance Order Operations app, the relevant settings are part of the new graphical view.

If relationships exist between order operations, you'll see arrows of different colors in the chart when the rows in the table area are expanded:

● Grey arrow: The relationship is implicit. That is, it wasn’t explicitly defined by the maintenance planner but is based on the sequence defined by the operation number.

● Black arrow: The relationship was explicitly defined in the maintenance order.● Red arrow: The relationship is violated as a result of the current scheduling situation.


Asset Management

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/eb96f4091ff64509a8ce0c400e6d1c96.html

NoteThis feature is only available in the Maintenance Scheduling Board app. In the graphical view of the Schedule Maintenance Order Operations app, relationship violations aren't visualized in red.

● Link icon: The operation is related to an operation that is currently not visible in the chart.

When you hover over the link icon or the arrowhead, details about the type of relationship are shown.

Related Information

New Features: Schedule Maintenance Order Operations App [page 43]New Features: Maintenance Scheduling Board App [page 44]

2.3.7 New App: Assign Maintenance Order Operations

With the new Assign Maintenance Order Operations app, you can assign maintenance order operations to a person responsible. You can also change or delete existing assignments.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

This app provides the following key features:

● Assign maintenance order operations to a person responsible● Change the person responsible for a maintenance order operation● Unassign the person responsible from a maintenance order operation



Make sure that all required ICF nodes are active. Checking the activation of ICF nodes is especially important if you've upgraded your SAP S/4HANA release. ICF nodes for new apps aren't activated automatically after software upgrades.

Implementation information, including information about the required ICF nodes, is available in the app entry in the SAP Fiori apps reference library.

Related Information

Assigning Maintenance Order Operations to a Person ResponsibleAssign Maintenance Order Operations (app entry in the SAP Fiori apps reference library)

2.4 Country/Region Specifics

For country/region-specific changes, please see Country/Region Specifics [page 751].

2.5 SAP Best Practices Content

2.5.1 Preventive Maintenance (BJ2)

Use

The scope item now includes the following:

● The preventive maintenance process flow is segregated into preventive maintenance (time-based) and preventive maintenance (performance-based).

● The process flow for preventive maintenance (time-based) is extended to include both single cycle and strategy maintenance plans.

● The process flow for preventive maintenance (performance-based) includes all the maintenance plan types supported; namely single cycle, strategy, and multiple counter.


Asset Management

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/f4b08e2549744c3fb2bea93b9fabc94e.html

http://fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com/sap/fix/externalViewer/index.html?appId=F3423

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BJ2 ( Preventive Maintenance )


Application Component PM

Additional Information

A localized version of this scope item is available for the following countries/regions:

United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Brazil, Canada, Switzerland, China, Czech Republic, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa

For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP Best Practices Explorer.


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FBJ2

3 Finance

3.1 Name Changes for Finance Apps

The names of some Finance apps change in this release.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item See the table below

Application Component See the table below


Additional Details

The following changes have been made:

Accounting and Financial Close

Previous Name New Name More Information

App delivered in the following business catalog(s)

Relevant Scope Item

Application Component

Display Financial Statement

Balance Sheet / Income Statement


General Ledger - Reporting (SAP_SFIN_BC_GL_REPORTING)

J58 (Accounting and Financial Close)

FI-GL-GL-IS

Financial Statement - Grid-Based

Balance Sheet / Income Statement - Multidimensional

Balance Sheet / Income Statement - Multidimensional

General Ledger - Reporting (SAP_SFIN_BC_GL_REPORTING)


FI-GL-GL-IS


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/b7d38154f9a7033de10000000a441470.html


https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/d8d608a19a5449f9916fc5a2ff8fb12f.html





Relevant Scope Item


Manage Profit Centers

Manage Profit Centers (Obsolete)


Profit Center Accounting - Profit Center Master Data (SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_MD_PCA)


CO-FIO

Interunit Reconciliation - Subsidiary View

Interunit Reconciliation - Unit View

Interunit Reconciliation

Consolidation - Data Preparation (SAP_FIN_BC_CCON_PRDTPRE)

1SG (Group Reporting - Financial Consolidation)

FIN-CS

Manage Cost Centers (New)

Manage Cost Centers

Manage Cost Centers

Profit Center Accounting - Profit Center Master Data (SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_MD_CCA)

J54 (Overhead Cost Accounting)

CO-FIO

Define Financial Statement Items

Define FS Items Define FS Items Consolidation - Master Data Financial Statement Items Management (SAP_FIN_BC_CCON_MDFSITM)


FIN-CS

Import and Export Validation Rules and Methods

Import/Export Validation Settings


Consolidation - Validation Rule Definition (SAP_FIN_BC_VE_RULE)


FIN-CS

Financial Operations



Relevant Scope Item


Manage Down Payment Requests - For Customers

Manage Customer Down Payment Requests

The name of the tile has changed.

Accounts Receivable - Incoming Payments (SAP_SFIN_BC_AR_INC_PAYM ), Accounts Receivable - Invoices (SAP_SFIN_BC_AR_INVOICES)

J59 (Accounts Receivable)

FI-AR-AR-DP

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Finance P U B L I C 51

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/7a6e875413cce75ee10000000a44176d.html


https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/b6c637a773cc4261b76823632202411f.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/b6c637a773cc4261b76823632202411f.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/eedd2fb11bc244108c8b76f2c6117939.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/eedd2fb11bc244108c8b76f2c6117939.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/4c1fb1e180894848b415365aa8779b4d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/f9ede1be96a44696bdb8563e39e9beeb.html


https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/a2c7175796595632e10000000a441470.html





Relevant Scope Item


Manage Down Payment Requests - For Suppliers

Manage Supplier Down Payment Requests

The name of the tile has changed.

Accounts Payable - Operational Processing (SAP_SFIN_BC_AP_DOC_PROC ), Accounts Payable - Payments (SAP_SFIN_BC_AP_PAY_PROC)

J59 (Accounts Receivable)

FI-AP-AP-DP

See Also

For information about the scheduling apps for Settlement Management that have been renamed in this release, see Renamed Scheduling Apps [page 247].

3.2 Fiori Content for Finance

Changes to Finance objects related to user management and authorizations for Fiori apps are delivered with this release. These objects include, for example, business catalogs, technical catalogs, business role templates, and target mappings.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Application Component All Finance components


Additional Details

Details about the changes for Finance are summarized in in the following SAP Notes:


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/adb3175796595632e10000000a441470.html



Affected content Related software components Link to SAP Note

Fiori content for Settlement Management

S4CORE,UIS4HOP1 2824477 - Release Information: Changes in SAP Fiori Content for Settlement Management in SAP S/4HANA 1909

Fiori content for International Trade S4CORE,UIS4HOP1 2824597 - Release Information: Changes in SAP Fiori Content for International Trade in SAP S/4HANA 1909

All other Finance Fiori content S4CORE,UIAPFI70 2730981 - Release Information: Changes in SAP Fiori Content for Finance in SAP S/4HANA 1909

For more details about the Finance applications affected by changes to value help authorizations, see Value Help Authorizations in Finance [page 53].

For information about the user management and authorization content needed for new Fiori apps, see the SAP Fiori apps reference library at https://fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com.

See Also

For more information about user management and authorizations, see the SAP S/4HANA UI Technology Guide on the SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909.

3.3 Value Help Authorizations in Finance

SAP has refined the access protection of value helps, resulting in modified authorization proposals.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component FI, BC-SEC-AUT






https://fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com

http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909

Additional Details

Please see SAP Note 2800871 for a list of the affected applications, transactions, and application objects in Finance.


To ensure smooth working of the system for your users, we strongly recommend that you perform the postprocessing steps as described in SAP Note 1539556 (question 2) during the upgrade of your system.

Related Information

Access Protection for Value Helps [page 746]

3.4 Financial Planning and Analysis

3.4.1 Apps No Longer Available

Apps No Longer Available as of SAP S/4HANA 1909

The following apps are no longer available as of SAP S/4HANA 1909:

● Display Cost Line Items (Orders - Actual)● Schedule Actual Overhead Allocation - Cost Centers● Schedule Actual Settlement - Projects

Individual users who choose not to work with the apps can still use the transactions as before.

Apps and Factsheets No Longer Available as of SAP S/4HANA 2009

Deprecated App Fiori ID Successor App Fiori ID

Manage Cost Center Master Data

F1023 Manage Cost Centers F1443A


Finance



Deprecated App Fiori ID Successor App Fiori ID

Manage Activity Type Master Data

F1025 Manage Activity Types 1605A

Manage Statistical Key Figures

F1603 Manage Statistical Key Figures

F1603A

Activity Type - Factsheet F1717 Manage Activity Types F1605A

Controlling Document – Factsheet

F1720 Display Line Items - Cost Accounting

F4023

Cost Center Group - Factsheet

F1722 Manage Cost Centers F1443A

Cost Center - Factsheet F0123 Manage Cost Centers F1443A

Statistical Key Figure - Factsheet

F1731 Manage Statistical Key Figures

F1603A

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item J54 (Overhead Cost Accounting)

Application Component CO-OM


3.4.2 Business Catalogs for Planning

As of SAP S/4HANA On Premise 1909 a new business catalog, SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_PLN_ADM, is available. It can be found in the Planning business group SAP_SFIN_BCG_PLAN.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1HB (Financial Plan Data Upload from File)


Application Component CO-OM-CCA-B


3.4.3 Overhead Cost Accounting

3.4.3.1 Apps Removed from Overhead role

The following apps have been removed from the SAP_BR_OVERHEAD_ACCOUNTANT business group:

● Display Actual Cost Line Items for Cost Centers● Display Actual Cost Documents● Manage Cost Center Master Data

Individual users who choose not to work with the apps, can still use this transaction as before.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component CO-OM-IS


3.4.3.2 Manage Statistical Key Figures (Version 2)

This app is a new version of the Manage Statistical Key Figures app. You can use Manage Statistical Key Figures (Version 2) to display and manage statistical key figures master data. You can create new statistical key figures as well as copy, edit, and delete existing ones. You can also view other objects that mention each statistical key figure by navigating to the Where-Used List – Statistical Key Figures app.

Manage Statistical Key Figures (Version 2) replaces the Manage Statistical Key Figures app.


Finance

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CO-FIO



This app replaces the Manage Statistical Key Figures app. The Manage Statistical Key Figures app is no longer supported and will be removed from the system as of SAP S/4HANA 2020. As of now, it is no longer available by default on the SAP Fiori launchpad. If you need this app, you can find it in the App Finder until it is deprecated. We recommend that you switch to the new successor app Manage Statistical Key Figures (Version 2) as soon as possible.

Related Information

Where-Used List - Statistical Key Figures [page 62]Manage Statistical Key Figures (Version 2)

3.4.3.3 Manage Activity Types (Version 2)

This app is a new version of the Manage Activity Types app. You can use the app Manage Activity Types (Version 2) to search for activity types, display their master data, create new and edit existing activity types. You can also view other objects that mention each activity type by navigating to the Where-Used List – Activity Types app.

Manage Activity Types (Version 2) replaces the Manage Activity Types app.

Technical Details

Type New


https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/241be8021eb742109a3e6d5c2c0805ce.html






This app replaces the Manage Activity Types app. The Manage Activity Types app is no longer supported and will be removed from the system as of SAP S/4HANA 2020. As of now, it is no longer available by default on the SAP Fiori launchpad. If you need this app, you can find it in the App Finder until it is deprecated. We recommend that you switch to the new successor app Manage Activity Types (Version 2) as soon as possible.

Related Information

Where-Used List - Activity Types [page 61]Manage Activity Types (Version 2)

3.4.3.4 SAP CoPilot Skill: Manage Cost Centers

Use this skill to find and view cost center master data. You can see the cost centers' validity periods, assigned profit centers, controlling areas, categories, users responsible, and other details.

Technical Details

Type New






Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/70c1b4f3e8bc4ea79a97e2c0cd40a0c5.html

Related Information

Skill: Manage Cost Centers

3.4.3.5 Change Log - Activity Types

With this app you can see details of changes made to activity type master data. You can see what was changed, by who, and when, and you can filter for changes made to particular activity types, or by a particular user.

Technical Details

Type New





3.4.3.6 SAP CoPilot Skill: Activity Type Change Log

This skill allows you to use SAP CoPilot to view changes made to activity type master data. You can simply say or type your query to see a list of changes to whichever activity type you specify.

Technical Details

Type New






https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/a3746da80eaa4c92a2c8b9a1a187891c.html

Related Information

Skill: Activity Type Change Log

3.4.3.7 Change Log - Cost Centers

With this app you can see details of changes made to cost center master data. You can see what was changed, by who, and when, and you can filter for changes made to particular cost centers, or by a particular user.

Technical Details

Type New





3.4.3.8 SAP CoPilot Skill: Cost Center Change Log

Use this skill to see details of changes made to cost center master data. You can see what was changed, by who, and when, and you can filter for specific changes.

Technical Details

Type New






Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/f54231fe3d92478ea69934ba3f762a69.html

Related Information

Skill: Cost Center Change Log

3.4.3.9 Where-Used List – Cost Centers

You can use this app to find all objects that mention a specific cost center. These objects may include activity types, cost allocation cycles and segments, cost center groups, hierarchies, cost centers using budget, and many other. To explore additional details, you can click the object links and navigate to other apps related to these objects.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Where-Used List – Cost Centers

3.4.3.10 Where-Used List - Activity Types

With this app you can find all mentions of a specific activity type in a wide range of objects, such as cost centers, receiving orders, receiving WBS elements, activity type groups, and production (routings and work centers). You can specify one or more activity types and view all objects where these activity types are mentioned. To explore additional details, you can click the object links and navigate to other SAP Fiori apps related to these objects.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/c591d89b20cf4333a1a67c604a8a4fe5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/1c4c42cf85214d67a9a3333073842969.html

Technical Details

Type New





3.4.3.11 Where-Used List - Statistical Key Figures

With this app you can find all mentions of a specific statistical key figure in statistical key figure groups, cost allocation cycles and segments, and a range of other objects. You can specify one or more statistical key figures and view the objects where these statistical key figures are mentioned. To explore additional details, you can click the object links and navigate to other SAP Fiori apps related to these objects.

Technical Details

Type New





3.4.3.12 Upload Material Inventory Prices

With this app you can make mass changes to material inventory prices. You can download a blank spreadsheet to use as a template or you can download your existing material prices for a given company code, its plants and currency type, make your changes, then upload the new prices.


Finance

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1ZT (1ZT)

Application Component CO-PC-ML


Related Information

Upload Material Inventory Prices

3.4.3.13 Display Line Items - Cost Accounting

With this app you can display line items in cost accounting. You can filter, sort, and group the items based on various criteria. By default, the line items are grouped by cost center, but you can create your own variants according to the needs of your business.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1GA (1GA)

Application Component FI-FIO-GL


Related Information

Display Line Items - Cost Accounting


https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/35ecd1fca27b44a5896cbe4311a147a4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/8bf790f057f94a9ba20c9e7484c24f25.html

3.4.3.14 Manage Direct Activity Allocation

With this feature you can view, create, and reverse direct activity allocations.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1NT (1NT)



Related Information

Manage Direct Activity Allocation

3.4.3.15 Run Allocations

This feature enables you to view the run result report in tabs for allocation results, senders, receivers, and messages. You can also display the run result report as a network graph.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item J54 (J54), 2QL (2QL)




Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/4b3fc3fac21244f09e9948dfa89bcb05.html

Related Information

Run Allocations

3.4.3.16 Manage Allocations

This feature enables you to perform allocations for actual data, allocate between profit centers, and download a template to use when importing CSV files.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2QL (2QL), J54 (J54)



Related Information

Manage Allocations

3.4.4 Financial Planning

3.4.4.1 Revenue Planning with SAP Analytics Cloud

This SAP Analytics Cloud content (Revenue Planning, Cost Center Budgeting and Activity Planning for SAP S/4HANA) facilitates the sales and revenue planning process including sales price and sales quantity planning, revenue and deduction calculation. It supports users with simulation capabilities based on past actual data. It is based on the S/4HANA data model in FI-CO. Master data and transaction data from S/4HANA can be loaded into SAP Analytics Cloud and planning results can be written back to S/4HANA.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/e217cc30a2994a2981cdf2234faded9b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/b4fc91d714be42128e29281097f0d246.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1YB



Related Information

Integration of SAP Analytics Cloud for Planning with SAP S/4HANA

3.4.4.2 Delete Financial Plan Data

Use this app to ensure data consistency by resetting financial plan data to a specified point in time (timestamp). This makes it possible to correct previous, erroneous plan data imports, for example. Resetting plan data deletes the data permanently and irrevocably. Please ensure that you archive any financial plan data that you are no longer using. Do not delete such data using this app.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1HB




To use this app, the Deleting Financial Plan Data checkbox must be selected for each plan category from which you want to delete plan data in the Maintain Category for Planning customizing activity. In the Implementation Guide, go to Controlling General Controlling Planning Maintain Category for Planning .


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/14010130de914754a17a040ad65614c5/1909.000/en-US/248f123e6e7943d0910ca745bffb7b53.html

Related Information

Delete Financial Plan Data

3.4.5 Product Costing

3.4.5.1 Production Cost Analysis

The Production Cost Analysis app now enables target cost calculation for collective orders.

It supports order standard costs and target cost calculation at time of goods receipts for collective orders.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BEI (Period-End Closing - Plant)



3.4.5.2 Analyze Costs by Work Center/Operation

The Analyze Costs by Work Center/Operation app now reports on Work Center/Operation to help analyze production costs. It also enables plan costs based on new planning solution.

It supports order standard costs and target cost calculation at time of goods receipts for collective orders.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BEI (Period-End Closing - Plant)


https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/e78b89ad5e314c03b35c09e8b922b14a.html



3.4.6 Sales Accounting

3.4.6.1 Sales Accounting Overview

The Sales Accounting Overview app has been updated with a number of new cards. These include Monthly Gross Margin, Gross Margin per Product, Monthly Sales Deductions, and Sales Deductions.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BGC (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for G/L Accounting in Finance)



Additional Details

The following semantic tags need to be assigned to your financial statement version:

● Billed Revenue (BILL_REV)Only items connected to the sale of products or goods with both billed revenue and a quantity < > 0 are included in the model. Items with billed revenue but no quantity connected are excluded.

● Recognized Revenue (RECO_REV)● Sales Deductions (SALES_DED)● Recognized Margin (REC_MARGIN)● Cost of Goods Sold (RECO_COS)● Revenue Adjustments (ADJ_REV)● Price Difference (PRICE_DIF)


Finance

Related Information

Sales Accounting Overview

3.4.6.2 Monitor Predictive Accounting - Predictive Quality

You use this app to monitor and check for how many of the sales orders created in the system it was possible to simulate all follow-on documents in predictive accounting. If it was possible to simulate all follow-on documents in the system you have an accurate prediction of costs and revenues for your products. If the system could not simulate the follow-on documents in predictive accounting you can check with this app where in the simulation process the errors occurred. You can correct the errors and then you can start reprocessing in predictive accounting.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2FD

Application Component FI-PRA



In order to use predictive accounting and the app Monitor Predictive Accounting - Predictive Quality you have to activate predictive accounting and make the settings necessary for it.

To do so in the SAP Reference IMG choose Financial Accounting Predictive Accounting .

Related Information

Predictive Accounting


https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/ef182f0891e64f72ba3998296787fb20.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/c78ce92ab96346f7ab2722b79756ffc1.html

3.4.7 Budget Availability Control

3.4.7.1 Budget Availability Control for Cost Centers

Budget availability control helps you avoid budget exceedances in your cost centers. When you post an expense, the available budget is checked. If the budget consumption exceeds a defined limit, either a warning or an error message appears. This system response is based on the settings that you have defined in the Budget Availability Control Profile for your cost centers. The Cost Center Budget Report app provides you with information about budget, actual costs, commitments, and available budget for your budget-carrying cost centers.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CO-OM-CCA


Additional Details

You can use the Cost Center Budget Report app to:

● View budget, plan data, actual costs, and commitments of budget-carrying cost centers. The information displayed is based on filter criteria such as company code or fiscal year.

● View costs and budget details of multiple budget-carrying cost centers from different company codes● Switch between visual filter and compact filter for available budget● Navigate to view the details of a cost center● Navigate to the line item overview for actual costs and commitments.


Budget availability control can be used for cost centers only after you have created a Budget Availability Control Profile for these cost centers.

You create a Budget Availability Control Profile and assign account groups to this profile. The assignment of account groups defines:


Finance

● Which accounts are checked during actual cost postings and● Which accounts are analyzed with the Cost Center Budget Report

Related Information

Budget Availability Control for Cost CentersCost Center Budget Report

3.5 Accounting and Financial Close

3.5.1 General Ledger Accounting

3.5.1.1 Edit Options for Journal Entries: Payment Reference Option

In the Edit Options for Journal Entries app, the Payment Reference as Search Criterion option is now available. Selecting this option allows you to search for line items to be cleared that have a payment reference (KIDNO). In the Clear Incoming Payments and Post Incoming Payments app, you can then search for items with payment reference.

This procedure for identifying invoices is common practice in Scandinavian countries.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item J58 (Accounting and Financial Close)

Application Component FI-GL


Related Information

Edit Options for Journal Entries


https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/787e0e992eb04c688730b1032f49a3f6.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/47ef8703e5ab4a83b9b833315f745290.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/5a06325798d8682be10000000a441470.html

3.5.1.2 Display Line Item Entry App - Items Without Leading Ledgers

You can now also display line items in the app that were posted to ledger groups without the leading ledger.

Additionally, you can also change journal entry items without leading ledgers, that is, change the assignment (for sorting documents) and the item texts for line items by selecting the respective line item and clicking Change Journal Entries. This functions the same way as for normal items (items of a journal entry that neither have a special document status nor do they portray special G/L account transactions) and for noted items (items that remind you of outstanding payments).

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component FI-FIO-GL (Fiori UI for General Ledger Accounting)


Related Information

Display Line Item Entry

3.5.1.3 App Extensibility: Public Sector Fields in Specific Reporting Apps for G/L Accountants

This feature enables you to display additional fields for Public Sector in the following apps:

● Display Line Items in General Ledger● Trial Balance● Trial Balance Comparison

You can use the Custom Fields and Logic app to do that.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/ba77e6d5618047c9a306a33441267874.html

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

The following fields for Public Sector are available natively in the Display Line Items for General Ledger app, the Trial Balance app and the Trial Balance Comparison app:

● Financial Management Area● Funds Center● Funded Program● Fund● Grant● Budget Period● Partner Fund● Partner Grant● FM: Partner Budget Period

Additionally, by using the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can display the fields listed below for Public Sector.

You use the Custom Fields and Logic app to create and publish a data source extension with additional fields for the above listed reporting apps for the G/L accountant. You choose from a list of available fields the ones that you want to have additionally displayed, put them into the Selected Fields area and save and publish the data source extension with the additional fields that you selected.

Fields You can Choose to Add for Public Sector:

● Cash Ledger: Company Code for Expense/Revenue● Cash Ledger: Expense or Revenue Account● Budget Account● Budget Account Company Code● Budget Consumption Date● CC Fiscal Period to Budget Consumption Date● CC Fiscal Year to Budget Consumption Date● Budget-Relevant Indicator● Budget Consumption Amount Type● Budget Consumption Type


Related Information

App Extensibility: Display Line Items in General LedgerApp Extensibility: Trial BalanceExtensibility

3.5.1.4 CDS Views for SAP BW/4HANA Extraction in General Ledger Accounting

CDS (Core Data Services) views have been enabled and released for SAP Business Warehouse/4HANA extraction.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component FI-GL (General Ledger Accounting)


Additional Details

● G/L Account Line Item - Raw Data (I_GLAccountLineItemRawData)You can use this CDS view to obtain details for G/L account line items (without ledger).

● Source Ledger (I_LedgerSourceLedger)You can use this CDS view to obtain details for the assignment of a ledger to the source ledger.

● Financial Planning Entry Item (I_FinancialPlanningEntryItem)You can use this CDS view to obtain details for financial planning entry items.

● Accounting Document Item: Operational View (I_OperationalAcctgDocItem)You can use this CDS view to obtain details for operational accounting documents.

● Journal Entry (I_Journal Entry)You can use this CDS view to obtain details for journal entries.

● Company Code (I_CompanyCode)You can use this CDS view to obtain details for company codes.

● Cost Center (I_CostCenter)You can use this CDS view to obtain details for cost centers.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/15ee31fac4be4e6497a76abe449fe49c.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/dc17c45747dc8809e10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9a281eac983f4f688d0deedc96b3c61c/201909.000/en-US/3ccb50e724b045508fea8b2cf1774b2b.html

● Profit Center (I_ProfitCenter)You can use this CDS view to obtain details for profit centers.

Related Information

CDS ViewsCDS Views for FinanceExtracting CDS Views to SAP BW/4HANA

3.5.1.5 CDS Views for General Ledger Accounting

CDS (Core Data Services) views have now been released for General Ledger Accounting.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

The following CDS views have now been released:

● CDS Views for Master Data○ Accounting Principle (I_AccountingPrinciple)○ Accounting Principle Text (I_AccountingPrincipleText)

● CDS View for Transaction Data○ Company Code User Default Value (I_UserSettingsForCompanyCode)

For more information about the CDS views available, see the product assistance at http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909.000 under Cross Components The Virtual Data Model in SAP S/4HANA CDS ViewsCDS Views for Finance .


https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/5418de55938d1d22e10000000a44147b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/70efdf57f8c2073ee10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/7d2bae1d9f2643c3bbaa398df8256c01.html

http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909.000


Related Information

CDS Views for Finance

3.5.1.6 Balance Sheet / Income Statement: Display Zero-Balance Accounts

This app was previously called Display Financial Statement.

You can now use it to display zero-balance accounts.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item J58 (J58)



Additional Details

Zero-balance accounts are accounts to which no postings have been made or for which the credit and debit postings offset each other.

For more information, see Displaying Zero-Balance Accounts.

Related Information



Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/70efdf57f8c2073ee10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/5c13f0805c0849e4a78dda9d0e67b18d.html


3.5.1.7 Changes in Automatic Account Determination

You can use the Automatic Account Determination app to configure G/L account assignments. New processes and transaction keys in different areas have been added. To open this app, you can search for the app name in the App Finder.

Technical Details

Type New




Available As Of SAP S/HANA 1909

Additional Details

See new areas, processes, transaction keys, and applications in the following table:

Item TypeArea/Subarea-Process/Transaction Group

UMS: Tax payable posting (advance tax return)

New transaction key Financial Accounting - General Ledger Accounting - Define Tax Accounts - STE

Define Zero-Balance Clearing Account New process Financial Accounting - General Ledger Accounting

Define Alternative Reconciliation Accounts for Special G/L Transactions

New process Financial Accounting - Accounts Receivables and Payables

Personnel Management New area (New)

SAP S/4HANA for Human Resources New subarea Personnel Management

Define Reconciliation Accounts for Employees in Role FI Supplier

New process Personnel Management - SAP S/4HANA for Human Resources

Application V: C017 New application Sales - Sales Billing - Assign G/L Accounts

Application V: C020 New application Sales - Sales Billing - Assign G/L Accounts

Application V: Customer-created condition tables

New application Sales - Sales Billing - Assign G/L Accounts


Item TypeArea/Subarea-Process/Transaction Group

Application VC: C018 & C019 New application Sales - Sales Billing - Assign G/L Accounts

Application VD: C006 New application Sales - Sales Billing - Assign G/L Accounts

Related Information

Automatic Account Determination

3.5.1.8 Manage Journal Entry Templates

This app enables you to define a journal entry template for postings based on your needs, which means you can select fields and values in a template for specific posting use. Then the template can be used in the Post General Journal Entries app. After you create a journal entry template, you can also choose to share it publicly and the access level. The templates can help save time when you enter journal entries.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Manage Journal Entry Templates


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/89f2a87accc849d4b5682feb619ce9ad.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/7e4dec43473d4025aa058c1de971521a.html

3.5.1.9 Profitability Segment Fields

With this feature, you can add profitability segment fields in a template file for upload in the Upload General Journal Entries app. Make sure that you add correct technical names of the fields. You can add profitability segment fields such as billing type, sales group, and customer group.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Adding Field Columns in TemplateUpload General Journal Entries

3.5.1.10 Changes in Manage Journal Entries

You can navigate to the Display Journal Entries - In T-Account View app from the Manage Journal Entries app, and view journal entries in the T-Account view. In addition, related documents of a journal entry are listed a hierarchy view, compared with a flat view before this release. These changes provide you with an easy and organized view of journal entries.

Technical Details

Type Changed




https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/41f88d19c3b64b1db1c2aa80165d9494.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/b8d24781d0ff45d8bff65a58b06853cd.html



Additional Details

To access Display Journal Entries from the Manage Journal Entries app, select a journal entry, and choose T-Account View in the entry view.

The Manage Journal Entries app also provides some country or region specific features, for example, creating and sending electronic customer tax invoices in XML format to an integrated external system.

Related Information

Manage Journal EntriesCreation and Sending of Electronic Customer Tax Invoices in XML Format [page 771]

3.5.1.11 Changes in Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies

It is supported to transport global accounting hierarchies from your quality system to the production system. Note that this feature is applicable only for the financial statement version type.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/d2d78154f9a7033de10000000a441470.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/8e040a45e4db4e6abd426bee0a86dc8a.html

3.5.1.12 Manage Custom Hierarchy Type

In the Manage Custom Hierarchy Type app, you can choose additional dimensions to use to create hierarchies. You can then use Manage Global Accounting Hiearchies to build hierarchies based on your attribute. For example, you can define a Country attribute and then use Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies to build country hierarchies.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

To use this app, you need the same minimum authorizations as the Overhead Account (SAP_BR_OVERHEAD_ACCOUNTANT) business role template.

Related Information

Manage Custom Hierarchy Type

3.5.1.13 Manage Teams and Responsibilities - General Journal Entry Verification

This app enables you to authorize processors who are required to verify submitted G/L journal entries. This app is also the successor of the Define Responsibilities app that is deprecated as of this release.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/e8669206c4804afb8337fba8ef85f2c0.html

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

Before SAP S/4 HANA 1909, the Manage Teams and Responsibilities app is used for defining group of users not only for verifying G/L journal entries, also for other purposes.


If you've configured in the Manage Teams and Responsibilities app and specified the Type field with FGLVG, the data about teams is also automatically available in the Manage Teams and Responsibilities - General Journal Entry Verification app. It's unnecessary to copy data from the old app to the new one.

Related Information

Managing Teams and Responsibilities

3.5.1.14 Accounting Enhancements for Banking

You can use the following enhancements for Multi Currency Accounting:

● ADB Key Figure Calculation (Fiori App)● Mass approval workflow for parked documents


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/cfa19b88659e4a50a913eb8b3b6379c6.html

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component ● AC-INT-ECS (Error Correction and Suspense Accounting)

● FI-GL-CU-MCA (Multi Currency Accounting)

● FI-GL-GL-ADB (Average Daily Balances)


Additional Details

SAP Easy Access Menu

The SAP Easy Access Menu has been changed. Error Correction and Suspense Accounting, Multi Currency Accounting, Average Daily Balances and Move and Merge are also available under Accounting Bank Applications Enhancements for Accounting .

SAP Customizing

The SAP Customizing structure has been changed. Error Correction and Suspense Accounting, Multi Currency Accounting, Average Daily Balances and Move and Merge are also available under SAP BankingEnhancements for Accounting .

3.5.1.15 Changes in Monitor GR/IR Account Reconciliation App

You can use the Monitor GR/IR Account Reconciliation app to get an overview over the status of open items on your GR/IR accounts that need clarification. New features and content have been added. To open this app, you can search for the app name in the App Finder of the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Technical Details

Type Changed




Application Component FI-GL-IS


Additional Details

This app displays Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) both from the logistics and the accounting point of view which enables real-time insight into the workload of the teams and the risk of open amounts for the period close result. It can be used, for example, by team leads in a shared services center to track the progress of their teams.

New Feature Description

Overview Over Absolute Amount of Open FI Items The new tile allows you to get an overview over the total balance amount without sign of open FI items in global currency and grouped by the dimension you choose (company code, supplier, purchase organization, purchasing group, material group, controlling area, profit center or plant).

The absolute open amount is an indicator for the risk exposed in the balance sheet.

Overview Over Debit & Credit Amount of Open FI Items The new tile enables you to get an overview over the debit amount & credit amount of open FI items in global currency summed up as total amount and grouped by the dimension you choose (company code, supplier, purchasing organization, purchasing group, material group, controlling area, profit center or plant.)

The chart puts the open credit and debit amount in relation to the total amount which is reflected in the size of the bubble. Negative total amounts are displayed as empty bubbles and positive total amounts are shown as filled bubbles.

New Content Description

Overview Over Different Amounts:

● For the Open FI Items by Company Code tile● For the Open FI Items by Supplier tile

For the two tiles business users can now choose to display the debit amount, the credit amount or the absolute amount of open items.


Finance

The graphic illustrates the new tiles and the new content for existing tiles that have been added to the Monitor GR/IR Account Reconciliation app:

Related Information

Monitor GR/IR Account Reconciliation

3.5.1.16 Changes in Reconcile GR/IR Accounts App

You can use the Reconcile GR/IR Accounts app to clarify and resolve issues for purchase order items with goods receipts and invoice receipts where amounts and quantities do not match. New features have been added to especially integrate more automation to ease and fasten your tasks when working with the app. To open this app, you can search for the app name in the App Finder of the SAP Fiori Launchpad.

Technical Details

Type Changed


https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/8700d78b2faf49f6aff17857bd674f27.html



Application Component FI-GL-IS


Additional Details

The entry page of the Reconcile GR/IR Accounts app provides powerful capabilities for analyzing the workload in detail and enables easy access to purchase order items of interest. It allows you to do mass-processing for decision taking as well as for writing off delivery costs or goods amounts.

The object page provides all relevant details related to a purchase order item, its open FI items and the purchase order history, in an easy-to-consume fashion for quickly understanding the situation and taking a decision.

New Features in Reconcile GR/IR Accounts

Area: New Feature Description

Entry Page: Excel Export You can export the list of purchase order items you filtered and which need clarification to excel.

Entry Page: Easy Detection of Outdated Decisions In the list of purchase order items, you can filter for purchase order items with not matching amounts or quantities in invoice receipts or goods receipts for which postings have been made after those items were last processed or changed.

This allows you to do mass-processing for revising the decisions you previously took for such purchase order items and decide newly based on the changed situation, that is, the postings that have been made.

Entry Page: Easy Access of Action History For each such purchase order item you can access the action log in an additional screen.

Entry Page: Input Validation of Processor When entering a processor for such a purchase order item the input is validated, so that you can easily detect and correct any mistakes before you save.


Finance

Area: New Feature Description

Situation Handling Proactively inform business users through automated notifi-cations based on relevant changes of a purchasing document item and provide business users with contextual information and actions, all in one place.

Examples:

● A business user is notified as soon as he or she is entered as the processor for the purchase order item.

● A business user is notified as soon as the next processing step (status) of a purchase order item is set to Write-off.

New Content in Reconcile GR/IR Accounts

Area: New Content Description

Entry Page: Show a Quality Mark for the ML Proposal If you are using the Reconcile GR/IR Accounts app with machine learning, machine learning provides recommendations for processing such purchase order items. The machine learning service learns from decisions taken by the users in the past and provides proposals for decision taking. It also shows a confidence level for the machine learning service as table columns, and also shows the confidence level for the machine learning proposal in the processing dialog.

Object Page: History of Posted Journal Entries and User Actions

A timeline shows the complete history of posted journal entries and user actions with the state of the purchase order item. This enables you to understand the What and the Why during processing.


As a key user you require authorization to access a standard situation template FIN_GRIRPROCESSORCHANGED. Your user must be assigned to the authorization role SAP_BR_BCP_EXPERT to be able to copy a standard situation template. For detailed information, see Authorizations for Situation Handling. You perform the following steps to copy the standard template for the GR/IR reconciliation scenario and adapt it to your needs:

1. Log on to the SAP Fiori launchpad and open the Manage Situation Type app.2. Search for the FIN_GRIRPROCESSORCHANGED template.3. Select the template and then choose the Copy button to copy the template to a new situation type.4. In the new situation type, define the settings according to your needs and save and enable the situation

type.

Related Information

Changes in Monitor GR/IR Account Reconciliation App [page 83]


https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/2ccf7b335319421ebfb0ab8e6ebbb3c2.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/2ccf7b335319421ebfb0ab8e6ebbb3c2.html

Reconcile GR/IR AccountsSituation Template: GR/IR Clearing Processor Was Changed

3.5.1.17 Deprecated Apps in General Ledger Accounting

Several apps and factsheets in General Ledger Accounting will be replaced soon. We recommend that you switch to the successor app as soon as possible. For more information about the deprecated apps and the successor apps, please see the links below.

Deprecated apps will be deleted two releases from now. They have been removed from the business catalog and are no longer visible on the Fiori launchpad. If you need the apps, you can find them in the App Finder until they are deleted.

Deprecated Apps

App Name Similar Functionality Scope Item

Manage Profit Centers (Obsolete) Profit Centers J58 (Accounting and Financial Close)

Manage Profit Center Master Data Profit Centers J58 (Accounting and Financial Close)

Technical Details

Type Changed




Available As SAP S/4HANA 1909

Related Information



Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/17f3a45189524e78b4a80bf51ff2b741.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/d08117808e5c414d90c657db0ea49a77.html


3.5.1.18 Changes to Authorization Objects in General Ledger Accounting

Changes to authorization objects delivered for General Ledger Accounting require you to recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.

Technical Details

Type Changed






Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and their restriction types:

NoteYou can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled by the catalog and its restriction types.

New Role and Changed Business CatalogsThe following changes were made to the business role templates.


Name of Object Object TypeChanges with This Release Details

Relevant Scope Item(s)

Division Accountant (SAP_BR_DIVISION_ACCOUNTANT)

Business role New business role The following business catalogs are assigned to this role:

● SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_MD_PCA

● SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_REP_PCA

● SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_GPA_PCA


Profit Center Accounting - General Posting Activities ( SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_GPA_PCA)

Business catalog New business catalog The app Run Allocation is part of the business catalog.

J54 (Overhead Cost Accounting)


Profit Center Accounting - Profit Center Master Data ( SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_MD_PCA)

Business catalog Business catalog renamed and apps added

The business catalog BC SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_MD_PCA has been renamed from Overhead Accounting - Profit Center Master Data to Profit Center Accounting - Profit Center Master Data.

The following apps have been added to the business catalog::

● Manage Profit Centers, in replacement of Manage Profit Centers (Obsolete)

● Where-Used List – Profit Centers

● Change Log - Profit Centers

● Manage Allocations



Finance

Name of Object Object TypeChanges with This Release Details

Relevant Scope Item(s)

Profit Center Accounting - Profit Center Reporting ( SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_REP_PCA)

Business catalog Business catalog renamed and apps added

The business catalog BC SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_REP_PCA has been renamed from Overhead Accounting - Profit Center Reporting to Profit Center Accounting - Profit Center Reporting.

The following apps have been added to the business catalog:

● Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies

● Manage Flexible Hierarchies


Profit Center Accounting - Profit Center Display (SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_FACT_PCA)

Business catalog Business catalog renamed and app removed

The business catalog BC SAP_SFIN_BC_OH_FACT_PCA has been renamed from Overhead Accounting - Profit Center Display to Profit Center Accounting - Profit Center Display.

The Profit Center Fact Sheet has been removed from the business catalog.


Enablement of Tablet Usage

Tablet usage has been enabled for the following apps:

● Profit Centers - Plan/Actual ● Profit Centers - Actuals● Profit Centers - Plan/Actual YTD ● Profit Centers - Plan/Actual with Currency Translation● Manage Profit Center Groups ● Edit Profit Centers - Collective ● Profit Center Assignment Monitor ● Edit Company Code Assignment - Profit Centers


● Edit Sales Order Substitution ● Compare ROI Profit Centers ● Display Key Figures Profit Center Groups

3.5.1.19 Manage Profit Centers

With this app you can search for, create, view, and edit the master data of profit centers. You can also assign company codes when you create a profit center. To view objects that are associated with a profit center, you can go to the Where-Used section.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information


3.5.1.20 Change Log - Profit Centers

With this app, you can see the details of changes made to profit center master data.

Technical Details

Type New



Finance





Related Information

Change Log - Profit Centers

3.5.1.21 Where-Used List - Profit Centers

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Where-Used List - Profit Centers

3.5.1.22 Journal Entry - Post APIs

The APIs Journal Entry - Post (Asynchronous) and Journal Entry - Post (Synchronous) are enabled for SAP S/4HANA and have been updated as follows:

New feature in MessageHeader nodeSimulation is supported.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/97c0771bc90d40c2958fe8ebce09897c.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/67c97989351f49c386ccf76d5df12733.html

New features in JournalEntry header node

● ExchangeRate● IndirectQuotedExchangeRate● Reference1InDocumentHeader and Reference2InDocumentHeader● AccountingDocument, which enables the accounting document number● TaxDeterminationDate

New features in Item node

● Extension fields in AccountingAssignment and ProfitabilitySupplement● FunctionArea and PersonnelNumber in AccountingAssignment● SoldMaterial and SoldMaterialGroup in ProfitabilitySupplement● AmountInGroupCurrency

New features in DebtorItem node

● Extension fields● Reference1IDByBusinessPartner● Reference2IDByBusinessPartner● Reference3IDByBusinessPartner● BusinessPlace● AmountInGroupCurrency● TaxItemGroup● DownPaymentTerms● OneTimeCustomer

New features in CreditorItem node

● Extension fields● Reference1IDByBusinessPartner● Reference2IDByBusinessPartner● Reference3IDByBusinessPartner● HouseBank● BusinessPlace● AmountInGroupCurrency● DownPaymentTerms

New features in ProductTaxItem node

● Extension fields● AmountInGroupCurrency● TaxItemGroup● ConditionType

Posting over 999 line itemsIf the number of document line items is lower than or equals 999, the items are not compressed. The details are stored in both the Entry View and Ledger View.


Finance

If the number of document line items is higher than 999 and open items, cross company items, or tax items are included, the items are compressed in the Entry View. This is done by deleting the content from the account assignment, except for the functional area. The details, however, are still stored in the Ledger View.

If the number of document line items is higher than 999 and open items, cross company items, and tax items are excluded, the items are stored in the Ledger View without being compressed.

If the number of document line items in the Entry View is still higher than 999 after compression, the posting fails.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item Accounting and Financial Close

Application Component AC-INT


Additional Details

For more information, see the business documentation of the services on the SAP API Business Hub .

3.5.1.23 Display Journal Entries – In T-Account View

With this app you can inspect how one or multiple journal entries affect ledger accounts where they are posted.

Technical Details

Type New





http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Fapi.sap.com%2F


Related Information

Display Journal Entries – In T-Account View

3.5.1.24 Currency Exchange Rates

With this feature you can monitor, create, and change currency exchange rates.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Currency Exchange Rates

3.5.1.25 Display Document Flow

With this feature you can display all documents that are part of a business transaction.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/a38e96aea416467c926148f32f08bb95.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/72041b59d4d6413f9c8cdf92bc2ccc7e.html

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Display Document Flow

3.5.1.26 Universal Allocation

With this feature, you can allocate and distribute overhead from one object to one or more others. For example, the costs incurred at a cost center that provided services for other cost centers can be charged to the requesting cost centers by means of overhead allocation.

NoteThis information is relevant for you if you have implemented SAP Fiori apps.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item J54, 2QL, 2US

Application Component FI, FI-GL, CO



https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/69b6a7a8a28948d8875cbef8df2b8188.html

Additional Details

You can use Universal Allocation instead of the traditional allocation functions for profit centers and segments known from General Ledger Accounting, where you can also periodically allocate amounts and quantities from sender to receiver objects.

With the Universal Allocation features, however, you can manage and perform various overhead allocation and distribution tasks for different allocation contexts from two central apps – Manage Allocations and Run Allocations –, such as cost centers or profit centers, and for actual and plan data. You can periodically allocate amounts and quantities from sending objects to receiving objects.

Related Information

Universal Allocation

3.5.1.27 Accruals Management

With SAP S/4HANA 1909, new features in accruals management enhance the process for calculating, checking, and posting accruals. A highlight is the addition of utilization – you not only create accruals but can also have the system automatically reduce them by the related postings of actual costs.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item J58, 2VB

Application Component FI-GL-ACE


Additional Details

Here are some new things you can do in accruals management:

● Implement utilization and release postings for accruals.● Pause, suspend, and resume accrual objects (relevant for purchase order accruals only).● Review purchase order accruals and adjust revised costs in the transaction currency.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/b4fc91d714be42128e29281097f0d246.html



https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/9ec635ecc22a4559b1070b2dd2c879e4.html

● Display a comprehensive overview of purchase order accruals.● Schedule accruals jobs using the templates provided.● Transfer existing accruals data to the SAP S/4HANA Accrual Engine from an outside system or even from a

manually maintained spreadsheet (relevant for manual accruals only).● Run the preprocessing program for archiving accrual objects.

Related Information

Utilization and Release Postings for Accruals [page 99]Review Purchase Order Accruals - For Cost Accountant [page 104]Display Purchase Order Accruals [page 103]Schedule Accruals Jobs [page 106]Legacy Data Transfer for Accruals [page 108]Preprocessing Program for Archiving Accruals [page 108]

3.5.1.27.1 Utilization and Release Postings for Accruals

Accruals help you to recognize expenses and revenues that are already known to your company and will be due in the future with a high degree of certainty.

To keep your accruals up-to-date and adjust the amounts as changes arise, you can now use an end-to-end solution for accruals: You create accruals and deferrals as before but now you can also have the system reduce them as soon as actual costs are posted with reference to the corresponding accrual objects. You can also release accrual amounts that you no longer require. The postings enabling this are called utilization and release postings.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item J58, 2VB




Additional Details

In addition to using utilization and release postings for the current fiscal period, you can distinguish between the current fiscal period and earlier periods, that is, you can utilize and release accruals amounts not only from the current fiscal period but also from earlier fiscal periods, and thus benefit from an even more accurate accruals process. Such utilization and release postings are called late utilization and late release postings.

This comprehensive process enables you to understand the financial position of your company in detail and ensures that revenues and expenses are reported correctly.

The following posting types have been added for these process:

● UP - utilization posting● RP - manual release posting● UL - late utilization posting (utilizing amounts from an earlier fiscal period)● RL - late manual release posting (releasing amounts from an earlier fiscal period)● FL - late automatic release posting (automatically releasing amounts from an earlier fiscal period, for

example, when a user closes a purchase order)


If you want to use the utilization and release process, you need to make the relevant settings in Customizing (see the links in the Related Links section below).

To be able to make utilization and release postings referring to earlier fiscal periods, you need to configure the accrual closing frequency and use a value, such as annually or quarterly (so the system can use the accrual value date which is only relevant in this case). You do this using the Define Accrual Item Types Customizing activity.

Only relevant for manual accruals:

For the system to be able to make utilization and release postings for a business transaction, such as an invoice, and its assigned accrual object, users need to enter a reference to the corresponding accrual objects when they post actual costs from the business transaction. Users enter this reference to an accrual object in the posting screens of the corresponding transactions, such as supplier invoices (MIRO) or manual journal entries (FB01 and FB50). You make these accrual object fields available using the Maintain Field Status Group transaction (OB14).

Related Information

Utilization and Release of Manual AccrualsCustomizing for Manual AccrualsUtilization and Release of Purchase Order AccrualsCustomizing Purchase Order Accruals


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/a75f054beecb49ebb62718437bab50e7.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/7182d0531d8b4208e10000000a174cb4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/e83b3e2a634e498ebc4e53f2341d32e2.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/b578526760074a1f846a7168bc4000e9.html

3.5.1.27.2 Release, Pause, and Suspend Accrual Objects in Purchase Order Accruals

If you are using the utilization and release process for purchase order accruals, you can release accrual amounts that you probably won't need anymore. It is also possible to revert this step if you later need the released accrual amounts.

In addition, you can pause or suspend accrual postings for a certain period of time and resume them later, if necessary.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item J58, 2VB



Additional Details

There are different ways to release accrual amounts or put them on hold:

● Release accrualsWhen you release accruals, the system sets the accrual balance to zero. You use this option if you don't expect actual cost postings anymore relating to this purchase order item (that is, the accrual object).

● Pause accrualsWhen you pause accruals, the system doesn't post any new accruals for this purchase order item. The accrual balance remains unchanged. You use this option if you expect that at a later point in time you will again need to post accruals for this purchase order item (that is, the accrual object).

● Suspend accrualsWhen you suspend accruals, the system doesn't post any new accruals for this purchase order item (that is, the accrual object). The accrual balance is set to zero.

● Resume accrualsWhen you resume an accrual object, you can continue to post accruals.

NoteYou can utilize accrual amounts even if you have paused or suspended accruals.


Related Information

Release, Pause, and Suspend Accrual Objects

3.5.1.27.3 Customizing Settings For Accrual Item Types and Posting Schemas

For each accrual item type that performs accrual postings, you must assign at least one posting schema.

This process has slightly changed and some fields have been moved from the Define Accrual Item Types Customizing activity to the Assign Accrual Item Types to Journal Entry Types and Posting Schemas Customizing activity. In addition, they’ve been rearranged from a horizontal to a vertical layout on the relevant views.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item J58, 2VB



Additional Details

For each type of posting, you create a new line with the accrual item type in question and enter the type of posting in the ACE TType column and the corresponding posting schema in the Posting Schema column. For example, if you need an opening posting (IP), a periodic posting (PP), and a final posting (FP) for the COSTS accrual item type, you add three separate lines for this accrual item type. In each line, you assign the corresponding posting type and posting schema. If you only need periodic postings, you just create one line and enter PP in the ACE TType column.

You do this using the Assign Accrual Item Types to Journal Entry Types and Posting Schemas Customizing activity.

If you’re using the utilization and release process, make sure to select the Post Deltas checkbox. This is important as utilization and release postings are delta postings. This setting also ensures correct currency and exchange rate handling.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/458e946f6f7144eabdebb99d2ac8baf2.html

These settings replace the following fields that used to be in the Define Accrual Item Types Customizing activity:

● AccrPs column● Post Deltas checkbox● Opening Entry: Post Deltas checkbox● Period Posting: Post Deltas checkbox● Closing Entry: Post Deltas checkbox


There's nothing to do for you because those changes are automatically migrated.

Related Information

Define Accrual Item Types for Manual AccrualsAccrual Item Type Settings for Utilization and Release of Manual AccrualsAssign Posting Schema for Manual AccrualsPosting Schema Settings for Utilization and Release of Manual AccrualsDefine Accrual Item Types for Purchase Order AccrualsAccrual Item Type Settings for Utilization and Release of Purchase Order AccrualsAssign Posting Schema for Purchase Order AccrualsPosting Schema Settings for Utilization and Release of Purchase Order Accruals

3.5.1.27.4 Display Purchase Order Accruals

This app enables you to have a comprehensive overview of purchase order accruals. In this app, you can view all key information about purchase order accruals form being transferred to being posted at the end of periods. The information includes accrual lifecycle status, accrual amounts, review history, and so on. You can find this app in the App Finder.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2VB (Purchase Order Accruals)


https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/a0a07c970882469cb1365e271e69d01f.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/24df52745d384b2b92af66d811a6d371.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/ff49f873a0134120b509bb0bc9ace6a7.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/7527eb0f74cd4fdca15878776df6d7f5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/169073874fb9420394812c5a6fc48ecf.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/52f212255ebf43229488be33deed124a.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/13fefda7133c4fe9ad7dd8bca0f5444d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/e878ab7c4e75438b91027e25e7fee7cb.html



Related Information

Display Purchase Order Accruals

3.5.1.27.5 Review Purchase Order Accruals - For Cost Accountant

With this new app, you can review purchase order accruals and adjust revised costs in transaction currency. For purchase order accruals, you can choose to have accrual amounts reviewed before the system posts them. With this option, a reviewer can check the periodic planned costs that the system proposes, and adjust them if needed.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

Before you use the app, you must define thresholds for accrual amounts that require to be manually reviewed. To define the lower limit and the upper limit of a threshold, you must create a threshold variant that you can assign to company codes, item types, ledger groups, and currency types. When you create a threshold variant, you can specify values for the following fields:

● Upper Threshold Amount● Lower Threshold Amount● Threshold Currency


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/0e2846af374d4f8686cb70681fbfea40.html

Related Information

Review Purchase Order Accruals - For Cost Accountant

3.5.1.27.6 Review Purchase Order Accruals - My Inbox

This feature enables you to use the My Inbox app to review purchase order accruals and adjust accrual amounts. For purchase order accruals, you can choose to have accrual amounts reviewed and approved before the system posts them. A reviewer can then check the periodic planned costs that the system proposes and adjust them if needed.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2VB (2VB)



Additional Details

The system calculates periodic accrual amounts as follows:

Accrual amounts = Planned Costs - Actual Costs

Planned costs are proposed amounts that are calculated periodically over the lifetime of an item using an accrual method. Actual costs are based on the receipt value or the invoice value of received goods or services.

Related Information

Review Purchase Order Accruals - My Inbox


https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/d88f07a6b99f4cf08e8798fc640038af.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/488934a7dd5d4640a5631fc9dfb0bdd6.html

3.5.1.27.7 Manage Workflow for Purchase Order Accruals Review

With this feature you can configure workflows for reviewing purchase order accruals in the Review Purchase Order Accruals - My Inbox app. The app provides several options for determining the approver, such as the approval by the cost center responsible, but you can also assign specific users. If a workflow with one or more steps is activated and the configured start conditions are fulfilled, the approval process is initiated.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-GL-GL-POA


Related Information

Manage Workflows for Purchase Order Accruals Review

3.5.1.27.8 Schedule Accruals Jobs

This app enables you to schedule accruals jobs using the templates provided. For example, you can perform periodic posting runs and propose periodic accrual amounts.

Technical Details

Type New





Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/24220d973c4c4797a709b64c6092afda.html


Additional Details

You can use the scheduling options to carry out the following periodic accrual activities:

● Perform Periodic Posting Runs● Propose Period Amounts● Transfer Purchase Orders to Accrual Engine

The templates are available only when you've registered them in customizing view APJ_C_SCOPE . Follow the steps to register for the three templates:

1. Run tcode SM30.2. Enter APJ_C_SCOPE for Table/View, and click Maintain.3. Add the following new entries:

○ SAP_FIN_GL_ACE_POSTING_RUN○ SAP_FIN_GL_ACE_PROPOSAL_RUN○ SAP_FIN_GL_POAC_MMPO2ACE_TRANS

4. Save your changes.

Related Information

Schedule Accruals Jobs

3.5.1.27.9 Analyze Accrual Postings

With this feature you can display an overview of accrual postings. You can filter the postings by various criteria and navigate to a specific posting in related apps to investigate.

Technical Details

Type New




https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/fa741ebf9fe047a380747841465f98f9.html



Related Information

Analyze Accrual Postings

3.5.1.27.10 Legacy Data Transfer for Accruals

This feature enables you to move existing accruals data to the SAP S/4HANA Accrual Engine from an outside system or even from a manually maintained spreadsheet. You can choose to upload legacy data with a template provided. Note that legacy data transfer and upload are applicable to manual accruals only.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Legacy Data TransferUpload Legacy Data

3.5.1.27.11 Preprocessing Program for Archiving Accruals

You can execute the archiving preprocessing program for archiving accrual objects. This program sets an accrual object to status To Be Archived based on conditions that are predefined in the system.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/b7f0fda0ad0c4840a5a38462a5a9bb0d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/8f7dff36a5674bfaa0164f25e38aed89.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/635c87796da24197911b6a9f3fd4d76e.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item J58 (Accounting and Financial Close), 2VB (Purchase Order Accruals)



Additional Details

If the conditions are fulfilled, it also fills the Business Completion Date in the accrual object with the date when the accrual object is set to status To Be Archived. In addition, a generic check on the accrual balance is done by the Accrual Engine before you run the program. Make sure that the balance is zero before running this program. In other words, an accrual object can be set to status To Be Archived only when all accruals are finished.

Related Information

Archiving Accruals: Preprocessing Program

3.5.2 Asset Accounting

3.5.2.1 BAdI: Customer-Specific Change to Line Items in Asset Document

When posting documents, you can use the new Business Add-In (BAdI) Customer-Specific Change to Line Items in Asset Document (FAA_DOCLINES_CUSTOMER). This new BAdI replaces the previous BAdI Change of Line Items in Asset Document (BADI_FIAA_DOCLINES).

Technical Details

Type Changed


https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/ce87cf0485574ef4b6201ae0f01bd7f2.html


Scope Item 1GB; 1GF; 1IH; BFH; J62; 33F; 33G

Application Component Asset Accounting (FI-AA)


Additional Details

With the interface methods of the new BAdI FAA_DOCLINES_CUSTOMER, you can achieve the following:

● You can change the document, for example, by adding user-defined characteristics to the line items.● You can change the type of the document.● You can derive the line item schema of the document.● You can change the account determination for the line items to be posted.


None.


None.


If you have used the previous BAdI BADI_FIAA_DOCLINES until now, note the following: The system no longer calls existing implementations of the BAdI BADI_FIAA_DOCLINES.

Instead, implement the interface of the BAdI FAA_DOCLINES_CUSTOMER.


Finance


The new BAdI Customer-Specific Change to Line Items in Asset Document (FAA_DOCLINES_CUSTOMER) is available in Customizing for Asset Accounting in the following place:

Asset Accounting Transactions Enhancements Business Add-Ins for Enhancements Customer-Specific Change to Line Items in Asset Document


For more information, see the system documentation for the BAdI and the interface methods.

3.5.2.2 Execute/Undo Year-End Closing

Until now a transaction was available which you could use to define the settings for company codes and for the legacy data transfer. This transaction has been enhanced.

The tree structure with the company codes was enhanced with the corresponding ledgers and depreciation areas. The following applies for a ledger:

You can close a fiscal year from an accounting view for a ledger or for a depreciation area.

You can also reopen the fiscal year last closed for one or more depreciation areas.

Technical Details

Type Changed






Additional Details

Tree StructureThe tree structure on the left part of the screen shows the following objects:

● Up to this point: Company codes that are relevant for Asset Accounting● New: For each company code: Ledgers that are relevant for Asset Accounting. These are the representative

ledgers of an accounting principle. Extension ledgers, for example, are not displayed.You can see the corresponding depreciation areas in the details for a ledger.

Execute Year-End ClosingYou can execute the year-end closing by either using the SAP Easy Access menu, or by using the new activity in Customizing for Asset Accounting. You can find more detailed information about this below under “Effects on Customizing”.

Undo Year-End ClosingIf you have closed a fiscal year by mistake and still have to make adjustments, you can reopen the fiscal year last closed for one or more depreciation areas of a company code.


None.


None.


Transactions and programsThe previous transactions and programs as of release SAP S/4HANA 1909 are handled as follows:

Transaction/Program System Response

Transaction AJAB (program RAJABS00) - Year-End Closing Asset Accounting

Can still be called (for reasons of compatibility)

Transaction OAAR – Reset Year-End Closing Valuation Area Is redirected to transaction FAA_CMP - Make Company Code Settings


Finance

Transaction/Program System Response

Reset Transaction OAAQ - Year-End Closing for Company Code

Is redirected to transaction FAA_CMP - Make Company Code Settings

SAP Easy Access

So far there have been several menu entries for executing and undoing the year-end closing in the SAP Easy Access menu for Asset Accounting. These have been changed as follows:

Previous Menu Entries New Menu Entry

Accounting Financial Accounting Fixed Assets

Year-End Closing

● Execute [Transaction AJAB]

● Undo○ Company Code Complete [Transaction OAAQ]

○ Area [Transaction OAAR]

Accounting Financial Accounting Fixed Assets

Year-End Closing

● Execute/Undo [Transaction FAA_CMP]

Fiori Launchpad

If you use the SAP Fiori Launchpad, please note the following changes in the role of accountant:

Replacement of Job Template "Year-End Closing Asset Accounting”

The job template Year-End Closing Asset Accounting is being replaced as follows:

Previous app/

Previous job template Is replaced by

From the Schedule Asset Accounting Jobs app:

Job template Year-End Closing Asset Accounting

Execute/Undo Year-End Closing app

Replacement of the app "Undo Year-End Closing - For Asset Accounting” and renaming the tile

From now on, the previous tile Reset Year-End Closing - For Asset Accounting (from the application catalog SAP_FIN_BCG_AA_PERIODIC_PC) contains the Make Company Code Settings app with the function Reopen Last Fiscal Year. The tile has the title Year-End Closing Execute/Undo. The changes are as follows:

Previous content Is replaced by

App Reset Year-End Closing - For Asset Accounting

[Based on SAP GUI transaction OAAQ]

Execute/Undo Year-End Closing app, function Reopen Last Fiscal Year

[Based on SAP GUI transaction FAA_CMP]



Customizing until now

Until now, you made settings in the following places in Customizing for Asset Accounting:

● Preparations for Going Live Production Startup Define Settings for Company Code

● Asset Data Transfer Parameters for Data Transfer Define Transfer Date and Additional Parameters

Customizing changed

In Customizing for Asset Accounting, previously, there was the activity Reset Year-End Closing under Preparations for Going Live Tools . This has been changed as follows:

Previous Customizing Activity New Customizing Activity

Asset Accounting (New) Preparations for Going Live

Tools

● Reset Year-End Closing [transactions OAAR and OAAQ]

Asset Accounting (New) Preparations for Going Live

Tools

● Execute/Undo Year-End Closing [transaction FAA_CMP]


For more information, see:

● The documentation for the Customizing activities in the system● In the application documentation (product assistance) for Asset Accounting:

○ Year-End Closing○ Legacy Data Transfer

3.5.2.3 Schedule Asset Accounting Jobs

If you use the SAP Fiori Launchpad for the fixed asset accountant, please note the following:

In the schedule Fixed Asset Accounting Jobs app, the following job templates have been removed:

Asset Transactions, Annual Financial Statements, Fill Master Data for Segment Reporting

Technical Details

Type Changed


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/67e323b7117e4c91869c258933f47182/1909.000/en-US/e93fde531ed3424de10000000a174cb4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/67e323b7117e4c91869c258933f47182/1909.000/en-US/dc0bd253913e4608e10000000a174cb4.html





Additional Details

The job templates are not necessary for the following reasons:

No job template Reason for the removal

Asset Transactions It is replaced by the Asset Transactions app.

Year End Closing Is replaced by the app Execute/Undo Year-End Closing

Fill Master Data for Segment Reporting Is no longer required


For more information, see:

● In the application documentation (product assistance) for Asset Accounting under Asset Transactions:● Under Execute/Undo Year-End Closing [page 111]

3.5.2.4 "Journal Entry" Dimension in Asset Balances and Asset History Sheet

In the Asset Balances app and the Asset History Sheet app, the Journal Entry dimension is now available. When displaying a report for posted values, you can now display a list of asset transactions with the corresponding journal entries for each asset.

Technical Details

Type Changed


https://help.sap.com/viewer/67e323b7117e4c91869c258933f47182/1909.000/en-US/86eac507dc934dc6be58a6411f2801b4.html


Scope Item J62 (Asset Accounting)

Application Component FI-AA


Related Information

Asset BalancesAsset History Sheet

3.5.2.5 Asset Transactions and Depreciation Lists

The following feature is now available in the Asset Transactions app and the Depreciation Lists app: When navigating away from these apps, for example jumping to another app, and returning to the same app, you return at the same point from which you left. That is, when you navigate back into the app, you return to the same data displayed.

For example, let’s say you had set filter criteria to define data to display in a table, then navigated away from the app. When you navigate back into the app, you return to find the same table with the same filter criteria and the same data displayed.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item J62 (Asset Accounting)

Application Component FI-AA


Related Information

Asset TransactionsDepreciation Lists


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/67e323b7117e4c91869c258933f47182/1909.000/en-US/982e6a57bd390422e10000000a44147b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/67e323b7117e4c91869c258933f47182/1909.000/en-US/5fc76b5740800322e10000000a44147b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/67e323b7117e4c91869c258933f47182/1909.000/en-US/86eac507dc934dc6be58a6411f2801b4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/67e323b7117e4c91869c258933f47182/1909.000/en-US/a717a352bd1e4ddcbb964f4924daa539.html

3.5.2.6 Asset Accounting Overview

For improved user experience and performance, the Asset Accounting Overview app now has filters for fiscal year and fiscal year period.

The fiscal year and fiscal period filters only affect the data shown in the following cards:

● Asset Balances● Asset Balances - Chart View● Asset Depreciation Values● Assets Under Construction● Depreciation to Be Posted● Origin of Assets

The remaining cards continue to show data for the current fiscal period.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2QY (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Asset Accounting in Finance)

Application Component FI-FIO-AA


Related Information

Asset Accounting Overview

3.5.3 Revenue Accounting and Reporting

3.5.3.1 Optimized Contract Management

You can now use an optimized new version of the revenue accounting contract management.

A new version of revenue accounting contract management is introduced in parallel with the existing contract management. To distinguish between the two different versions, the existing contract management is now referred to as classic contract management.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/67e323b7117e4c91869c258933f47182/1909.000/en-US/043055e005494195b497705ff5513f82.html

The new contract management makes use of dedicated SAP S/4HANA capabilities such as FIORI. It also focuses on performance optimization as well as other specific features such as day-based contract modifications.

This requires some changes, yet the overall existing database table design and processes remain stable between the optimized and classic contract management.

Technical Details

Type New

Functioal Localization Not applicable

Application Component FI-RA



You can activate the new contract management for new contracts based on a contract category in Customizing under Revenue Accounting Revenue Accounting Contracts .

In the Customizing activity Define Contract Categories, you define the contract category.

In the Customizing activity Select Contract Management for Contract Categories, set the indicator Create Contracts with CM Instead of CM Classic for all contract categories that are to use the optimized contract management.

Related Information

Contract Management

3.5.4 Joint Venture Accounting

3.5.5 Joint Venture Accounting on Universal Journal

With this feature you can run Joint Venture Accounting (JVA) on the universal journal as the single source of truth for processing and reporting. The cash call and the month-end processing transactions are re-developed, spool output is refined, error reporting is improved, and drill down functionality is added. You can use the funding reimbursement process for inter-venture liablities. The reporting tools are redesigned and available as SAP Fiori apps.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f63dd39a28bb4b90adbf9e608aff58ea/1909.000/en-US/4020cd6e8f82478b92c1edb5d6cb2f4a.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3F7

Application Component CA-JVA-JVA



The business function JVA on ACDOCA must be activated if you want to use Joint Venture Accounting on universal journal.


The G/L splitter needs to be customized if you want to use Joint Venture Accounting on universal journal.

Related Information

Joint Venture Accounting (JVA)

3.5.6 Intercompany Matching and Reconciliation

The Intercompany Matching and Reconciliation (ICR) is introduced to speed up your intercompany reconciliation process from company close to corporate close. As a built-in solution in SAP S/4HANA, it matches transactions without any ETL (extract, transform, load) processes and reconciles your financial data in real time. By defining flexible matching and reconciliation rules, you can achieve high automation and continuous reconciliation. In addition, its in-app communication and workflow features eliminate the latencies very often seen in dealing with intercompany discrepancies, and at the same time, improves visibility and transparency of your reconciliation process.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/f049a59301a94f1c9bb60ca8394db217/1909.000/en-US/e262d0531d8b4208e10000000a174cb4.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 40Y (Intercompany Reconciliation Process)

Application Component FIN-CS-ICR


Additional Details

The solution comes with the following key features:

● Flexible matching and reconciliation rule definition● High visibility on your reconciliation process● User-friendly Fiori apps to manage your matching assignments on aggregation or line item level● In-app communication and workflow● Possibility to enable automatic discrepancy adjustment● Real-time reconciliation● High performance on matching and reconciliation● Supports user-defined organizational dimensions for matching and reconciliation

This is a video showing how to use the ICR solution, from running document matching, checking matching results, making and approving adjustment postings, to viewing reconciliation reports and drilling through to their matching items and original documents (English only): Video Link.


You need to create business roles in your front-end system by referencing the standard role General Ledger Accountant - Intercompany (SAP_BR_RECON_ACCOUNTANT) that contains all the business catalogs for Intercompany Matching and Reconciliation. Then assign the created business roles to the relevant users according to their job responsibilities. Additionally, you need to set up the necessary authorizations for users in the back-end systems, for example, by using the transaction code PFCG.


You can make the necessary customizing settings in Customizing for Intercompany Matching and Reconciliation under SAP S/4HANA for Group Reporting or under Financial Accounting General Ledger Accounting Periodic Processing Check/Count .


Finance

https://sapvideoa35699dc5.hana.ondemand.com/?entry_id=1_93ubpbrv

Product Assistance Links

The Intercompany Matching and Reconciliation product documentation is located in both of the following structures at https://help.sap.com//s4hana_op_1909 with the direct link Intercompany Matching and Reconciliation (New):

● Finance Accounting and Financial Close General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) Periodic ProcessingClosing Operations

● Finance Accounting and Financial Close Group Reporting Consolidation

3.5.7 Group Reporting

3.5.7.1 Consolidation Reporting Logic

The consolidation reporting logic is renovated to support both legal and management consolidation while providing high flexibility in re-organizations. It combines two different views of consolidated data: Group consolidation view and hierarchy consolidation view.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1SG (Group Reporting - Financial Consolidation)

Application Component FIN-CS


Additional Details

In the Group Consolidation View, the consolidation group is a flat list of the assigned consolidation units with group-dependent attributes such as consolidation method, acquisition date, and divestiture date.

The Hierarchy Consolidation View is based on the hierarchies of consolidation units, profit centers, and segments that are maintained in the Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies app.

Both views retrieve the same set of consolidated data but based on different dimensions and with a specific reporting logic described below. When generating a report for consolidated data, by specifying both consolidation group and any relevant hierarchies, you can get a combined view.


https://help.sap.com//s4hana_op_1909

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/a8172f85383947bd8538bf778e771874.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/a8172f85383947bd8538bf778e771874.html

With the new reporting logic introduced, two new analytical report apps are made available: Group Data Analysis (New) and Group Data Analysis - With Reporting Rules (New). You use these reports to display a group consolidation view, a hierarchy consolidation view, or a combined view by specifying the corresponding values in the report Prompts.

In addition, the Display Group Journal Entries - With Reporting Logic app is also introduced to provide drill-through capability from the above reports to group journal entries at line item level.

For more information about report prompts and the derivation logic for consolidation groups, hierarchy members, and elimination members in the respective views, see Reporting Logic (New).

The following apps can be used using the new group reporting logic:

● Manage Consolidation Group Structure - Group View● Manage Consolidation Group Structure - Unit View● Import Consolidation Master Data for FS items, group structure, and consolidation units.● Group Data Analysis● Group Data Analysis - With Reporting Rules● Display Group Journal Entries - With Reporting Logic

Preparation for Consolidation Group ChangesWith the new reporting logic, the Preparation for Consolidation Group Changes (PCC) task in the Consolidation Monitor is enhanced to increase traceability and eliminate data replication.

Additional Details:

The PCC postings (at posting levels 02, 12, and 22) are adjusted as follows:

● Revoke data for the periods when the consolidation unit is not yet first consolidated (record type A)● Revoke data for the periods when the consolidation unit is already divested (record type D)● Revoke data when the consolidation unit is consolidated using the equity consolidation method (record

type E)● Other existing adjustments remain posted with record type 0.

In addition, the following new scenarios are supported:

● First consolidation at end of period● Divestiture at beginning of period

With this change, the Integration of Data into Consolidation Group task is no longer needed and has been removed from the Consolidation Monitor.

In addition to the PCC enhancements, the Customizing activity Define Reclassification Methods now combines Accounting Technique and Start/End Period settings to restrict the trigger data to the correct period, for example, first consolidation at end of period or divestiture at beginning of period.

NoteThe changes described above are only applicable if you have an initial release SAP S/4HANA 1909. If you have an initial release earlier than 1909, you are not affected unless you have contacted SAP to activate the new reporting logic.


Finance

Related Information

Group Data Analysis (New)Group Data Analysis - With Reporting Rules (New)Group Data Analysis - With Reporting Rules (New)Reporting Logic (New)Import Consolidation Master Data (New)Manage Consolidation Group Structure - Group View (New)Manage Consolidation Group Structure - Unit View (New)

3.5.7.2 Group Structure Definition

The Manage Consolidation Group Structure apps are introduced for you to assign consolidation units to consolidation groups and make consolidation-related settings for these assignments, such as the period of the first consolidation, the period of the divestiture, and the consolidation method.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

With the new apps, you maintain consolidation groups as plain lists of consolidation units with group-dependent attributes. This facilitates the data analysis from the group consolidation view as described in the help documentation Reporting Logic (New).

NoteThe new group structure maintenance apps are only applicable if you have an initial release SAP S/4HANA 1909. If you are upgrading from an earlier release, use the Consolidation Group Hierarchy - Display & Change and Accounting Method Assignment - Display & Change apps instead or contact SAP to activate the new reporting logic.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/b00975f83e1c46df9b15f98de88078d5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/a0d3867e9351483e9349a4547331dc7c.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/a0d3867e9351483e9349a4547331dc7c.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/86b7e4024e4b4264891ce4d377ca075c.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/6fcb7e5bf1334c0097d03c9b3d50badb.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/ea268f44d2ee4858bba552dcb49f484b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/bb6e2212b60441d09d893e9a71ceaf7f.html

Related Information

Manage Consolidation Group Structure - Group View (New)Manage Consolidation Group Structure - Unit View (New)

3.5.7.3 From Year for New Group Reporting Logic

The From Year for New Group Report Logic is now enabled in the Check Global System Settings Customizing activity.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

The From Year for New Group Reporting Logic is the starting year for using the new group reporting logic in SAP S/4HANA. The new group reporting logic includes a set of features (for example, consolidation group structure manager, group view, hierarchy views, and enhanced group dependent postings) to support legal and management consolidation while providing high flexibility in reorganizations. The new group reporting logic is activated and the starting year is set to 1001 for customers with an initial release of SAP S/4HANA 1909 or higher.

NoteIf you have an initial release earlier than SAP S/4HANA 1909, contact SAP to activate the new reporting logic. Note that once activated, it is not possible to deactivate the new group reporting logic.

Related Information

Reporting Logic (New)


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/ea268f44d2ee4858bba552dcb49f484b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/bb6e2212b60441d09d893e9a71ceaf7f.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/86b7e4024e4b4264891ce4d377ca075c.html

3.5.7.4 Import Consolidation Master Data

The Import Consolidation Master Data app allows you to import consolidation-related master data entries for master data types, such as consolidation group structure, financial statement items, and consolidation units into the consolidation system.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

With this new app, you can download a template file or a file with existing master data, enter or change the master data, and upload the completed file back to the app. You can then import the validated master data into the database.

To import other master data types, such as account number, chart of accounts, cost center, functional area, profit center, segment for segmental reporting, and transaction type, you should continue using the Import Master Data for Consolidation Fields app.

NoteThe consolidation group structure import function is only available if you have the New Group Reporting Logic activated in the Check Global System Settings Customizing activity. This logic is activated by default if you have an initial release SAP S/4HANA 1909 or higher. The import function for all other master data types is applicable to all customers. Contact SAP to activate the new reporting logic.

Related Information

Import Consolidation Master Data (New)


https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/6fcb7e5bf1334c0097d03c9b3d50badb.html

3.5.7.5 Master Data Hierarchies

You can maintain hierarchies for the relevant master data types so that you can customize your report layout or use the hierarchies in the selection definition and the rule definition. The following additional master data types are now enabled:

● Consolidation posting level● Consolidation document type● Consolidation subitem

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Define Hierarchies

3.5.7.6 Financial Statement Item Maintenance

The Define FS Items app allows you to display and maintain financial statement (FS) items. To upload, download, and import FS items into the system, use the Import Consolidation Master Data app. With this release, new FS item attributes are also made available.

Technical Details

Type New



Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/cc2da247f6d5406b8b7c27bddbf723fa.html




Additional Details

After creating or updating any FS items, you may need to perform the following activities:

● Include the new FS items in any relevant FS item hierarchies or reporting item hierarchies using the Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies app. See the SAP help topic Define Hierarchies for details.

● Map the new FS items with general ledger accounts using the Map FS Items with G/L Accounts app.● Update all FS item-related configuration settings as necessary, such as:

○ Selected FS items for automatic posting (annual net income and deferred taxes), currency translation methods, and reclassification methods in the respective Customizing activities

○ FS items to be carried forward or not, validation rules, selections, and reporting rules using the respective app on the SAP Fiori launchpad

You can also assign additional financial statement (FS) item attributes. In addition to the existing selection attributes, elimination and currency translation, SAP delivers the following new selection attributes:

● FS Item Role● Scope● Data Collection● Cash Flow● Other Selection Attribute

A FS item selection attribute is a classification that you assign to FS items so that all FS items that share the same attribute value can be selected in order to be treated in the same way, for example, in consolidation tasks.

SAP also delivers the following new target attributes:

● Elimination Target● Non-Controlling Target● Planning Target

FS item target attributes are designed to derive an FS item based on another FS item for specific purposes. This may be used, for example, for automatic postings in reclassification rules. You assign target attributes for FS items and then specify the target attributes in the reclassification rules.

Related Information

FS Item AttributesDefine HierarchiesMap FS Items with G/L Accounts


https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/bb5a08412bf145e9a950bee1bf4c6c6b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/cc2da247f6d5406b8b7c27bddbf723fa.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/7a771b681e2741e387680f274f6fb5f8.html

3.5.7.7 Currency Translation Settings

With this release, a new app and multiple Customizing activities are made available for customizing currency translation settings and configuration.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

The new Currency Exchange Rates Fiori app replaces the Maintain Exchange Rates Web GUI app with a modern look and feel. It enables you to maintain exchange rates for combinations of exchange rate type, source and target currency, and effective period.

3.5.7.8 Activity-Based Consolidation of Investments

Consolidation of investments (C/I) enables you to eliminate investment relationships that exist between consolidation units in a consolidation group.

Technical Details

Type New





Finance


Additional Details

A parent company's investments are eliminated against the stockholders' equity of a subsidiary. During the time span of this investment relationship, different activities can occur that require elimination and adjustments in consolidation. The following activities are supported by the consolidation of investments:

● First consolidation● Subsequent consolidation● Step acquisition● Capital increase and decrease● Partial and total divestiture

With this release, new Customizing activities for making settings related to C/I are made available:

● Node: Consolidation of Investments● Node: Preparation of Consolidation Group Changes

Related Information

Consolidation of Investments (Activity-Based)Consolidation of InvestmentsConsolidation of Investments (Rule-Based)

3.5.7.9 Validation Settings

Selections, validation rules, and methods can be exported between systems through a spreadsheet.

Technical Details

Type Changed





https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/2f07a213a53f425eada2e096f6c6f1b0.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/9453a9b45c1a41f08f16924f20e6806c.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/5ce06895106a463ca073fddae0f7a473.html


Additional Details

All validation settings (selections, rules, and methods) can now be imported/exported by using the Import/Export Validation Settings app. They can all be activated en masse by using Schedule Mass Activation Jobs - Rules, Methods, and Selections.

In addition, the following changes are made to the validation-related apps:

● Entering leading zeroes is no longer needed for the relevant fields when defining validation rules using the Like and Not Like operators. For example, you can now enter 1* to search for all values starting with 1, alphanumeric or purely numeric. In prior releases, you need to add all necessary leading zeroes before your keyword followed by a wildcard (*) to include purely numeric values. You may need to revisit and update the rules that were defined with leading zeroes in prior releases.

● Simulation Run is now supported when you run validation tasks directly through the Manage Data Validation Tasks apps. Previously, it was only possible by running tasks in Data Monitor or Consolidation Monitor with the Test with Original List option

Related Information


3.5.7.10 Define Selections

In the prior release, selections were maintained using the Define Selections customizing activity. Starting from this release, you can define selections using the Define Selections Fiori app with enhanced functionalities and more user-friendly interfaces. All selections you defined in prior releases have been migrated to this app during your system upgrade. The customizing activity is therefore removed.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Finance



https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/efad76acb7b54ca4a3d6dd282c43bc06.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/efad76acb7b54ca4a3d6dd282c43bc06.html



Additional Details

A selection groups a range of consolidation master data, typically the financial statement (FS) items, by using various filter criteria. You can use value ranges, attributes, or hierarchy nodes for individual master data to define selections.

The defined selections can then be reused in consolidation-related settings, such as validation rules, reclassification methods, currency translation (CT) methods, and breakdown categories. The app also provides the feature to check the where-used list for each selection.

Related Information

Define Selections

3.5.7.11 Schedule Jobs for Consolidation Tasks

The job scheduling app is introduced to support various data monitor and consolidation monitor tasks .

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You can schedule an immediate job or recurring jobs for the following tasks, which are also available in Data Monitor or Consolidation Monitor:


https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/5f5dbc9df2704632bc3adcda0f196482.html

● Balance carryforward● Calculation of net income● Currency translation● Preparation for consolidation group changes● Reclassification● Validation of universal journals● Validation of reported data● Validation of standardized data● Validation of consolidated data

Related Information

Schedule Jobs for Consolidation Tasks

3.5.7.12 Task Logs

Three validation task categories are now supported in the Task Logs app:

● Reported Data Validation● Standardized Data Validation● Consolidated Data Validation

By choosing each validation task log, you navigate to the validation result page, which contains the overall validation result, calculated left-handed and right-handed values based on each relevant validation rule, tolerance, difference, and drill-down capabilities to the original accounting documents or group journal entries.

Technical Details

Type Changed






Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/f126fae4e28c46b6a9dab2e0ce8ed0e9.html

Related Information

Task Logs

3.5.7.13 CDS Views for Group Reporting

The following CDS (Core Data Services) views for Group Reporting have now been released. This CDS view provides access to the consolidated data for both statutory and management consolidation reporting.

● I_MatrixConsolidationReportC (Group Data Analysis Cube)● I_MatrixConsolidationRptEnhcdC (Rule-Based Group Data Analysis Cube)

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

With the Group Data Analysis Cube CDS view, you can create group reports for consolidation groups, such as consolidated balance sheets and consolidated P&L statements based on organizational units such as profit centers, segments, and companies, with the data provided by this CDS view.

With the Rule-Based Group Data Analysis Cube CDS view, you can create rule-based group reports for consolidation groups, such as cash flow statements based on organizational units such as profit centers, segments, and companies, with the data provided by this CDS view.

You can look at all released CDS views and their fields by using the View Browser app. You can design your own queries based on these released CDS views by using the Custom Analytical Queries app.

Related Information

Group Data Analysis CubeRule-Based Group Data Analysis Cube


https://help.sap.com/viewer/4ebf1502064b406c964b0911adfb3f01/1909.000/en-US/a4ef951a02cc44f297846031299a31a0.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/06cbdbe8ccbc437cb1c67cb3521c7278.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/14e876823f684d65980c848c215461cf.html

3.5.7.14 APIs for Group Reporting

The Transaction Data for Group Reporting service enables you to read transaction data in SAP S/4HANA Finance for group reporting. You can open this service to build your own application using the transaction data in group reporting.

The Master Data for Group Reporting service enables you to read SAP S/4HANA Finance for group reporting master data, the master data attributes, and hierarchy definitions through an API call. You can open this service to build your own application using the group reporting master data.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2U6 (Group Reporting - Data from External Systems)



See also

For more information about APIs for SAP S/4HANA, see the SAP API Business Hub https://api.sap.com/ .

3.5.8 Central Finance

3.5.8.1 Replication of Material Cost Estimates

This feature enables you to replicate material cost estimates from source system(s) to the Central Finance system. For a mixed costing, the material cost estimates are replicated together with the relevant procurement alternatives.


Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Fapi.sap.com%2F

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-CF (Central Finance)



You need to make settings for cost estimate replication in the Customizing of Central Finance (transaction: CFINIMG) under Central Finance: Target System Settings Replication Settings for Cost Estimates Define Rule for Cost Estimate Replication .

Related Information

Material Cost Estimates Replication

3.5.8.2 Replication of Activity Rates

This feature enables you to replicate activity rates from source system(s) to the Central Finance system. If a primary cost component split exists for a certain activity rate, the activity rate is replicated together with the cost component split data.

Technical Details

Type New





https://help.sap.com/viewer/26c2d5e366bc44c1a98f2a9212a0c49d/1909.000/en-US/7d9a3a45941d497a875735de608f362e.html


Related Information

Activity Rates Replication

3.5.8.3 Third-Party System Interface: Replication of Clearing Information

This feature enables you to transfer clearing information via the third-party system interface of Central Finance. Together with the payments, also the clearing information is transferred. A new staging table on the SAP LT Replication Server is added to include the clearing information and the connection between payments and open invoice items. In the Central Finance system, a new clearing entry is posted.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

The following processes are supported for replicating clearing information via the third-party system interface:

● Complete clearing of one invoice with one payment● Clearing of one invoice by down payment● Partial clearing of one invoice by partial payment● Clearing several invoices by payment● Replicating and updating clearing information for residual items● Clearing by credit memo● Clearing of several invoices by one payment● Update of withholding tax from original invoice


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/26c2d5e366bc44c1a98f2a9212a0c49d/1909.000/en-US/e8c48fcedf09428693a30689876afb74.html

● Reverse payment and reset clearing

In the third-party system interface the clearing information is stored in the CLRITM clearing item table and the CLEARING_DATA and INVOICE_REFERENCE fields. The clearing function is only triggered when both the CLRITM clearing item table and the CLEARING_DATA field on header level are filled. For partial payments, the INVOICE_REFERENCE and INVOICE_REFERENCE_ITEM fields must be filled with the journal entry number and the line item number of the invoice for which partial payments were made. The fields are available on the CREDITM structure for supplier invoices and the DEBITM structure for customer invoices or payments.

The graphic below shows the architecture of the third-party system interface including the staging tables relevant for clearing:

Related Information

Replicating Clearing Information Using the Third-Party System InterfaceInstalling Financial Data Structures on SAP LT Replication Server

3.5.8.4 Third-Party System Interface: Replication of CO-PA Characteristics

In SAP S/4HANA you perform Profitability Analysis (CO-PA) in the Universal Journal using criteria based on which you analyze your operating results and perform sales and profit planning. A combination of values for these criteria in an Operating Concern is called a profitability segment. Examples for such criteria can be product, billing type (such as invoice), customer, sales organization.

This feature enables you to transfer such criteria via the third-party system interface in Central Finance as name-value pairs.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/26c2d5e366bc44c1a98f2a9212a0c49d/1909.000/en-US/8667763eb5ca460594e1a32396c54fa6.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/26c2d5e366bc44c1a98f2a9212a0c49d/1909.000/en-US/f55c9262196541228b1e4972cbf67571.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/f813d254fb26c50ae10000000a441470.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/523b8a55559ad007e10000000a44538d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/dc07ad531e332f56e10000000a4450e5.html

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

Via the third-party system interface of Central Finance, you can transfer journal entries into the Central Finance system, such as invoices or credit memos which contain data representing a profitability segment and are called Characteristics in SAP S/4HANA.

When such a journal entry is posted into the Central Finance system, a profitability segment is generated (PAOBJNR in ACDOCA table). The profitability segment number (PAOBJNR) as well as values for all relevant characteristics are written into the ACDOCA table.

The replication of CO-PA data is integrated into existing message handling with SAP AIF. The values for the CO-PA characteristics are mapped according the defined values in the key and value mapping.

The third-party system interface has been enhanced with an additional structure and fields for the profitability segment data. It is added as a new staging table on the SAP LT Replication Server as you can see in the graphic below which shows the architecture of the third-party system interface in Central Finance.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/65fdc254d2589d03e10000000a44176d.html

Related Information

Replicating CO-PA Characteristics Using the Third-Party System InterfaceInstalling Financial Data Structures on SAP LT Replication ServerProfitability Analysis (CO-PA)Universal JournalIntroduction to Data Mapping

3.5.8.5 Third-Party System Interface: Group Currency

In SAP S/4HANA journal entries can be posted in group currency which enables reporting in group currency.

With this feature journal entries containing group currency information and amounts in group currency can be replicated via the third-party system interface of Central Finance.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

In the third-party system interface the staging tables and fields containing the financial accounting data have been enhanced to enable the replication of group currency information and amounts. The SAP note referenced in Installing Financial Data Structures on SAP LT Replication Server has an excel list attached to which you can refer for the structure and fields relating to the group currency.


You have defined the group currency for the respective ledger in Customizing of Financial Accounting under Financial Accounting Global Settings Ledgers Ledger Define Settings for Ledgers and Currency

Types .


https://help.sap.com/viewer/26c2d5e366bc44c1a98f2a9212a0c49d/1909.000/en-US/d3b5d65648924c239061d26b7f408231.html


https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/f813d254fb26c50ae10000000a441470.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/523b8a55559ad007e10000000a44538d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/26c2d5e366bc44c1a98f2a9212a0c49d/1909.000/en-US/11a8355871504442e10000000a4450e5.html


Related Information

Currencies Managed in Parallel in the Universal JournalInstalling Financial Data Structures on SAP LT Replication Server

3.5.8.6 Initial Load Optimizations

The feature enables you to benefit from the following improvements to the initial load:

● Balance load - take profit center information or trading partner information into account for Classic G/L● Take document splitting information into account● Different fiscal year variant for non-leading ledger

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component FI-CF


Additional Details

● Balance load - use profit center ledger or consolidation ledger (trading partner information) for Classic G/LIf your source system operates on classic G/L you can define an alternative ledger from which balances are read during the extraction step of the initial load instead of ledger GLT0. For each company code and range of accounts you can specify either ledger 8A for profit center information (table GLPCT) or ledger 09 for trading partner information (table GLT3). As these ledgers are not compatible, you can choose only one. You make these settings in the IMG activity Specify Alternative Ledger for Balance Load for Classic G/L in your source system.

● Take document splitting information into accountDocument splitting information is now replicated in the initial load of documents and open items, in addition to being replicated as part of ongoing replication.

● Different fiscal year variant for non-leading ledgerIf you want to replicate data to your Central Finance system and the leading ledger has a different fiscal year variant than the non-leading ledger, it is necessary to ensure that the initial load can load the balances into the correct periods. To enable this, you can install two SAP Notes (2764810 and 2764851 ) into


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/651d8af3ea974ad1a4d74449122c620e/1909.000/en-US/0d51d7531a4d424de10000000a174cb4.html




your source system. These notes enable the system to align the different fiscal year variants of the leading and non-leading ledgers, ensuring all relevant data is replicated and assigned to the correct periods in the Central Finance system.The only restriction is that the periods of both ledgers must match, for example, they must both start on the same day of the month.

3.5.8.7 Advanced Compliance Reporting: Country/Region-Specific Reports

With this feature you can use a number of country/region-specific reports in advanced compliance reporting that are supported for Central Finance.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-CF


Additional Details

For a complete list of the supported reports, see the documentation linked below.

Related Information

Advanced Compliance Reporting: Country/Region-Specific Reports Supported in Central Finance

3.5.8.8 Replicating Project Data from SAP S/4HANA Cloud

This feature enables you to transfer in real time project master data, such as project definitions and WBS elements, as well as changes to those master data from a SAP S/4HANA Cloud source system to the Central Finance (SAP S/4HANA on-premise) system in a Central Finance scenario. FI documents (journal entries) and


https://help.sap.com/viewer/26c2d5e366bc44c1a98f2a9212a0c49d/1909.000/en-US/3c0686e8948844408d0e97e79d8bbb18.html

CO documents with the account assignment to a WBS element are also replicated to the Central Finance system, where you can perform a centralized project reporting on costs and revenues posted to WBS elements.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3W1, 1W4, 1NT in SAP S/4HANA Cloud



Additional Details

You are using a Central Finance scenario, where you are creating and editing projects in a SAP S/4HANA Cloud source system and want to do the project reporting in the Central Finance system.

The WBS elements are maintained as part of a project in your source system. To allow the reporting in the Central Finance system, the project definition and WBS elements for projects created in a source system are replicated in real time to the Central Finance system. Also changes to project definitions or WBS elements are replicated.

For the replication of project data SOAP and the Cloud Connector is used.

Constraints

● Reposting projects with user changes in SAP AIF is not supported.● You edit or change the projects in the SAP S/4HANA Cloud source system. You cannot edit or change them

in the Central Finance system.● Once a project is released in the source system and thus replicated to the Central Finance system, you

cannot delete WBS elements anymore.● Once the projects are replicated to the Central Finance system, the IDs can no longer be changed, neither

in the SAP S/4HANA Cloud source system, nor in the Central Finance system.● The WBS project structure only is replicated. Networks are not replicated.


Finance


After you have set up the integration scenario 3W1 in the SAP S/4HANA Cloud source system and configured the related Application Link Enabling (ALE) settings in the Central Finance (SAP S/4HANA on-premise) system, you can use this feature.

Related Information

● Central Finance● Replicating Project Data from SAP S/4HANA Cloud to Central Finance

3.5.8.9 Central Finance Operations Monitor with Focused Run

In a Central Finance scenario in a typical set-up, multiple source systems are connected to one SAP System Landscape Transformation Replication Server (SAP SLT Replication Server) which in turn is connected to one Central Finance system. In this scenario when operating Central Finance, you can monitor the replication processes in SAP SLT, that is, do the system monitoring by using SAP SLT.

This feature enables you to use Focused Run (F-Run) for performing the SLT monitoring.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

Focused Run addresses customers and partners with advanced needs in monitoring larger system landscapes. F-Run has a dashboard-based visualization, for example with systems.

For more details on using F-Run to monitor SAP SLT replications, see Focused Run - SAP Landscape Transformation Replication Server (SLT) .


https://help.sap.com/viewer/26c2d5e366bc44c1a98f2a9212a0c49d/1909.000/en-US/9354c0540cf5ef05e10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/6b39bd1d0e5e4099a5b65d835c29c696/LATEST/en-US/5738a4a74e634cc69eadf4700c83cc5c.html

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Fsupport.sap.com%2Fen%2Falm%2Ffocused-solutions%2Ffocused-run-expert-portal%2Fintegration-cloud-monitoring%2Fsap-slt.html

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Fsupport.sap.com%2Fen%2Falm%2Ffocused-solutions%2Ffocused-run-expert-portal%2Fintegration-cloud-monitoring%2Fsap-slt.html

3.5.9 Advanced Compliance Reporting

3.5.9.1 Advanced Compliance Reporting

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1J2 (Advance Compliance Reporting)

Application Component Run Compliance Reports app: FI-LOC-SRF-RUN

Define Compliance Reports app: FI-LOC-SRF-DEF


Additional Details

The following features are available for Advanced Compliance Reports app:

● Due Date Adjustments for Reporting PeriodsIf the reporting period due date falls on a non-working day, you can adjust the due date based on the laws defined by your country. You can select the relevant factory calendar, and then choose one of the below options, based on your legal requirements:○ Next Working Day○ Previous Working Day○ Nearest Working Day (Prepone – Only If Equidistant)○ Nearest Working Day (Postpone - Only if Equidistant)

● Report Submission at Different Organizational Unit LevelsFor your business operations, if required, you can submit compliance reports at different organizational units levels. In advanced compliance reporting, you can achieve this by configuring optional organizational units for your report category.

Related Information

Advanced Compliance Reporting


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cc1da1e1e364fadb9b1af653a9597d2/1909.000/en-US/4975ec570b01f032e10000000a441470.html

3.6 Treasury Management

3.6.1 Cash and Liquidity Management

3.6.1.1 Migrate House Bank Accounts

You can now use the Start and Monitor Data Migration activity to migrate house bank accounts.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component FIN-FSCM-CLM-BAM


Additional Details

You can find the Customizing activity Start and Monitor Data Migration in Customizing under Conversion to SAP S/4HANA Data Migration .

For more information about how to migrate house bank accounts, see the Implementation Guide Migration of House Bank Accounts. You can find it in Customizing under Conversion to SAP S/4HANA Data MigrationDocumentation of Data Migration .

3.6.1.2 Bank Relationship Overview

With this app, you can access key information about bank relationship management and gain insights into current trends. The app provides a central source of information for recent payments, bank profiles, bank fees, and bank account statuses.


Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item J77 (Advanced Bank Account Management)



Related Information

Bank Relationship Overview

3.6.1.3 Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Bank Accounts

With this app, you can create and edit bank account group hierarchies and their validity timeframes. You can also quickly create hierarchies based on existing hierarchies in case of structure changes or changing reporting needs. Additionally, you can easily expand hierarchies by adding levels or importing nodes from other hierarchies.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

Starting from this release, you use the Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Bank Accounts app to define bank account group hierarchies. Bank account groups that are defined in the Manage Bank Accounts - Bank


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/f9de3636e30747d98eac6d7fb3ee31ef.html

Hierarchy View app can only be displayed. For more information on how to managing the bank account group hierarchies, see Managing Bank Account Group Hierarchies.

Consequently, in the Cash Flow Analyzer app, you can no longer use the old bank account groups as the display hierarchy. Instead, you can choose the new bank account group hierarchies to display the report. For more information, see Cash Flow Analyzer.


If you have defined bank account groups in the Manage Bank Accounts - Bank Hierarchy View app in earlier releases, you can migrate the bank account groups or nodes of the bank account groups to this app by using the import function. For more information, see Managing Bank Account Group Hierarchies.

Related Information

Managing Bank Account Group HierarchiesManage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Bank Accounts

3.6.1.4 Review Bank Accounts

Due to design changes, specifying a reviewer for bank account reviews or designating the bank account contact persons as reviewers is no longer supported. After a review is initiated, all the users that have the authorization to change the relevant bank accounts receive the review requests and are able to perform the review. In addition to the notification from the SAP Fiori launchpad, reviewers also receive an email notification.

Technical Details

Type Changed






https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/885784bd31994863879f4cf1ba5a1fe7.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/cd6705281eef4230b81ef5a7b1ec54ee.html



https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/44ba05bde7044633bbf5c5cfe6eb649e.html


With this change, only users who are assigned with the authorization activity 31 Confirm of authorization object F_CLM_BAM are able to receive and process bank account review requests. Please assign proper authorization to reviewers.

Related Information

Reviewing Bank Accounts

3.6.1.5 CDS View for Cash and Liquidity Management

With this release, a CDS (Core Data Services) view has been released. The view makes it possible to read information about banks, house banks, bank accounts, and house bank accounts.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BFA (Basic Bank Account Management), J77 (Advanced Bank Account Management)



Additional Details

The CDS view name is I_HouseBankAccountLinkage (House Bank Account Linkage).

You can look at all released CDS views and their fields in detail by using the View Browser app.

NoteYou need to have the Analytics Specialist role (SAP_BR_ANALYTICS_SPECIALIST) assigned to you.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/1f0e6c4cbd334dfa96f28c852521bc3b.html

For more information about the CDS views available, see the product assistance at http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909.000 under Cross Components The Virtual Data Model in SAP S/4HANA Cloud CDS Views CDS Views for Finance CDS Views for Treasury Management .

Related Information

View Browser

3.6.1.6 Situation Handling for the Dual Control Mode

If you use the dual control mode to manage bank accounts, you can now configure a situation type to inform a specific group of users about when bank account revisions are pending activation for a certain number of days.

Technical Details

Type New






To use this feature, configure the settings that are described in Situation Template: Bank Account Revisions to Be Activated.

3.6.1.7 Situation Handling for House Bank Account Check

You can now configure a situation type to inform a specific group of users to check the house bank account setting in payment configuration after the relevant bank account is closed.




https://help.sap.com/viewer/6b356c79dea443c4bbeeaf0865e04207/1909.000/en-US/0bde695751505c08e10000000a441470.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/2253aaa80ffa4c72b484b994ee67358a.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/2253aaa80ffa4c72b484b994ee67358a.html

Technical Details

Type New






Before using this situation template, you must first define the notification recipients. You can also customize the template by modifying the default settings.

After receiving the notification, configuration experts can then check the relevant house bank account in the Set Up Bank Determination for Payment Transactions Customizing activity and decide whether to keep or remove the setting for this house bank account.

You can find this Customizing activity in Customizing under Financial Accounting (New) Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Business Transactions Outgoing Payments Automatic Outgoing Payments Payment Method/Bank Selection for Payment Program .

Related Information

Situation Template: Check House Bank Account in Payment Configuration

3.6.1.8 Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Liquidity Items

You can now use the Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Liquidity Items app to define and manage liquidity item hierarchies for use in the Cash Flow Analyzer app as well as the Liquidity Planning feature on SAP Analytics Cloud.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/4f5b71d7046248c0b36766593f8a7ac3.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item J78 (Advanced Cash Operations)

Application Component FIN-FSCM-CLM-COP



If you have defined liquidity item hierarchies in the Define Liquidity Item Hierarchies Customizing activity in earlier releases, please migrate the legacy liquidity item hierarchies to the successor app Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Liquidity Items by using the Import Hierarchy function. For more information about how to migrate legacy hierarchies, see Managing Liquidity Item Hierarchies

The Liquidity Planning feature based on SAP Analysis for Microsoft Office still uses the liquidity item hierarchies that are defined in the transaction M_LQH.


The Customizing activity Define Liquidity Item Hierarchies has been removed. You can still access the program using the M_LQH transaction code.

Related Information

Managing Liquidity Item HierarchiesManage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Liquidity Items

3.6.1.9 Liquidity Planning with SAP Analytics Cloud

You can plan your future liquidity using the liquidity planning feature of SAP Analytics Cloud. After setting up the connection between SAP S/4HANA and SAP Analytics Cloud, you can develop liquidity plans in SAP Analytics Cloud based on the integrated data sources from SAP S/4HANA.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/fbb589ce1f3d40e4913aa45c2aa931e1.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/fbb589ce1f3d40e4913aa45c2aa931e1.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/e8153e9f3c044856a1f990a550afa050.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3L5 (Liquidity Planning)




For more information about how to set up the feature, see the documents at https://rapid.sap.com/bp/scopeitems/3L5 and https://rapid.sap.com/bp/scopeitems/3Y0 .

Find general information about SAP Analytics Cloud, see https://www.sapanalytics.cloud/product .

Related Information

Liquidity Planning with SAP Analytics Cloud

3.6.1.10 House Bank Account Determination for Cash Pools

For each bank account, you can now use the Use in Cash Pooling checkbox in the Manage Bank Accounts app to set a house bank account as the one to be used by cash pooling payment requests generated by the Manage Cash Concentration app.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BFB (Basic Cash Operations), J78 (Advanced Cash Operations)


Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2Fscopeitems%2F3L5

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2Fscopeitems%2F3L5

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2Fscopeitems%2F3Y0

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.sapanalytics.cloud%2Fproduct

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/39e81b8f567d415185768de918b5092d.html



Additional Details

For each bank account, you must select one of the linked house bank accounts and set the Use in Cash Pooling checkbox for it. Otherwise, the system cannot identify the house bank account to use for generating cash pooling payment requests.

You can find the Use in Cash Pooling checkbox on the House Bank Account Connectivity tab of the Manage Bank Accounts app.

3.6.1.11 Planning Level Setting for Intraday Memo Record

Starting from this release, you must specify a planning level for each bank account that is set for intraday bank statements in the Manage Bank Accounts app. Otherwise, the system cannot generate intraday memo records from intraday bank statements.

Technical Details

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You make the specification in the Planning Level (Memo Record) field. You can find the field under the Bank Statement Data section on the Bank Relationship tab.

You must specify this setting for bank accounts that have intraday bank statements. Otherwise, the system cannot automatically generate intraday memo records for intraday bank statements that you import using the


Manage Incoming Payment Files app. As a result, the cash flows for intraday bank statements cannot be identified properly and displayed in the Cash Flow Analyzer app and the Reconcile Cash Flows - Intraday Memo Records app.

Related Information

Manage Incoming Payment FilesManage Bank AccountsCash Flow AnalyzerReconcile Cash Flows - Intraday Memo Records

3.6.1.12 Make Bank Transfers

With this app, you can either create and clear the payment request in one single action, or create, release, and clear the payment request in separate steps. This gives you flexibility in managing bank transfers between bank accounts of your company.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

Previously, the payment requests are automatically cleared once they are generated. Now, depending on the process in your company, you can do either of the following:

● Create, release, and clear payment requests in separate stepsYou can either carry out all the actions yourself or ask different users to take responsibilities for certain steps.

● Create, release, and clear payment requests in one single actionTo do so, when creating a bank transfer, you select the Release and Pay checkbox before you save it. This way, the system automatically releases the payment request and makes the payment. If the payment run is successful, the status of the payment request is changed to Cleared.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/a1597b757dfd404283a050ab12585e5a.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/fd6073c2b5db4e8fa19e4efce7629a96.html


https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/9c831ba6903741e7bc140639c5a33171.html

Related Information

Make Bank Transfers

3.6.1.13 Define Bank Transfer Templates

With this app, you can define templates for bank transfers between bank accounts of your company that are likely to occur in a recurring pattern. The templates help you save time and eliminate errors when creating frequent bank transfers.

Technical Details

Type New






Related Information

Define Bank Transfer TemplatesMake Bank Transfers - Create with Templates

3.6.1.14 Make Bank Transfers - Create with Templates

With this app, you can create one or more bank transfers in a batch based on the defined templates. The app helps you speed up your routine work for regular bank transfers between bank accounts of your company.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/cb248054fb33043de10000000a441470.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/19cf26f284ac412ba74204508365a6b4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/9bfca78bf8904926873bdd063804e3c5.html

Technical Details

Type New






Before you use this app, you must first define templates in the Define Bank Transfer Templates app.

In addition, you need to have configured the required settings for making bank transfers. For more information, see the “Prerequisites” of the Make Bank Transfers app.

Related Information

Make Bank TransfersMake Bank Transfers - Create with TemplatesDefine Bank Transfer Templates

3.6.1.15 Manage Cash Pools

With the new service provider bank, you can now define cash pools that are operated by banks in the Manage Cash Pools app.

Technical Details

Type Changed




Finance




https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/9bfca78bf8904926873bdd063804e3c5.html




Additional Details

For cash pools whose service provider is bank, you must define the Pool Usage as Both Directions.

You cannot perform cash concentration for cash pools of this type using the Manage Cash Concentration app, as they are operated by banks.

Related Information

Defining Cash PoolsDefining Cash Pool Hierarchies

3.6.1.16 Manage Cash Concentration

You can now perform cash concentration for multi-level cash pools. In addition to the system proposed transfer amount, you can also view simulation details in child cash pools to understand how balances are calculated in a multi-level cash pool.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

For information about how to define a multi-level cash pool, see Defining Cash Pool Hierarchies.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/9ab27a15f70c4627887ac903721438d1.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/5c363147d4bf41af89391981dddf14f9.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/5c363147d4bf41af89391981dddf14f9.html

For information about how to perform cash concentration and the logic of cash concentration simulation, see Performing Cash Concentration.


If you specify a cash pool that contains one or more child cash pools of the enterprise type for cash concentration, the system only simulates the cash movements for the child cash pools and uses the simulation results to propose the cash concentration transfers for the top-level cash pool. No payment requests will be generated for child cash pools even though they are defined as the enterprise type.

3.6.1.17 Manage Memo Records

You can now create multiple memo records in a recurring pattern by copying or distributing a memo record. You can also specify an offsetting bank account for memo records when necessary.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

You can create several memo records in one go for cash flows that are expected in a repetitive pattern by copying or distributing an existing memo record. The Copy function creates memo records with the identical amount to the original memo records, the Distribute function splits the original memo record evenly into smaller ones.

With the new Offsetting Information section, you can now specify an offsetting bank account for a memo record if there is one. This attribute is for information only and your specification does not create any offsetting cash flows in reports.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/3bb83dcff7b44a12b55316d85f0421a7.html

Related Information

Manage Memo Records

3.6.1.18 Selection of House Banks and House Bank Accounts

The selection of bank accounts has been enhanced by adding the selection of house banks and house bank accounts. You can see this change in apps including Make Bank Transfers, Define Bank Transfer Templates, and Manage Memo Records.

Technical Details

Type Changed





3.6.1.19 Adjust Assigned Liquidity Items

With this app, you can adjust liquidity items, which indicates the source and use of cash flows in your company, by leveraging machine learning capabilities. You can compare the actual liquidity items that are assigned and the predicted liquidity items that are automatically proposed by the predictive models. By accepting the system proposal, the assigned liquidity items are then adjusted and replaced by the proposed liquidity items.

Technical Details

Type New




https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/92cd53859b23418eb6bfc4b95c773878.html

Application Component FIN-FSCM-CLM-LM


Related Information

Adjust Assigned Liquidity Items

3.6.1.20 Bank Account Balance

With this app, you can now have a quick visual overview of the bank account balance for a selected period of time. It illustrates the bank account balance by available balance, which is the amount of opening balance, cash flows, overdue cash flows and overdraft limits in display currency and bank account currency for bank accounts. You can also customize your analysis with several filtering options in chart or table views.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Bank Account Balance


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/ac65c00f9ac04170b2cc7dc37b1eb275.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/7ca770c251e945edbd2a2e469a140dad.html

3.6.1.21 Cash Trade Request in the Manage Memo Records App

With this feature, you can now create a cash trade request for a specific financial instrument which will automatically trigger the creation of trade requests in the treasury and risk management systems. An approval process is also available for you to manage the status of the cash trade request.

Technical Details

Type New






Make sure you have made the configuration settings in the Customizing activity Assign Planning Levels to Cash Requests under Financial Supply Chain Management Cash and Liquidity Management Cash Management

Memo Records .

Related Information

Create Cash Trade Requests

3.6.1.22 Cash Flow Analyzer

With this app, you can now display the report with the following hierarchy views:

● Bank Account HierarchyIn this view, you can choose bank account group hierarchy, bank hierarchy or cash pool to display the report.

● Liquidity Item HierarchyIn this view, you can use liquidity item hierarchy to display the report.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/96d22ebb8a9b43a0bee6d5709fca1f5e.html

● Cash Concentration SimulationIn this view, you can display the results of cash concentration by cash pool.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

To use each hierarchy views, you need to define the different hierarchies in the following different apps:

● Define bank account group hierarchies in the Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Bank Accounts app

● Define bank hierarchy in the Manage Bank Accounts - Bank Hierarchy View app.● Define a cash pool hierarchy by assigning a header account and subaccounts to the cash pool in the

Manage Bank Accounts app.● Define the liquidity item hierarchy in the Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Liquidity Items app.● Perform the cash concentration in the Manage Cash Concentration app.

Related Information

Cash Flow AnalyzerManage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Bank AccountsManage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Liquidity ItemsManage Cash PoolsManage Cash Concentration

3.6.1.23 Cash Flow Comparison - By Timestamp

With this app, you can select any two snapshot timestamps in the past and compare the forecasted cash flows as well as compare the forecasted flows with the actual flows. It helps you understand the accuracy of your past forecast records and assists you in improving your cash flow forecasts continuously.


Finance


https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/44ba05bde7044633bbf5c5cfe6eb649e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/e8153e9f3c044856a1f990a550afa050.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/3c3ff22b0a144376803e823d05647589.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/69d58ccb5d1e44249e1a83174f965324.html

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

To be able to view the forecast values in the past, make sure that the snapshot function is enabled in the Configuration Step (SSCUI) Define Basic Settingsof the Configure Your Solution app.

Related Information

Cash Flow Comparison - By Timestamp

3.6.2 Treasury and Risk Management

3.6.2.1 Treasury Position History

With this app, you analyze the changes of important Treasury position values such as the book value or the amortized acquisition value over one or multiple periods at a glance. You can compare the position values of a valuation area at the different dates on a high aggregation level or break down the position values into dimensions like company codes, currencies, valuation classes, and account assignment references. The breakdown on a more detailed level provides you more insight about the reconciliation between the Treasury subledger and the general ledger. The app calculates the position values, such as the book value, in the display currency and shows them in a chart view and a table view. The chart view provides you with different chart types, such as Bar Chart and Column Chart. You can use predefined views or change the displayed measures and dimensions. For a further analysis, you can navigate to the Display Treasury Position Values app.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/ac319d8fa4ea4624b40a58d23e3c4627/1909.000/en-US/f1e7076b27e54f00a7f757cadbd8ee77.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Items 1WV (Debt and Investment Management), 1X1 (Foreign Currency Risk Management)

Application Component FIN-FSCM-TRM


Additional Details

Calculation of Position ValuesThe position values are calculated according to your settings in the filters. In the filters, you defined for which dates the position values are calculated. You also defined, which Treasury positions are selected using dimensions such as company code, product type, position currency, and valuation area. In addition, you decided on the display currency and the relevant exchange rate type for the currency conversion.

The app shows the calculated position values in a chart view and a table view. You can switch between the different view types using the following buttons:

● Chart and Table View● Chart View● Table View

Which positions components are displayed depends on the chosen view. Using the Settings button, you can choose the position values (type Measure) from the list.Examples:○ Purchase Value in DC○ Acquisition Value DC

Chart View of Position ValuesFor the Chart View, the following predefined views are available:

● StandardThis view displays the Book Value in DC of the selected positions, for all relevant dates.

NoteYou can manually change the displayed position values (measures), and the characteristics (dimensions) by which you want to aggregate the values.

● View ByUsing this button, you can choose more characteristics to split the calculated values accordingly.Examples:○ Accounting Code


Finance

○ Product Type● Using the Settings button, you can choose extra characteristics of the positions (of type Dimension)

from the list and also more position values in display currency (of type Measure).● Using Toggle Legend Visibility, you can display or hide the legend, which explains the displayed

position values.

Table View of Position Values

● You can use the predefined Standard view to display the selected positions. This view displays the Book Value in Display Currency on the aggregation level Date / Company Code / Product Type.

● For a detailed analysis, you can mark a row in the table and press the Display Position Values button. You navigate to the Display Treasury Position Values app. The app lists the Treasury positions contributing to the value displayed in the row. You can see the position values in position currency and valuation currency. Further, you can use drilldown functionality to position flows or you can view the position indicator or the position management procedure.

● Using the Settings button, you can choose extra characteristics (of type Dimension) and position values in display currency (of type Measure) from the list.

● Using Export to Spreadsheet function, you can export your currently filtered results into a spreadsheet and save it to your computer.

Business Catalog, Roles, Grouping

The app is assigned to the business catalog TRM - Position Management, which is assigned to the Treasury Accountant, Treasury Specialist - Back Office, and Treasury Risk Manager roles. Users with these roles find the app on the SAP Fiori Launchpad in the Treasury Reporting group.

See Also

For more information about the Treasury Position History app, see the product assistance on http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909.000 under Finance Treasury Management Treasury and Risk Management Treasury Reporting Treasury Positions .

NoteYou can also reach the product assistance of Treasury and Risk Management using the new quick link http://help.sap.com/s4_op_trm to jump straight to the latest version in SAP S/4HANA.

3.6.2.2 Market Data Overview

With this app, you can display an overview of foreign exchange related financial risks including current foreign exchange (FX) spot rate, historic FX spot rate, and FX swap rate on a selected key date. You can also get an overview of market data related financial risks, including historic reference interest rate, current security price and historic security price.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/848f8ce21bcd4f67bce77494799e2257/1909.000/en-US/eb489f57e7356d10e10000000a441470.html



http://help.sap.com/s4_op_trm

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1WV (Debt and Investment Management

1S4 (Automatic Market Rates Management

1XN (Market Rates Management - Manually via Upload

)



Related Information

Market Data Overview

3.6.2.3 Stock Futures

With this feature, you can now create stock futures in the Transaction Manager of Treasury and Risk Management.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1WV (Debt and Investment Management), 1X1 (Foreign Currency Risk Management)

Application Component FIN-FSCM-TRM-TM



Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/848f8ce21bcd4f67bce77494799e2257/1909.000/en-US/e676d1d1062541b8b1dc9d934cd76064.html


The price calculator of the Market Risk Analyzer calculates the net present value of stock futures depending on the evaluation type settings, either as 0 due to daily margin payments, or as described in the formula below:

where

NPVe = Net present value in evaluation currency

Sc,e(t e) = Spot FX rate used in the conversion from contract currency to evaluation currency on the evaluation date

Dc(te,ts) = Discount factor in contract currency on the evaluation date for the future settlement date

Nf = Number of futures in the lot

Nc = Contract size, that is, the number of shares one future contract refers to

Pc(M) = Market price of the future in contract currency

P c(C) = Contract price of the lot-generating transaction in contract currency

The contract currency is the currency of the lot-generating transaction equal to the currency that is maintained in the future master data. If no market price is found that is younger than the maximum security price age specified in the evaluation type, the system issues an error message.


It is now possible to define a product type for stock futures in Customizing under Treasury and Risk Management Transaction Manager Listed Derivatives Master Data Product Types Define Product Types .

See Also

For more information about stock futures, see the product assistance at http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909.000 under Finance Treasury Management Treasury and Risk ManagementTransaction Manager Manage Financial Transactions Securities Listed Derivatives .

NoteYou can also reach the product assistance of Treasury and Risk Management using the new quick link http://help.sap.com/s4_op_trm to jump straight to the latest version in SAP S/4HANA.




http://help.sap.com/s4_op_trm

3.6.2.4 Treasury Correspondence Integration with SWIFT Network

This product feature allows you to exchange Treasury correspondence with your counterparties using MT300 and MT320 SWIFT messages for your FX and money market transactions. The process requires the Treasury Correspondence Integration via SWIFT Network integration scenario. The integration is enabled using SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity for communication with the SWIFT infrastructure.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3QM (Treasury Correspondence Integration with SWIFT Network)



Additional Details

For communication via SWIFT, the receiver, the sender, and the kind of message must be identified explicitly:

● Receiver ID○ Outbound process: Bank identifier code (BIC) of the counterparty○ Inbound process: BIC of your company

● Sender ID○ Outbound process: BIC of your company○ Inbound process: Bank identifier code (BIC) of the counterparty

● Message ID○ Outbound process: ID of correspondence object

Note● You assign the bank identifier code (BIC) for business partners using the function Assign BIC and

External Security Account ID to Business Partner (transaction FTR_BP_BIC)● You assign the bank identifier code (BIC) for your company codes in the Customizing of Treasury and

Risk Management under Define Company Code Additional Data configuration step.


Finance

Effects on Configuration

● Set up the Treasury Correspondence Integration via SWIFT Network integration scenario.For more information, see the Treasury Correspondence Integration with SWIFT Network (3QM) scope item in the Best Practices Explorer https://rapid.sap.com/bp/scopeitems/3QM .

● In the Customizing of Treasury and Risk Management, you find the following configuration steps to enable the Exchange Treasury Correspondence via SWIFT process:○ Define Company Code Additional Data○ Assign Format Mappings for Outbound Process

To define format mappings for the outbound process, you use the Extended Data Medium Exchange (DME) Engine (transaction DMEEX) in the SAP Client.

○ Assign Format Mappings for Inbound ProcessTo define format mappings for the inbound process, you use the Map Treasury Correspondence Format Data app on the SAP Fiori launchpad.

For more information about the Exchange Treasury Correspondence via SWIFT process, see in product assistance at http://help.sap.com/ for SAP S/4HANA, version 1909, and choose Finance Treasury Management Treasury and Risk Management Transaction Manager Treasury Correspondence .

3.6.2.5 Enhancements to the Hedge Accounting for Exposure Items Process

With this feature, you get several new features for the Hedge Accounting for Exposure Items process. You can now change the reclassification-relevant dates of a hedging relationship. New settings influencing the designation process are available in the Customizing activities Define Hedging Profile and Effectiveness Test Method. In addition, a new setting in the evaluation type enables the calculation of NPVs for FX options from the settlement or termination date onwards until the payment date.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1XD (Hedge Accounting for FX Forward - Group Ledger IFRS), 2RW (Hedge Accounting for FX Option - Group Ledger IFRS), 2UF (Hedge Accounting for FX Swap - Group Ledger IFRS), 3X1 (Hedge Accounting for FX Forward - Local GAAP), 3X2 (Hedge Accounting for FX Option - Local GAAP), 3X3 (Hedge Accounting for FX Forward - Group Ledger US GAAP), 3X4 (Hedge Accounting for FX Option - Group Ledger US GAAP)


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2Fscopeitems%2F3QM

http://help.sap.com/



Additional Details

Change Reclassification-Relevant Dates

The new function Change Reclassification-Relevant Dates (transaction TPM122) is available as an app on the SAP Fiori launchpad and in the area menu of the Treasury and Risk Management back-end system under

Hedge Management and Accounting Hedge Accounting for Positions Master Data Automated Designation Process .

With this function, you can change the automatically determined balance sheet recognition date or the reclassification date for a hedging relationship that has already designated .

The new date must fulfill the following rules:

● The new balance sheet recognition date must be later than the designation date and earlier than the planned dedesignation date.

● The new reclassification date must be later than the dedesignation date.

New/Changed Settings in the Hedging Profile

● Intrinsic Value = 0 at Contract DateThe Intrinsic Value = 0 at Contract Date indicator is relevant for hedging profiles with hedging scenario 943 CFH: FX Risk with Intrinsic, Time + Premium Amort..The hedge accounting key figure for the intrinsic value (NPV_INTR) is calculated according to the settings in the hedge accounting calculation type and stored in the market data container at designation date.○ If you set this indicator, the classification applies the intrinsic value (hedge accounting key figure

NPV_INTR) = 0 for the calculation on the contract date. Therefore, the classification assumes the intrinsic value to be zero and adds the calculated intrinsic value stored in the market data container to the NPV_OTHERS component. Afterwards, the classification starts based on these new values. Note: The values in the market data container are not changed.

○ If you do not set this indicator, the classification is based on the calculated hedge accounting key figures at contract date.

Example:

Classification if "Intrinsic Value = 0 at Contract Date" indicator is not set

Premium/ Book Value Intrinsic Value Time Value Others

Values at designation 1000 82,72 1090,86 - 173,58

Values at valuation/classification

958,08 82,72 875,36 0

Posting - 41,92 - 124,64


Finance

Classification if "Intrinsic Value = 0 at Contract Date" indicator is set

Premium/ Book Value Intrinsic Value Time Value Others

Values at designation 1000 0 1090,86 - 90,86

Values at valuation/classification

958,08 82,72 875,36 0

Posting - 41,92 82,72 - 41,92

● Skip Valuation at Contract DateThe exception for FX options has changed slightly:For an FX option with a premium that has been activated: In classifications after the payment date of the premium, the calculated values for the elements and components are used as start values during classification (with the Run Classification app) and are not assumed to be 0.

New Indicator in Customizing activity Effectiveness Test Method

In the Linear Regression area, you now find the new Set to Effective If All Points Are Zero indicator.

If you set this indicator, the result of the effectiveness test is set to Effective if all points required for the linear regression have been calculated successfully but they are all zero. The linear regression cannot be applied.

Example:

If the designated component for an FX option is the intrinsic value and the FX option is out of the money (that is, the intrinsic value is equal to zero) for the current market as well as for all market data constellations given by the market data set, all calculated delta values are zero. If this applies to both the hedging instrument as well as to the hypothetical derivative, all points for the linear regression are zero.

New Indicator in Define and Set Up Evaluation Type FunctionYou find the new indicator Consider Option Settlement Flow in the Define and Set Up Evaluation Types (transaction JBREVAL) function (available in the Treasury and Risk Management area menu under Market Risk Analyzer Evaluation Control Valuation Settings ) on the Evaluation Control tab in the Valuation Control area.

This indicator controls whether the settlement or the termination flow of a plain vanilla FX option is used for the NPV calculation.

● If you set this indicator, the system uses the settlement or the termination flow for the NPV calculation from the settlement or termination date onwards until the payment date.

● If you do not set this indicator, the system does not calculate a NPV for the FX option after the settlement or termination date.

Requirements

● Set the Select on Day of Cancellation/Settlement indicator in the evaluation type.● In the Customizing activity Assign Cash Flow Indicator to Flow Types, assign a cash flow indicator to the

settlement flow. Do not set the flow as fictitious.


Related Information

Change Reclassification-Relevant DatesSettings for Hedge Accounting for Exposure Items

3.6.2.6 New Data Source for Balance Sheet FX Risk Reporting

With this feature, you can consider operational data from One Exposure, such as memo records, during the review of your balance sheet FX risk.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1X1 (Foreign Currency Risk Management)



Additional Details

The One Exposure is now available as data source within the definition of the key figures for the balance sheet FX risk reporting.


If you define key figures based on One Exposure the user calling the balance sheet FX risk apps, needs display authorization for One Exposure data which is, for example, granted with the Cash Manager role.


In the Define Key Figures - Balance Sheet FX Risk app, you must define the required key figures.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/848f8ce21bcd4f67bce77494799e2257/1909.000/en-US/304d201b3a254e349e6ff86fc83ffda9.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/848f8ce21bcd4f67bce77494799e2257/1909.000/en-US/d4842c5863352360e10000000a44147b.html

For key figures using One Exposure as their data source, the following fields are available:

● Certainity Level● Planning Level● Planning Group● Liquidity Item● Transaction Date

Here, you create rules dictating how the system selects dates dynamically on the basis of the key date from the apps.○ KD-1 Key Date - 1 Day○ KD-2 Key Date - 2 Days○ KD-3 Key Date - 3 Days○ KD-4 Key Date - 4 Days○ KD-5 Key Date - 5 Days○ KD Report Key Date○ KD+ Key Date + 1 Day○ KD+2 Key Date + 2 Days○ KD+3 Key Date + 3 Days○ KD+4 Key Date + 4 Days○ KD+5 Key Date + 5 Days○ BOM-1 Start of Preceding Month○ BOM Month Start○ EOM Month End○ EOM+1 Start of Following Month

3.6.2.7 Authorization Check for Reference Category

With this authorization check, you can check a user's authorization on reference based on the reference category (and the company code) in the function of reference maintenance in transaction management. You can then check whether the user who wants to create, change, display, undo, or collectively process references has the required authorization for the reference category. The following apps are available:

● Create Reference (transaction TBR6)● Change Reference (transaction TBR7)● Display Reference (transaction TBR8)● Reverse Reference (transaction TBR9)● Collective Processing: Reference (transaction TBRL)

Technical Details

Type New




Application Component FIN-FSCM-TRM-TM


Additional Details

By default, the authorization checks are not activated. If you want to use the authorization check, you have to do the following:

● Activate the functionality in this IMG activity● Define the different reference categories needed.● Give the needed authorizations to the users which are responsible for the maintenance of reference.


You can made the settings of the Reference Authorization in the Customizing activity Make Settings for Authority Checks under Financial Supply Chain Management Treasury and Risk Management Transaction Management General Settings Organization .

3.6.2.8 CDS Views for Treasury and Risk Management

With this feature, a great many CDS (Core Data Services) views have been released. The views make it possible to read system data, configuration data, master data, transactional data, and market data relevant for financial transactions/positions of Treasury and Risk Management. Most of them have been enabled for SAP Business Warehouse/4HANA extraction.

Based on released CDS views you can create your own query views.

The CDS query views can be used by any tool/solution that supports CDS views, such as the Analysis for Microsoft Office, Design Studio, SAP Lumira, or SAP Analytics Cloud.

Technical Details

Type New


Finance





Additional Details

The following CDS views for Treasury and Risk Management are available:

● CDS Views for System Data○ Product Category and Product Category Text○ Transaction Category and Transaction Category Text○ Securities Account Category and Securities Account Category Text○ Security Class Stock Category and Security Class Stock Category Text○ Security Class Quotation and Security Class Quotation Text○ Listed Derivative Quotation and Listed Derivative Quotation Text○ Listed Derivative Category and Listed Derivative Category Text○ Option Put/Call Code and Option Put/Call Code Text○ Debt Investment Indicator and Debt Investment Indicator Text○ Fixed Variable Interest Category and Fixed Variable Interest Category Text

● CDS Views for Configuration Data○ Treasury Valuation Area○ Treasury Valuation Class and Treasury Valuation Class Text○ Security Account Type and Security Account Type Text○ Product Type and Product Type Text○ Security Class General Classification and Security Class General Classification Text○ Bond Classification and Bond Classification Text○ Security Class Security Type and Security Class Security Type Text○ Security Class Fund Type and Security Class Fund Type Text○ Transaction Type and Transaction Type Text○ Portfolio and Portfolio Name○ Treasury Hedging Classification and Treasury Hedging Classification Name○ Treasury Account Assignment Reference and Treasury Account Assignment Reference Text○ Treasury Position Management Procedure and Treasury Position Management Proc. Name○ Securities Account Group○ Market Data: Basis Spread ID○ Credit Spread ID○ ReferenceEntity Attribute○ Volatility Name Definition and Volatility Name Description○ Volatility Profile Information


○ Volatility Type and Volatility Type Text● CDS Views for Master Data

○ Treasury Securities Account○ Central Clearing Account○ Security Class

○ Security Class Stock○ Security Class Bond○ Security Class Listed Derivatives

○ Treasury Position Account○ Counterparty

● CDS Views for Transactional Data○ Financial Transaction○ Treasury Facility Contract○ Treasury Facility Utilization○ Letter of Credit○ Treasury Position Values Cube○ Query View for Maturity Profile○ Maturity Profile Cash Flow Data Cube

● CDS Views for Market Data○ Market Data Query for Implied Volatility○ Market Data Query for Basis Spread○ Basis Spread Value Cube View○ Market Data Query for Credit Spread○ Credit Spread Value Cube View○ Market Data Query for FX Rate○ Market Data Cube View for FX Rate○ Currency Pair Dimension View○ Market Data Query for Reference Interest Rate○ Market Data Cube View for Reference Interest Rate○ Reference IR Dimension View○ Market Data Query for Security Price○ Market Data Cube View for Security Price○ Security Exchange Dimension View○ Security Price Type Dimension View○ Reference Interest Rate○ Implied Volatility Cube View


NoteYou need to have the Analytics Specialist role (SAP_BR_ANALYTICS_SPECIALIST) assigned to you.

For more information about the CDS views available, see the product assistance at http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909.000 under Cross Components The Virtual Data Model in SAP S/4HANA Cloud CDS Views CDS Views for Finance CDS Views for Treasury Management .


Finance



Related Information

View Browser

3.6.2.9 Restructuring of SAP Fiori Launchpad for Treasury and Risk Management

The SAP Fiori launchpad for Treasury and Risk Management has been restructured. The reduced number of groups and the removal of seldom used apps from the SAP Fiori launchpad leads to a clearly arranged launchpad for the specific roles.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

Besides the rearrangement and renaming of the groups and the removal of some seldom used apps from the SAP Fiori launchpad, some apps are now available on the SAP Fiori launchpad via link.

Note● The removed apps are still available on the SAP Fiori launchpad. You can find them using the App

Finder.● The assignment of apps to roles remains unchanged.

● The following groups are available for Treasury and Risk Management:○ Treasury Reporting○ Risk Management○ Hedge Management○ Creation of Financial Transactions○ Processing of Financial Transactions



○ Treasury Accounting○ Market Data Management

● The Money Market Transactions, FX Transactions, Derivatives, Trade Finance Transactions, Securities Transactions, and Financial Transactions groups are obsolete. The affected apps are moved to the new groups Creation of Financial Transactions and Processing of Financial Transactions.

● The Hedge Management and Accounting group is obsolete. The apps relevant for hedge management are moved to the new Hedge Management group and the apps relevant for hedge accounting are moved to the Treasury Accounting group.

● The Securities Account Management and Correspondence groups are obsolete, the affected apps are moved to Treasury Accounting or Processing of Financial Transactions groups.

● Apps for reversing, entering of master data and datafeed notations have been removed.● Apps for manually entering market data are available as links now.

See the following table to get an detailed overview.

SAP Fiori Launchpad of Treasury and Risk Management

App Name

Original Business Group

New Business Group Shown As

Treasury Specialist - Back Office

Treasury Specialist - Front Office

Treasury Specialist - Middle Office

Treasury Accountant

Treasury Risk Manager

Adjustment Schedule - Interest Rates/Prices

Financial Transactions

None x

Analyze NPV

Risk Management

Risk Management

Tile x

Assign Basis Spread Notations - Datafeed

Market Data Management

None x

Assign Credit Spread Notations - Datafeed


None x

Assign Currency Notations - Datafeed


None x


Finance

App Name






Treasury Accountant


Assign Exchange Rate Volatility Notations - Datafeed


None x

Assign FX Swap Rate Notations - Datafeed


None x

Assign General Volatility Notations - Datafeed


None x

Assign Interest Rate Notations - Datafeed


None x

Assign Profile and BP Group - Internal Recipients

Correspondence

None x

Assign Profile and BP Group - External Recipients

Correspondence

None x

Assign Security Price Notations - Datafeed


None x


App Name






Treasury Accountant


Automatic Debit Position and Posting - Security Accounts

Securities Account Management

Treasury Accounting

Tile x

Balance Sheet FX Risk (Web Dynpro Version)

Hedge Management and Accounting

Hedge Management

Tile x

Balance Sheet FX Risk - In Transaction Currency (Web Dynpro Version)


Hedge Management

Tile x

Balance Sheet FX Risk (Design Studio Version)

None None x

Balance Sheet FX Risk - In Transaction Currency (Design Studio Version)

None None x

Calculate Amounts - Commercial Paper

Money Market Transactions

None x


Finance

App Name






Treasury Accountant


Calculate Clearing Threshold Key Figures

Risk Management

Risk Management

Tile x x

Calculate Market Risk Key Figures

Risk Management

Risk Management

Tile x

Calculate Net Present Values

Accounting Treasury Accounting

Tile x

Calculate Net Present Values - With CVA and DVA


Tile x

Change Adjustment - Interest Rates/Prices


None x

Change Counterparty - Financial Transaction


None x

Change Netting


None x x

Change Reference


None x x

Clearing Threshold Report

Risk Management

Risk Management

Tile x x


App Name






Treasury Accountant


Create Adjustment - Interest Rates/Prices


Processing of Financial Transactions

Link x

Create Bank Guarantee

Trade Finance Transactions

Creation of Financial Transactions

Tile x

Create CA Style Instrument



Tile x

Create Cash Flow Transaction



Tile x

Create Collar FX Option

FX Transactions


Tile x

Create Commercial Paper



Tile x

Create Deposit at Notice



Tile x

Create Facility



Tile x

Create Fixed Term Deposit



Tile x


Finance

App Name






Treasury Accountant


Create FX Option

FX Transactions


Tile x

Create FX Spot/Forward

FX Transactions


Tile x

Create FX Swap

FX Transactions


Tile x

Create IR Derivative

Derivatives Creation of Financial Transactions

Tile x

Create IR Instrument



Tile x

Create Letter of Credit



Tile x

Create Manual Posting


Treasury Accounting

Tile x

Create Netting



Link x

Create Presentation - Letter of Credit



Tile x x


App Name






Treasury Accountant


Create Reference



Link x

Create Reference Entities - Business Partners


None x

Create Securities Transaction

Securities Transactions


Tile x

Credit Line Analysis

Reporting Treasury Reporting

Tile x x x

Currency Converter


None x x x

Debt and Investment Analysis


Tile x x x

Debt and Investment Maturity Profile


Tile x x x

Define Display Order - Currency Pairs

Reporting None x

Define Financial Positions

Reporting None x

Define Fixing Reference

Correspondence

None x


Finance

App Name






Treasury Accountant


Define Hedging Area


Hedge Management

Tile x x

Define Key Figures - Balance Sheet FX Risk


None x

Define NPVs on Term Start

Accounting None x

Define Time Pattern


None x x

Define Traders

Master Data

None x

Define User Data

Master Data

None x

Define Values for Expiry Time - FX Option

Correspondence

None x

Display Adjustment - Interest Rates Prices


None x

Display Exposure Position Flows


Hedge Management

Link x

Display Limit Overview

Risk Management

Risk Management

Tile x


App Name






Treasury Accountant


Display Netting


None x x

Display Netting Proposals


None x x

Display OCI Balances - Hedge Accounting


None x

Display Payment Schedules


None x

Display Reference


None x x

Display Securities Account Class Positions


Treasury Accounting

Tile x x x

Display Transactions - Changed Counterparty


None x

Display Treasury Alerts - Correspondence

Reporting None x x

Display Treasury Alerts - Interest Rate

Reporting None x x


Finance

App Name






Treasury Accountant


Display Treasury Alerts - Payment

Reporting None x x

Display Treasury Alerts - Posting

Reporting None x x

Display Treasury Alerts - Release

Reporting None x x

Display Treasury Alerts - Settlement

Reporting None x x

Display Treasury Payments


Link x

Display Treasury Position Flows


Tile x x

Display Treasury Position Values


Tile x x

Display Treasury Posting Journal


Tile x

End-of-Day Processing

Risk Management

None x

Enter Basis Spreads



Link x


App Name






Treasury Accountant


Enter Credit Spreads



Link x

Enter Exchange Rate Volatilities



Link x

Enter Factor Values



Link x

Enter FX Spot Rates



Link x

Enter FX Swap Rates



Link x

Enter Interest Rates



Link x

Enter Interest Rates Volatilities



Link x

Enter Net Present Values

Accounting

Treasury Accounting

Link x

Enter Securities Prices



Link x

Execute Debit Position - Manual Debit Position


Treasury Accounting

Tile x


Finance

App Name






Treasury Accountant


Execute Valuation Class Transfer


Tile x

Financial Status - Book Value


Tile x

Financial Status - Nominal Amount


Tile x

Fix FX Rates


Processing of Finanial Transactions

Link x

Foreign Exchange Overview


Tile x x

Hedge Management Cockpit


Hedge Management

Tile x x

Import Foreign Exchange Rates


None x

Import Market Data



Tile x

Import Raw Exposures - Speadsheet


Hedge Management

Tile x x

Interest Rate Overview


Tile x x x


App Name






Treasury Accountant


Manage Exposure Hedging - Hedge Accounting

Hedge Managment and Accounting

None x

Manage Hedging Relationships

Hedge Managment and Accounting

Treasury Accounting

Tile x

Manage Limits

Risk Management

Risk Management

Link x

Manage Market Data Shift

Risk Management

Risk Management

Link x

Manage Position Indicator


Link x x

Manage Reference Entities


None x

Manage Scenarios

Risk Management

Risk Management

Link x

Manage Securities Accounts


None x x

Manage Securities Classes


None x x

Manage Snapshots


Hedge Management

Link x x


Finance

App Name






Treasury Accountant


Manage Trader Authorizations


None x

Manage Yield Curves



Link x

Market Data Overview


Tile x

Post Derived Business Transactions


Tile x

Post Flows Accounting Treasury Accounting

Tile x

Process Business Transactions


Tile x

Process Correspondence - Monitor

Correspondence


Tile x

Process Exposure Positions


Hedge Management

Tile x x

Process FX Options - Collective Processing

FX Transactions


Tile x x

Process Hedge Requests


Hedge Management

Tile x


App Name






Treasury Accountant


Process IR Derivatives - Collective Processing

Derivatives Processing of Financial Transactions

Tile x x

Process MM Transactions - Collective Processing



Tile x x

Process Raw Exposure


Hedge Management

Link x x

Process Raw Exposure - Collective Processing


Hedge Management

Tile x x

Process Security Transactions - Collective Processing

Securities Transactions


Tile x x

Process Spots/Forwards - Collective Processing

FX Transactions


Tile x x

Process Trade Finance Transactions - Collective Processing



Tile x x


Finance

App Name






Treasury Accountant


Process Trade Requests


Hedge Management

Tile x x

Release Hedging Business Transactions


Treasury Accounting

Tile x

Remaining Term Statistics



Link x x

Reprocess Transactions - Automated Designation


Treasury Accounting

Tile x

Request Current Market Data - Datafeed



Tile x

Request Historical Market Data - Datafeed



Tile x

Reverse Account Assignment Reference Transfer

Accounting None x

Reverse Accrual/Deferral

Accounting None x


App Name






Treasury Accountant


Reverse Adjustment - Interest Rates/Prices


None x

Reverse Automatic Adjustments - Interest Rates/Prices


None x

Reverse Classifica-tion

Accounting None x

Reverse Debit Position


None x

Reverse Release of Hedging Business Transactions


None x

Reverse Valuation

Accounting None x

Reverse Valuation Class Transfer

Accounting None x

Review Balance Sheet FX Risk


Treasury Reporting

Tile x

Review Limit Utilizations

Risk Management

Risk Management

Tile x


Finance

App Name






Treasury Accountant


Run Accrual/Deferral


Tile x

Run Automatic Adjustments - Interest Rates/Prices



Link x

Run Classification


Tile x

Run Effec-tiveness Test - Hedge Accounting


None x

Run OCI Reclassification - Hedge Accounting


None x

Run Valuation


Tile x

Send Correspondence

Correspondence

None x

Sensitivity Key Figures - Single Analysis

Risk Management

Risk Management

Tile x

Take Snapshot


Hedge Management

Tile x x


App Name






Treasury Accountant


Terminate Hedging Relationships - Expired Exposures


None x

Transfer Account Assignment Reference

Accounting None x

Treasury Position Analysis


Tile x x x

Treasury Position Flows - Classic


Link x x x

Treasury Position Values - Classic


Link x x x

Treasury Posting Journal - Classic


Link x

Undo Netting


None x x

Undo Reference


None x x

Update Cash Flow - Deposit at Notice


None x


Finance

App Name






Treasury Accountant


Update Planned Records


None x

Update Planned Records for Securities



Tile x

Volatilities with Moneyness - Assign Currency Pairs


None x

Volatilities with Moneyness - Enter Values



Link x

3.6.3 Payments and Bank Communication

3.6.3.1 Advanced Payment Management

The following apps provide you with the ability to manage payments in batches, as well as to analyze payments.

In the Manage Payment Batches SAP Fiori app, you can manage and process batched payments.

In the Payments Analyzer SAP Fiori app, you can analyze your payments by displaying their key figures in different charts.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item No scope item required


Application Component FIN-FSCM-PF


Related Information

Manage Payment Batches (SAP Fiori)Payments Analyzer (SAP Fiori)

3.7 Commodity Risk Management

3.7.1 Configuration Settings for Commodities

To make the Commodity Risk Management customizing for commodities easier accessible, from a single point of entry in the SAP Implementation Guide, the customizing activities have been combined under Financial Supply Chain Management Treasury and Risk Management Basic Functions Market Data ManagementMaster Data Commodities .

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component FIN-FSCM-TRM-CRM

Available As Of SAP S/4HANA 1909 FPS00


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/a8876abe205c49869273b9f9137ab7d4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/b7b8f42384b14644bc3b674e9d8ca5a5.html


The IMG has been changed as follows:

In the Past From Now On

Node Name: Physical Commodities Node Name: Commodities

Node Name: Market Data Based on Derivative Contract Specifications

Node Name: Derivative Contract Specification and MIC

● Transaction Manager Listed Derivatives/OTC

Derviatives Master Data Commodities Define Commodity Types/Define Commodity Group 1/Define

Commodity Group 2

● Treasury and Risk Management Basic Functions

Market Data Management Market Data Based on

Derivative Contract Specifications CommoditiesDefine Commodity Types/Define Commodity Group 1/

Define Commodity Group 2

Treasury and Risk Management Basic Functions

Market Data Management Master Data CommoditiesDefine Commodity Types/Define Commodity Group 1/Define

Commodity Group 2



Derivative Contract Specifications


Market Data Management Master Data Commodities

Derivative Contract Specification and MIC


Market Data Management Master Data Master Data

Master Data Market Data Based on Derivative

Contract Specifications Settings for Commodity

Curve


Market Data Management Master Data

Commodities Settings for Commodity Curve



Settings for Commodity Curve



Derivative Contract Specifications Datafeed



Datafeed

Related Information

Commodity Risk Management


https://help.sap.com/viewer/888cbe952a0e4a729f8b823d69860929/1909.000/en-US/d22ad7e6d7574b6c844f0917620bb8db.html

3.7.2 Exercise of Commodity Listed Options

With the exercise of the commodity listed option it is meant, that the right for the physical delivery of the underlying commodity future is claimed.

The new business transaction category Commodity Listed Option available in transaction FWER (Option Right - Exercise) allows the processing of a commodity listed option and the underlying commodity future(s) in one step. This is also true for the reversal of an exercise.

The exercises of commodity listed options are considered in Commodity Risk Analytics.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FIN-FSCM-TRM-CRM


3.8 Financial Operations

3.8.1 Invoice Management

3.8.1.1 Import Supplier Invoices

This app enables you to import multiple supplier invoices into the system all at once. You download a template file, enter the invoice information, and upload the completed file back to the app. You can then post the invoices from the app. Changes have been made to the available fields in the downloaded file where you can enter information for the invoices.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Finance

Scope Item J60 (Accounts Payable)

Application Component FI-FIO-AP

Available As Of SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1908

Additional Details

The downloaded file includes two sections, Header Data and G/L Account Items. The following changes have been made to the fields in the two sections:

SectionTechnical Name of Field Old Field Name New Field Name Length Change

Header Data BUSINESSPLACE Business Place <Unchanged> 4 This field is now by default unhidden.

PAYMENTMETHODSUPPLEMENT

<Not available>

Payment Method Supplement

2 This field has been added.

BUSINESSSECTIONCODE

Section Code 4

PAYMENTTERMS Terms of Payment Key

4

BUSINESSAREA Business Area 4

INVOICERECEIPTDATE

Invoice Receipt Date

8

DELIVERYOFGOODSREPORTINGCNTRY

Reporting Country for Delivery of Goods Within the EU

3

ISEUTRIANGULARDEAL

Indicator: Triangular Deal Within the EU?

1

TAXDETERMINATIONDATE

Date for Defining Tax Rates

8

SUPPLIERINVOICEUPLOADORIGIN

Origin of Uploaded Invoice

2


SectionTechnical Name of Field Old Field Name New Field Name Length Change

DUMMY_MMIV_SI_S_HEADER_EEW_PS

MMIV_SI_S_HEADER_INCL_EEW

1

PAYTSLIPWTHREFREFERENCE

Reference Number for Purchase Order

ISR/QR Reference Number

27 This field has been renamed.

INVOICEREFERENCE

Document Number for Invoice Reference

Invoice Reference: Document Number for Invoice Reference

10

INVOICEREFERENCEFISCALYEAR

Fiscal Year Fiscal Year of the Relevant Invoice (for Credit Memo)

4

PAYTSLIPWTHREFSUBSCRIBER

Subscriber Number for Purchase Order

ISR subscriber number

11

PAYTSLIPWTHREFCHECKDIGIT

Check Digit for Purchase Order

ISR Check Digit 2

SUPPLIERINVOICEUPLOADFILEUUID

GUID for Supplier Invoice

UUID of Invoice Upload

16

G/L Account Items DUMMY_INCL_EEW_COBL

<Not available>

Custom Fields: Dummy for Use in Extension Includes (1)

1 This field has been added.

Related Information

Import Supplier Invoices

3.8.1.2 Manage Supplier Line Items

You can now assign house banks and bank accounts of business partners to line items in the Edit Line Items dialog.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/30729b55b3d9408cba94857359a70edc.html

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

If you want to edit several line items at once, note the following:

● You can change the house bank only for line items with the same company code.● You can change the bank account of the business partner only for line items with the same customer ID or

the same supplier ID.

3.8.1.3 App Extensibility: Manage Supplier Line Items

This feature enables you to extend the Manage Supplier Line Items app.

The Manage Supplier Line Items app is based on the Supplier Line Items data source. In the Data Source Extensions section of the Custom Fields and Logic app, key users can add standard SAP fields from supplier master data to this data source.

Technical Details

Type New






Related Information

App Extensibility: Manage Customer Line Items

3.8.1.4 Data Management in Invoice Management

New data destruction objects have been added to Invoice Management.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-AP


Additional Details

Name of Data Destruction Object Object Type

Changes with This Release Details More Information

BP_FKREDEB_SYNC_DESTRUCTION

Data destruction object

New data destruction object added.

You can use this data destruction object to destroy synchronization of customer master data.

Destroying Synchronization of Customer Master Data Using BP_FKREDEB_SYNC_DESTRUCTION

FI_DD_PRENOTIF_DESTRUCTION

Data destruction object

New data destruction object added.

You can use this data destruction object to destroy direct debit pre-notifications.

Destroying Direct Debit Pre-Notifications Using FI_DD_PRENOTIF_DESTRUCTION


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/6ffe0c56d46e8809e10000000a441470.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/43f38254e95748e6b289349c1c3d2037.html






https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/4d5407690a8d402b9c688750b0078071.html




3.8.1.5 CDS Views in Invoice Management

New CDS views have been added to Invoice Management.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

The following CDS views have been added:

● Accounts Payable Aging Grid CubeThis CDS view provides you with an overview of the payables in an aging grid. It shows an aggregated view of the payables per net due interval in the aging grid and per account (that is, per company code or supplier) as well as the payable items.

● Accounts Payable Aging GridThis CDS view provides you with an overview of the payables in an aging grid. It shows an aggregated view of the payables per net due interval in the aging grid and per account (that is, per company code or supplier) as well as the payable items.

● Aging Analysis CubeThis CDS view provides you with an overview of the payables in an aging grid. The result aggregates the amount per net due interval in the aging grid and per account (that is, per company code or supplier).

● Aging AnalysisThis CDS view provides you with an overview of the payables in an aging grid. The result aggregates the amount per net due interval in the aging grid and per account (that is, per company code or supplier).

● Days Payable Outstanding CubeThis CDS view provides you with an insight into the average collection period of your company. It shows the number of days it takes, on average, for your company to collect payables. The result aggregates the payables amount per account (that is, per company code or supplier) and per month.

● Days Payable OutstandingThis CDS view provides you with an insight into the average collection period of your company. It shows the number of days it takes, on average, for your company to collect payables. The result aggregates the payables amount per account (that is, per company code or supplier) and per month.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/1c8b6153912a494ba958ae47f4706172.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/e320223ed01846de98d6bfd53a7dde40.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/ed91c4fe7fb7479aa0dd2147808a93f1.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/aaadfc2ef6bd4d2a9ef93630d7d9aca9.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/389a0749ba1f4b56b5dd31c2a9121f8b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/1865f50a182e4033b6d5d725f6c9a888.html

3.8.1.6 Unique End-to-End Reference for Credit Transfers

With this feature, you can add a unique end-to-end transaction reference (UETR) to your credit transfers to track the status of your payments. The tracking takes place in the SWIFT global payments innovation (gpi) tracker enabling the checking and real-time monitoring of payments. You can manually enable the insertion of the UETR data in the xx_CGI_XML_CT payment formats.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-AP-AP-B1


Related Information

Unique End-to-End Transaction Reference (UETR) Reporting

3.8.2 Receivables Management

3.8.2.1 Enhancement Spot: Adjust Result of Credit Check (Local Scenario)

With this enhancement spot, you can change the answer from the Credit Management system to a query before it is sent to the calling component. This is now also possible, instead of using Web services in a local scenario.

Technical Details

Type New


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/10a228aed3184d388cfb3102db01389a.html


Scope Item BD6 (Basic Credit Management), 1QM (Advanced Credit Management)

Application Component FIN-FSCM-CR (SAP Credit Management)


Additional Details

You can find the enhancement spot Adjust Result of Credit Check (Local Scenario) in Customizing under the following path:

Financial Supply Chain Management Credit Management Credit Risk Monitoring Credit Limit Request:

If Your Financial Accounting (FI) and your Sales and Distribution (SD) are in the same system as SAP Credit Management, then you can use a configuration web service interface to switch to a local configuration. In this case, you can replace the following interfaces with this enhancement spot:

● UKM_FILL (credit_check_convert_outbound)Contained in the BAdI BAdI: Fill Line Items for Credit Exposure Update.See Customizing under:

Financial Supply Chain Management Credit Management Integration with Accounts Receivable Accounting and Sales and Distribution Integration with Sales and Distribution Customer Enhancements

● UKM_CREDIT_CHECK (convert_inbound, convert_outbound)Contained in the BAdI BAdI: Adjust Result of Credit Check.See Customizing under:

Financial Supply Chain Management Credit Management Integration with Accounts Receivable Accounting and Sales and Distribution Integration with Accounts Receivable Accounting Customer Enhancements

For more information, see the documentation for this enhancement spot.

3.8.2.2 Schedule Credit Management Jobs

With this app you can schedule periodic activities for SAP Credit Management.


Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FIN-FIO-CCD


Additional Details

You can schedule the following jobs with this app:

● Check Credit on SD Documents● Update Score for Business Partners● Update Credit Limit for Business Partners● Update Rules for Scoring and Credit Check● Assign Credit Management Role to Business Partners

Related Information

Schedule Credit Management Jobs

3.8.2.3 Schedule Collections Management Jobs

With this app you can schedule mass activities for SAP Collections Management.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BFC (Collections and Dispute Management)


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/c45b25e805db4350ba433b01dfe3c6e0.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/4cd1a50a5d4b44dea1f2d1c688bd8b5c.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/f59733bfa6cf4e0e87368a13d0cb0e4f.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/f65be17345ba45ba845398bc82ed0401.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/0b036b19bb1c4e8693b5bdc014ed591c.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/83d992d1e8c847678fb89bd9b5dd88f2.html



Additional Details


● Change Collection Segment Data for Business Partners● Assign Collection Specialists● Assign Collection Profile to Business Partners

Related Information

Schedule Collections Management Jobs

3.8.2.4 Schedule Dispute Management Jobs

With this app you can schedule periodic activities for SAP Dispute Management.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BFC (Collections and Dispute Management)



Additional Details


● Closing Dispute Cases Using Automatic Write-Off


https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/9d4699308dc84b9b83861a38a92e0faf.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/abe1ef1d313a44c3ac952993b68a56e3.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/b9223c12518e4204a01e5c50fe9edcec.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/33653f80045b457bb178c01e02033534.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/5dc76278800f4493935f35aed60629bd.html

● Automatic Creation of Dispute Cases

Related Information

Schedule Dispute Management Jobs

3.8.2.5 Data Migration: SAP Credit Management

If you want to migrate from another system to SAP S/4HANA, a new migration object for SAP Credit Management is available.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FIN-FSCM-CR


Additional Details

Find out about the migration object for SAP Credit Management: Customer - extend existing record by Credit Management data.

For more details about the migration, see the product assistance for SAP Credit Management: Data Migration

3.8.2.6 New Authorization Setup for Documented Credit Decisions

There is a new authorization setup for documented credit decisions which influences the integration of SAP Credit Management with sales and distribution (SD). This set-up is only relevant if your SAP Credit Management is running in a one-system-scenario.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/d2c3ee3a94744bff879e522a087edf52.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/f4d73d3d8b0c4320b34f55fa3f35a18a.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/d3a3eb7caa1842858bf0372e17ad3909/1909.000/en-US/824a1a1ffaf048d79d155ffa094c215a.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/d3a3eb7caa1842858bf0372e17ad3909/1909.000/en-US/824a1a1ffaf048d79d155ffa094c215a.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/0bfd0ef8ac604566b03299809b86b10e/1909.000/en-US/c732bb56fdc53d23e10000000a44147b.html

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

Business scenario:

A sales representative carries out a credit check. The credit check fails. In the background, a documented credit decision is automatically created in SAP Credit Management.

Old Authorization Concept:

To the sales representative carrying out the credit check, all authorizations necessary for creating a documented credit decision had to be assigned.

New Authorization Concept:

The sales representative doesn't need any authorizations in SAP Credit Management.

The documented credit decision is now created by the workflow user SAP_WFRT. To this user, you must assign a copy of the business role SAP_FIN_CR_DCD_WF. This business role includes all necessary authorizations for creating documented credit decisions in SAP Credit Management.


If your SAP Credit Management is running in a one-system-scenario, the system administrator must assign a copy of the business role SAP_FIN_CR_DCD_WF to the new workflow user SAP_WFRT.

Prerequisites

● In Customizing, the SAP Business Workflow is set up under the following path:SAP Netweaver Application Server Business Management SAP Business Workflow Maintain

Standard Settings● In addition, you have to activate the corresponding event type linkage:

1. Enter transaction SWE2 or choose the following path in the SAP menu:Tools Business Workflow Development Administration Event Manager Type linkages


2. Open the object type CL_UKM_DCD_WF_EVENT and set the Linkage Activated field to active.The following settings should be available:

Field Setting

Object Category CL ABAP Class

Event PUSH_DCD

Receiver Type PUSH_DCD

Receiver Call M Method

Event Delivery Using tRFC (Default)

Linkage Activated Yes

Behavior Upon Error Feedback 3 Do not change linkage

Receiver Status 0 No errors

3.8.2.7 Flexible Credit Check

A new setting in Customizing for SAP Credit Management allows you to decide which liabilities of a business partner are considered for the credit check.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You can make the setting in the new field: Credit Check

To navigate to this new field, follow these steps:

1. In the IMG, follow this path: Financial Supply Chain Management Credit Management Credit Risk Monitoring Master Data Create Credit Segments


Finance

2. Select a credit segment which is not marked as main segment and choose Details.You find the Credit Check field with a dropdown menu.

Using the dropdown menu, you can decide which liabilities of a business partner are considered for the credit check. You can decide whether the liability of the main segment only, of the chosen segment, or of both segments should be taken into account.

This way, you can differentiate the following:

● Existing functionality: You can decide whether the liability of a Business Partner in a credit segment shall contribute to the main credit segment. Set the flag in the Additive Contribution to Main Credit Segment field.

● New functionality: Independent of that setting, you can decide how the liabilities of a Business Partner in a credit segment should be considered for the credit check. Make your choice in the new Credit Check field.

You find more information in the F1 -help for these fields.


For your existing credit segments, per default the setting is selected that corresponds to your setting in the Additive Contribution to Main Credit Segment field:

● If the Additive Contribution to Main Credit Segment field is active, the following default setting is selected for your segment:Credit Check: Liability of This Segment and of the Main Segment

● If the Additive Contribution to Main Credit Segment field is not active, the following default setting is selected for your segment:Credit Check: Liability of This Segment Only

You can change this setting according to your preferences.

Related Information

Credit Segments: Attributes

3.8.2.8 Doubtful Accounts Valuation

You can now adjust the age range of the categories into which overdue receivables and the related allowances are grouped. The default is 30 / 60 / 90 days overdue, and you can change this using the new Net Due Interval filters. There are also new visual filters which can help you to focus quickly on key items, and you now also have the option to filter and display data by dunning block reason.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/8b2d8a535af43d58e10000000a174cb4.html

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2PD (Provisioning of Overdue Receivables)

Application Component FI-FIO-AR


Related Information

Doubtful Accounts Valuation

3.8.2.9 SAP CoPilot Skill: Doubtful Accounts Valuation

This skill allows you to compare the value of overdue invoices for a particular customer with the related allowances created by valuation runs as provisions against possible credit losses. The resulting entry displays the allowance and overdue amount for the customer in question - clicking on an entry displays full details.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2PD (Provisioning of Overdue Receivables)



Related Information

Skill: Doubtful Accounts Valuation


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/e1754109d75c4243bda20768a6d3340e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/6884d7c232eb4cffa2511b0a3e64838d.html

3.8.2.10 Manage Customer Line Items

You can now assign house banks and bank accounts for business partners to line items in the Edit Line Items dialog.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item J59 (Accounts Receivable)



Additional Details

If you want to edit several line items at once, note the following:

● You can change the house bank only for line items with the same company code.● You can change the bank account of the business partner only for line items with the same customer ID or

the same supplier ID.

3.8.2.11 App Extensibility: Manage Customer Line Items

This feature enables you to extend the Manage Customer Line Items app.

The Manage Customer Line Items app is based on the Customer Line Items data source. In the Data Source Extensions section of the Custom Fields and Logic app, key users can add standard SAP fields from customer master data to this data source.

Technical Details

Type New



Scope Item J59 (Accounts Receivable)



Related Information

App Extensibility: Manage Customer Line Items

3.8.2.12 Use Payment Reference to Search for Open Items (KIDNO)

In the Clear Incoming Payments and Post Incoming Payments apps, the search options have been extended: In addition to journal entry and invoice number, you can now use the payment reference (KIDNO) to search for open items.

To be able to search for open items using the payment reference, in the Edit Options for Journal Entries app, you need to select the Payment Reference as Selection Criterion field. This field has been added to the app.

The new field looks like this (image is available in English only):

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component FI-AR-AR-DP


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/6ffe0c56d46e8809e10000000a441470.html


Additional Details

Especially in Scandinavian countries, it is common practice to state a payment reference when you pay an invoice. This payment reference appears on the payee's bank statement and makes it easy to identify the invoices that have been paid.

When you create an invoice in the Create Outgoing Invoices app, you can enter the payment reference on the Payment tab in the Payment Reference field.

The screen looks like this (image is available in English only):


Until now, you could search for open items by entering an invoice or journal entry number in the Payment Reference field on the Payment Reference tab. Now you can also use the payment reference.

The screen looks like this (image is available in English only):


Related Information

Edit Options for Journal Entries: Payment Reference Option [page 71]Creating Invoices and Credit MemosPost Incoming PaymentsClear Incoming Payments

3.8.2.13 Reprocess Lockbox Items

You can now reprocess lockbox items in the Reprocess Lockbox Items app.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1JT



Related Information

Reprocess Lockbox Items

3.8.2.14 Automate Reprocessing Rules

You can now automate bank statement reprocessing rules. You do so in the Manage Bank Statement Reprocessing Rules app by selecting Automate Rule. To use this function, you need the appropriate authorization. If you activate the automation of a reprocessing rule, the rule is automated with every import of bank statements.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/7e7cd1538cdf4608e10000000a174cb4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/fc628a542f2b0165e10000000a44538d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/340f87546ccd9c62e10000000a445394.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8999cee59b7c44fdb53fbbb4d703f8e6/1909.000/en-US/f7a097eae71e4393b5d5b1a0180c5eb5.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item J59 (Accounts Receivable), 1MV (Cash Application Integration)



Additional Details

You can find the new function in the Manage Bank Statement Reprocessing Rules app as shown below:


To automate bank statement reprocessing rules, you must have the appropriate authorization. This authorization is granted using the authorization object F_RP_BUKRS.


Related Information

Manage Bank Statement Reprocessing Rules


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cb1182b4a184bdd93f8d62e3f1f0741/1909.000/en-US/d6fe6526b26f46e59d9d1dd0f7427fe3.html

3.8.3 Settlement Management

3.8.3.1 Accruals Clearing at Manual Settlement

With this feature, you can automatically distribute the entered settlement amount over the underlying condition contract settlement items during manual settlement. Two new algorithms support the distribution along the existing accruals data, or based on the condition contract settlement document, by creating sub items on the level of the split criteria defined in the profile for the business volume determination.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component LO-AB


Additional Details

The following distribution rules are defined for manual settlement processes:

● 3 Distribution Based on Accruals (CCS)● 4 Distribution Based on Settlement Document (CCS)


As a result of the automated distribution across settlement items based on the distribution rule, the right cost objects are posted to accounting and the accruals are adjusted according to the calculated amounts in pricing.

3.8.3.2 Analyze Detailed Statement: Purchasing Rebate

This app enables the user to view an itemization of the business volume for selected condition contract settlement documents. The Settlement Document Billing documents, the Goods Receipt Document and the logistics invoice verification documents will be relevant for Business Volume Base.


Technical Details

Type New





3.8.3.3 Analyze Detailed Statement: Purchasing Rebate (Accessible)

This app enables the user to view an itemization of the business volume for selected condition contract settlement documents. The Settlement Document Billing documents, the Goods Receipt Document and the logistics invoice verification documents will be relevant for Business Volume Base.

Technical Details

Type New





3.8.3.4 Analyze Detailed Statement: Sales Commission

With this app, you can view an itemization of the business volume for selected condition contract settlement documents. The Settlement Document Billing relevant for sales commission agreements with external sales agents will be the business volume base.

This app uses the C_DetStmntPurgRbteQry CDS view.


Finance

Technical Details

Type New





3.8.3.5 Analyze Detailed Statement: Sales Commission (Accessible)

With this app, you can view an itemization of the business volume for selected condition contract settlement documents. The Settlement Document Billing relevant for sales commission agreements with external sales agents will be the business volume base.

This app uses the C_DetStmntPurgRbteQrySettlement CDS view.

Technical Details

Type New





3.8.3.6 Analyze Detailed Statement: Sales Rebate

With this app, you can view an itemization of the business volume for selected condition contract settlement documents. The Settlement Document Billing documents and the Sales Orders will be relevant for Business Volume Base.

This app uses the C_DetStmntSlsRbteQr CDS view.


Technical Details

Type New





3.8.3.7 Analyze Detailed Statements: Sales Rebate (Accessible)

With this app, you can view an itemization of the business volume for selected condition contract settlement documents. The Settlement Document Billing documents and the Sales Orders will be relevant for Business Volume Base.

This app uses the C_DetStmntSlsRbteQr CDS view.

Technical Details

Type New





3.8.3.8 CDS Views for Settlement Management

Several new CDS (Core Data Services) views have been released that enable you to read configuration data and transactional data relevant for Settlement Management.


Finance

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1B6 (Sales Rebates Processing)

2TT (Sales Commissions Processing for External Sales Representatives)

2R7 (Purchasing Rebates Processing)


Available As Of SAP S/4HANA On Premise 1909

CDS Views

Business Volume

View Name Technical Name Link

Business Volume Source Document Types

I_BusVolDocCat Business Volume Source Document Types

Business Volume Source Document Type Descriptions

I_BusVolDocCatText Business Volume Source Document Type Descriptions

Settlement Document I_SettlmtDoc Settlement Document

Settlement Document Bank Data I_SettlmtDocBankData Settlement Document Bank Data

Settlement Document Item I_SettlmtDocItem Settlement Document Item

Settlement Document Item Plain Long Text

I_SettlmtDocItemPlainLongText Settlement Document Item Plain Long Text

Settlement Document Plain Long Text I_SettlmtDocPlainLongText Settlement Document Plain Long Text

Customer Settlement


Customer Settlement Item Partner I_CustSettlmtItemPartner Customer Settlement Item Partner

Customer Settlement Bank Data I_CustSettlmtBankData Customer Settlement Bank Data

Customer Settlement Document I_CustSettlmt Customer Settlement Document

Customer Settlement Item I_CustSettlmtItem Customer Settlement Item

Customer Settlement Item Plain Long Text

I_CustSettlmtItemPlainLongText Customer Settlement Item Plain Long Text

Customer Settlement Item Pricing Element

I_CustSettlmtItmPrcgElmnt Customer Settlement Item Pricing Element


https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/7f3abee0494c48338c97b57d322ed06a.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/7f3abee0494c48338c97b57d322ed06a.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/b4f7f5ad2ef64b92acda47f91dac20a0.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/b4f7f5ad2ef64b92acda47f91dac20a0.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/467cf827f0084225bbc69b8570b5f146.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/de568cdbfbb2437ab4a6ca2e2420d3ea.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/788fa4c7585e415187e347e904010cee/1908.500/en-US/4b28a3d6269f4217a98638f8f3ecc455.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/2257b948a13542cd9510c65407c293b8.html


https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/b04fb532f1914d0c8fe1babe859db615.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/d35c5d06f22244bda7d715d98ec4e0d6.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/0f2ed2f812df4354bcd25283c9fcb071.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/29050415c24d4614affb6169f01ae28f.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/90953ae084b049028129ef47450cf67c.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/1cf04520201d4c8daa6052dda8c96249.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/1cf04520201d4c8daa6052dda8c96249.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/38b6a692eeca4edba85d4a8ef7b62048.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/38b6a692eeca4edba85d4a8ef7b62048.html


Customer Settlement Partner I_CustSettlmtPartner Customer Settlement Partner

Customer Settlement Plain Long Text I_CustSettlmtPlainLongText Customer Settlement Plain Long Text

Customer Settlement Pricing Element I_CustSettlmtPrcgElmnt Customer Settlement Pricing Element

Customer Settlement List


Customer Settlement List I_CustSettlmtList Customer Settlement List

Customer Settlement List Bank Data I_CustSettlmtListBankData Customer Settlement List Bank Data

Customer Settlement List Item I_CustSettlmtListItem Customer Settlement List Item

Customer Settlement List Partner I_CustSettlmtListPartner Customer Settlement List Partner

Customer Settlement List Plain Long Text

I_CustSettlmtListPlainLongText Customer Settlement List Plain Long Text

Expense Settlement


Expense Settlement I_ExpnSettlmt Expense Settlement

Expense Settlement Bank Data I_ExpnSettlmtBankData Expense Settlement Bank Data

Expense Settlement Item I_ExpnSettlmtItem Expense Settlement Item

Expense Settlement Item Partner I_ExpnSettlmtItemPartner Expense Settlement Item Partner

Expense Settlement Item Plain Long Text

I_ExpnSettlmtItemPlainLongText Expense Settlement Item Plain Long Text

Expense Settlement Item Pricing Element

I_ExpnSettlmtItmPrcgElmn Expense Settlement Item Pricing Element

Expense Settlement Partner I_ExpnSettlmtPartner Expense Settlement Partner

Expense Settlement Plain Long Text I_ExpnSettlmtPlainLongText Expense Settlement Plain Long Text

Condition Contract


Condition Contract I_ConditionContract Condition Contract

Condition Contract Type I_CndnContrType Condition Contract Type

Condition Contract Type Text I_CndnContrTypeText Condition Contract Type Text

Settlement Document


Settlement Document I_SettlmtDoc Settlement Document

Settlement Document Customer Pricing Element

I_SettlmtDocCustPrcgElmnt Settlement Document Customer Pricing Element

Settlement Document Item I_SettlmtDocItem Settlement Document Item


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/3aaee6cd8f8c4594966a34938530f04b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/7f13ef994f0542cab0d13011288e920d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/644c856a2b9c4a56868a71ec965046ae.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/b23d532221dd4bc88ba0b5922ffdd2d5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/059ca8dc978c4cb596ea28215562f665.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/51dc90cf4bf84685aaf9c9a91dcae915.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/bbb70811de954d2abea8355e9db46b4d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/d188fcbf080640dfb2d603c880c6e8f6.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/d188fcbf080640dfb2d603c880c6e8f6.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/f8d6e2814b844470a5461eba153ec7be.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/ffaade70d55440b0b6276a6919c3866b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/a0ef78c0e6db41a2b73631ea86214f14.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/8246872334a747d996b2f191205128aa.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/52f800c8853b48bcb53a2b795190a744.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/52f800c8853b48bcb53a2b795190a744.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/bdbed4a78ae74427b66730ee4198c4f0.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/bdbed4a78ae74427b66730ee4198c4f0.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/e3151d8110f14bb89b94e41ebaba183e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/DRAFT/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/52bb48595b5c4a4993779d716f0765cb.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/73f42553057249ff91eb58cd674b9ed1.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/a94651fc9bb84e97974900b5ba71cf38.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/2e6f7a0d0a26464ebc0bf96c8ccc3347.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/467cf827f0084225bbc69b8570b5f146.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/28dcff5371da4455ac2a2cf63679cd9c.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/28dcff5371da4455ac2a2cf63679cd9c.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/4b28a3d6269f4217a98638f8f3ecc455.html


Settlement Document Item Customer Pricing Element

I_SettlmtDocItmCustPrcgElmnt Settlement Document Item Customer Pricing Element

Settlement Document Partner I_SettlmtDocPartner Settlement Document Partner

Settlement Document Item Partner I_SettlmtDocItemPartner Settlement Document Item Partner

Settlement Document Plain Long Text I_SettlmtDocPlainLongText Settlement Document Plain Long Text

Settlement Document Item Plain Long Text

I_SettlmtDocItemPlainLongText Settlement Document Item Plain Long Text

Settlement Document Partner I_SettlmtDocPartner Settlement Document Partner

Settlement Document Supplier Pricing Element

I_SettlmtDocSuplrPrcgElmnt Settlement Document Supplier Pricing Element

Settlement Document Type I_SettlmtDocType Settlement Document Type

Settlement Document Type Text I_SettlmtDocTypeText Settlement Document Type Text

Settlement Process Type


Settlement Process Type I_SettlmtProcessType Settlement Process Type

Settlement Process Type Text I_SettlmtProcessTypeText Settlement Process Type Text

3.8.3.9 Condition Contract

With this new app, you can display detailed information about your rebate and commission agreements in the form of condition contracts related to your customers, suppliers, or external sales agents. You can quickly see and analyze the most important information about your contract.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1B6 (Sales Rebate Processing)

2R7 (Purchasing Rebate Processing)

2TT (Commission)

Application Component LO-GT-CHB

Available as of SAP S/4HANA 1909


https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/ffd2706029b049dcb0faedd8bf30a417.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/ffd2706029b049dcb0faedd8bf30a417.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/a8607d15f4ae439b96dc3d4a42a1f840.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/46c240074d77476faf04bc3bd5a09b13.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/b04fb532f1914d0c8fe1babe859db615.html



https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/a8607d15f4ae439b96dc3d4a42a1f840.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/e22dcda9e39a4e2981f8d63bfa47a312.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/e22dcda9e39a4e2981f8d63bfa47a312.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/6a8846890b554c8e87814fff072549dd.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/a329cb30f7c64f2a88e9bc5239b751af.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/b301c250d0a44c44bdd4d67ce1f67ccb.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/6b5ed5846832492c9175aba30e349e8b.html

Related Information

Condition Contract (App)

3.8.3.10 Displaying Attachments for Condition Contracts

You can now filter customer condition contracts based on distribution channels and/or divisions and filter supplier condition contracts based on purchasing groups.

Technical Details

Type New




2TT (Sales Commissions - External Sales Representative)



3.8.3.11 Fiori Content for Settlement Management


Changes to Settlement Management objects related to user management and authorizations for SAP Fiori apps require that you recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/1ace2e7e04fd4fd39891a18ded8c0713.html


Scope Item Depending on the individual object:

1B6 (Sales Rebate Processing)


2TT (Sales Commissions – External Sales Representative)


LO-GT-CHG


Additional Details

NoteYou can also find information about the changes in SAP Fiori content for Settlement Management in SAP Note 2824477 .

For information about the user management and authorization content needed for new SAP Fiori apps, see the SAP Fiori apps reference library at https://fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com.

New Business Catalogs for Settlement Management

Catalog Name Description Details Related Scope Item

SAP_PRC_BC_SDOC_MON Purchasing – Monitor Settlement Documents

The business catalog contains the Monitor Settlement Documents app.


SAP_PRC_BC_SDOC_MNG Purchasing – Manage Settlement Documents

The business catalog contains the Manage Settlement Documents app.


SAP_PRC_BC_SDOC_CHG Purchasing – Change Settlement Document

This business catalog contains the navigation target to change a settlement document.


SAP_PRC_BC_CC_DSTMT Purchasing – Change Settlement Document

The business catalog contains the apps Analyze Detailed Statement – Flexible Analysis and Analyze Detailed Statement – Accessible for purchasing rebates






SAP_SD_BC_SDOC_MON Sales – Monitor Settlement Documents

The business catalog contains the Monitor Settlement Documents app.


SAP_SD_BC_SDOC_MNG Sales – Manage Settlement Documents

The business catalog contains the Manage Settlement Documents app.


SAP_SD_BC_SDOC_CHG Sales – Change Settlement Document

This business catalog contains the navigation target to change a settlement document.


SAP_SD_BC_CC_DSTMT Sales – Condition Contract Detailed Statement

The business catalog contains the apps Analyze Detailed Statement – Flexible Analysis and Analyze Detailed Statement – Accessible for purchasing rebates.


SAP_SD_BC_CC_MNGECO Sales – Manage Commissions for External Agents (Obsolete)

A successor business catalog, SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_MNG, is now available. All apps have been moved from SAP_SD_BC_CC_MNGECO to SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_MNG.


SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_MNG Sales – Manage Commissions for External Agents

The Manage Sales Commissions – External Agents app was added to the Sales – Manage Commissions for External Agents business catalog and is visible in the Sales Commissions and Incentives business group.


SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_EXT Sales – Extend Condition Contracts for External Agents

The Extend Condition Contracts app was added to the Sales – Manage Commissions for External Agents business catalog and is visible in the Sales Commissions and Incentives business group.



Finance


SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_SETLS Sales – Commissions Settlement for External Agent

The Settle Sales Commissions – External Agents app was added to the Sales – Commissions Settlement for External Agent business catalog and is visible in the Sales Commission and Incentive Processing business group.


SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_SETLS_COR

Sales – Reverse or Correct Settlements of Commissions for External Agent

The business catalog contains the following apps:

● Correct Settlements – External Agent Contracts

● Reverse Settlement Documents – Condition Contracts

● Reverse Accruals – External Agent Contracts

● Update Accruals – External Agent Contracts

These apps are visible in the Sales Commission and Incentive Processing business group.


SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_ANLYS Sales – Business Analysis for External Agents


● Display Settlement Calendars – Condition Contracts

● Display Business Volume – Condition Contracts





SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_JOBS Sales – Periodic Activities for External Agent Commission Settlement


● Schedule Contract Settlement – External Agent Contracts

● Schedule Accruals Reversal – External Agent Contracts

● Schedule Accruals Update – External Agent Contracts

These apps are visible in the Periodic Activities for Sales Commissions and Incentives business group.


SAP_SD_BC_SDOC_EC_MON Sales – Monitor Settlement Documents for External Agents

The Monitor Settlement Documents app was added to the Sales – Monitor Settlement Documents for External Agents business catalog and is visible in the Sales Commission and Incentive Processing business group.


SAP_SD_BC_CC_EC_DSTMT Sales – Analyze Detailed Statement for External Agent Commissions


● Analyze Detailed Statement – Flexible Analysis

● Analyze Detailed Statement – Accessible

The Analyze Detailed Statement – Flexible Analysis app is visible in the Periodic Activities for Sales Commissions and Incentives business group.



Finance


SAP_SD_BC_PSDOC_MNG Sales – Manage Personnel Settlements


● Manage Personnel Settlement Documents

● Release Documents – Personnel Settlements


Not applicable

SAP_SD_BC_PSDOC_MON Sales – Monitor Personnel Settlement Documents

The Monitor Personnel Settlement Documents app was added to the Sales – Monitor Personnel Settlement Documents business catalog and becomes visible in the Sales Commission and Incentive Processing business group.

Not applicable

SAP_SD_BC_PSDOC_JOBS Sales – Periodic Activities for Personnel Commission Settlement

The Schedule Document Release – Personnel Settlements app was added to the Sales – Periodic Activities for Personnel Commission Settlement business catalog and becomes visible in the Periodic Activities for Sales Commissions and Incentives business group.

Not applicable

SAP_SD_BC_PSDOC_IMP_JOB

Sales – Periodic Commission Data Import

The Schedule Commission Data Import – Personnel Settlements app was added to the Sales – Periodic Commission Data Import business catalog and is visible in the Integration for SAP Commissions business group.

Not applicable



SAP_SM_BC_ABDOC_CONFIGURE

Settlement Management – Settlement Management Document Configuration


● Manage Workflows for Settlement Documents

● Manage Workflows for Personnel Settlement Documents

These apps are visible in the Settlement Management Configuration business group.

Not applicable

SAP_SM_BC_CC_CONFIGURE Settlement Management – Condition Contract Configuration

The Manage Workflows for Condition Contracts app was added to the Settlement Management – Condition Contract Configuration business catalog and is visible in the Settlement Management Configuration business group.

Not applicable

New and Renamed Business Groups for Settlement Management

Group Name Description Details Related Scope Item

SAP_LO_BCG_SETMAN_CC_JOB

Periodic Activities for Condition Contracts

The business group has been renamed.

Not applicable

SAP_PRC_BCG_CC_MANAGE Purchasing Rebates The business group has been renamed.


SAP_PRC_BCG_CC_SETTLE Purchasing Rebate Processing



SAP_SD_BCG_CC_MANAGE Sales Rebates The business group has been renamed.


SAP_SD_BCG_CC_SETTLE Sales Rebate Processing The business group has been renamed.


SAP_SD_BCG_COM_MANAGE Sales Commissions and Incentives




Finance

Group Name Description Details Related Scope Item

SAP_SD_BCG_COM_SETTLE Sales Commission and Incentive Processing

The business group Sales Commission and Incentive Processing has been created.


SAP_SD_BCG_COM_SCHEDULE

Periodic Activities for Sales Commissions and Incentives

The business group Periodic Activities for Sales Commissions and Incentives has been created.


SAP_SD_BCG_COM_INTEG Integration for SAP Commissions

The business group Integration for SAP Commissions has been created.

Not applicable

SAP_SM_BCG_CONFIGURE Settlement Management Configuration

The business group Settlement Management Configuration has been created.

Not applicable

See Also

For more information about user management and authorizations, see the SAP S/4HANA UI Technology Guide on SAP Help Portal at https://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909.

3.8.3.12 Freight Cost Distribution Enhancements

New transfer events are available that allow you to transfer data from different reference documents to a freight settlement document by configuration.

These new events allow you to apply your business requirements in an efficient, controlled, and transparent way. You can reuse transfer groups, transfer rules, and source value classes to minimize the effort and risks involved in implementation.

Technical Details

Type New



https://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909




Additional Details

You can find the new transfer events under the following names:

● T1: TM: Transfer Purchase Order Data● T2: TM: Transfer Sales Order Data● T3: TM: Transfer Delivery Data


The new transfer events are called directly before the corresponding Business Add-In (BAdI) methods are processed.

3.8.3.13 Manage Personnel Settlement Documents

With this app, you can manage commissions more effectively by displaying and processing the employees corresponding personnel settlement documents.

Technical Details

Type New






Finance

Additional Details

In this app, you can check the status of personnel settlement documents, edit them manually, analyze them, block individual documents from further processing, or release them to Accounting.

Related Information

Manage Personnel Settlement Documents

3.8.3.14 Manage Settlement Documents

With this app, you are able to easily manage multiple settlement documents with the ability to quickly search and display them. The new list report based layout not only shows significant performance improvements, but also provides you with the most relevant fields for filtering and display. Furthermore, the app now provides a detailed view of a settlement document providing information about the settlement partners, amounts, administrational data, contractual data as well as the documents items.

Technical Details

Type Changed







Related Information

Monitor Settlement DocumentsMonitor Personnel Settlement Documents


https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/7c11b25369344f1990c5bdb1d76942dd.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/eef3323d0ad246bca5b6f7b448b29020.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/6989b9fb88874feea2407815b949ec12.html

3.8.3.15 Manage Workflows - Condition Contracts

With this app you can configure automatic workflows for the process of releasing condition contracts. Based on the conditions you define for the workflow, an approver can approve, reject, or send documents for rework to the document initiator.

Technical Details

Type New




2TT (Sales Commissions Processing - External Sales Representatives)

Application Component LO-GT-CHB (Charge Back)



For information about the steps required to set up workflows before configuring a release workflow, see Workflows for Settlement Management.

Related Information

Manage Workflows - Condition Contracts

3.8.3.16 Monitor Personnel Settlement Documents

With this app, you can get an overview over the total amount of commissions that were paid or deducted within any given time period and filter the total amount by quarter and/or compensation reason.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/393be683589143a0bd1300aa3effe7ad.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/9116c38d91e142febe084c6bf761e5e9.html

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Monitor Personnel Settlement Documents

3.8.3.17 Monitor Settlement Documents

The Manage Settlement Documents app has been renamed. The name of the app is now Monitor Settlement Documents and it provides the same features and functions as the app version delivered with the previous release.

Technical Details

Type Changed








https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/6989b9fb88874feea2407815b949ec12.html

Related Information

Monitor Settlement Documents

3.8.3.18 New CDS View for Business Volume Determination

A new CDS (Core Data Services) view is available that you can use in condition contract settlement to ensure that business volume is determined correctly. This view enables you to read incoming supplier invoices that were created online or through batch processing.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component LO-GT-CHB (Charge Back)



You need to define a new profile for the determination of business volume data in Customizing for Logistics - General under Settlement Management Condition Contract Management Condition Contract SettlementDefine and Configure Profiles for Business Volume Determination . In the Business Volume Table field, assign

view V_WB2_RBKP_RSEG_2.

A profile is a central parameter used to determine the business volume data for the settlement process of condition contracts. You need to assign it to a condition contract type.

Related Information

CDS Views for Settlement Management [page 224]


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/eef3323d0ad246bca5b6f7b448b29020.html

3.8.3.19 New Control Parameter for Material Validity Check

A new control parameter that determines whether a material requires a validity check is now available on settlement document type level.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

This feature enables you to determine if a validity check has to be executed or not, based on your business requirements. This check is not needed in a pool payment or condition contract settlement scenario, because you have to accept the invoice based on your contractual obligations. An inventory related scenario on the other hand requires this check to avoid inventory updates after the valid to date of the material.

3.8.3.20 New Control Parameter for Profitability Segment Determination

You can now use a new control parameter at settlement document type level to define which customer number from the settlement document is used as customer for the profitability analysis. Instead of passing the payer as a customer to the coding block, you can now define which customer number should be used.

Technical Details

Type New






Additional Details

The following settings can be made:

● Payer● Bill-To Party● Customer from Item / Payer:

Settlement document lists: If the payer on item level is filled, this customer is used, otherwise the payer from the header is used.Settlement documents: If the customer field on item level is filled, this customer is used, otherwise the payer from the header is used.

● Customer from Item / Bill-To Party:Settlement document lists: If the bill-to party on item level is filled, this customer is used, otherwise the bill-to party from the header is used.Settlement documents: If the customer field on item level is filled, this customer is used, otherwise the bill-to party from the header is used.

3.8.3.21 New Display Variant for Amount and Quantity Fields

This feature enables you to define, at settlement document type level, how the system should consider the amount and quantity fields during list reporting according to your business processes.

Type New





Additional Details

To use the pre-defined settings at list processing, you have to choose the value Apply Setting of Settlement Document Type for the parameter that controls the sign of the amount and quantity fields.


Finance

3.8.3.22 New Events for the Transfer of Partner Data

Partner data can now be transferred to a target structure using the transfer manager. This helps you to easily map additional business partners, like a ship-to party, to the KOMK or COBL structures, for example.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

The feature is now available for the following events:

● 01 Profitability Analysis● 02 Customer Profitability Analysis● 20 Fill Pricing Header Supplier● 21 Fill Pricing Header Customer● 22 Fill Pricing Item Supplier● 23 Fill Pricing Item Customer

A dedicated source value class to perform the mapping and field transfer is also provided.

3.8.3.23 New Settlement Capabilities for Non-Goods-Related Condition Contracts

The condition contract process variant now also covers company code specific parameters to control the settlement of non-goods-related condition contracts.


Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

In the standard sales and purchase rebate settlement processes for non-goods-related contracts, the system will determine the required tax code via pricing by using the full tax rate indicator. For certain settlement scenarios, though, the tax code determination follows a different rule. Therefore, you can now specify an alternative tax indicator at process variant and company code level for non-goods-related scenarios. This alternative tax indicator will then be passed to the pricing application to derive the required tax code and rates.

3.8.3.24 New Visual Filters for Condition Contracts

This new feature enables you to use additional filters for condition contracts in the Settlement Management apps Manage Supplier Condition Contracts, Manage Customer Condition Contracts, and Manage Sales Commissions.

Technical Details

Type New




2TT (Sales Commissions - External Sales Representative)




Finance

Additional Details

You can now filter your customer condition contracts based on distribution channels and/or divisions and your supplier condition contracts based on purchasing groups.

3.8.3.25 OData Service for Personnel Settlement Document Retrieval

This new service enables you to read header and cost center related data of personnel settlement documents that represent payments to an employee. It is based on the OData protocol and is intended for application integration scenarios.

Technical Details

OData Service: Personnel Settlement Document – Read (API_PERS_SETTLMT_DOC)

Type New





Related Information

OData Service for Personnel Settlement Document Retrieval

3.8.3.26 OData Service for Reading Condition Contract Types

The new service Condition Contract Type - Read enables you to read condition contract type master data in an API call. It is based on the OData protocol and can be consumed in SAP Fiori apps or other user interfaces.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/f196aa7b945547b99f58896ee3d3f8d4.html

Technical Details

Type New




2TT (Sales Commissions Processing for External Agents)



Related Information

OData Service for Reading Condition Contract Types

3.8.3.27 Release Documents - Personnel Settlement

With this app you can search for groups of personnel settlement documents and perform mass releases to Financial Accounting.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You can use this app to find and release a group of personnel settlement documents manually that were blocked from an automatic posting to accounting.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/9fa139d692dd43e7af01343a1e5ff9ec.html

For the release of individual personnel settlement documents, please see Manage Personnel Settlement Documents

Related Information

Release Documents – Personnel Settlement

3.8.3.28 Renamed Scheduling Apps

The scheduling apps for Settlement Management were renamed for technical reasons.

Technical Details

Type Changed







Additional Details

The following scheduling apps were renamed:

Scheduling Apps for Settlement Management

Previous Name New Name

Schedule Import of Commission Data - Personnel Settlements

Schedule Commission Data Import - Personnel Settlement

Schedule Job for Document Output - Settlement Management

Schedule Document Output - Settlement Management

Schedule Job to Collect Documents - Settlement Document Schedule Document Collection - Settlement Document




https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/4817b52b0b1b44ba8d94a10aefde326f.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/6ee181fa932f4fa6b77208f37a0454ec.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/1fc649587272a007e10000000a441470.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/960402a64b4c498ab0f4db710430a382.html


Schedule Job to Release Documents - Personnel Settlements Schedule Document Release - Personnel Settlement

Schedule Job to Release Documents - Settlement Management

Schedule Document Release - Settlement Management

Schedule Job to Reverse Documents - Settlement Management

Schedule Document Reversal - Settlement Management

Scheduling Apps for Condition Contract Management


Schedule Job for Accruals Reversal - Customer Contracts Schedule Accruals Reversal - Customer Contracts

Schedule Job for Accruals Reversal - Supplier Contracts Schedule Accruals Reversal - Supplier Contracts

Schedule Job for Contract Settlement - Customer Contracts Schedule Document Output - Settlement Management

Schedule Job for Contract Settlement - Supplier Contracts Schedule Document Output - Settlement Management

Schedule Job to Update Accruals - Customer Contracts Schedule Accruals Update - Customer Contracts

Schedule Job to Update Accruals - Supplier Contracts Schedule Accruals Update - Supplier Contracts

Related Information

Schedule Document Release - Personnel Settlement [page 248]Schedule Accruals Update - External Agent Contracts [page 249]Schedule Accruals Reversal - External Agent Contracts [page 250]Schedule Contract Settlement - External Agent Contracts [page 250]

3.8.3.29 Schedule Document Release - Personnel Settlement

With this app you can schedule jobs to perform a mass release of personnel settlement management documents to Financial Accounting.

Technical Details

Type New



Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/0b9c7887a2ad4189b78cf71de9801222.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/07c949587272a007e10000000a441470.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/d547ed6a80c145d4ba849f3d48f61683.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/50fd49588e0a0a02e10000000a44147b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/74ef5f571cd26a2be10000000a441470.html



https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/09e64288542042289549b843d5e761d0.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/946866e52f32441192b99d93ef6b80aa.html




Additional Details

As a result of the scheduling job, the accounting status of the document is adjusted for each successfully processed personnel settlement document and a journal entry is created (if needed). In case of errors, corresponding error messages are stored in the spool and/or the application log.

Related Information

Schedule Document Release - Personnel Settlement

3.8.3.30 Schedule Accruals Update - External Agent Contracts

This new feature enables you to create and schedule jobs to update the accruals for changed condition contracts that are relevant to external agents’ commissions settlements. An update is required when you change accruals relevant data retroactively, for example, the condition rate.

For each contract matching your selection and which requires a retroactive accrual update, an update of the accruals is performed and corresponding settlement documents are created during the updating process.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2TT (Sales Commissions Processing for External Sales Representatives)




https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/0b9c7887a2ad4189b78cf71de9801222.html

3.8.3.31 Schedule Accruals Reversal - External Agent Contracts

This new feature enables you to create and schedule jobs to reverse open accruals for obsolete condition contracts that were relevant to external agents’ commissions settlements.

For obsolete contracts matching your selection criteria, all accruals created after the last settlement are selected and reversed during the reversal process.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Schedule Accruals Reversal - External Agent Contracts

3.8.3.32 Schedule Contract Settlement - External Agent Contracts

This feature enables you to create and schedule a job for the settlement of external agents’ commissions.

For each settlement date of a selected condition contract matching your selection, one or more settlement documents will be generated during the settlement run.

Technical Details

Type New


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/ec717028a1474c869356f0cf92384375.html





3.8.3.33 Working with Long Texts

The condition contract and the settlement document both provide you with a set of text types to maintain long texts in different languages at the level of your choice.

Technical Details

Type New







Additional Details

Some text types are predefined as external. These texts are foreseen to be part of forms when printing settlement documents.

Related Information

Working with Long Texts


https://help.sap.com/viewer/f89cf0387e8a460c8a37990b268da59f/1909.000/en-US/cb35f86456724087865be54819b6fb57.html

3.8.4 Integration with SAP S/4HANA Contract Accounting (FI-CA) and SAP S/4HANA Cloud for Central Payment Management

This scope item describes the steps required to integrate SAP S/4HANA Contract Accounting (FI-CA) with SAP S/4HANA Cloud for central payment management, which is based on the SAP Cloud Platform.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item Central Payment Management (42Y)

Application Component FIN-FSCM-DP-CPM


Additional Details

As part of the integration scenario, central payment management receives payment batches from the SAP S/4HANA system as well as from a non-SAP system via SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity. Central payment management also retrieves data regarding bank accounts and signatories from Bank Account Management.

For detailed information about the central payment management app, see the administration guide and the security guide.

Related Information

https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/CENTRALPAYMENTMANAGEMENT


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/CENTRALPAYMENTMANAGEMENT

3.9 Billing and Revenue Innovation Management

3.9.1 Convergent Invoicing

3.9.1.1 Display Consumption Items

With this app you can search for and display consumption items for Convergent Invoicing. These consumption items provide the basis for the rating process.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-CA-INV-FIO


Related Information

Display Consumption Items

3.9.1.2 Create Credit/Debit Memos - Mass Processing

With this app you can create credit memos and debit memos for large numbers of invoicing documents. You use credit memos and debit memos to adjust the amount already invoiced to a customer, without changing the original invoice. In cases where it is not possible to reverse the invoicing document, the combination of original invoicing document and credit memo or debit memo determines the effective amount invoiced to the customer.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/fc005cff24e9430691c1e05ffd5f0eee/1909.000/en-US/4c7240705a4f49caa7dc3d201864e41d.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-CA-INV-FIO


Related Information

Create Credit/Debit Memos - Mass Processing

3.9.2 Receivables Management and Payment Handling

3.9.2.1 Access to Other Apps in the Fiori Launchpad

In the Fiori launchpad, you can now access more business roles with the apps assigned to them.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-CA-FIO (Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable)



Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/fc005cff24e9430691c1e05ffd5f0eee/1909.000/en-US/8161c8dc014e490fa7d400680cc674c2.html

Additional Details

The enhancements include the following business roles and their assigned apps:

● Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable (FI-CA)● Accounts Payable/Receivable Manager (FI-CA).● Collections Specialist (FI-CA)● Administrator - Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA)● Reconciliation Specialist - Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable (FI-CA)

Related Information

Access to the System

3.9.2.2 New Fiori Apps

You can use the new Fiori apps Display Payment List, Find Payments in Lots, Find Payments in Payment Runs, Display Correspondence, Maintain Dunning Notices, and Display Saved Open Item Lists.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-CA-FIO (Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable)


Additional Details

Previously, you could access the payment list in the menu of the payment run (transaction FPY1), under Environment Payment List .

The Find Payments in Lots and Find Payments in Payment Runs apps replace the transactions FP30 and FP31 for searching for payments.

The Display Correspondence app replaces the transaction for displaying the correspondence history (transaction CORRHIST).


https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/436417569c260033e10000000a44538d.html

The Maintain Dunning Notices app replaces the transaction for displaying the dunning history (transaction FPM3).

If you create key-date-based open item lists using transactions FPO1 or FPO4 and save the lists (the Save Data indicator is set), you can use the Display Saved Open Item Lists app to display these lists.

Related Information

Display Payment ListsSearch PaymentsDisplay CorrespondenceMaintain Dunning NoticesDisplay Saved Open Item Lists

3.9.2.3 Processing Incoming Payments by Using Lockbox

If you use a lockbox service to receive payments from your customers, you can now process the bank files with the check information.

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization United States of America


Application Component FI-CA-BT-PY-PP (Processing Incoming and Outgoing Payments)


Additional Details

Lockbox

In the transaction for transferring data from the electronic bank statement (FPB7), select bank statements of bank statement type 0003 for transfer to a FI-CA payment lot. When you execute the transaction, the system creates a payment advice note containing all the checks from the lockbox file. The check lot is the only item to contain this payment advice note.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/2aa57d10a4614be0a2456978a8f295e7/1909.000/en-US/fc8f3d5f518b4543b9a24b6a403665b8.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/2aa57d10a4614be0a2456978a8f295e7/1909.000/en-US/0050bc85850b449aa0f9fa817282fd48.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/eb16822832b84f6697ee9f3ead4df9eb/1909.000/en-US/8e398d0f7ffc4f15931506e3fa2b1c34.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/48375168261046a68260fcb73338ac37/1909.000/en-US/2bb4904f8e9e4eea88d245f6947c53cf.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/00de05e2fb6349f089dc4e59c47e2ce3/1909.000/en-US/ccefcf7f35a24994a47cde04d0bf49c9.html

Related Information

Importing Electronic Account InformationLockbox

3.9.2.4 API: Contract Accounting - SEPA Mandate Create, Read, Update

You can use the OData service Contract Accounting - SEPA Mandate Create, Read, Update (technical service name API_O2C_FICA_SEPA_MANDATE_SRV) to create, update, and read SEPA mandates in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable.

You can also use the API to create and read the use of SEPA mandates in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-CA-BT-PY (Payments)


Related Information

APIs

3.9.2.5 Replication of Provider Contracts to SAP CC

If you use Billing and Revenue Innovation Management (BRIM), SAP Convergent Charging (SAP CC) creates a subscriber account for each business partner for master data distribution in the standard system. If several provider contracts are assigned to business partners, this can leader to longer runtimes during rating. Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable creates a separate customer account for each provider contract in SAP CC so that the workload can be distributed to the raters in a highly effective manner in a B2B scenario such as this. Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable receives the information about the several subscriber accounts that are to be created for a provider contract in SAP CC from the front-end system.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/2240005993f2429088e42085ebf697c5/1909.000/en-US/6d0ac5536a51204be10000000a174cb4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8999cee59b7c44fdb53fbbb4d703f8e6/1909.000/en-US/99bdd153e8b34208e10000000a174cb4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e88ba58a6e71437caa4e67d6bc456a00/1909.000/en-US/cfb039eb921c43bb85cf82bb24b92d73.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item Not relevant

Application Component FI-CA-INV


Additional Details

The provider contracts in question are indicated (indicator ASUAC) as an alternative subscriber account in a scenario such as this in the S/4HANA system.

The indicator alternative subscriber account is displayed for supervising the provider contract replication (transaction FKKCC_PC_MON) in a separate column as well as by displaying a provider contract under General Data (transaction FP_VT3).


Related Information

Account Split [page 539]Replication of Subscription Contracts to FI-CA and SAP CChttp://help.sap.com/BRIM

3.9.2.6 Value Adjustment According to IFRS9

You can now use a risk class defined in the business partner to make a flat-rate value adjustment of receivables due and not yet due according to IFRS 9. In this way, you can post the expected loss as an expense for the total amount of receivables depending on the risk class and age grid of the receivables.


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/95ad0cb1c441447888d695da7f3fd3d9/1909.000/en-US/7f5382e0345c42fcbad893164f2fe7f4.html

http://help.sap.com/BRIM

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-CA-BT (Business Transactions)


Additional Details

The calculation of total amounts are carried out as a flat-rate individual value adjustment for each receivable.

The system calculates the value adjustment of the open net value of the receivable at the valuation date and posts the reset value adjustment (for example on payment or when written off) on separate accounts (in accordance with IFRS 9).


Define the corresponding account determination in Customizing for Contract Accounts Payable and Receivable under Business Transactions Doubtful Entries and Value Adjustment in the activities Maintain Flat-Rate Value Adjustment Account Determination, and Alternative Account for the Resetting of Flat-Rate Value Adjustments.

Maintain the percentages for the flat-rate value adjustments in Customizing for General Ledger Accounting under Periodic Processing Enhanced Valuation in General Ledger Accounting Define Rates for Expected Losses .

Related Information

Receivables Marked as Doubtful and Value Adjustments

3.9.2.7 Integration with Revenue Accounting (FI-RA)

As part of the migration, you can use the transaction Prepare Operative Load (FP_RAI_OL) to load records for stock data, such as the provider contract items, billable items (including one-off charges), and invoice items to revenue accounting.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/00de05e2fb6349f089dc4e59c47e2ce3/1909.000/en-US/b1e9c5536a51204be10000000a174cb4.html

You can now also undo the migration by running the transaction Prepare Operative Load with the Reset data option.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-CA-IN (Integration)


Additional Details

If you reset the migration, the provider contract items, invoice items, billing document items and billable items in Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable are reset to the status prior to the preparation of the operative load. Doing this, for example, deletes the relevance indicator for revenue accounting from the corresponding data records. The transfer records and legacy data generated by the operating data transfer are deleted.

After you have reset the data, you can prepare the operational load again.

Related Information

Loading of Revenue Accounting Items for Inventory Data

3.9.2.8 Integration with General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL)

You can configure your system so that manually posted and reversed FI-CA documents are updated directly in the general ledger.

Technical Details

Type New


Finance

https://help.sap.com/viewer/979f2dc95c9140af90c00d382693d820/1909.000/en-US/18110657b6279517e10000000a4450e5.html



Application Component FI-CA-IN-GL (General Ledger Accounting)



You activate the direct posting in Customizing for Contract Accounts Receivable and Payable under Integration General Ledger Accounting Define Direct G/L Transfer for Document Origins .

Related Information

Direct Update of the General Ledger

3.9.2.9 Archiving Deferred Revenues

You archive event-based deferred revenues by using the archiving object FI_MKKDRE. For archiving mass data, there is a mass activity for archiving deferred revenues (transaction FPDR_BY_EVENT_ARCM).

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-CA-IN (Integration)


Related Information

Archiving Event-Based Deferred Revenues (FI_MKKDRE)


https://help.sap.com/viewer/979f2dc95c9140af90c00d382693d820/1909.000/en-US/ac1614c1472d488fa97289416c07f19e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/00de05e2fb6349f089dc4e59c47e2ce3/1909.000/en-US/672257efc0d14ae3abfa4f07561ba126.html

3.10 Governance, Risk, and Compliance for Finance

3.10.1 International Trade

3.10.1.1 FIORI Content for International Trade

Changes to International Trade objects related to user management and authorizations for Fiori apps are delivered with this release. These objects include, for example, business catalogs, technical catalogs, business role templates, and target mappings.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Application Component All Finance components


Additional Details

Details about the changes for International Trade are summarized in in the following SAP Notes:

Affected content Related software component Link to SAP Note

Fiori content for International Trade UIS4HOP1 and S4CORE 2824597 - Release Information: Changes in SAP Fiori Content for International Trade in SAP S/4HANA 1909

For more details about the Finance applications affected by changes to value help authorizations, see Value Help Authorizations in Finance [page 53].


See Also

For more information about user management and authorizations, see the SAP S/4HANA UI Technology Guide on the SAP Help Portal at http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909.


Finance




3.10.1.2 Change Management: Retirement of Web GUI App Manage Commodity Codes

The Manage Commodity Codes (/SAPSLL/CLSNR_01) app is removed from the business catalog SAP_SLL_BC_CLS_CMMDTYCODE and technical catalog SAP_TC_SLL_BE_APPS with SAP S/4HANA OP1909. The successor app has the Fiori ID F2516.

Technical Details

Type Deleted


Scope Item BDT, 1W8, 2U3

Application Component SLL-ITR-CLS


3.10.1.3 Change Management: Retirement of Web GUI App Manage Intrastat Service Codes

The Manage Intrastat Service Codes ( /SAPSLL/CLSNR_03) app is removed from the business catalog SAP_SLL_BC_CLS_ISSRVCCODE and technical catalog SAP_TC_SLL_BE_APPS with SAP S/4HANA 1909. The successor app has the Fiori ID F2517.

Technical Details

Type Deleted


Scope Item BDT

Application Component SLL-ITR-ISR



3.10.1.4 Classification for International Trade

3.10.1.4.1 Manage Content from Data Provider - Customs Tariff Numbers

You can use this app to display and activate data from external data providers. The data is provided as an inactive version for checking and you can activate it to use it then for your product classification. You can display the content of the data package using the details screen of the respective version. Before you can activate the data in your system, the data is subject to a consistency check and then an activation check. The data contains customs tariff numbers.

Technical Details

Product Feature is New


Used in Scope Item 2U3

Application Component SLL-ITR-CLS (International Trade Classification)


3.10.1.4.2 Schedule Content Request to Data Provider - Customs Tariff Numbers

You can regularly schedule requests to your external data providers to receive updated and new versions. These versions are then available in the Manage Data from Data Provider – Customs Tariff Numbers app.

Technical Details



Used in Scope Item 2U3



Finance


3.10.1.4.3 Manage Content from Data Provider - Control Classes

You can use this app to display and activate data from external data providers. The data is provided as an inactive version for checking and you can activate it to use it then for your product classification. You can display the content of the data package using the details screen of the respective version. Before you can activate the data in your system, the data is subject to a consistency check and then an activation check. The data contains control classes.

Technical Details



Used in Scope Item 1W8



3.10.1.4.4 Schedule Content Request to Data Provider – Control Classes

You can regularly schedule requests to your external data providers to receive updated and new versions. These versions are then available in the Manage Data from Data Provider – Control Classes app.

Technical Details



Used in Scope Item 1W8




3.10.1.4.5 Classify Products - Commodity Codes

You can use this app to assign another commodity code time-dependently to unclassified products.

As a new key feature, you can now add a remark during classification of a product.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2U3


(International Trade Classification)


3.10.1.4.6 Reclassify Products - Commodity Codes

You can use this app to assign another commodity code time-dependently to classified products.

As a new key feature, you can now add a remark during reclassification of a product.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2U3


Finance




3.10.1.4.7 Classify Products - Legal Control

You can use this app to classify products for legal control time-dependently, to define the control relevance of products and to assign control classes and control groups to the products. You can find unclassified products at a particular time for a legal regulation. Additionally, you can assign multiple products to a classification for the legal control.

As a new key feature, you can now add a remark during classification of a product

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1W8




3.10.1.4.8 Reclassify Products - Legal Control

You can use this app to assign another control class and/or control grouping to classified products, and decide if these are relevant for control.



Technical Details

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1W8




3.10.1.4.9 Classify Products - Customs Tariff Numbers

You can use this app to assign a customs tariff number time-dependently to unclassified products.


Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2U3




3.10.1.4.10 Reclassify Products - Customs Tariff Numbers

You can use this app to assign another customs tariff number time-dependently to classified products.



Finance

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2U3




3.10.1.4.11 Classify Products - Intrastat Service Codes

You can use this app to assign an Intrastat service code time-dependently to unclassified products.


Technical Details

Type Changed

Functional Localization Localized for Italy

Scope Item BDT




3.10.1.4.12 Reclassify Products - Intrastat Service Codes


Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BDT




3.10.1.4.13 Display Classified Products - International Trade

You can use this app to display products which have been classified with a code number, like commodity codes, customs tariff numbers, legal control relevant attributes or intrastat service codes.

You can display classification remarks created during classification/reclassification of a product, classification history, as well as changed documents.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BDT, 1W8, 2U3




3.10.1.4.14 Display International Trade Classification

You can display classification information for all active numbering schemes and legal regulations currently valid for the selected product. You can call up this function via the Manage Product Master Data app.


Finance

Technical Details

Type New






3.10.1.5 International Trade Compliance

3.10.1.5.1 Display License Assignments - Trade Compliance

You can use this app to display documents that are assigned to licenses and to receive an overview of open depreciation values and quantities.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1W8

Application Component SLL-ITR-TRC

(International Trade Compliance)


3.10.1.5.2 Integration of Purchasing Contracts for Embargo and SAP Watch List Screening

The purchasing contracts are integrated in the following business processes:

● Embargo● SAP Watch List Screening


These business processes are processed in the following apps:

● Manage Documents- Trade Compliance● Resolve Blocked Documents- Trade Compliance● Schedule Postprocessing - SAP Watch List Screening

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1WC, 1WE

Application Component SLL-ITR-TRC


3.10.1.6 GTS Integration

3.10.1.6.1 Schedule Transfer of Procurement Indicators – Global Trade Services

You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your procurement indicators to SAP Global Trade Services.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3JX

Application Component SLL-ITR-INT-GTS(Integration with SAP Global Trade Services)



Finance

3.10.1.6.2 Schedule Transfer of Product Prices – Global Trade Services

You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your product prices to SAP Global Trade Services.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3JX

Application Component SLL-ITR-INT-GTS (Integration with SAP Global Trade Services)


3.10.1.6.3 Schedule Transfer of Min./Max. Product Prices – Global Trade Services

You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your min./max. product prices to SAP Global Trade Services.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3JX




3.10.1.6.4 Schedule Transfer of Supplier Product Names – Global Trade Services

You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your supplier product names to SAP Global Trade Services.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3JX



3.10.1.6.5 Schedule Transfer of Customer Product Names – Global Trade Services

You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your customer product names to SAP Global Trade Services.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3JX




Finance

3.10.1.6.6 Schedule Transfer of Purchasing Documents - Global Trade Services

You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your purchasing documents to SAP Global Trade Services.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3JX



3.10.1.6.7 Schedule Transfer of Material Documents - Global Trade Services

You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your material documents to SAP Global Trade Services.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3JX




3.10.1.6.8 Schedule Transfer of Billing Documents - Global Trade Services

You can use this app to schedule the transfer of your billing documents to SAP Global Trade Services.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3JX



3.10.1.7 Intrastat

3.10.1.7.1 Reuse of address data for company code in provider of information

Prior to SAP S/4HANA 1909, users had to enter the following address data for providers of information in the Manage Providers of Information app:

● Name● Street/House Number● Postal Code● City● Phone● Fax

The address data for the company code is the same as for providers of information, so it can be reused.

Therefore - as of SAP S/4HANA 1909 - the address data for providers of information is no longer entered in the Manage Providers of Information app, but is reused from the address data for company code.

This address data for the company code is displayed in the Manage Providers of Information app and used in the Manage Intrastat Declarations app when creating the declaration file (if the country-specific file format requires the address data).

After the upgrade to SAP S/4HANA 1909, check the completeness and correctness of the address data for company code in the Manage Providers of Information app. If there is missing or incorrect address data, update the address data for the company code in the Implementation Guide.


Finance

Be aware that all changes to the address data for the company code will be applied for providers of information.

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for all 26 countries that support Intrastat in SAP S/4HANA 1909

Scope Item BDT

Application Component SLL-ITR-ISR





3.12.1 Lease-In Accounting (1T6)

Use


● General letter as part of the Output management that allows letter with free text field to be sent to customers or vendors.

● Extensibility of certain fields in the contract that enables customers to substitute or insert some prefixes or fill out some fields in the contract name auto-fill, for example the customer can use the contract type and contract object name as prefix.

● Lease questionnaire - a questionnaire for leasing scenarios that helps simplify lease classifications.● Two new chats form part of the Valuation cockpit and offer an overview of the status of the valuation.● CDS views for contract master data as well as one for the contract object types that enable the customers

to make their own customized reports.


Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1T6 ( Lease-In Accounting )


Application Component RE-FX



Australia, Canada, Switzerland, Germany, Spain, France, Great Britain, Japan, Netherlands, Portugal, United States of America, South Africa


3.12.2 Period-End Closing - Plant (BEI)

Use


● You can perform the settlement of co-products and by-products.● You can now assign source G/L Accounts for Work in Process capitalization, so that Work in Process can be

capitalized according to this assignment.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1T6

Scope Item BEI ( Period-End Closing - Plant )


Application Component FI-CO





3.12.3 Service Contract (21R)

Use


● General letter as part of Output management that allows letter with free text field to be sent to customers or vendors.

● Extensibility of certain fields in the contract that enable customers to substitute or insert some prefixes or fill out some fields in the contract name auto-fill, for example the customer can use the contract type and contract object name as prefix.

● Lease questionnaire - a questionnaire for leasing scenarios that helps simplify lease classifications.● CDS views for contract master data as well as one for the contract object types that enable the customers


Technical Details

Type Changed


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FBEI


Scope Item 21R ( Service Contract )





United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Czech Republic, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa


3.12.4 Accounting for Incoming Sales Orders (2FD)

Use


● Quality improvement of existing processes● Monitoring UI for Predictive Accounting

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2FD ( Accounting for Incoming Sales Orders )



Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F21R




United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Brazil, Canada, Switzerland, China, Czech Republic, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa


3.12.5 Basic Cash Operations (BFB)

Use


● Copying or distributing a memo record as an option when creating multiple memo records in a recurring pattern. Also, it's now possible to specify an offsetting bank account for memo records when necessary.

● The Cash Position Analysis app offers cash position information. Customers can extend the measures flexibly.

● The imported or manually created bank statement can be reversed via the Manage Bank Statements app.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BFB ( Basic Cash Operations )


Application Component FIN-FSCM-CLM


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2FD





3.12.6 Advanced Bank Account Management (J77)

Use


● Due to design changes, specifying a reviewer for bank account reviews or designating the bank account contact persons as reviewers is no longer supported. After a review is initiated, all the users that have the authorization to change the relevant bank accounts receive the review requests and can perform the review. In addition to the notification from the SAP Fiori launchpad, reviewers also receive an email notification.

● The Dual Control Revision Activate mode is enhanced with the Situation Framework so that the approver gets system notifications when requests are pending for a certain period of time defined in the situation type.

● Support both sequential and non-sequential payment approval patterns.● Use the Manage Global Accounting Hierarchy app to support the maintenance of bank account group.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item J77 ( Advanced Bank Account Management )



Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FBFB






3.12.7 Customs Management with SAP Global Trade Services (2U1)

Use


● New apps for maintaining customs offices and their assignment to countries or routes.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2U1 ( Customs Management with SAP Global Trade Services )


Application Component SLL-ITR


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FJ77



United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Czech Republic, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa


3.12.8 Inventory Valuation for Year-End Closing (BEJ)

Use


● You can determine the lowest value rate based on the movement rate. In the determination of the lowest value by movement rate, the system determines a devaluation indicator that specifies the number of settlement periods that the material has been slow or non-moving. The determination can be carried out at material level, or based on other selections such as the material type used.

● A job template for the Determine Lowest Value - Market Prices app is now available in the Schedule Inventory Accounting Jobs app. This enables you to determine the lowest values based on market prices as a background job.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BEJ ( Inventory Valuation for Year-End Closing )




Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2U1





3.12.9 Universal Allocation (2QL)

Use


● SAP has significantly innovated allocations in terms of:○ Usability○ Process○ Flexibility○ Insights

● Proven allocation functionality based on the Universal Journal with a common structure of CO and FI allocations.

● Harmonized Actual and Plan allocations.● Allocations are organized by ledger and company code.● The new Manage Allocations app provides a single point of maintenance of multiple types of cost

allocations and multiple cost object types.● The Run Allocations app provides a single execution point for allocation cycles and displays allocation

results in a user-friendly manner.● Allocation cycles are grouped and executed together to run the cycle in a specific sequence.● New level of transparency through a graphical visualization of the value flow.

Technical Details

Type Changed


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FBEJ


Scope Item 2QL ( Universal Allocation )







3.12.10 Provisioning of Overdue Receivables (2PD)

Use


● Documentation provided to describe the write-off process of an uncollectible, overdue receivable item.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2PD ( Provisioning of Overdue Receivables )



Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2QL

Application Component FI-AR





3.12.11 Financial Plan Data Upload from File (1HB)

Use


● Broad set of functionalities to manage Financial Plan Data within SAP S/4HANA

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1HB ( Financial Plan Data Upload from File )




http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2PD





3.12.12 Accounting and Financial Close (J58)

Use


● Added Display Journal Entries - In T-Account View.● Enhancements to the Currency Exchange Rates.● New Manage Templates for General Journal Entries.● New Display Document Flow.● Display Financial Statement renamed to Balance Sheet / Income Statement.● Financial Statement (Grid-Based) renamed to Balance Sheet / Income Statement.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item J58 ( Accounting and Financial Close )




Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1HB





3.12.13 Bank Integration with SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity (16R)

Use


● Supports fee analysis via MBC● Get status feedback from MBC: Status feedback is sent to SAP S/4HANA in the application Monitor

Payments when messages have been received from SAP S/4HANA or have been forwarded to the bank● Use standard status notification in MBC● Use MBC Connector Monitor

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 16R ( Bank Integration with SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity )









3.12.14 Lease-Out for Sublease Accounting (2SB)

Use


● General letter as part of the Output management that allows letter with free text field to be sent to customers or vendors.




Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2SB ( Lease-Out for Sublease Accounting )




Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F16R



Australia, Canada, Switzerland, Germany, Spain, France, Great Britain, Japan, Netherlands, Portugal, United States of America, South Africa


3.12.15 Basic Credit Management (BD6)

Use


New Apps, including new job templates:

● Schedule Credit Management Jobs - With these job templates, you can make mass changes to the credit data of business partners.

New Features for SAP Credit Management:

● SAP Credit Management Enhancement Spot: Adjust Result of Credit Check (Local Scenario) - You can change the answer from the Credit Management system to a query before it is sent to the calling component. This is now also possible,instead of using Web services in a local scenario.

● Data Migration: New migration object in SAP Credit Management if you want to migrate from another system to SAP S/4HANA.

● New Authorization Setup for Documented Credit Decisions - There is a new authorization setup for documented credit decisions which influence the integration of SAP Credit Management with sales and distribution (SD). This set-up is only relevant if SAP Credit Management is running in a one-system-scenario.

● Flexible Credit Check - A new setting in Customizing for SAP Credit Management allows you to decide which business partner liabilities are considered for the credit check.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BD6 ( Basic Credit Management )


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2SB







3.12.16 Group Reporting - Financial Consolidation (1SG)

Use


● A new section introduces how to manage your organizational structure and show how the assignment is time-dependent

● Flexible consolidation reports can be generated in real time, and the Integrate Data into Consolidation Group task is removed from the consolidation process

● Introduction on how to define validation using selection● Enhanced task logs for activity● Preparation of consolidation group change is moved from data collection.● Introduction on how to import consolidation master data● Introduction on selection definition during FS item maintenance● A new section introduces activity-based COI● Removal of original intercompany reconciliation report


Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FBD6

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1SG ( Group Reporting - Financial Consolidation )





3.12.17 Restricted Party Screening with SAP Watch List Screening (1WE)

Use


● Suppress communication from Output Management for sales documents blocked by Trade Compliance.● Intelligent Screening learns from resolutions to avoid repetitive blocks for the same party.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1WE ( Restricted Party Screening with SAP Watch List Screening )



http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1SG




United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Czech Republic, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa


3.12.18 Purchase Order Accruals (2VB)

Use

This process supports the automatic calculation, review, approval, posting and analysis of purchase order accruals.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2VB ( Purchase Order Accruals )






Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1WE



3.12.19 Embargo Control (1WC)

Use


● Integration of MM Scheduling Agreements and MM Contracts● Suppress communication from output management for sales documents blocked by trade compliance

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1WC ( Embargo Control )







http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2VB


3.12.20 General Indirect Tax in the Canary Islands (3SS)

Use

This scope item describes the process for a standard sales process with a customer. The business process covers order creation through the clearing of a customer account after the receipt of payment applicable for the Canary Islands territory.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3SS ( General Indirect Tax in the Canary Islands )


Application Component FI-LOC-ES



Spain



Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1WC

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FES%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3SS

3.12.21 Key Risk Indicator Monitoring with SAP Risk Management (2U2)

Use


● Support CDS View OData services with drilldown functionality and input parameters

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2U2 ( Key Risk Indicator Monitoring with SAP Risk Management )


Application Component GRC-INT-RM



3.12.22 Intercompany Reconciliation Process (40Y)

Use

This scope item covers the process of periodic controlling for accounting documents that describe the accounting transactions within a corporate group.


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2U2

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 40Y ( Intercompany Reconciliation Process )





3.12.23 Profitability and Cost Analysis (J55)

Use


● New Smart Cards for Sales Accounting Overview Page● Service Contracts are enabled for Profitability Analysis

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item J55 ( Profitability and Cost Analysis )




Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F40Y





3.12.24 Legal Control (1W8)

Use


In relation to material maintenance:

● The ability to receive control classes from an external data provider via XML● The ability to enter a comment when classifying or reclassifying products● Display product master to check classification detail for every numbering scheme● Introduction of a Product Classification Factsheet which is visible from the Material Master app

In relation to transactions:

● Support export control check for the supplying plant in Stock Transfer Orders (STOs)● Suppress communication from output management for sales documents blocked by trade compliance

● The ability to display Block and Release Reason in the Manage Documents app

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1W8 ( Legal Control )









3.12.25 Predictive Analytics Model Training - Finance (30K)

Use

This scope item enables you to periodically train the preconfigured predictive scenarios with their own historical data to enable the model to reflect their business context and transaction/master data history.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 30K ( Predictive Analytics Model Training - Finance )


Application Component CA-GTF


Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1W8



3.12.26 Joint Venture Accounting (3F7)

Use

This scope item enables you to run JVA on the universal journal.

JVA records all data in the universal journal. The venture bank switching program is replaced by Joint Venture Funding for an improved and transparent reimbursement process. All single cash call programs are grouped into dedicated single operated and non-operated cash call programs. The farm-in/out programs are available in one single program. Cutback posting options allow cutback posting by partner invoice and partner invoice with cost objects.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3F7 ( Joint Venture Accounting )


Application Component CA-JVA



Great Britain, Norway, United States of America



http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F30K

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FUS%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3F7

3.12.27 Advanced Cash Operations (J78)

Use


● It's now possible to create a cash request for a specific financial instrument which will automatically trigger the creation of trade requests in the treasury and risk management systems. An approval process is also available for you to manage the status of the cash request.

● You can now use the Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies - For Liquidity Items app to define and manage liquidity item hierarchies. The app replaces the Liquidity Item Hierarchy app.

● An additional hierarchy view of Cash Concentration Simulation in the Cash Flow Analyzer was added to display the results of cash concentration by cash pool.

● The selection of bank accounts has been enhanced by adding the selection of house banks and house bank accounts. This enhancement has been made in apps including Make Bank Transfers, Define Bank Transfer Templates, and Manage Memo Records.

● In the new Adjust Assigned Liquidity Items - Anomaly Detection app, users can detect the abnormal liquidity items by comparing the current assignment to that proposed by the trained Machine Learning model. Users can then correct the wrong assignment of liquidity items by adopting the Machine Learning proposals.

● Added process for the initiated bank transfers. The users can create, release, and pay the bank transfer in one step or in separate steps. In the latter case, the bank transfer request can be reversed before it is finally paid.

● Added the Define Bank Transfer Templates app to define templates for repetitive bank transfers (make bank transfer - create with templates).

● New Reconcile Cash Flows - Intraday Memo Records app enables the manual reconciliation of the intraday bank statement line items with the forecast cash flows.

● Added the Bank Statement Monitor Intraday app to enable the monitoring of the intraday bank statement status for the user to check if they are imported as expected.

● Starting from this release, you must specify a planning level for each bank account that is set for intraday bank statements in the Manage Bank Accounts app. Otherwise, the system cannot generate intraday memo records from intraday bank statements.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item J78 ( Advanced Cash Operations )



Finance






3.12.28 Overhead Cost Accounting (J54)

Use


● New "Where Used List" apps (for example, Cost Centers, Activity Types, Statistical Key Figures) allow the overhead accountant to analyze where and in which context a certain object is being used.

● New "Change Log" apps (for example, Cost Centers, Statistical Key Figures, Activity Types) allow a controller to analyze changes by type of change, change type or a specific user.

● Various Overhead Accounting Jobs have been integrated into one Overhead Accounting Job Scheduler.● Budget Availability Control for Cost Centers supports the business process from budget maintenance, runs

with each actual posting, and ends with the analysis of costs and budget.● A new budget report is available that allows you to analyze the actual costs, commitments, and the

consumed and available budget.

Technical Details

Type Changed




Scope Item J54 ( Overhead Cost Accounting )







3.12.29 Accounts Receivable (J59)

Use


● Added the SAP Fiori app Manage Bank Statement Reprocessing Rules:○ Allows A/R accountants to partially automate the reprocessing of bank statement items. The

accountant can create their own rules for processing bank statements by defining condition parameters and a rule action.

○ Use Post to GL or AP/AR Account as an action in the reprocessing rules.○ Analyze As now available as a new action in the reprocessing rules. Users can use several options to

analyze the Memo accordingly (for example, Payment Order).○ Added a Select by Rule action to apply to the worklist. The condition of the newly created rule is

directly applied to the worklist filter so that only worklist items that satisfy the reprocessing rule are displayed. The respective items can then be manually processed, or the accountant can choose to apply the rule and execute the defined rule action. Worklist items can then be processed in a batch.

● With the Situations Framework, the information contained in the payment advice is automatically analyzed and the AR accountant or manager is notified with any shortfall of payments instantly upon the receipt of the payment advices. They can then contact the customer immediately and demand additional payment much sooner than before.


Finance


Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item J59 ( Accounts Receivable )







3.12.30 Classification for Customs Tariff Number and Commodity Code (2U3)

Use


● Receive tariff numbers from an external data provider.● Display product master to check classification details for every numbering scheme and display change

logs.● Introduction of a Product Classification Factsheet which is visible from the Material Master app.● The ability to enter a remark when classifying or reclassifying product.● Display change documents for products which have been classified for international trade.



Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2U3 ( Classification for Customs Tariff Number and Commodity Code )







3.12.31 Cash Application Integration (1MV)

Use


● Reprocessing rules will be added to allow customer to create rules how to deal with bank statement items that could not be cleared by posting rules or cash app.

● Customer can execute up to n rules in one step.● Reprocessing rules can be executable in the background after bank statement import.


Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2U3

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1MV ( Cash Application Integration )





3.12.32 Advanced Credit Management (1QM)

Use


New Apps, including new Job Templates:

● Schedule Credit Management Jobs - With these job templates, you can make mass changes to the credit data of business partners.

New Features for SAP Credit Management:

● SAP Credit Management Enhancement Spot: Adjust Result of Credit Check (Local Scenario) - You can change the answer from the Credit Management system to a query before it is sent to the calling component. This is now a possible alternative to using Web services in a local scenario.

● Data Migration: New migration object in SAP Credit Management if you want to migrate from another system to SAP S/4HANA.

● New Authorization Setup for Documented Credit Decisions - There is a new authorization setup for documented credit decisions which influences the integration of SAP Credit Management with sales and distribution (SD). This setup is only relevant if your SAP Credit Management is running in a one-system scenario.

● Flexible Credit Check - A new setting in Customizing for SAP Credit Management allows you to decide which of a business partner's liabilities are considered for the credit check.


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1MV

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1QM ( Advanced Credit Management )







3.12.33 Accounts Payable (J60)

Use


● Manage Automatic Payments: This app enables you to schedule payment proposals or schedule payments directly and get an overview of the proposal or payment status. You can now view the items that have been paid in a payment run in an accompanying sheet.

● Map Payment Format Data: This feature enables you to use enhanced functions in the Map Payment Format Data configuration step, which is part of the Payment Medium Formats configuration item.

● Import Supplier Invoices: This app enables you to import multiple supplier invoices into the system all at once. You download a template file, enter the invoice information, and upload the completed file back to the app. You can then post the invoices from the app.


Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1QM

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item J60 ( Accounts Payable )


Application Component FI-AP





3.12.34 Basic Bank Account Management (BFA)

Use


● Added the Transfer BIC Data app for the upload of a bank directory (International formats not included).

Technical Details

Type Changed




Scope Item BFA ( Basic Bank Account Management )







3.12.35 Liquidity Planning (3L5)

Use

The scope item supports the long-term plan of liquidity trend.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3L5 ( Liquidity Planning )




Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FBFA



United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Czech Republic, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Romania, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa


3.12.36 Intrastat Processing (BDT)

Use


● Reuse of address from company code and plant abroad in Provider of Information.● In the Change Documents tab, you can now see the details of changed data including old and new values,

created by, created on, and change types for the fields belonging to classification.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BDT ( Intrastat Processing )





Austria, Belgium, Czech Republic, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hungary, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, Netherlands, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Sweden


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3L5


3.12.37 Lockbox (1JT)

Use


Reprocessing of lockbox items in the Reprocess Lockbox Items app.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1JT ( Lockbox )





Canada, United States of America



Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FBDT

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FUS%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1JT

3.12.38 Lease-Out Accounting (21Q)

Use




● Lease questionnaire - a questionnaire for leasing scenarios that helps simplify lease classifications.● CDS views for contract master data as well as one for the contract object types that enable the customers


Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 21Q ( Lease-Out Accounting )





United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Czech Republic, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa



http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F21Q

3.12.39 Group Reporting - Matrix Consolidation (3LX)

Use

This scope item supports consolidation for managerial organizational entities such as profit center and business segment. This functionality includes inter-unit eliminations and flexible management consolidation reports generated at report run-time.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3LX ( Group Reporting - Matrix Consolidation )





3.12.40 Group Reporting - Predictive Consolidation (3JP)

Use

This scope item enables integration of predictive accounting documents to SAP S/4HANA Group Reporting and subsequent consolidation of these documents to produce actual/predictive comparisons.


Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3LX

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3JP ( Group Reporting - Predictive Consolidation )





3.12.41 Tax Service Integration (43D)

Use

The SAP S/4HANA and Tax Service Integration enables business transactions, such as sales orders or purchase orders, to use the Tax Service as an engine for tax calculation.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 43D ( Tax Service Integration )


Application Component FI-LOC-TXS


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3JP



Brazil, Canada


3.12.42 Digital Payments (1S2)

Use


● Support for additional credit card provider "Union Pay"

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1S2 ( Digital Payments )







Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FBR%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F43D


3.12.43 Group Reporting - Data from External Systems (2U6)

Use


● Extract the data object from SAP S/4HANA● Extract the consolidated data from SAP S/4HANA

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2U6 ( Group Reporting - Data from External Systems )






http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1S2

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2U6

3.12.44 Lease-Out for Sublease Accounting - Group Ledger IFRS (2SA)

Use


● General letter as part of Output management that allows letter with free text field to be sent to customers or vendors

● Extensibility of certain fields in the contract that enables customers to substitute or insert some prefixes or fill out some fields in the contract name auto-fill, for example the customer can use the contract type and contract object name as prefix

● Lease questionnaire - a questionnaire for leasing scenarios that helps simplify lease classifications● Two new chats form part of the Valuation cockpit and offer an overview of the status of the valuation● CDS views for contract master data as well as one for the contract object types that enable the customers


Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2SA ( Lease-Out for Sublease Accounting - Group Ledger IFRS )





United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa



Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2SA

3.12.45 Preference Management with SAP Global Trade Services (3JX)

Use

This scope item integrates SAP Global Trade Services Preference Management with SAP S/4HANA Cloud and SAP S/4HANA on premise.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3JX ( Preference Management with SAP Global Trade Services )





United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa



http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3JX

3.12.46 Continuous Control Monitoring with SAP Process Control (2OH)

Use


● The ability to define multiple deficiency criteria for each business rule. Any data source value that meets any of the specified deficiency criteria will be reported.

● Support CDS View OData services with drilldown functionality and input parameters.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2OH ( Continuous Control Monitoring with SAP Process Control )


Application Component GRC-INT-SPC




Finance

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2OH

3.12.47 Lease-In Accounting - Group Ledger IFRS (21P)

Use






Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 21P ( Lease-In Accounting - Group Ledger IFRS )





United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa



http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F21P

3.12.48 Actual Costing (33Q)

Use

This scope item enables actual costing for material inventory without cost component split functionality. This supports legal requirement in some countries (such as Brazil).

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 33Q ( Actual Costing )





United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa



Finance


4 Manufacturing

4.1 Manufacturing Execution for Discrete Industries

4.1.1 Schedule Technical Completion Job for Orders

This new Fiori app enables you to set an order to Technically Completed to end one or multiple production orders from a logistical viewpoint. This is used, if the execution of an order has to be stopped prematurely or if the order could not be executed in the required manner and open requirements for the order (reservations, capacities) should be deleted.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BJ5 (Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing)

Application Component PP-SFC


Related Information

Schedule Technical Completion Run for Orders

4.1.2 Value Help Authorizations in Manufacturing Execution for Discrete Industries


What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Manufacturing P U B L I C 323

https://help.sap.com/viewer/34de0103497c4b80a7c7fbf6952ff971/1909.000/en-US/b75f6e838ccc423dbe9968d24ad69e70.html

Technical Details

Type Not applicable



Application Component LE-JIT


Additional Details

Please see SAP Note <your note number> for a list of the affected applications, transactions and application objects in Manufacturing Execution for Discrete Industries.



Related Information


4.1.3 Confirmation Settings for Discrete and Process Manufacturing

This feature enables you to further refine confirmation profiles with settings dependent on plant and order type. The Customizing activities Define Confirmation Parameters and Define Single-Screen Entry for Confirming Production Orders or Define Single-Screen Entry for Confirming Process Orders can be linked to each other.


Manufacturing


Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1BM (Make-to-Order Production - Semifinished Goods Planning and Assembly), BJ5 ( Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing), BJ8 (Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on Process Order), BJE (Make-to-Order Production - Finished Goods Sales and Final Assembly), BJH (Make-to-Stock Production - Repetitive Manufacturing)

Application Component PP-SFC-PLN


Additional Details

NoteTo benefit from this new feature, the user must not have assigned a confirmation profile in the CORUPROF user parameter.

In the Customizing activity for single-screen entry, you can define a standard profile with a nearly empty screen for confirmations. This screen will be displayed until you enter a confirmation number or an order and operation number in the confirmation application.

In the Customizing activity for confirmation parameters, you assign a confirmation profile to a specific combination of plant and order type containing the desired layout and settings.

If you now select the new checkbox Use Profile for Plant/Order Type in the Customizing activity for single-screen entry, the system searches for a confirmation profile specific for the combination of plant and order type given by the confirmation number or order number that you enter in the confirmation application.

The system will then display your defined layout and settings.

Type of changeNew/changed Customizing activity How to find it What you can do Leading scope item

New field in Customizing activity

Define Confirmation Parameters

Production Shop

Floor Control

Operations

Confirmation

Define a confirmation profile dependent on a plant and an order type.

BJ5 ( Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing)



New fields in Customizing activity

Define Single-Screen Entry for Confirming Production Orders

Production Shop

Floor Control

Operations

Confirmation Single-

Screen Entry

Define how the system determines the confir-mation profile to be used for single-screen entry of confirmations.



Define Single-Screen Entry for Confirming Process Orders

Production Planning for Process Industries

Process Order

Operations


Screen Entry


BJ8 (Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on Process Order)

4.2 Manufacturing Execution for Process Industries

4.2.1 Confirmation Settings for Discrete and Process Manufacturing

This feature enables you to further refine confirmation profiles with settings dependent on plant and order type. The Customizing activities Define Confirmation Parameters and Define Single-Screen Entry for Confirming Production Orders or Define Single-Screen Entry for Confirming Process Orders can be linked to each other.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1BM (Make-to-Order Production - Semifinished Goods Planning and Assembly), BJ5 ( Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing), BJ8 (Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on Process Order), BJE (Make-to-Order Production - Finished Goods Sales and Final Assembly), BJH (Make-to-Stock Production - Repetitive Manufacturing)

Application Component PP-SFC-PLN



Manufacturing

Additional Details

NoteTo benefit from this new feature, the user must not have assigned a confirmation profile in the CORUPROF user parameter.

In the Customizing activity for single-screen entry, you can define a standard profile with a nearly empty screen for confirmations. This screen will be displayed until you enter a confirmation number or an order and operation number in the confirmation application.

In the Customizing activity for confirmation parameters, you assign a confirmation profile to a specific combination of plant and order type containing the desired layout and settings.

If you now select the new checkbox Use Profile for Plant/Order Type in the Customizing activity for single-screen entry, the system searches for a confirmation profile specific for the combination of plant and order type given by the confirmation number or order number that you enter in the confirmation application.

The system will then display your defined layout and settings.


New field in Customizing activity

Define Confirmation Parameters

Production Shop

Floor Control

Operations

Confirmation

Define a confirmation profile dependent on a plant and an order type.



Define Single-Screen Entry for Confirming Production Orders

Production Shop

Floor Control

Operations


Screen Entry




Define Single-Screen Entry for Confirming Process Orders

Production Planning for Process Industries

Process Order

Operations


Screen Entry


BJ8 (Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on Process Order)

4.3 Production Planning

4.3.1 Maintain PIRs

This feature enables you to create multiple versions of PIRs for one material. This means, for example, that you can use different sources for creating different versions of PIRs such as the material forecast or an alternative


reference material. In addition, you can now also change the period for which you want to mass maintain your PIR quantities. That is, you can always maintain the PIRs for a period of a year at a time - either in months or weeks. The default period is set to start in the current month or week and in the case of monthly periods, you can maintain 12 periods and in the case of weekly periods, you can maintain 52 periods. Now you can change the start date to a period in the past or a period in the future and the system adjusts the period accordingly.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item J44 (Material Requirements Planning)

Application Component PP-MP_DEM


4.3.2 Rescheduling Check in the Managing Apps

This feature enables you to perform the rescheduling check in the Managing apps and, depending on the execution message, to execute different actions.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component PP-MRP (Material Requirements Planning)


Related Information

Manage Material CoverageManage External RequirementsManage Internal Requirements


Manufacturing

https://help.sap.com/viewer/fe39e10a9a864a8f8dc9537704f0fa13/1909.000/en-US/09cd1556d22c0033e10000000a44538d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/fe39e10a9a864a8f8dc9537704f0fa13/1909.000/en-US/e5cf1556d22c0033e10000000a44538d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/fe39e10a9a864a8f8dc9537704f0fa13/1909.000/en-US/e6d31556d22c0033e10000000a44538d.html

Manage Production Orders or Process Orders

4.3.3 Situation Handling in the Manage Material Coverage App

With this feature, you can use situation handling in the Manage Material Coverage app to bring important issues to the users' attention.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Situation HandlingSAP Note 2809017

4.3.4 Manage Planned Orders

With this feature, you can use the Manage Planned Orders app to create, change, delete, or display planned orders.

Technical Details

Type New



https://help.sap.com/viewer/fe39e10a9a864a8f8dc9537704f0fa13/1909.000/en-US/e2ce15560e1c792de10000000a44538d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/516c8ecb7462453ca430a42481cc33ec.html





Related Information

Manage Planned Orders

4.3.5 Convert Planned Orders

With this feature, you can use the Convert Planned Orders app to convert planned orders into production orders, process orders, or purchase requisitions.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component PP-MRP (Material Requirements Planning


Related Information

Convert Planned Orders

4.3.6 Maintain MRP Controllers

The Maintain MRP Controllers app is deprecated as of SAP S/4HANA 1909. The app will not be replaced.


Manufacturing

https://help.sap.com/viewer/fe39e10a9a864a8f8dc9537704f0fa13/1909.000/en-US/e45ca7eed9f44f828768e720e8d6f7ad.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/fe39e10a9a864a8f8dc9537704f0fa13/1909.000/en-US/5a4ab0310c694ed18b94fdd7a4da8b58.html

Technical Details

Type Deleted






In addition, the business catalog Production Planning - MRP Master Data (SAP_SCM_BC_MRPMD) will be deleted with SAP S/4HANA 1909.


Instead of using the Maintain MRP Controllers app to maintain MRP controllers, you can maintain them in Customizing for Production Planning under Material Requirements Planning Master Data Define MRP Controllers .

4.3.7 Schedule Production

With this new app, you can pre-schedule your orders to be dispatched based on their priority. You can select the source of supply (production version) and the pacemaker work centers to dispatch the orders on the dates that you choose. A work center with capacity duration that meets the capacity required to complete the operation is highlighted in the app.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3LQ


Application Component PP-CFS-SCH


Additional Details

Before you use the app, set the work center capacity to finite scheduling and make sure the right production line is maintained in the production version.

Related Information

Schedule Production

4.3.8 Monitor Work Center Schedules

With this feature, you get an overview of the operations performed at your work centers by visualizing their schedules over a time period. You can also plan optimum utilization of pacemaker work centers by matching their capacities with those of the orders that have to be dispatched.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3LQ (Production Capacity Leveling)

Application Component PP-CFS-SCH


4.3.9 Schedule ATP Run for Production / Planned Orders

You can use this new Fiori app to do the following:

● Schedule and configure background jobs that check the availability of materials for several production orders or planned orders according to the ATP method


Manufacturing

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9fbed5ee4a6745ed90e67716f93e3205/1909.000/en-US/8d2e44f0c279408ba2790e9ad0ac5188.html

● View the results of the availability checks scheduled with this app

Technical Details


Country Dependency Valid for all countries

Used in Scope Item No scope item required

Application Component PP-SFC

Availability SAP S/4HANA 1909

Related Information

Schedule ATP Run for Production / Planned Orders

4.3.10 API for Planned Orders (Read, Create, Update, Delete)

This service enables you to read, create, change, and delete planned orders as well as components belonging to planned orders. It is based on the OData protocol.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BJ5 ( Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing), BJ8 (Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on Process Order)

Application Component PP-ES



https://help.sap.com/viewer/34de0103497c4b80a7c7fbf6952ff971/1909.000/en-US/473277665900410b9e92ef9861ebb748.html

Additional Details

This service enables the following operations:

● Read planned orders, for example, retrieve header values of a planned order, retrieve a set of components related to a planned order, or retrieve capacity data of a planned order

● Create a planned order without components (system adds components automatically), for example, with account assignment referring to project stock

● Create a planned order with components● Create a component● Schedule a planned order including creation of capacity data● Change selected parameters of an existing planned order● Change parameters of a component● Delete a planned order● Delete a component

Related Information

Planned Orders - Read, Create, Update, Delete

4.3.11 Material Requirements Planning (MRP)

4.3.11.1 MRP Area

The customizing for the MRP area has changed. The Customizing activity Define MRP Areas is now defined in the following two Customizing activities:

● Define MRP Areas for Plant/ Storage Locations● Define MRP Areas for Subcontractors

In the Customizing navigate to Material Requirements Planning Master Data MRP Areas or to Consumption-Based Planning Master Data MRP Areas .

Technical Details

Type Changed




Manufacturing

https://help.sap.com/viewer/a6f0333202384ba2b48a841a4a6deb1b/1909.000/en-US/43ae2e5876b4a107e10000000a441470.html

Application Component PP-MRP, PP-MRP-BD


Related Information

Implementing MRP Areas

4.3.11.2 Improved Performance for Splitting Quota Arrangements in MRP

Quota arrangement splitting is used in material requirements planning (MRP) to distribute procurement proposals among various sources of supply. This feature is now also available for high-performance scenarios in SAP S/4HANA Cloud based on SAP HANA-optimized coding.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BJ5 ( Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing)

Application Component PP-MRP


Related Information

Quota Arrangements

4.3.11.3 OData Service for Maintain Planned Independent Requirements API

This new service enables you to read and update planned independent requirements (PIRs).


https://help.sap.com/viewer/fe39e10a9a864a8f8dc9537704f0fa13/1909.000/en-US/1998b6535fe6b74ce10000000a174cb4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/fe39e10a9a864a8f8dc9537704f0fa13/1909.000/en-US/7d97b6535fe6b74ce10000000a174cb4.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item J44 (Material Requirements Planning), BJ5 (Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing), BJH (Make-to-Stock Production - Repetitive Manufacturing)

Application Component PP-MP-DEM


Related Information

OData Service for Maintain Planned Independent Requirements API

4.3.11.4 API for Material Planning Data (Read)

This service enables you to read planning data for materials in Material Requirements Planning (MRP). The service is based on the OData protocol, and can be consumed by external systems and user interfaces.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component PP-ES


Additional Details

You can use this service to perform the following operations:


Manufacturing

https://help.sap.com/viewer/a6f0333202384ba2b48a841a4a6deb1b/1909.000/en-US/c81d1718b16147b5811acce3f1888054.html

● Read material master data for one or more materials● Read supply and demand information for materials over a certain time period; you can show supply and

demand information aggregated over a defined time period, for example, one week, or you can aggregate the quantities on category group level over a certain time period.

● Read material coverage information

Related Information

Material Planning Data - Read

4.3.12 Demand-Driven Replenishment

4.3.13 Suspend and Resume Proposal Runs

With this feature, you can now suspend and resume proposal creation of products in the Manage Buffer Levels app.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1Y2 (Demand-Driven Buffer Level Management)

Application Component PP-DD


4.3.14 BOM and BOM Usage in Network Graph

With this feature, in the Buffer Positioning app, you can now visualize a product BOM and its usage by choosing BOM and BOM Usage from the dropdown list in the network graph view of the Upstream - Downstream section of Buffer Analysis. With this change, you can no longer change the orientation of the network graph in the settings.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/a6f0333202384ba2b48a841a4a6deb1b/1909.000/en-US/ca111d6ed0004ac088b68f1360cf24fc.html

Technical Details

Type New





4.3.15 Average Daily Usage in Buffer Proposal Calculation

With this feature, you can now decide if the average daily usage used for buffer proposal calculation in the Schedule Buffer Proposal Calculation app is based on fixed interval or rolling interval.

Technical Details

Type New





4.3.16 API for Buffer Profile (Read)

The OData service Buffer Profile - Read (API_BUFFER_PROFILE_SRV) enables you to read buffer profile data, such as, lead time factor and variability factor, and also for each plant, read spike horizon constant (SHC), spike horizon DLT multiplier, spike threshold factor, and on-hand alert threshold factor of demand-driven relevant products.


Manufacturing

Technical Details

Type New





4.3.17 API for Buffer Sizing (Read, Write, Update)

The OData service Buffer Sizing - Read, Write, Update (API_API_BUFFERSIZING_SRV) enables you to read and create buffer sizing data, such as, buffer proposals, average dailty usage (ADU), decoupled lead time (DLT), demand and zone adjustments of demand-driven relevant products. It also enables you to update demand and zone adjustment factors.

Technical Details

Type New





4.3.18 Predictive Material and Resource Planning

4.3.18.1 Predictive Material and Resource Planning (PMRP)

This feature enables you to to identify capacity issues related to demand-driven materials and solve them early in the planning process. The following two new apps are available:

● Schedule pMRP Simulation CreationIn this app you define which set of data of your operative data should be considered for a simulation.

● Process pMRP Simulations


In this app you work with simulations. You can create multiple simulation, make changes to them and compare them to decide what measure to solve capacity isssues works best for you.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item Demand-Driven Buffer Level Management (1Y2)

Application Component PP-PMR (predictive MRP)


Related Information

Predictive Material and Resource Planning (pMRP)

4.3.19 Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling

4.3.19.1 Value Help Authorizations in Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling


Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component SCM-APO-FCS-CSP, SCM-APO-MD-PPE, SCM-APO-PPS, SCM-BAS-MD, LO-MD-BP


Manufacturing

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/61d3f1634dae44608b46b79e36d77dfb.html


Additional Details

Please see SAP Notes 2794475 , 2794511 , 2794502 , 2794467 and 2794512 for a list of the affected applications, transactions and application objects in Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS).



Related Information


4.3.20 Kanban

4.3.20.1 Value Help Authorizations in Kanban


Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1E3 (Manufacturing with Kanban Supply into Production)

Application Component PP-KAB









Additional Details

Please see SAP Note 2793936 for a list of the affected transactions in Kanban.



Related Information


4.3.20.2 OData API for Production Supply Area (Create, Update, Delete)

This service now additionally enables you to create, update, and delete production supply area (PSA) data in an API call. The service is based on the OData protocol and allows you to query for specific PSAs with filter parameters or by specifying the PSA key. The production supply area is an area on the shop floor where material is provided that can be directly used for production. It is used, for example, in Kanban production control and for material staging. The service can be consumed by external systems and user interfaces.

Technical Details

Type Changed






Manufacturing



Related Information

Production Supply Area - Read, Write

4.3.20.3 OData API for Kanban Control Cycle (Create, Update)

This service now additionally enables you to create and update kanban control cycles in an API call, and includes lock and unlock operations on the corresponding kanban containers. The service is based on the OData protocol and allows you to query for specific kanban control cycles and container data with filter parameters or by specifying the relevant key. The service can be consumed by external systems and user interfaces.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Information

Kanban Control Cycle - Read, Write

4.3.20.4 Set Kanban Container Status

With this app you can select or scan kanban containers to trigger kanban status changes. The kanban processing cycle is controlled by setting containers to the appropriate status.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/a6f0333202384ba2b48a841a4a6deb1b/1909.000/en-US/df5c6b2792ec49a7b10c75fd5989f7ab.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/a6f0333202384ba2b48a841a4a6deb1b/1909.000/en-US/a271dc21bc514d2b80701e88409533f9.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component PP-KAB-FIO


Related Information

Set Kanban Container Status

4.3.20.5 Custom Fields and Custom Business Logic for Kanban Control Cycles and Containers

You can use this feature to implement custom logic for Kanban control cycle maintenance and for container check or change.

The following classic apps can be extended according to your business needs:

● Control Cycle Maintenance● Kanban Board: Supply Source Overview● Kanban Board: Demand Source Overview

In addition this feature enables data flow of custom fields from the kanban control cycle and container to purchase order item in case the replenishment strategy for external procurement with purchase order is used.

You can use the Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) to change custom field values or to implement additional checks.

Technical Details

Type New





Manufacturing

https://help.sap.com/viewer/49d0972a760b4646918ce9fddb034d64/1909.000/en-US/bfd0f863bb1c4598a262a4fa10b46765.html


Additional Details

You can adapt the system with custom logic using the following Business Add-Ins:

Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) Business Context

Kanban Control Cycle Change Manufacturing: Kanban Control Cycle

Kanban Control Cycle Check Manufacturing: Kanban Control Cycle

Kanban Container Status Change Manufacturing: Kanban Container

Kanban Container Status Check Manufacturing: Kanban Container

Change Before Creation of Replenishment Element Manufacturing: Kanban Container

Related Information

App Extensibility for Kanban

4.3.20.6 Support of Production Supply Areas Managed in EWM

Three features have been developed to support production supply areas managed in embedded EWM:

● Kanban Stock Transfer with EWM Warehouse Task● External procurement with Kanban Summarized JIT Call● Production Kanban with Repetitive Manufacturing

Technical Details

Type New



https://help.sap.com/viewer/49d0972a760b4646918ce9fddb034d64/1909.000/en-US/0e11c3c36a13434891ca0050f9bcfb78.html




Additional Details

In Kanban, a new stock transfer replenishment strategy is available, allowing direct warehouse task creation in embedded EWM.

See: Replenishment of EWM-Managed Storage Locations

The following Kanban replenishment strategies support destination bins:

● Stock Transfer with Warehouse Task● External Procurement with Summarized JIT Calls● In-house Production with Planned Orders

If a source production supply area but no source bin is maintained in the Kanban control cycle, the replenishment strategy “Stock Transfer with Warehouse Task” will determine the source bin before creating the EWM warehouse task.

In the Repetitive Manufacturing profile a flag to control synchronous/asynchronous goods movement posting can be configured for the Kanban replenishment strategy In-house production with planned orders.

4.3.20.7 Output Management for Kanban Summarized JIT Calls

SAP S/4HANA Output Control is now available for Kanban Summarized JIT Calls, alternatively you can choose NAST-based output.

Output Control is based on Adobe® forms, form data providers, and BRF+ based configurations.

With the Schedule Kanban JIT Call Output app you can schedule background jobs for triggering the output of Summarized JIT Calls.

Technical Details

Type New



Manufacturing

https://help.sap.com/viewer/49d0972a760b4646918ce9fddb034d64/1909.000/en-US/e75ebd534f22b44ce10000000a174cb4.html




Additional Details

You can start jobs to print or send e-mails for Kanban Summarized JIT calls immediately, or schedule them to start later.

You can schedule background jobs for triggering the output of Summarized JIT Calls where the dispatch time is set to scheduled.

The dispatch time is determined based on the settings in output control.

Related Information

Schedule Kanban JIT Call OutputOutput Management for Summarized JIT Calls

4.4 Quality Management

4.4.1 Manage Defects

This feature enables you to view and manage defects using a simple interface that also includes a chart. You can also navigate to view contextual information related to a defect.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2QN (Nonconformance Management)

Application Component QM-QN-DEF


https://help.sap.com/viewer/49d0972a760b4646918ce9fddb034d64/1909.000/en-US/9f9af0a90dba4a9fad9308f337804836.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/49d0972a760b4646918ce9fddb034d64/1909.000/en-US/2bb79b3accd34af7b407a52ad970885c.html


4.4.2 Record Production Defects

With this feature you can record defects with the defect category Production Defect, which includes production-relevant information from the production order.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2QN (Nonconformance Management), 1E1 (Quality Management in Discrete Manufacturing)


QM-QN-TSK


4.4.3 Define Follow-Up Actions for Quality Tasks

With this feature you can define follow-up actions for quality tasks in nonconformance management and use them for further processing of the tasks. Only one follow-up action can be assigned to each task

The task type defines whether a task can be assigned a follow-up action. The task type is controlled by the defect category. The follow-up action is assigned to a task with the task code.

Technical Details

Type New




Manufacturing

Application Component QM-QN-TSK


4.4.4 Define Defect Categories

With this feature you can define customer-specific defect categories for defects recording. The defect category controls the following settings:

● Using a customer-specific defect category, you can specify the task type for a defect. The task type determines, for example, whether a follow-up action can be assigned to a task in a defect.

● You can add context-specific fields for a defect category. This requires knowledge of SAP Fiori Elements.

Defects of a customer-specific defect category can be selected via their defect category in the Process Defects app.

You define a customer-specific defect category in Customizing for Quality Management under Nonconformance Management Defects Recording Define Defect Categories .

Technical Details

Type New





4.4.5 Proposal of Defect Codes

Defect codes can be proposed using an analytical predictive model. The defect description and the detailed description are taken into account for the determination of the proposals for defect codes. The proposalfunction for defect codes is based on the Predictive Analytics Integrator (PAi), which integrates predictive functions in business applications. The Predictive Analytics integrator comprises predictive models and predictive scenarios.


Technical Details

Type New





4.4.6 New Functions for Quality Tasks

With this feature the following changes for quality tasks are available:

● You can create quality tasks for defects of all categories.● The most important information like defect code or defect status is displayed.● You can directly navigate from the task to the defect.

Technical Details

Type New




QM-QN-DEF


4.4.7 Manage Quality Tasks: Task Status

With this feature, you can now select one or more quality tasks and set the task status to In Process or Complete.


Manufacturing

Technical Details

Type New





4.4.8 Manage Workflows for Quality Task Processing

With this feature, you can activate the Assignment of Processor to Quality Task workflow to create notifications for quality engineers and technicians when they are assigned as processors of tasks. The workflow also creates new items for them in the My Inbox app. Here, you can not only view important information related to each item, you can also, for example, claim or forward the item, and navigate to related apps. You can also configure workflows for quality task processing.

Technical Details

Type New





4.4.9 Flexible In-Production Inspection

With this feature you can define that inspection lot characteristics are only created for released production order operations. Hence, changes to unreleased order operations are still possible and are reflected in the inspection lot as soon as they are released. This allows a flexible in-production inspection.


Technical Details

Type New



Application Component QM-IM (Quality Inspection)



You can activate this feature in Customizing under Quality Management Basic Settings Maintain Settings at Client Level by setting the Late Characteristic Creation indicator under Further Settings.

Related Information

Inspections During Production

4.4.10 Value Help Authorizations in Quality Management


Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component QM (Quality Management)

BC-SEC-AUT (Authorization Management)



Manufacturing

https://help.sap.com/viewer/2bc3ee8d1c83404e8cf62418640004f2/1909.000/en-US/1f14c453f57eb44ce10000000a174cb4.html

Additional Details

Please see SAP Note 2805620 for a list of the affected transactions in Quality Management.



Related Information


4.4.11 Record Inspection Results in Table Form

With this feature you can record the inspection results for several master inspection characteristics for different inspection lots in a table on a single screen. For example, you can use this feature if you have to inspect one characteristic for several materials.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1E1 (Quality Management in Discrete Manufacturing), 1FM (Quality Management in Procurement), 1MP (Quality Management in Sales),

Application Component QM-IM-RR


Related Information

Record Inspection Results in Table Form




https://help.sap.com/viewer/2bc3ee8d1c83404e8cf62418640004f2/1909.000/en-US/e2e9664322474114be161395ce279c09.html

4.4.12 EWM-QM Integration Without Inspection Rules

With this feature you can integrate quality management in Extended Warehouse Management (EWM) without inspection rules for the warehouse-dependent inspection object types 4 and 5.

NoteQM without inspection rules is only possible in EWM embedded in SAP S/4HANA . It does not apply to decentralized EWM based on SAP S/4HANA.

For the integration of quality management you can define that the inspection setup data of the Quality Management view in the material master is used. An inspection rule is no longer required. In EWM the inspection types 01 (Goods receipt insp. for purchase order), 04 (Goods receipt inspection from production), 08 (Stock transfer inspection) and 09 (Recurring inspection of batches) are supported.

● When using process Acceptance Sampling you specify the inspection type in the quality info record for the material.

● When using process Presampling in Production you specify the inspection type in the Quality Management view of the material master.

If you want to change your settings from inspections with inspection rules to inspections without inspection rules, see SAP Note 2787302 .

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item

Application Component SCM-EWM-QM


Additional Details

You can use quality inspection without inspection rule in the following processes:

● Acceptance sampling● Inspections after goods receipt● Presampling in production● Stock inspections● Recurring inspections


Manufacturing



You define that you use QM without inspection rules in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Cross-Process Settings Quality Management Basics and Integration Define and Activate Warehouse-Dependent IOTs :

● For Origin of the Inspection Lot Setup, you specify that no inspection rule is used and that the inspection lot setup originates from the Quality Management tab of the material master.

● Under Insp. Planning w/o Rules, you specify the inspection settings and the quality inspection process.

Related Information

Configure Quality Management Without Inspection Rules

4.4.13 New Features for Record Inspection Results

With these features, you can perform the following operations in the Record Inspection Results app:

● View and edit the detailed data of a characteristic on the characteristic result details screen● Add master inspection characteristics not planned in the inspection plan or routing to the selected

inspection lot and operation on the results recording screen

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1E1 (Quality Management in Discrete Manufacturing), 1FM (Quality Management in Procurement), 1MP (Quality Management in Sales),

Application Component QM-IM-RR


Related Information

Record Inspection Results


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/61e7cbe2aee54f1ca0e63533f2402e49.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/2bc3ee8d1c83404e8cf62418640004f2/1909.000/en-US/3b363257bb23bb61e10000000a4450e5.html

4.4.14 Nonconformance Analytics

This feature enables you to analyze defects, based on time, master inspection characteristics, inspection characteristics, material and plant, work center and plant, defect category, defect code and defect code group, supplier, and customer. It also enables you to analyze quality notifications, based on time, material and plant, and work center.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2V0 (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Quality Management)

Application Component QM-QC-IS


4.4.15 Nonconformance Detailed Analytics

This feature enables you to analyze recorded defects with or without notifications based on time, inspection characteristics, master inspection characteristics, plant, material, work center, defect category, defect code and defect code group, supplier, and customer. It also enables you analyze quality notifications in detail based on notification type, supplier, and customer.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2V0 (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Quality Management)

Application Component QM-QC-IS



Manufacturing

4.4.16 Defects in Quality Engineer Overview

With this feature, you now have three new analytical cards related to defects recording in the Quality Engineer Overview app.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2QN (Nonconformance Management), 2V0 (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Quality Management)

Application Component QM-FIO-IM





4.6.1 Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on Process Order (BJ8)

Use

This scope item provides a platform for process manufacturing, supporting processes in manufacturing for the chemical, pharmaceutical, and food and beverage industries, as well as the batch-oriented electronics industry.


Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BJ8 ( Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on Process Order )


Application Component PP



United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Germany, Denmark, Spain, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa


4.6.2 Analytics for Production Unit - Plan/Actual Production Cost (2QW)

Use


● CDS-based Analytical Query Views provide the foundation to Manufacturing (Plan to Produce) analytics content.

● "Delivery Items Shipped as Planned" CDS-based Analytical Query View (2CCSHPPLNDQRY) is available for analytics consumption for Shipping Specialist analysis.

● "Manufacturing Order Item Scrap Amount" CDS-based Analytical Query View (2CCMFGORDITEMAMTQ) is available for analytics consumption for Plant Manager analysis.

● "Current stock quantity and value" CDS-based Analytical Query View (2CCSHPPLNDQRY) is available for analytics consumption for Inventory Analyst analysis.


Manufacturing


● Customers can leverage the extensibility tool to build analytic application based on standard CDS view, especially for boardroom for Manufacturing analytics topics.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2QW ( Analytics for Production Unit - Plan/Actual Production Cost )





4.6.3 Quality Management in Discrete Manufacturing (1E1)

Use


● Record Inspection Results app enhancement which includes graphical representation of results history and statistical process control charts. Ability to upload attachments for an inspection characteristic when recording results.

● Create additional inspection characteristics for the inspection lot that are not contained in the task list during results recording. Create additional inspection characteristics even after an inspection lot has been released.

● Inspection results for several master inspection characteristics for different inspection lots can be recorded in tabular form on a single screen.

● Flexible inspections via characteristic creation on release of order operation. Checks whether inspection lot characteristics should only be created for released order operations.


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2QW

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1E1 ( Quality Management in Discrete Manufacturing )


Application Component QM



United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Brazil, Canada, Switzerland, China, Czech Republic, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa


4.6.4 Predictive Analytics Model Training - Supply Chain (20N)

Use


● Updated with use case for "Defect Code Proposal"

Technical Details

Type Changed


Manufacturing

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1E1


Scope Item 20N ( Predictive Analytics Model Training - Supply Chain )





4.6.5 Make-to-Order Production - Process Manufacturing (3OK)

Use

This scope item encompasses the Make-to-Order process of batch-managed finished goods from customer quotation (optional), sales order creation, production planning, and execution using process orders to the delivery and billing of the customer.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3OK ( Make-to-Order Production - Process Manufacturing )




http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F20N



Germany, United States of America


4.6.6 Tank Trailer Filling with Residuals (42N)

Use

This scope item supports the filling process of the manufactured product into the tank trailer from silos. This filling process also considers the quantity of existing residuals in the tank trailer.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 42N ( Tank Trailer Filling with Residuals )








Manufacturing

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3OK

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F42N

4.6.7 Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing (BJ5)

Use


● The new Maintain PIRS app enables the creation and monitoring of planned independent requirements (PIRs) for up to 50 materials at a time in the long term, either in months or weeks, and mass maintenance for these materials is also possible. With the function of download/upload PIRs is a function available to create or upload a csv file for the creation of PIRs.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BJ5 ( Make-to-Stock Production - Discrete Manufacturing )









4.6.8 Mass Change Manufacturing Bill of Material for Production (3LP)

Use

This scope item covers the change-master-controlled change process for materials and components in the manufacturing bills of materials.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3LP ( Mass Change Manufacturing Bill of Material for Production )








Manufacturing

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3LP

4.6.9 Make-to-Stock Production with Variant Configuration (21D)

Use


● Enhanced user experience through enabling the grouping of characteristics with variant configuration.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 21D ( Make-to-Stock Production with Variant Configuration )








http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F21D

4.6.10 Nonconformance Management (2QN)

Use

This scope item describes the management of nonconformances. The user enters defect data and documents defect processing. Afterwards, the quality engineer analyzes the current defect situation, and if needed, creates additional, manual inspection lots.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2QN ( Nonconformance Management )








Manufacturing

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2QN

4.6.11 Just-In-Time Supply to Customer from Stock (2EM)

Use

This scope item describes the Just-in-Time process (Supply to Customer from stock) for component manufacturers. The business process encompasses steps from receiving Just-In-Time calls to billing.

● Supports the business process for Just-In-Time supply to customers from stock● Enables the visibility of fulfillment progress and alerts based on errors in processing● Helps to process the supply efficiently● Provides flexibility through configuration and extensibility

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2EM ( Just-In-Time Supply to Customer from Stock )








http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2EM

4.6.12 Rework Processing - Work-in-Process (BJQ)

Use


● A new Master Data script is available that explains the creation of a Reference Operation Set.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BJQ ( Rework Processing - Work-in-Process )








Manufacturing

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FBJQ

4.6.13 Make-to-Stock with Co- and By-Products - Process Manufacturing (3L7)

Use

This scope item enables production planning in make-to-stock scenarios with joint production capability (the process of manufacturing two or more products in a single production run (for example, co- and by-products along with the main product)).

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3L7 ( Make-to-Stock with Co- and By-Products - Process Manufacturing )








http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3L7

4.6.14 Inbound Storage Tank Management - Process Manufacturing (3UK)

Use

This scope item enables the storage tank management process, which supports the procurement of a new batch into the day tank and then mixing of this new batch with an existing batch in the main tank with a special mixing process order type.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3UK ( Inbound Storage Tank Management - Process Manufacturing )








Manufacturing

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3UK

4.6.15 SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Quality Management (2V0)

Use

This scope item provides overview pages and analytical apps for the quality technician and quality engineer showing the most important information related to inspection and task management. Analytical apps enable in-depth analysis of the quality situation.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2V0 ( SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Quality Management )






http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2V0

4.6.16 Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on Production Order (2UG)

Use


The Maintain PIRs app enables the creation and monitoring of planned independent requirements (PIRs) for up to 50 materials at a time, in the long term, either in months or weeks. You can perform mass maintenance for these materials. You can create or upload a csv file for PIR creation with the function of download/upload PIRs.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2UG ( Make-to-Stock - Process Manufacturing Based on Production Order )








Manufacturing

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2UG

4.6.17 Change Manufacturing Bill of Material for Production (3LO)

Use

This scope item covers the process of executing change-number-managed BOM updates in the production process.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3LO ( Change Manufacturing Bill of Material for Production )








http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3LO

4.6.18 Make-to-Order Production - Finished Goods Sales and Final Assembly (BJE)

Use


● Improved usability with intuitive confirmation of production operation.● Added new SAP Fiori App for Post Goods Receipt for Order. With this feature, you can post the receipt of

goods with reference to a production order. If a material is delivered for a production order, it is important for all the departments involved that the goods receipt entry in the system references this production order.

● Simplified quotation handling at the start of the process. Alignment with scope item "Sales Order Processing with Customer Down Payment" (BKJ).

● Use of standard quotation type and sales order type, as well as billing plan of BKJ. Simplified invoice handling at process end.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BJE ( Make-to-Order Production - Finished Goods Sales and Final Assembly )








Manufacturing

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FBJE

4.6.19 Make-to-Order Production with Variant Configuration (1YT)

Use


● Enhanced user experience through enabling the grouping of characteristics with variant configuration.● Activation of billing plan in sales order for down-payment handling (optional).

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1YT ( Make-to-Order Production with Variant Configuration )








http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1YT

4.6.20 Manufacturing with Kanban Supply into Production (1E3)

Use


● The Maintain PIRs app enables the creation and monitoring of planned independent requirements (PIRs) for up to 50 materials at a time in the long term either in months or weeks. With the app, you can perform mass maintenance for these materials. You can create or upload csv files for the creation of PIRs with the function of download/upload PIRs.

● New SAP Fiori app Set Kanban Container Status lets the user change the status of a Kanban container easily and quickly to trigger material replenishment.

● Enhanced best practice content with additional Kanban replenishment strategies.● New SAP Fiori app Set Kanban Container Status lets the user change the status of a Kanban container

easily and quickly to trigger material replenishment.● Enhanced best practice content with additional Kanban replenishment strategies.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1E3 ( Manufacturing with Kanban Supply into Production )







Manufacturing


4.6.21 Demand-Driven Replenishment Planning and Execution (2QI)

Use


● Consideration of rounding values of products for replenishment.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2QI ( Demand-Driven Replenishment Planning and Execution )








http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1E3

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2QI

4.6.22 Production Capacity Evaluation (31L)

Use


● Visualization of capacities and loads on work center capacities in bucket view.● Visualization of the already dispatched operations and the planner’s backlog of operations to be

dispatched.● Self Service Configuration UI for Shift Definition of Workcenters.● The Maintain PIRS app enables the creation and monitoring of planned independent requirements (PIRs)

for up to 50 materials at a time in the long term either in months or weeks.● You can also perform mass maintenance for these materials.● You can create or upload csv files for PIR creation with the function of download/upload PIRs.● Capacity Evaluation for Process Manufacturing.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 31L ( Production Capacity Evaluation )





United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Czech Republic, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa



Manufacturing

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F31L

4.6.23 Production Capacity Leveling (3LQ)

Use

The process of production capacity leveling enables the planning and scheduling (dispatching) of production and process orders and operations.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3LQ ( Production Capacity Leveling )








http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3LQ

4.6.24 Make-to-Order Production - Semifinished Goods Planning and Assembly (1BM)

Use


● The Maintain PIRs app enables the creation and monitoring of planned independent requirements (PIRs) for up to 50 materials at a time, in the long term, either in months or weeks. With the app, you can perform mass maintenance for these materials. You can create or upload csv files for PIR creation using the function of download/upload PIRs.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1BM ( Make-to-Order Production - Semifinished Goods Planning and Assembly )








Manufacturing

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1BM

4.6.25 Make-to-Stock with Silo Material - Process Manufacturing (3UL)

Use

This scope item focuses on more complex process manufacturing scenarios with silo materials and phantom assemblies. Silo materials are generally stored in big silos or tanks. The silos are modeled as separate storage locations.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3UL ( Make-to-Stock with Silo Material - Process Manufacturing )








http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3UL

4.6.26 Demand-Driven Buffer Level Management (1Y2)

Use


● Extended calculation of average daily usage (ADU) of products, taking into account future demand based on planned independent requirements (PIRs).

● Enablement of mass adoption for parameters in the Manage Buffer Levels app.● Predictive Material and Resource Planning: This feature enables you to reduce inventory-carrying cost by

enabling preproduction for semi-finished materials and changes to sources of supply.● In the Process pMRP Simulations app, you can use the multilevel Material Simulation view to get an

overview of the multilevel bill of material. You can solve capacity issues for a particular component by preproducing component materials or by changing the source of supply.

● In the Schedule pMRP Simulation Creation app, you can now create reference data only, based on data for particular top-level materials.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1Y2 ( Demand-Driven Buffer Level Management )








Manufacturing

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1Y2

5 Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations

5.1 Manufacturing Engineering and Process Planning

5.1.1 Manage Production Operators

With this feature you can view the the list of production operators assigned to a plant and work center combination. You can view the current workload, qualifications, and team information of a production operator, and assign one or more operation activities to the production operator, if required.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component PP-PEO


Additional Details

With this app, you can view the list of production operators assigned to a plant and work center combination. For each production operator, you can view details such as user, default work center, the total number of operation activities assigned, and the time it takes to perform them. You can also identify if the production operator is currently idle or at work. Using this information, you can analyze the current workload and qualifications of each production operator and either assign or unassign operation activities, and define the duration of labor for each of those operation activities.

Using the new features available in this app, you can:

● Assign operation activities to production operators.For more information, see How to Assign Operation Activities to Production Operators.

● Assign the duration of labor for the operation activities assigned to the production operator.

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations P U B L I C 383

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/60bb27927db14969b5cb68006dcc950c.html

5.1.2 Manage Production Versions

This feature enables you to include different master data for planning and execution in the production version.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details


● Specify different master data for planning and execution while creating a production version.For more information, see How to Create Production Versions

5.1.3 Monitor Shop Floor Master Data

With this feature you can monitor planned orders for which no valid production master data exists. You can use search criteria to filter for specific planned orders with production version issues. Also, you can navigate to a details page where you can view the details of the production version and solve the issues by creating a shop floor BOM version or routing, for example.

Technical Details

Type New





Manufacturing for Production Engineering and Operations

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/971312f280c2459aba17bc4fcd00ce10.html

Available As Of SAP S4/HANA 1909

Additional Details

You must enter the relevant plant in the Monitor Shop Floor Master Data app, and then you can filter the planned orders by material , MRP controller, or production supervisor. You can define a horizon and search for all planned orders with opening dates that lie within this horizon. If you leave this filter blank, the system searches for planned orders with opening dates on the current date or in the past. Also, this app analyzes the opening dates of the planned orders for the material and displays the earliest planned order date. Furthermore, you can navigate to a details page where you can view the details of the production version and solve the issues by creating a shop floor BOM version or routing, for example.


● Solve shop floor master data issues.For more information, see How to Solve Shop Floor Master Data Issues.

5.1.4 Manage Engineering Changes

With this feature you can use multiple new functions and features that are available for managing engineering changes.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details


● Manage date-effective engineering changes.● Create planning BOMs from a source date-effective or version-controlled engineering BOM.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/a2a3a4d0cb1942e9a8c394048d37ffa5.html

● Create shop floor BOM versions from a source date-effective or version-controlled planning BOM.● Create a production version for the planning BOM.

5.1.5 Additional PEO Features in VEMP

This feature enables you to assign manufacturing substitutes to a material during the EBOM to MBOM handover in VEMP. In both the source and target panels, you can now also see which items are phantom assemblies. A new column entitled Phantoms is available providing this information. You can also convert an assembly to a phantom assembly.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Information

Additional Features in Visual Enterprise Manufacturing Planner

5.1.6 Manage Shop Floor Routings

With this feature you can create and manage your shop floor routings. You can now also use multiple new functions and features that are available for maintaining shop floor routings.

Technical Details

Type Changed




https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/8a8a72d8eed146b6bd2e0220f6b2a105.html


Application Component PP-PEO-SFR


Additional Details

Using the new features available in the shop floor routing, you can:

● Enable a shop floor routing version for flexible processing.For more information on flexible processing, see Flexible Processing.

● Select a workspace more easily using the new workspace selection dialog box.● Select an MBOM more easily using the new MBOM selection dialog box.● Use the enhanced features for maintaining work instructions.

For more information, see How to Maintain Work Instructions for Operation Activities.● Maintain effectivity ranges at routing header level.

For more information, see How to Create a Routing with Parameter Effectivity.● Enhanced favorites options with referenceable objects.

For more information, see Working with Referenceable Templates.

5.1.7 Manage Rework Routings

With this feature you can create and manage your rework routings. You can now also use multiple new functions and features that are available for maintaining rework routings.

Technical Details

Type Changed






https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/16039bff4f4e469795c95b35da6490fe.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/794cc61130a140f4848fddc3c492b1e8.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/eba1875061fa4762a18ee879dc7ae41f.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/5814fd2457ca40f2ac68fa9829e58701.html

Additional Details

Using the new features available in the shop floor routing, you can:

● Maintain multiple rework routings per plant.● Specify one or more defect codes for which the rework routing is valid.● Create multiple operations for each rework routing.● Assign all objects such as work instructions, PRTs, or documents, for example, to operation activities.

For detailed information on how to create rework routings, see How to Create Rework Routings

Related Information

Unplanned Rework

5.1.8 Manage Planning Routings

This feature enables you to create a simplified routing that you can use together with the planning BOM for planning purposes long before the complex shop floor BOM and routing are completed. This means that you can perform material requirements planning and capacity planning prior to the completion of the final shop floor BOM and routing.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

Using the planning routing, you can ensure that all the necessary components will be available for execution including those components with very long procurement lead times. The planning routing also enables you to make sure that sufficient work center capacity will also be available when needed. You can create simple, date-effective planning routings or you can create a planning routing with parameter effectivity. In this case, you



https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/25e2fa5c09b84909a94673d8b9066489.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/5901424217a344df8f35c887597207a1.html

specify the effectivity type at routing creation and then you can only select materials or version-controlled planning BOMs that also have this effectivity type.

Using the new features, you can:

● Create a planning routing for a date-effective planning BOM (for non-unitized materials).● Create a planning routing for a version-controller planning BOM (for unitized materials).● Define the critical work center at routing header level that represents the capacity bottleneck and that is to

be used for capacity planning.● Use change numbers to manage changes to the planning routing.● Create operations.● Assign the appropriate work centers to operations and maintain standard values as necessary.● Assign one or multiple planning BOMs.● Perform component assignment at operation level for each assigned planning BOM.● Display the phantom assembly hierarchy in the component assignment workspace for date-effective

planning BOMs.

For more detailed information, see How to Create Planning Routings

Related Information

Planning with Date-Effective Planning BOMsPlanning with Unitized Parameter-Effective Planning BOMs

5.1.9 Manage Order-Specific Shop Floor Routings

This feature enables you to change a released production order that is currently in execution by creating an order-specific shop floor routing. You can create the order-specific shop floor routing in the Manage Production Operations and Manage Production Orders apps. The changes you make are only relevant to the production order for which you create the order-specific routing.

Technical Details

Type New






https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/9ae789ff65f74eee96528c7ab3acacf6.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/bbe5d733754e444289c7d6ac19bf7c15.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/8cf49d2df76241e78405b65b4bd9ca13.html

Additional Details

Using the new features available, you can:

● Create order-specific shop floor routings.For more information, see How to Create Order-Specific Routings.

● Change the structure of the routing by adding new operations, for example.● Change the components assigned to the routing. That is, you can add new components or deleted existing

ones.● Change the components assignments to operation activities, as necessary.

For more information, see How to Change Order-Specific Routings.

Related Information

Creating Order-Specific Routings

5.2 Extended Production Process Setup

5.3 Extended Production Operations

5.3.1 Production Control

5.3.1.1 Manage Production Orders

This feature enables you to monitor the progress of production. You can now also use new functions and features that are available for making order-specific changes to master data.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component PP-PEO-SFE



https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/3909605f18ee4f089eb495c1519fb414.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/89137af7450549aba8a9b33bb0b22d15.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/84f2b0b309964249a81191edb41fc16d.html


Additional Details


● Trigger the creation of an order-specific shop floor routing for shop floor orders that are released and currently in execution.For more information, see Creating Order-Specific Routings.

● Navigate to the Manage Order-Specific Shop Floor Routings app to make the necessary changes.For more information, see How to Change Order-Specific Routings.

● Determine the processing type determined in the master data for a production order. The processing type may be sequential or flexible.For more information, see Flexible Processing.

Related Information

Order Change Management

5.3.1.2 Manage Production Operations

This feature enables you to monitor the progress of production. You can now also use new functions and features that are available for making order-specific changes to master data.

Technical Details

Type Changed









https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/9cfa7981538643b6a66858e7f2959724.html

Additional Details


● Trigger the creation of an order-specific shop floor routing for operations of shop floor orders that are released and currently in execution.For more information, see Creating Order-Specific Routings.

● Navigate to the Manage Order-Specific Shop Floor Routings app to make the necessary changes.For more information, see How to Change Order-Specific Routings.

Related Information

Order Change Management

5.3.2 Production Execution

5.3.2.1 Assign Work

With this app, you can now unassign a single production operator or a selection of production operators from an operation activity that you select. This provides greater flexibility when you want to change the existing assignment of production operators to a particular operation activity.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Information

Assign Work





https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/9cfa7981538643b6a66858e7f2959724.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/0b81671aaf054a2d82c8b619306d5221.html

5.3.2.2 Enhancements for Rework

You can now use a range of new features that are available for rework in extended production operations and quality management. For example, you can specify a rework routing and its placement when processing defects that require a rework task with a follow-up action. In addition, when performing rework operation activities, you can add unplanned materials if you need more or different materials to perform rework, or if flexible processing has been enabled in the shop floor routing for the production order, you can start rework operation activities without waiting for the predecessor operation to be completed.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

Rework Routing Selection and PlacementWhile processing defects in the Process Defects app, you may need to create a quality task for rework. In such cases, you navigate to the Process Quality Tasks app, where you specify task code 015 for Rework. For this rework task, you can now define parameters for the follow-up action by choosing the Select Rework Routing button, which appears in the Process Quality Tasks app after you have selected the rework task. The system displays a list of rework routings linked to the defect code recorded by the production operator. Here you can select the rework routing you require and specify after which operation in the current production order you want to insert the operations of the rework routing.

For more information, see Select Rework Routing and How to Process Defects.

Add Unplanned MaterialsWhen performing rework operation activities, you can now add unplanned materials, for example, if you need to assemble more of one material or a different material than originally planned. Depending on the material's assembly type, you may be prompted to enter a serial number or quantity.

For more information, see How to Add Unplanned Materials.

Start Rework Operation Activities Independent of Predecessor OperationIf Flexible Processing has been enabled in the shop floor routing for the production order, you can start rework operation activities without waiting for the predecessor operation to be completed.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/69283d457bd0433cb478ca2817680686.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/6991a140e96c4413aa6764a947f5c35f.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/c3371416a0dd4a22b72ae0ce3efbddf1.html

For more information, see Flexible Processing

Related Information

Unplanned ReworkManage Rework Routings [page 387]

5.3.2.3 Perform Operation Activity

This feature enables you to perform operation activities. You can now also use new functions and features that are available for production execution.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details


● Process operation activities for serialized materials without explicitly having to navigate to the next or previous operation activity (these buttons have been removed). When you complete an operation activity, the status of the serialized material at this activity changes from In Process to Completed. The next operation activity is displayed automatically or you are prompted to select the operation activity you want to perform next if multiple activities are possible.

● Perform work in serialized execution without having to follow the defined sequence of operations. This feature is enabled if the Flexible Processing checkbox has been selected in the shop floor routing associated with the production order. Note that other functionalities (such as scheduling, calculation of scrap-adjusted quantities, and so on) still take the operation sequence into consideration. Essentially this feature allows production operators to work on operations in parallel and in any sequence.




https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/5901424217a344df8f35c887597207a1.html

NoteIf cross-operation dependencies have been defined, you will only be able to start those operation activities that have to be completed first.

● Add an unplanned material if you need to assemble a material that is not one of the components in the bill of material associated with the routing.

● Select the stock type to which you want to return a component when disassembling a component.

Related Information

How to Add Unplanned MaterialsFlexible ProcessingHow to Disassemble Components

5.3.2.4 Check Major Assembly Projects

This app enables you to check major assembly projects. You can now also use new functions and features that are available for checking major assembly projects.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details


● Filter the list of major assembly projects by issue type.● Check for the following types of issues:

○ BOM explosion issues○ Activity duration issues


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/c3371416a0dd4a22b72ae0ce3efbddf1.html


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/c5c24f4737774974bd7ba23f19626e35.html

○ Scheduling issues○ Nested major assembly issues○ Material-type-related issues

Related Information

Check Major Assembly Projects

5.3.2.5 Manage Major Assembly Projects

With this app, you can display an overview of your major assembly projects based on a range of filters. You can drill down into the detailed view for a major assembly project, open the project in the Project Builder, and navigate to the Check Major Assembly Projects app to resolve any issues. In addition, you can create projects based on the manufacturing BOM hierarchy for specific parameter effectivity values.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

Reference points are not required if you use this app to create a project. The app explodes the end-item BOM hierarchy and creates a project for the end item, networks for every major assembly, and network activities for every installation kit.

Related Information

Manage Major Assembly ProjectsCheck Major Assembly Projects



https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/f43ec803519844f1b645a747cee0a9da.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/80215af3c3b2458194085123fd849181.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/f43ec803519844f1b645a747cee0a9da.html

6 Just-In-Time Processing

6.1 Next Generation Just-In-Time (JIT) Supply to Production

This feature enables the following processes:

● Using the Manage Control Cycles app, the Production Planner - Lean Manufacturing can create, modify, view and filter new JIT control cycles for each material used in the production supply areas (PSAs). These control cycles can be used to raise requests for material replenishment from the warehouse.

● Using the Request Replenishments for Control Cycles app, the Production Operator – Lean Manufacturing can raise JIT calls using new JIT control cycles to request material replenishments for the PSAs.

● Using the Transfer Stock for JIT Supply to Production app, the Warehouse Clerk can prioritize and fulfil the open replenishment requests (JIT calls) in a timely manner.

Technical Details

Type New






To use this feature optimally, make the following setting in Customizing under Logistics Execution Just-in-Time Processing (New) JIT Supply to Production .

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Just-In-Time Processing P U B L I C 397

7 R&D/Engineering

7.1 Enterprise Portfolio and Project Management

7.1.1 Project Financial Control

7.1.1.1 Change Document Enablement in Grouping WBS Elements

This feature enables you to get an audit trail of any document changes to the Grouping WBS Elements. This change is relevant to transactions GRM4 and GRM5.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component PS-STR


Additional Details

The change document enablement is relevant for new data and changes to existing data.

7.1.1.2 Consistency Check for a Range of Grouping WBS Elements

This feature now enables you to carry out consistency checks on Grouping WBS elements for multiple WBS elements. You can view the result in the list viewer (ALV grid). This change is relevant to transaction GRM7.


R&D/Engineering

Technical Details

Type New





7.1.1.3 New transaction for Grouping WBS Elements

This feature enables you to carry out the assignment of WBS elements, plant and MRP Area to Grouping WBS Elements. The new transaction introduced is GRM8.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You can access this transaction from SAP Menu Logistics Project System Material PlanningRequirements Grouping Maintain Grouping WBS Elements


A new RFC function module MAINTAIN_GROUPING_WBS_PARAMS is created to:

● Carry out a mass insertion or deletion of WBS elements

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909R&D/Engineering P U B L I C 399

● Carry out a mass insertion or deletion of validity area of WBS elements

7.1.2 Commercial Project Management

7.1.2.1 Mass Update of Team Members

With this feature, you can use the Add and Delete Team Member from Commercial Projects (/CPD/PWS_MASS_TEAM_UPDATE) report to assign business partners to roles or remove business partners from roles in a commercial project team.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-CPD-WS (Project Workspace)



You can define project team roles for commercial projects, in Customizing under Commercial Project Management Master Data Commercial Project Define Role Profiles .

Related Information

Teams and Roles


R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/d6c1ceb7e0074cd1a8f28dad8a1a649c/1909.000/en-US/adb69c6207ca4cb9bd52a105f757dd87.html

7.1.2.2 Audit Log of Changes to Planning

With this feature, you can enable an audit log of changes to financial plans based on information stored in the real-time BW InfoCube /CPD/PFP_R01. If you enable auditing for the InfoCube, the following information is stored along with other changes to the InfoCube:

● The user that made the change, and the time at which it was made● The audit mode (load or plan) in which the change was made● The infoObject for which the change was made

Once you enable auditing, you can retrieve an audit log through a BEx query that suits your business needs.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-CPD-FP (Project Cost and Revenue Planning)


Additional Details

For more information on how to enable auditing, see SAP Note 2770658 .


Auditing will only apply to data changes after auditing is enabled.


If you enable auditing for the real-time InfoCube, you may observe slower performance for InfoCube-related operations. Moreover, compression of the real-time InfoCube may also be affected.



Related Information

Change Logging

7.1.2.3 Progress Reporting from Multiple Progress Versions

With this feature, you can view the progress of a commercial project from the results of different progress analysis versions. Users can choose the progress analysis version of their choice, in the Overview page of a commercial project.

Technical Details

Type New





For reporting the progress of commercial projects, you can define progress analysis versions in Customizing for Commercial Project Management, under Analytics Set Up Progress Analysis Versions in Analytics .

Related Information

Progress Analysis

7.1.2.4 Handling Change Requests in Active Versions

This feature allows you to handle the delay in approved change requests by re-baselining the active version. Normally, it is not possible to create a new baseline version if the active version contains approved costs from change request alternatives.

However, this is now possible by setting a status for the approved change request. This in turn changes the status of the approved change request alternative.


R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/d6c1ceb7e0074cd1a8f28dad8a1a649c/1909.000/en-US/5e1d0ef56f9e46caa564b0ee54e06cbf.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/d6c1ceb7e0074cd1a8f28dad8a1a649c/1909.000/en-US/5c7de3af6bf44a7182421e286297cb9b.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-CPD-FP (Project Cost and Revenue Planning)


Additional Details

To defer inclusion of approved change request alternatives when creating a new baseline version, set the system status of the corresponding change requests to Flag for deletion. This also sets the status of the change request alternative to In Progress thereby allowing the creation of a new baseline. However, to include approved change requests into the forecast, you must manually reset the status of the change request alternative and the change request.

7.1.2.5 Project Variance

With this feature, project managers can quickly identify and address critical situations in projects that have exceeded certain variance thresholds. Such projects can also be automatically grouped into a new category in the Cross-Project View. In the Overview screen, the project variance report helps to narrow down focus to the specific structure elements where the variance has occurred.

Technical Details

Type New






Additional Details

For more information, see SAP Note 2770478 .

Related Information

Project Variance

7.1.2.6 Flexible Definition of a User's Projects

The Cross-Project View provides a default category with a user's projects (projects to which the user is assigned).

This feature provides the following:

● Automatically removes projects that are complete, from the My Projects category● Allows you to define additional criteria to filter projects in this category, through a business add-in

implementation

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

For more information, see SAP Note 2821881 .


To define conditions that affect the list of projects in the My Projects category, you can create your own implementation of the method FILTER_MASTER_PROJECTof BAdI: Custom Settings in Commercial Project


R&D/Engineering


https://help.sap.com/viewer/d6c1ceb7e0074cd1a8f28dad8a1a649c/1909.000/en-US/de25f8b7dcdb4112a0297cf40165eed3.html


Header, in Customizing for Commercial Project Management Master Data Commercial ProjectBusiness Add-Ins .

7.2 Integrated Product Development for Discrete Industries

7.2.1 Access Control Management for Change Master

With this feature you can provide direct controlled access for your users, both internal and external, to change masters. This way you can ensure that users can only access change masters that are necessary for their work, thus protecting your data.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component PLM-WUI-APP-ACC



To enable the use of this feature, make sure to activate access control management for the change number object in the Customizing activity Activate Object Types for PLM Authorization Check under Logistics - General Product Lifecycle Management (PLM) PLM Web User Interface PLM Web Applications PLM Authorizations and Access Control Context .

Related Information

Change Master Integration with Access Control Management


https://help.sap.com/viewer/add30a34af294d51a0ccd83db28791f9/1909.000/en-US/4d8d0d407cf542fe9a60e043c3ddb566.html

7.2.2 Access Control Management for Bill of Material

This feature enables you to control the access to specific material BOM by selected users using access control management.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component LO-MD-BOM


Related Information

Access Control Management

7.2.3 Assignment of Change Record to BOM

With this feature, you can assign engineering change record to bill of material.

Technical Details

Type New






R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/18ee18df146f46e9a7738186eebceaa7/1909.000/en-US/02e0480ff0cb4031a75c7fe51f44a7bb.html

Related Information

Assigning Change Record

7.2.4 Maintain Variable Size Item for BOM

With this feature, you can maintain data that is specific to variable-size items and document items. If you enter variable-size item data, the system calculates the quantity. All calculations in BOMs are based on the international system of units.

Technical Details

Type New





7.2.5 Deletion of Multiple BOM Items

With this feature, you can now delete multiple BOM items.

Technical Details

Type New






https://help.sap.com/viewer/18ee18df146f46e9a7738186eebceaa7/1909.000/en-US/c0769320a7fc43cebeb14023a80685fe.html

7.2.6 Business Event Handling in Bill of Material

This feature enables you to handle the business events for bill of material by using the SAP object type BillOfMaterial.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Business Events Handling

7.2.7 Value Help Authorizations in Bill of Material


Technical Details

Type Changed






R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/18ee18df146f46e9a7738186eebceaa7/1909.000/en-US/d535895fc708442d963647ff6c30b492.html

Additional Details

Please see SAP Note 2809026 for a list of the affected applications, transactions and application objects in Bill of Material.



Related Information


7.2.8 Document Search

With this feature, you can search documents using the search function in the SAP Fiori launchpad. You can use the document search to search for an existing document info record (DIR) with different attributes.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-DMS


Related Information

Document Search



https://help.sap.com/viewer/1317b7d3a93c4763a041b49532666fd7/1909.000/en-US/2dcbd92a620749698e72c831c07ab0d6.html

7.2.9 Assignment of Phantom Items to Routing

With this feature, you can now view the phantom items in multilevel hierarchy and perform the component allocation of the phantom items to the routing.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component PLM-VEP-VMP


Related Information

How to Assign Phantom Items to Routing

7.2.10 Define Phantom Items in Assembly

With this feature, you can define an item as phantom or a phantom item as non-phantom item depending on your requirement.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component PLM-VEP-VMP



R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9fbed5ee4a6745ed90e67716f93e3205/1909.000/en-US/23a7e9705518484b833b59c39f55e093.html

Related Information

How to Define Phantom Items in Assembly

7.2.11 AVC - Enhanced Integration with Purchasing

With this feature you can:

● Use variant conditions in Purchasing to define surcharges and discounts for configurable materials that are procured externally. The surcharges and discounts depend on the values assigned to the characteristics in the sales order or (for material variants) the material master.

● Print a purhase order document with configuration data (characteristics and its values).

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2XU (2XU)

Application Component LO-VCH


7.2.12 AVC - Enhanced Integration with Production Order


● Display configuration of the material being produced using the Manage Production Order app.● View the variant configuration for production order items from a production order factsheet.● View the variant configuration for a production order header linked to the operations of a workcenter in

Managed Workcenter Capacity app.

Technical Details

Type New


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9fbed5ee4a6745ed90e67716f93e3205/1909.000/en-US/5e52135b83f64736a2d108810e7592ea.html





7.2.13 AVC - Apply Mass Changes to Material Variant

With this feature you can change the configuration for multiple material variants at the same time, when a configuration model is changed. For example, a new characteristic is included in a class and this characteristic is analyzed using object dependencies. Alternatively, object dependencies are changed and calculated characteristic values change as a result. At the same time, multiple material variants, which would now have to be changed, exist in order to adjust the stored configurations to the new model.

Technical Details

Type New





7.2.14 Enterprise Search for Classification Characteristic

This features provides an enterprise search to find classification characteristics based on the following basic attributes:

● Characteristic name● Characteristic description● Characteristic value● Characteristic value description


R&D/Engineering

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-CL-CHR


7.2.15 Enterprise Search for Classification Class

This features provides an enterprise search to find classification classes based on the following basic attributes:

● Class name● Class description● Keyword● Characteristics (name and description) assigned to the class

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-CL-CLS


7.2.16 AVC - Handling Inconsistencies for Multi-level VC Models

With this feature, you are able to see additional information to help resolve an inconsistent configuration, including object dependency documentation.


Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 22T (Set up Configurable Bill of Material using Variant Configuration)



7.2.17 AVC - Enhanced Functionality for Maintenance of Characteristic Groups

With this feature you will have the following improvements for characteristic group maintenance: view the number of characteristic assigned to a characteristic group, re-sort the assigned characteristics of a characteristic group, re-sort the assigned characteristic groups of a configuration profile, move single or multiple assigned characteristics of a characteristic group to the top or bottom position, move single or multiple assigned characteristic groups of a configuration profile to the top or bottom position.

Technical Details

Type New





7.2.18 Enhancements to Manage Engineering Changes

With this app, you can now do the following in a change process:

● identify where a selected material or BOM is used.● assign a specific user to a workflow task.


R&D/Engineering

● enable product structure variants for change records.● support context-based access control management.● support parameter effectivity based change number.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1NF (Engineering Change Management with Change Records)

Application Component PLM-FIO-CR


Related Information

Manage Engineering Changes

7.2.19 AVC - Syntax Enhancements

This feature provides syntax enhancements for object dependencies.

Technical Details

Type New






https://help.sap.com/viewer/9c4986bda35f4840ae438960ffbef64d/1909.000/en-US/d1c63dbe742b45ad98efa0e726da74a5.html

Related Information

Syntax per Characteristic Type

7.2.20 AVC - Enablement of BAdIs for the Advanced Configuration Engine

With this feature, you can implement the following BAdIs:

VCH_HL_PRE_VALIDATE_ASSIGN

This BAdI allows you to make changes to all the characteristic value assignments on every active instance of the configuration state (including all not validated changes) since the last configuration validation roundtrip.

VCH_HL_POST_VALIDATE_ASSIGN

This BAdI allows you to make changes to all the characteristic value assignments on every active instance of the configuration state directly after the model was configured.

VCH_HL_MD_DOMAIN_MODIFY

This BAdI allows you to change all characteristic value domains of each configurable material of a configuration model when this material is loaded into the active configuration.

Technical Details

Type New





7.2.21 Integration of Order Engineering Workbench

This feature enables you to use the Order Engineering Workbench, supporting classical Variant Configuration (LO-VC).

● Intuitive user interface (drag and drop, context menus, etc.)● Versioning of order BOMs and characteristic value assignments


R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/36802406aebb4b96b1598246e1d316ee/1909.000/en-US/346bee25fa8f4c37a6d4d60e29d95a10.html

● Reimport of versions (rollback functionality)● Reuse of previously created order BOMs for similar sales orders in the past

Technical Details

Type New





7.2.22 AVC - Enhancements for the Simulation Environment

With this feature, the following new functions are available for the Simuate Configuration Models app:

● New trace functionality, showing details of how object dependencies are processed in the configuration engine

● Reload master data● Improved handling of BOMs and routings

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component LO-VCH-FIO-SIM



7.3 Integrated Product Development for Process Industries

7.3.1 Contribution-based Formulation

With this feature you can see the formula items in a hierarchical structure and understand how they contribute to the primary output in terms of nutrients, cost, or composition. For nutrients and cost, you can define a dedicated reference quantity that differs from the Calculation Parameters. You can create your own layouts and save them so the most frequently needed information is always at hand. You can modify the recipe and see the updated contribution values immediately.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1QC (Formulation - Recipe Development)

Application Component PLM-WUI-RCP


Additional Details

With this feature, you can perform the following tasks:

● Get a hierarchical view for better understanding the contribution of each formula item to the primary output.

● Calculate the cost contribution of each formula item using a dedicated reference quantity.● Calculate the nutrient contribution of each formula item to the primary output or to a stage output using a

dedicated reference quantity. Nutrient loss profiles are taken into consideration.● Calculate the composition of each component and show how each formula item adds up these

components to the primary output.● See basic intraformula calculations (eg. Mass per PO) for each formula item.● Modify the recipe and see the updated contribution values in real time.● Manage layouts and create user-specific layouts for the contribution view.● Export the contents of the contribution view to a spreadsheet.● Reorder columns within the contribution table, sorting them based on importance.● Scale quantities in read-only mode.● Get notification on missing nutrient values and/or exception values.

The Contribution view is available in the Manage Recipes app, under the Formula tab. For more information, see Contribution-based Formulation.


R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b4bdbde3faf42e7a1d477e7691646eb/1909.000/en-US/654257c6210a4c949f4084132474d47f.html

7.3.2 Usability Enhancements in Recipe Development

This feature enables you to search recipes more effectively in the Manage Recipes and Recipe Finder apps. You can now find recipes whose primary output specification is not yet valid on the current date, so you can access and keep working on your future recipes. In Recipe Finder you can further narrow down your result list by the validity dates of recipes, thus ensuring more accurate and relevant results.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1QC (Formulation - Recipe Development), 22R (Advanced Ingredient Replacement for Recipes)

Application Component PLM-FIO-RCP


Additional Details

The following usability improvements are now available in SAP Recipe Development:

● In the Manage Recipes app a Search Date field has been added, allowing you to search recipes whose primary specification is not valid on the current date.

● In the Recipe Finder app you can now filter recipes by their valid-from and valid-to dates. This is especially useful if you have executed a date-independent search and would like to narrow down your results for past or future recipes.

Related Information

Manage RecipesRecipe Finder


https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b4bdbde3faf42e7a1d477e7691646eb/1909.000/en-US/56c88757c483ad6be10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1b4bdbde3faf42e7a1d477e7691646eb/1909.000/en-US/0be8bf39d0864d0b89e3dda4fda90189.html

7.4 Product Compliance

7.4.1 Foundation for Product Compliance

7.4.1.1 Role Concept for Products

With this feature, you can assign logistics roles, such as Purchased, Produced, Transported, or Sold, to a product to carry out compliance processes and maintain compliance data based on these roles. You can assign and change logistics roles with the Manage Basic Compliance Data - Unpackaged Products and Manage Raw Materials Compliance apps.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 31G (Chemical Compliance Approval for Purchased Material And Supplier), 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product), 3VR (Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products), 3FC (Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product)



Additional Details

Logistics roles affect compliance processes in the following ways:

● The assignment and propagation of compliance assessments is based on these logistics roles and role changes.

● Certain logistics roles are connected to certain default compliance purposes, which are assigned to the product or raw material automatically along with the role assignment.

The Compliance Assessment apps support the different logistics roles, which influence the calculation of the assessments. For example, the substance list check, which is a compliance pattern for calculating assessments, now considers the data in the following:

● Substance Assessment● Raw Material Assessment● Supplier Assessment


R&D/Engineering

The data affected the different roles is considered with the best-case scenario. In other words, it ignores data that isn’t available instead of treating it as missing. This behavior is different from the calculation of the compliance status.

Related Information

Logistics Roles

7.4.1.2 Automatic Change Processing

With this feature, you can monitor product compliance events and follow-on tasks in the Process Product Compliance Events app. For example, in activating a compliance requirement version, you can apply regulatory changes and reprocess them after resolving errors. When an event has been processed, the initiator is notified in the central notification area on the SAP Fiori launchpad. This feature increases data quality and consistency by keeping calculated results in sync with base data.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 31G (Chemical Compliance Approval for Purchased Material And Supplier), 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product), 31J (Chemical Compliance in Sales), 3G8 (Dangerous Goods in Sales), 3FC (Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product), 3VQ (Safety Data Sheets in Sales), 3VR (Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products)



Additional Details

Automatic change processing recalculates compliance assessments based on various event triggers, especially if a new compliance requirement version is activated. The Process Product Compliance Events app supports asynchronous event processing for the activation of a new compliance requirement version, as well as synchronous processing for other events. In some cases, a product compliance event triggers follow-on tasks, which you can track and troubleshoot individually. For example, when a compliance requirement is added to an


https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/06ec644541e8426b9dd1d3cc5dda94de.html

active compliance purpose and the purpose is saved, the system creates an event of type Compliance Purpose Saved. This event triggers the following tasks:

● Creation of compliance assessments for all active versions of the assigned compliance requirement according to the defined compliance pattern

● Propagation of compliance assessments to subordinate products and raw materials according to the defined compliance pattern

● Compliance check of the products and raw materials to which compliance assessments have been newly added

● Automatic release of compliance assessments where possible

If any of these tasks causes the event to fail, you can open a log that displays the attempted tasks. Using the information provided in the log, you can correct the failed tasks and trigger task processing again.


Upon the activation of a new compliance requirement version, a background job to recalculate the relevant compliance assessments is started.


To activate the event type linkage so that the system can react to relevant product compliance events from the application and perform the necessary follow-on activities, carry out the Customizing activity Product Compliance Foundation for Product Compliance Product Compliance Event Processing Activate Event Type Linkage .

To ensure that users receive a notification when the background processing of product compliance events has finished or failed, carry out the Customizing activity Product Compliance Foundation for Product Compliance Activate Notification Providers .

Related Information

Process Product Compliance Events

7.4.1.3 Integration into the Product Master

This feature makes the Compliance Relevant field available in the unified product API to ensure data consistency for customers using both the Manage Product Master Data SAP Fiori app and update processes in background programs. In addition, requests from logistics for compliance information about a material are closed automatically when you release a market assessment of the material. The Compliance Relevant field replaces the Environmentally Relevant field in triggering compliance processes.


R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/e632fa8375aa4fa8b8438b6e49207323.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 31G (Chemical Compliance Approval for Purchased Material And Supplier), 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product), 31J (Chemical Compliance in Sales), 3G8 (Dangerous Goods in Sales), 3FC (Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product), 3VQ (Safety Data Sheets in Sales), 3VR (Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products)



Additional Details

The automatic closure of requests from logistics reduced time by combining the assessment tasks and the tasks to update requests from logistics.


The system checks the compliance-relevant indicator in the product master when you activate product compliance. If the compliance-relevant indicator is set to Yes, a compliance view is created to provide relevant compliance insights. To activate product compliance, carry out the Customizing activity Product Compliance

Foundation for Product Compliance Activate Product Compliance .

Besides setting the compliance-relevant indicator manually in the Manage Product Master Data app, you can have the indicator set automatically whenever a changed product is saved. To do so, carry out the Customizing activity Product Compliance Integration Automatic Determination of Compliance Relevance .

7.4.1.4 Extended Compliance Purpose Management

With this feature, you can edit active compliance purposes. Upon saving, the system creates an event of the type Compliance Purpose Saved in the Process Product Compliance Events app. For each compliance requirement that has been added or removed, the system searches for the affected products and raw materials and changes the relevant compliance assessments accordingly.


Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product), 3FC (Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product), 3VR (Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products)



Additional Details

When you add or remove at least one compliance requirement and then save the active compliance purpose in the Manage Compliance Purposes app, the system recognizes the relevant changes. The system then creates an event of the type Compliance Purpose Saved in the Process Product Compliance Events app. The event is processed in the background.

● For each compliance requirement that you've added to the compliance purpose, the system searches for all unpackaged products and raw materials to which the purpose is assigned. The system then performs the following actions:○ Creates compliance assessments for all active versions of the assigned compliance requirement

according to the compliance pattern of the compliance requirement version. This action simulates a manual compliance purpose assignment.

○ Propagates the compliance assessments to subordinate products and raw materials according to the compliance pattern.

○ Carries out a compliance check for the products and raw materials to which the compliance assessments have been newly added.

○ Attempts to release the new compliance assessments automatically if possible.● For each compliance requirement that you’ve removed from the compliance purpose, the system searches

for all unpackaged products and raw materials to which the purpose is assigned. The system then performs the following actions for both the unpackaged products and raw materials and all linked packaged products:○ Sets the processing status of all affected released compliance assessments for the compliance

requirement to Historical○ Deletes all affected compliance assessments in progress. The deletion isn't propagated to any

subordinate unpackaged products or raw materials.


R&D/Engineering


When you add a compliance requirement to or remove a compliance requirement from an active compliance purpose and then save, an event of the type Compliance Purpose Saved is started. This event runs as a background job and performs the actions described under Additional Details.


To activate the event type linkage so that the system can react to changes to compliance purposes and carry out the necessary follow-on activities, carry out the Customizing activity Product Compliance Foundation for Product Compliance Product Compliance Event Processing Activate Event Type Linkage for object type CL_EHFND_PCEP_EVT_WF_PRP, event CHANGED.


Related Information

Compliance Purpose and RequirementCompliance PatternsManage Compliance Purposes

7.4.1.5 Automatic Release of Compliance Assessments

With this feature, the system determines which pattern applies to each compliance assessment in status In Progress and verifies whether the pattern-specific conditions are met to release the compliance assessment. If these conditions are met, the compliance assessment is released automatically. You can view compliance assessments in the various Compliance Assessment apps.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product), 3VR (Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products)


https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/633a1a92c1314f5aa4956155b5662e3f.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/1ba8dd135a4e4b72827bd345d5ae4421.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/24c52911df3a4e389eb970748bc12002.html

Application Component EHS-SUS-PMA (Product Marketability and Chemical Compliance), EHS-SUS-SDS (Safety Data Sheet Management)


Additional Details

The following pattern-specific details apply to the automatic release of compliance assessments:

Compliance Pattern Condition for Automatically Releasing a Compliance Assessment

Substance List Check

If at least one of the following conditions is met, a compliance assessment can be released automatically:

● The calculated aggregated compliance status of the substance, raw material, and supplier assessment is either Compliant or Not Applicable.

● The calculated aggregated compliance status of the substance, raw material, and supplier assessment is Not Compliant, and a compliance assessment of the previous version with the same compliance status and assessment details exists.A typical use case of this condition is the activation of a new compliance requirement version in which additional restricted substances have been added but aren't used in the assessed product.

Simple Compliance Documentation

If the calculated compliance status is Compliant, meaning that all subordinate products, raw materials, and supplier raw materials are compliant, a compliance assessment can be released automatically.

Supplier Information

If the calculated compliance status is Compliant, meaning that all subordinate raw materials and supplier raw materials are compliant, a compliance assessment at the product or raw material level can be released automatically.

Safety Data Sheet Management

If safety data sheets are provided in all required languages, the compliance assessment can be released.


If the conditions described in the Additional Details section are met, existing compliance assessments in status In Progress are automatically set to Released.


The automatic release of a compliance assessment is a product compliance event, which can lead to calculations that run as background jobs.


R&D/Engineering


To activate the event type linkage so that the system can react to automatic releases of compliance assessments and perform the necessary follow-on activities, carry out the Customizing activity Product Compliance Foundation for Product Compliance Product Compliance Event Processing Activate Event Type Linkage for object type CL_EHFND_PCEP_EVT_WF_CRR, event RELEASED.


Related Information

Compliance PatternsProcess Product Compliance Events

7.4.1.6 Integration into Outbound Delivery Processing

Integration into outbound delivery processing allows you to monitor and manage issues in delivery processing due to compliance reasons. This streamlines processing of compliance issues and improves on-time delivery of goods.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 31J (Chemical Compliance in Sales), 3G8 (Dangerous Goods in Sales), 3VQ (Safety Data Sheets in Sales)




https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/1ba8dd135a4e4b72827bd345d5ae4421.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/e632fa8375aa4fa8b8438b6e49207323.html

Additional Details

● Enhancements in the Sales Order Fulfillment - Analyze and Resolve Issues app:○ In this app, you can see the Dangerous Goods Status and the Safety Data Sheet Status for delivery

documents.○ You can automatically update the corresponding items of sales orders and sales quotations when you

release a market assessment for the material of the given item. For example, the status of an item is automatically set from Blocked to Approved.

○ You can navigate to the Compliance Information app from with the Sales Order Fulfillment - Analyze and Resolve Issues app.

● Enhancements in the Manage Outbound Deliveries app:In this app, you can see the following statuses:○ Product Marketability Status○ Dangerous Goods Status○ Safety Data Sheet Status

● Enhancements in the Compliance Information - For Products app:○ You can see compliance information for products and materials not only in the Compliance Information

- For Products app, but in all screens and activities where a material is visible.○ The Compliance Information - For Products app supports the sales order context.

● Enhancements in the Process Requests from Logistics app:This app supports the processing of requests from deliveries. With these enhancements, product stewardship specialists can process market assessment requests on item level while the delivery is processed.○ They can accept requests and initiate compliance and market assessments, and exceptionally approve

or reject requests.○ After the request has been processed, the marketability status for the delivery item is updated

automatically.○ After a market assessment has been released, the marketability status for the delivery item is updated

automatically.


When you activate product compliance, the system uses compliance information and dangerous goods data in sales and delivery processes, as long as you have activated the corresponding business features. To activate product compliance, carry out the Customizing activity Product Compliance Foundation for Product Compliance Activate Product Compliance .

Related Information

Manage Outbound DeliveriesCompliance Information - For Products


R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/c7894a248ca14f74aca67f97528e5ad7/1909.000/en-US/7d9124f355bf4d2790e0776a68ea7bb6.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/b5ae413b93bc4587986a10955368b763.html

7.4.1.7 Enterprise Search for Compliance Views

With this feature, you can search for compliance views for raw materials and for products. From the search results area, you can then navigate to other apps that support your product compliance business processes.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 31G (Chemical Compliance Approval for Purchased Material And Supplier), 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product), 3VR (Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products), 3FC (Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product)



Additional Details

The SAP Fiori launchpad offers an enterprise search function that searches across all apps and business objects. To start a search, click the magnifying glass icon. To search for compliance views for raw materials or products, you select the corresponding entry from the dropdown list next to the search input field. You then enter your search query in the search field. The search results area lists all objects that match your search query. You can expand and collapse the display area of search results to view more or fewer details.

The following enterprise search models are available for Product Compliance:

● Compliance View of Raw MaterialsThe system searches for compliance information for raw materials. In the results area, you can view the matching raw materials with material-related information. In addition, you can use the links to navigate to the apps that support you in managing the raw material compliance.

● Compliance View of ProductsThe system searches for compliance information for unpackaged products. In the results area, you can view the matching unpackaged products with material-related information. In addition, you can use the links to navigate to the apps that support you in managing compliance, assessing marketability, fulfilling safety data sheet requirements, and classifying unpackaged products according to dangerous goods regulations.

NoteIf you are not authorized to view a business object in the system, you will not be able to find it using any search functions. Furthermore, you might need specific permissions or roles to access certain objects.



For information about configuring the enterprise search function, see Setting up Enterprise Search.

7.4.2 Product Marketability and Chemical Compliance

7.4.2.1 Regulatory Content Update

With this feature, the regulatory content has been updated to comply with requirements related to Product Marketability and Chemical Compliance. The content reflects globally increasing country coverage, continuously deepening regional specifics, and regular updates based on new or updated regulations worldwide. This feature also facilitates compliance checks by extending automation for data calculations, broadening standardization to reduce effort, and covering changing business requirements.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 31G (Chemical Compliance Approval for Purchased Material And Supplier), 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product), 31J (Chemical Compliance in Sales)

Application Component EHS-SUS-PMA (Product Marketability and Chemical Compliance)


Additional Details

The regulatory content has been updated with over 40 new compliance requirements, over 50 new compliance requirement versions, and over 30 corrections of existing compliance requirement versions.

In addition, the Activate Compliance Requirements app has been enhanced in the following ways:

● The expiration date of the previous compliance requirement version is updated automatically upon activation of a new version.

● The updated and new compliance requirement versions are displayed in both the Active and New or Updated views, which increases visibility.

● The activation of a new compliance requirement version is carried out in the background.


R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/90b263323d0a4976bcda415e6bd20ea4/1909.000/en-US/8588b6c3499949149c08e2163e78ca9a.html

The Compliance Assessment - Substance List Check app has been enhanced in that you can use more precise operators in the compositions for upper and lower limit values, and the more precise calculation of the compliance status is based on details of the regulations. Because the compositions now support the operators <, <=, >, and >= for the values of the lower limits and upper limits of components, the calculation of the compliance status can use these more precise limits if the rule set needs them.

The Manage Substances Compliance app has been enhanced in the following ways:

● You can manually adapt substance group assignments.● Changes to the substance group assignments start a check of the corresponding compliance

assessments.

Related Information

SAP Content for Compliance RequirementsActivate Compliance Requirements - Product MarketabilityCompliance Assessment - Substance List Check

7.4.2.2 Marketability Check in Outbound Delivery Processing

With this feature, the system checks all compliance-relevant products to determine whether further processing is allowed with regards to marketability. If this is not the case, the post goods issue is blocked for the delivery.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 31J (Chemical Compliance in Sales)



Additional Details

If a product has been marked as relevant for compliance in the product master, the system checks marketability data when a shipping specialist saves an outbound delivery. The system checks if a product can


https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/9f5248da04fc492babd04d5cedd5cbb0.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/1abd2c4f776b4a7dbea7cefa6cfd90e7.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/104c7f10eecc41f3828173b62a705758.html

be delivered to a certain country or region. If not, the system automatically blocks the item and informs the shipping specialist about the issue. If the marketability is not yet assessed or released, the item is blocked, and a request is triggered so that the product steward can assess the data for the product. If the product can be delivered under restricted conditions, the shipping specialist is informed that there are restrictions, but the item can be further processed.

7.4.2.3 Improved Compliance Assessment

With this feature, you can use the improved Compliance Assessment - Substance List Check, Compliance Assessment - Supplier Information, and Compliance Assessment - Substance List Check apps to visualize statuses and issues as pie charts or tables that provide more details. The apps display objects, such as raw materials, suppliers, and substances, both with and without issues.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product



Additional Details

The Compliance Assessment - Substance List Check app provides a substance list check with a graphical overview and more detailed information about the raw material, supplier, and substance assessments. The Compliance Assessment - Supplier Information and Compliance Assessment - Simple Compliance Documentation apps display the aggregated result of the compliance calculation as pie charts.

Related Information

Compliance Assessment - Substance List CheckCompliance Assessment - Supplier InformationCompliance Assessment - Simple Compliance Documentation


R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/104c7f10eecc41f3828173b62a705758.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/5aa446121cd84fa9aaddb607716ee028.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/8090a883ad47437e8763de402da52e2b.html

7.4.2.4 Substance List Analytics

With this feature, you can use the three new analytics apps, Substance Lists - Impact on Sales, Substance Lists - Impact on Production, and Substance Lists - Impact on Supplier, to monitor substances and analyze their impact on sales, production, and suppliers. This allows you to streamline the processing of compliance issues, prepare for upcoming regulatory changes, and analyze the impact of these changes on your portfolio.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 31H (Assess Marketability of a Product



Additional Details

The Substance Lists - Impact on Sales app enables you to analyze the possible impact on sales if substances in a monitoring list become restricted in the future. This allows you to plan for and trigger customer communication and potential engineering changes.

The Substance Lists - Impact on Production app enables you to see the affected materials for products that contain substances in a monitoring list. The app allows you to analyze the possible impact on produced products if substances on this list become restricted in the future. This enables you to plan for and trigger potential production and engineering changes.

The Substance Lists - Impact on Supplier app enables you to see affected materials and suppliers of raw materials that contain substances in a monitoring list. The app allows you to analyze the possible impact on raw materials if substances on this list become restricted in the future. This enables you to plan for and trigger supplier communication and potential engineering changes.

Related Information

Substance Lists - Impact on SalesSubstance Lists - Impact on ProductionSubstance Lists - Impact on Supplier


https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/1f7d54e9cd8f48919a8629d7700e2951.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/bc82f6fde66141c0960ab521ba89324e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/087ed0bbd7504f0a885c7a36e781acd6.html

7.4.3 Dangerous Goods Management

7.4.3.1 Manage Compliance Requirements

With this feature, you can manage and activate compliance requirements. A compliance requirement contains data for a dangerous goods regulation. It has to be released and activated before it can be used in business processes. If a compliance requirement is no longer needed, you can deactivate it.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3FC (Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product)

Application Component EHS-SUS-DG


Additional Details

A compliance requirement in Dangerous Goods Management contains data for a dangerous goods regulation. Since only active compliance requirements are used in dangerous goods-related business processes, you can activate the compliance requirements using the Activate Compliance Requirements - Dangerous Goods app.

You can create your own compliance requirements and review existing ones using the Manage Compliance Requirements - Dangerous Goods app.

To support your dangerous goods processes, SAP delivers new and updated compliance requirements containing dangerous goods information for certain dangerous goods regulations. After you have activated these requirements, you can use them to assess and classify your products according to these regulations.

See Also

For more information about the apps, see the following app descriptions:

● Manage Compliance Requirements - Dangerous Goods.● Activate Compliance Requirements - Dangerous Goods.


R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/c0c99cee0a014d3f86526dc79285a34a.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/cb04f12a59f448f786394b360800df67.html

7.4.3.2 Classify Unpackaged Dangerous Goods

With this feature, you can classify unpackaged products according to the applicable dangerous goods regulations.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

When the product stewardship specialist for product compliance assigns a compliance purpose to a product, the system generates classification requests for the unpackaged product. You can use the following apps to assess these unpackaged products and classify them according to the assigned dangerous goods regulations:

● My Unpackaged Dangerous GoodsGet an overview of unpackaged products in your responsible unit that have to be classified according to dangerous goods regulations. View the progress that shows how many regulations are assigned to the product and how many of these regulations are already released.

● Classify Unpackaged Dangerous GoodGet an overview of the dangerous goods regulations that are assigned to the unpackaged product. View the classification entered in the Classify Dangerous Good - Unpackaged Product app and dangerous goods basic descriptions for all regulations in all available languages. To simplify the classification process, you can also apply the classification from other products to all regulations, apply a classification for one regulation to others, and release all regulations so that they can be used in other business processes. In addition, you can use this app as a starting point to navigate to other apps that further support your product compliance business processes.

● Classify Dangerous Good - Unpackaged ProductClassify an unpackaged product according to the dangerous goods regulation that you have selected in the Classify Unpackaged Dangerous Good app. In addition, you can use this app as a starting point to navigate to other apps that further support your product compliance business processes.

After you have released your classification for an unpackaged product, the system generates classification requests for the packaged product that is assigned to the unpackaged product.


See Also


● My Unpackaged Dangerous Goods.● Classify Unpackaged Dangerous Good.● Classify Dangerous Good - Unpackaged Product.

7.4.3.3 Classify Packaged Dangerous Goods

With this feature, you can classify packaged products according to the applicable dangerous goods regulations.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product



Additional Details

After you have released your classification for an unpackaged product, the system generates classification requests for the packaged product that is assigned to the unpackaged product. You can use the following apps to assess these packaged products:

● My Packaged Dangerous GoodsGet an overview of packaged products in your responsible unit that have to be classified according to dangerous goods regulations. View the progress that shows how many regulations are assigned to the product and how many of these regulations are already released.

● Classify Packaged Dangerous GoodGet an overview of the dangerous goods regulations that are assigned to the packaged product.Get an overview of the dangerous goods regulations that are assigned to the product that you have selected in the My Packaged Dangerous Goods app. Specify the enclosure variant and the description of the dangerous good that is used on documents for all selected regulations. View all descriptions as they will be printed on dangerous goods documents and on sales and delivery documents. You can also select multiple regulations and release them in one step. In addition, you can use this app as a starting point to navigate to other apps that further support your product compliance business processes.


R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/8294a3ebd7db40149203f31738325df5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/6bb3fda503aa4466bea37c89856d68a1.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/dd0ecc42f61e4b9cbe599f5b02fa00ae.html

● Classify Dangerous Good - Packaged ProductClassify a packaged product according to the dangerous goods regulation that you have selected in the Classify Packaged Dangerous Good app. In addition, you can use this app as a starting point to navigate to other apps that further support your product compliance business processes.

After you have released your classification for the packaged product, the system uses the classification data for dangerous goods checks that are carried out in sales and delivery documents.

See Also


● My Packaged Dangerous Goods.● Classify Packaged Dangerous Good.● Classify Dangerous Good - Packaged Product.

7.4.3.4 Specify Applicable Dangerous Goods Regulations

With this feature, you can apply dangerous goods regulations to specific countries and specify the languages in which dangerous goods data must be printed on sales and delivery documents.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

When you transport dangerous goods into another country, you have to comply with the dangerous goods regulations that are valid for this country. Compliance involves ensuring that the transport of a dangerous good is allowed for the mode of transport you are using and that the dangerous goods documents are available in the required languages.

Using the Apply Regulation - Dangerous Goods app, you, as a dangerous goods expert, can select regulations that are applicable for a specific mode of transport in a certain country. The dangerous goods check that is


https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/4633daafad184b98853f6a98ff92d9be.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/194d52bb22a142db8124d4fe57e2bd9d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/91d5cd2c4aae4bb7adece4e57e504986.html

carried out in sales and delivery documents determines the classification of the transported product for the specified regulation. Depending on the transport permission of the classification, the check either allows or blocks further processing of the documents.

In addition, you can allow or forbid the transport of dangerous goods by a specific mode of transport. If you select one of these options, the check always allows further processing of the documents or blocks them independent of the classification of the transported product. These settings are useful if, for example, no dangerous goods regulations are valid for a specific country.


SAP delivers applicable regulations and required languages for various countries. However, you can change the data using the Apply Regulation - Dangerous Goods app.


You can use the Prefill Applicable Dangerous Goods Regulations Customizing activity to start report R_EHDGM_REG_USE_FILL (Prefill Applicable Dangerous Goods Regulations). This report prefills database tables with applicable dangerous goods regulations and applicable languages for the various modes of transports in certain countries.

You can change the applicable dangerous goods regulations and languages for a country using the Apply Dangerous Goods Regulation app. If you have entered any data using this app, this report will not overwrite your changes.

See Also

For more information about the app, see the following app description:

● Apply Regulations - Dangerous Goods.

7.4.3.5 Analyze Products with Certain Dangerous Goods Classifications

With this feature, you can analyze the dangerous goods classification of unpackaged and packaged products step by step from different perspectives.


R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/d43443bd9915475fbff981b567164cf9.html

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

Using the apps Analyze Unpackaged Dangerous Goods and Analyze Packaged Dangerous Goods, you can view classification data grouped by various criteria, such as where you want to transport the product, how is it classified, or in which status the classification is. If you select a value in one of the charts in the filter area, the data in the content area is adapted automatically to display only the data that meets your selection. This feature enables you to easily get an overview of the classifications of your products. If a regulation is changed, you can quickly identify the products that have to be reassessed.

See Also


● Analyze Unpackaged Dangerous Goods.● Analyze Packaged Dangerous Goods.

7.4.3.6 Enhancements in the Compliance Information App

When transporting a packaged product that is classified as a dangerous good, you must know in which countries and on which modes of transport you are allowed to transport the product. The new Dangerous Goods view in the Compliance Information - For Products app gives you an overview of the transport permissions for the packaged product in the different countries.

Technical Details

Type Changed


https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/f033103ba82c4399b4217a099ae8b990.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/cf6473ea1e904367bc46a36f15d75896.html


Scope Item 3G8 (Dangerous Goods in Sales)



Additional Details

With the Compliance Information - For Products app, you can view compliance information and dangerous goods data for packaged products for which the Compliance Relevant indicator has been set to Yes in the material master. When you select a product, you can now also view transport permissions and dangerous goods data for different countries/regions as a world map. The colors of the countries indicate the effects on the processing of sales and delivery documents so that you can get a quick overview of whether or not the transport of your product is allowed in a certain country.

See Also

For more information about the app, see the following app description:

● Compliance Information - For Products.

7.4.3.7 Dangerous Goods Data in Sales Processes

Compliance with dangerous goods regulations is an important component of product compliance to ensure safe transportation of dangerous goods. To support you in complying with dangerous goods regulations, dangerous goods data is integrated into the processing of various sales document types. The data can be used for transport checks.

Technical Details

Type New





R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/b5ae413b93bc4587986a10955368b763.html


Additional Details

Dangerous Goods Checks in Sales Documents

If a product has been marked as relevant for compliance in the product master, the system checks dangerous goods data when an internal sales representative saves a sales document. If an item in the sales document has been classified as a dangerous good, the system also checks if all necessary dangerous goods data is available, and whether transportation of the product is allowed, forbidden, or restricted. Depending on the check results, the system allows or blocks further processing of the sales documents.

Output of Dangerous Goods Data on Sales Documents

The form templates SD_SLS_ORDER_CONFIRM (Sales Order) and SD_SLS_ORDER_WO_CHARGE (Sales Order Without Charge) include information about dangerous goods if the goods are picked up by the customer and not transported by the seller (that is, if the corresponding shipping condition is used).

For sales orders and sales orders without charge, the delivery date and the confirmed quantity are excluded from the output for items that are blocked by the dangerous goods check. Instead, the output contains the information that further assessment is required before the relevant item can be delivered.


To use the dangerous goods integration into the sales processes, you have to activate the corresponding business feature in the Customizing under Product Compliance Foundation for Product ComplianceActivate Business Features .

See Also

For more information, see Dangerous Goods in Sales Processes.

7.4.3.8 Dangerous Goods Data in Delivery Processes

Compliance with dangerous goods regulations is an important component of product compliance to ensure safe transportation of dangerous goods. To support you in complying with dangerous goods regulations, dangerous goods data is integrated into the processing of outbound deliveries. The data can be used for transport checks.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/4e405407fc8146cfa66e26fa3ee2054b.html

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

If a product has been marked as relevant for compliance in the product master, the system checks dangerous goods data when an internal sales representative saves a delivery document. If an item in the delivery document has been classified as a dangerous good, the system also checks if all necessary dangerous goods data is available, and whether transportation of the product is allowed, forbidden, or restricted. Depending on the check results, the system allows or blocks further processing of the delivery documents.


To use the dangerous goods integration into the delivery processes, you have to activate the corresponding business feature in the Customizing under Product Compliance Foundation for Product ComplianceActivate Business Features .

See Also

For more information, see Dangerous Goods in Delivery Processing.

7.4.4 Safety Data Sheet Management

7.4.4.1 Safety Data Sheet Management for Products

With this feature, you manage safety data sheets according to chemical regulations for your entire product portfolio and ensure compliant hazard communication for your products. You can assign, view, and manage a compliance requirement for safety data sheets. You can upload safety data sheets to fulfill the requirements selected in the Unpackaged Product - Compliance Requirements app and release documents for use in follow-up processes.


R&D/Engineering

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/b28cabe5624147a2a4fd537c17d69762.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3VR (Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products)

Application Component EHS-SUS-SDS


Additional Details

A compliance requirement in Safety Data Sheet Management contains data that indicates in which languages a safety data sheet is required for a certain country. Since only active compliance requirements are used in safety data sheet-related business processes, you can activate the compliance requirements using the Activate Compliance Requirements – Safety Data Sheets app.

You can create your own compliance requirements and review existing ones using the Manage Compliance Requirements - Safety Data Sheets app. Eight example compliance requirements are predefined for safety data sheets.

To support your safety data sheet processes, SAP delivers compliance requirements containing safety data sheet information for certain regulations. After you have activated these requirements, you can use them to manage your products according to these regulations.

7.4.4.2 Safety Data Sheet Integration with Sales and Delivery

With this features, a safety data sheet check is integrated into the processing of various sales and delivery document types to support compliance with safety data sheet regulations.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3VQ (Safety Data Sheets in Sales)




Additional Details

If a product has been marked as relevant for compliance in the product master, the system checks safety data sheet data when a sales or delivery document is saved. Any relevant change to a material triggers a safety data sheet check. If an item in the document is relevant for the check, the system first verifies that a ship-to country and the address of the sales organization is given. If not, a warning is created and the user is informed about the missing data.

As a next step, the system verifies whether, for the ship-to country, safety data sheets are required. If no safety data sheet is required for a ship-to country, the check for the item is completed successfully. If the ship-to country requires safety data sheets, the system checks whether the documents exist in all required languages. If no released safety data sheets are available or languages or key information are missing, the system raises a warning for the item, informs the user, and creates a request for the product stewardship specialist.

The request allows the product stewardship specialist to assess the data for the product and take or initiate the required actions to provide the missing safety data sheets in required languages.

The delivery is blocked if particular information is missing. When the safety data sheet is provided with the required information, the system releases the compliance requirement and closes the request. If the delivery was blocked, the system changes the delivery status from Blocked to OK.


The system creates notifications to the product-stewardship department to complete missing data for checks or to request the safety data sheets.

By default, these notifications are enabled. However, you can disable the notifications in the SAP Fiori launchpad settings.

7.4.4.3 Analyze Safety Data Sheet Availability

With this feature, you can use the Analyze Safety Data Sheet Availability app to check the availability of safety data sheets for unpackaged products, based on compliance requirements. By using various filter criteria, you can look up available safety data sheets to respond to information inquiries or to fulfill auditing requirements. You can also easily identify missing safety data sheets for later processing.


R&D/Engineering

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

This app allows you to view safety data sheets grouped by various filter criteria. You can export the data matching your filter selection to a spreadsheet. You can select an item from the table to navigate to its view in the Manage Safety Data Sheets app. You can also save your settings as a view variant to easily access them the next time you use the app.

7.4.4.4 Apply Safety Data Sheet Regulations to Countries

With this feature, you can use the Apply Regulations - Safety Data Sheets to specify the compliance requirements that determine the safety data sheet regulations for a selected country. You can also add or change safety data sheet languages that are required when selling to a selected country. This enables you to ensure compliant hazard communication for your products.

Technical Details

Type New






Additional Details

Applying regulations is an initial configuration task. The system provides predefined settings to enable a quick start.

When you change the safety data sheet languages for a country, the system updates the safety data sheet requirements on all compliance-relevant products to which the compliance purposes are assigned. Missing languages are added, but existing languages are not removed.

You can use this app to do the following:

● In a map view, see countries and the status of safety data sheet regulations for each country.● In a table view, see an alphabetical list of countries or search for a specific country.● Select a country to view its regulation information for safety data sheets.● Assign a compliance requirement that specifies the safety data sheet requirements for a selected country.● Add or remove languages required for safety data sheets for a selected country.● Manage the compliance purposes associated with a selected country.


7.5.1 Recipe Handover to Production - Bill of Material (1QG)

Use


● Support non-overlapping validity dates for different recipe versions● Use collaboration integration, internally and cross company

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1QG ( Recipe Handover to Production - Bill of Material )


Application Component PLM


R&D/Engineering





7.5.2 Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product (3FC)

Use

Transporting chemical products on public transportation routes requires product classification for each applicable dangerous goods regulation. This scope item provides the means to identify these regulations and to classify your products efficiently.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3FC ( Assess Dangerous Goods for a Product )


Application Component EHS-SUS



United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea,


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1QG

Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa


7.5.3 Product Structure Template Management (35Q)

Use

This scope item enables you to build up templates to structure a product as a set of hierarchically ordered objects in SAP S/4HANA.

● Manual update of product structure● Automatic update of product structure using block definition diagram

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 35Q ( Product Structure Template Management )








R&D/Engineering

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3FC


7.5.4 Assess Marketability of a Product (31H)

Use


● Applied regulatory update of compliance requirements● Processes to support the new material master flag for compliance relevance● Improved the versioning and activation of compliance requirements and purposes, incl. auto-release● Added visualization overview of compliance check results● Added background activity monitoring for asynchronous events

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 31H ( Assess Marketability of a Product )








http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F31H

7.5.5 Set up Configurable Bill of Material using Variant Configuration (22T)

Use


● Enhanced multilevel configuration: multilevel BOM, multilevel routing

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 22T ( Set up Configurable Bill of Material using Variant Configuration )








R&D/Engineering

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F22T

7.5.6 Chemical Compliance Approval for Purchased Material And Supplier (31G)

Use


● Processes to support the new material master flag for compliance relevance.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 31G ( Chemical Compliance Approval for Purchased Material And Supplier )





United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa



http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F31G

7.5.7 Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products (3VR)

Use

This scope item lets you maintain final safety data sheets as documents for products.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3VR ( Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products )







7.5.8 Specification Management for Recipes (1QA)

Use


● Integrate collaboration, internally and cross-company


R&D/Engineering

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3VR

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1QA ( Specification Management for Recipes )







7.5.9 Product Structure Management (3ND)

Use

This scope item lets you structure a product as a set of hierarchically ordered objects in SAP S/4HANA. Additionally, the definition and maintenance of product structures has been optimized for SAP S/4HANA.

Technical Details

Type New



http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1QA

Scope Item 3ND ( Product Structure Management )







7.5.10 Manage Documents (22P)

Use


● Enterprise Search: Searching the Document Info Record (DIR) has been enabled from the main screen of Fiori launchpad. As a result, the user is now able to search for all the DIRs/originals according to search criteria such as 'document type', 'document number', 'description', 'status', 'created by' etc. The user can also search on the document content and classification.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 22P ( Manage Documents )



R&D/Engineering

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3ND






7.5.11 Bill of Material - Mass Change (1R5)

Use


● Spare Parts indicator● Change Record integration● Advanced Variant Configuration integration● Handover to Manufacturing integration● Software Management loose fixed coupling

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1R5 ( Bill of Material - Mass Change )



http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F22P






7.5.12 Engineering Bill of Material - Change Master Management (1R3)

Use


● Multi-level maintenance● Spare Parts indicator● Change Record integration● Advanced Variant Configuration integration● Handover to Manufacturing integration● Software Management loose fixed coupling● SSCUI for Change Record/Material Revision Level

Technical Details

Type Changed



R&D/Engineering

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1R5

Scope Item 1R3 ( Engineering Bill of Material - Change Master Management )







7.5.13 Formulation - Recipe Development (1QC)

Use


● Display all necessary information on an overview page, providing the user with a 360-degree domain view while consolidating data from various sources

● Support non-overlapping validity dates for different recipe versions● Use collaboration integration, internally and cross-company

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1QC ( Formulation - Recipe Development )


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1R3







7.5.14 Requirements Driven Development (2G4)

Use


● Create block definition diagrams● Link the requirements to the block definition diagram

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2G4 ( Requirements Driven Development )




R&D/Engineering

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1QC





7.5.15 Engineering Change Management with Change Records (1NF)

Use


● Workflow - Enable customer roles in process● Workflow - Enable agent determination, attachments in MyInbox● Product Structure elements can be handled within change record● Integration of team from SAP Responsibility Management into Change Record

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1NF ( Engineering Change Management with Change Records )




http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2G4






R&D/Engineering

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1NF

8 Sales

8.1 Order and Contract Management

8.1.1 Sales Master Data Management

8.1.1.1 Manage Customer Materials

With this feature, you can now assign several customer material information records to a single material number. Change Documents information has also been added to customer materials in the Manage Customer Materials app.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock)

Application Component SD-MD-AM-CMI (Customer Material Information)


Related Information

Manage Customer Materials

8.1.1.2 SOAP APIs for Sales Area Replication

With these asynchronous outbound SOAP services, you can replicate sales area-related master data and configuration data in bulk to external systems. The replication logic of this data is handled by the Data Replication Framework (DRF).

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Sales P U B L I C 461

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/0f988925a9f446f8aa27e04eda4105d2.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1VP (Opportunity-to-Order with SAP Cloud for Customer), BD9 (Sell from Stock)

Application Component SD-MD (Master Data)


Additional Details

The following services are available:

● Sales Organization - Replicate (SalesOrganizationBulkReplication_Out)● Distribution Channel - Replicate (DistributionChannelBulkReplication_Out)● Sales Division - Replicate (SalesDivisionBulkReplication_Out)● Distribution Chain - Replicate (DistributionChainBulkReplication_Out)● Divisions Per Sales Organization - Replicate

(DivisionsPerSalesOrganizationBulkReplication_Out)● Sales Area - Replicate (SalesAreaBulkReplication_Out)● Sales Office - Replicate (SalesOfficeBulkReplication_Out)● Sales Group - Replicate (SalesGroupBulkReplication_Out)

Related Information

Data Replication FrameworkSales Area - ReplicateSales Organization - ReplicateSales Office - ReplicateSales Group - ReplicateSales Division - ReplicateDistribution Chain - ReplicateDistribution Channel - ReplicateDivisions Per Sales Organization - Replicate


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/88e3f5577c84bc12e10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/be405ca47a0a4ef0b7f603798e5b1053.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/62105a5aca1f49e7bb26ddf9fc14bfe3.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/e81e2db9da5043f69d23568550e73a4a.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/5e34f78002da40239d00ff94ae69e584.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/6df93fb722c844c38d159058182cbf4d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/48d9c93e9f364faead8d8beaa62d3173.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/ea51db4c82cc4dc398fd0682d8c9add4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/1befa02f2a1c4c2ba0dcb653848d31b7.html

8.1.1.3 Material Substitution Apps Renamed

Several tiles on the SAP Fiori Launchpad related to material determination have been renamed to better reflect the functions that you can access using these tiles.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component SD-BF-MD (Material Determination)


Additional Details

The tiles have been renamed as follows:

Old Name New Name

Create Material Substitution Create Material Determination

Display Material Substitution Dislay Material Determination

Change Material Substitution Change Material Determination

Reference Material Substitution Create Material Determination with Reference

8.1.2 Price Management

8.1.2.1 OData API for Condition Records for Pricing in Sales

The synchronous inbound OData service Condition Record for Pricing in Sales – Create, Read, Update, Delete (API_SLSPRICINGCONDITIONRECORD_SRV) is now available for you to create, read, update, and delete condition records for pricing that are used in Sales.


Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), J11 (Customer Project Management - Project-Based Services), 3D2 (Service Order Management and Monitoring)

Application Component SD-BF-PR (Pricing and Conditions)


Additional Details

The service contains entities for condition record, validity of condition record, pricing scale, and condition supplement.

If you need to create an incident regarding this service, use component SD-MD-CM.

Related Information

Condition Record for Pricing in Sales – Create, Read, Update, Delete

8.1.2.2 SOAP API for Condition Records for Pricing in Sales

The asynchronous outbound service Condition Record for Pricing in Sales - Replicate enables you to replicate condition records for pricing that are used in Sales to external systems. The data replication uses the Data Replication Framework (DRF).

Technical Details

Type New



Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/7916962329ee49b293156fffddfb7dd8.html

Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), J11 (Customer Project Management - Project-Based Services), 3D2 (Service Order Management and Monitoring)

Application Component SD-BF-PR (Pricing and Conditions)


Additional Details

The service contains nodes that respectively represent condition record, validity of condition record, pricing scale, and condition supplement.

You need to make specific settings in your system before using this service. For more information, see Configuration: Condition Record for Pricing in Sales - Replicate.

If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component SD-MD-CM.

Related Information

Condition Record for Pricing in Sales - Replicate

8.1.2.3 Freight Costs in Price Management - Integration with Transportation Management

With this feature you can integrate freight costs coming from transportation management with price management. You use this feature when, for a freight order, the system creates the corresponding billing document and the freight costs are to be taken into account. To use this feature, you must set up the integration between transportation management, price management, and billing.

Technical Details

Type New




https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/2bbffa1259b84274aff88053fadee71b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/e2500c848c264417a9380ad6407dd5a4.html

Application Component SD-BF-PR (Pricing)



To enable the integration, a configuration expert must make the following settings in Customizing:

● In the activity Define Condition Types in Customizing under Sales and Distribution Basic FunctionsPricing Pricing Control , create new entries with the following details, then save:

Field Value Description

Condition Type <Enter condition type> <Enter a description>

Condition Class A Discount or Surcharge

Calculation Type B Fixed Amount

Condition Category F Freight

Plus/Minus A Positive

Condition Function FCTM Freight Costs fr. TM

Item Condition Select checkbox

Delete Select checkbox

Amount/Percent Select checkbox

● In the activity Define and Assign Pricing Procedures in Customizing under the same path, select the pricing procedure relevant for your business or choose a predefined one to be copied. Add the newly created condition type, then save.

● In the activity Set Pricing Procedure Determination in Customizing under the same path, adjust the settings accordingly so that the newly created pricing procedure is used by the relevant business documents, then save.

Related Information

Internal TM Component IntegrationBilling the Freight Cost in TM to a Customer in SDBilling of Freight Costs - Integration with Transportation ManagementBilling of Freight Costs - Integration with Transportation Management [page 494]


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/04474a8485384e3fbfcb346d943b3217.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/af6321d71d82402faf215eb44572b832.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/b7eb61a4f5414e0cba7b49b2c02e8f4f.html

8.1.3 Sales Quotation Management

8.1.3.1 OData APIs - Create with Reference

Several OData APIs can now be used to create sales documents with reference to other sales documents.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), 1EZ (Credit Memo Processing), 1F1 (Debit Memo Processing), I9I (Sales Contract Management), BDG (Sales Quotation), BDA (Free of Charge Delivery)

Application Component SD-SLS-API (SD API Interface)


Additional Details

You can now create sales documents with reference with the following service interfaces:

● Sales Quotation - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) (API_SALES_QUOTATION_SRV)● Sales Contract - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) (API_SALES_CONTRACT_SRV)● Sales Order - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) (API_SALES_ORDER_SRV)● Sales Order Without Charge - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)

(API_SALES_ORDER_WITHOUT_CHARGE_SRV)● Credit Memo Request - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) (API_CREDIT_MEMO_REQUEST_SRV)● Debit Memo Request - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) (API_DEBIT_MEMO_REQUEST_SRV)

Related Information

Sales Quotation - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)Sales Contract - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)Sales Order - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)Sales Order Without Charge - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)Credit Memo Request - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)Debit Memo Request - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)


https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/bcfea10daf7241aea335dab3bc70ea8e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/bc2d6c95d98e4b96ae70e7db2de4cca1.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/00d244581efca007e10000000a441470.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/1eb3e97d4e314e769d614b8d5b16468d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/191531b7e2e048d9bddffab772f1788b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/e7f50d9ea49d49c7a428da494fce2c44.html

8.1.3.2 OData API: Sales Quotation - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)

With this service (API_SALES_QUOTATION_SRV), you can now accept or deny approval requests for sales quotations that cannot be processed without the consent of an approver.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BDG (Sales Quotation)




If you want to use this service for approving or rejecting sales quotations, you must define at least one approval request reason for sales quotations in the Define Reasons for Approval Requests and the Assign Reasons for Approval Requests Customizing activities. You can find these activities in Customizing under Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Approvals . This reason must then be flagged as relevant for an external workflow.

Related Information

Sales Quotation - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)

8.1.4 Sales Contract Management

8.1.4.1 CDS Views for Sales Contracts

Two Core Data Service (CDS) views for sales contracts have now been released. You can use the CDS views to obtain information about sales contracts and sales contract items.


Sales


Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item I9I (Sales Contract Management)

Application Component SD-SLS-OA-CCO (Customer Contracts)


Additional Details

The following CDS views have been released:

● Sales Contract (I_SalesContract)● Sales Contract Item (I_SalesContractItem)

Related Information

Sales ContractSales Contract Item

8.1.4.2 Sales Scheduling Agreement

With this app, you can display details and contextual information of a sales scheduling agreement on header, item, and delivery schedule level. Examples include process flow, customer reference, requirements and delivery relevance, customer fiscal year, and cumulative quantities. You can also extend the app according to your business needs.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3NR (Sales Scheduling Agreements)


https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/ebc7f58291b54faf8aed3b759a32c1ae.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/6f6a0377496549b2a1ff4185f6ecbdba.html

Application Component SD-SLS-OA-SCH (Customer Scheduling Agreement)


Related Information

Sales Scheduling Agreement

8.1.4.3 Manage Sales Scheduling Agreements

With this app, you can search for, display, filter, sort, and group all sales scheduling agreements. You can also extend the app according to your business needs.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Manage Sales Scheduling Agreements

8.1.4.4 OData API for Sales Scheduling Agreement

With this service Sales Scheduling Agreement - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) (API_SALES_SCHEDULING_AGREEMENT), you can retrieve sales scheduling agreements, as well as create, update, and delete sales scheduling agreements on header and item level. You can also extend this OData service according to your business needs.


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/f7b3e498c30a4f9aad381062cc9d8b09.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/2619d667d79b4ac9bd156fb6b3a8dfe8.html

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Sales Scheduling Agreement - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)



Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details


● Sales Quotation - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) (API_SALES_QUOTATION_SRV)


https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/904b06b7cbb84ce48e7f71c58db856e0.html

● Sales Contract - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) (API_SALES_CONTRACT_SRV)● Sales Order - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) (API_SALES_ORDER_SRV)● Sales Order Without Charge - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)


Related Information


8.1.4.6 Assign Sold-to Parties

With this app, you can search for, create, copy, change, and display sold-to party assignments. You can also display sold-to party changes in each sold-to party assignment. You maintain sold-to party assignments as master data of sales scheduling agreements. Based on sold-to party assignments, the system determines the appropriate sold-to party for each inbound delivery schedule in electronic data interchange (EDI) processing.

Technical Details

Type New






Sales







Additional Details

TipIt’s recommended to configure inbound EDI processing in the Assign Sold-to Parties and Manage Delivery Schedule Processing apps rather than in Customizing.

Related Information

Assign Sold-to Parties

8.1.4.7 Manage Delivery Schedule Processing

With this app, you can search for, create, copy, change, and display delivery schedule processing options. Delivery schedule processing options are saved as master data of sales scheduling agreements. Based on the delivery schedule processing options, the system determines how to process inbound delivery schedules in electronic data interchange (EDI) processing.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

TipIt’s recommended to configure inbound EDI processing in the Assign Sold-to Parties and Manage Delivery Schedule Processing apps rather than in Customizing.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/d631e656dc9f4e0e961226f0fc7af93d.html

Related Information

Manage Delivery Schedule Processing

8.1.5 Sales Order Management and Processing

8.1.5.1 Manage Sales Document Workflows

This feature enables you to create and manage workflows to optimize the approval process for various sales documents. The workflows allow you to define conditions under which to approve sales documents as well as define one or more approvers.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component SD-SLS (Sales)



Business Catalog Changes with this ReleaseNew or Changed Authorization Objects

Sales - Sales Configuration

(SAP_SD_BC_CONFIGURE)The catalog now applies to the management of workflows of all sales documents, including sales quotations and sales orders. Previously, it was applicable to credit memo requests only.

Not relevant.

Sales - My Inbox

(SAP_SD_BC_MYINBOX)Make settings for new authorization objects.

Sales Document: Approval Management(V_VBAK_APM)


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/88301c244c0d4542af02c2fbf4764acf.html

Related Information

Manage Sales Document Workflows

8.1.5.2 Customizing Activities and BAdIs for Sales Document Approvals

You can now use the Customizing activities Define Reasons for Approval Requests and Assign Reasons for Approval Requests to define the reasons why sales orders, sales quotations, or credit memo requests need to be approved (for example, whenever a net value is higher than USD 1,000). With the Business Add-In (BAdI) Set Approval Request Reasons for Sales Documents, you then define for which sales orders this reason is valid. Whenever a sales order matches these criteria, and the corresponding workflow has been set up, the system automatically blocks the sales document and triggers an approval request. The approver can release the document, send the document back for rework, or deny the approval. With the BAdI Set Sales Document Rejection Reasons for Rejected Approval Requests, you can determine which rejection reason is used for sales documents when the approval request is rejected by the approver.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You can see the approval status of documents in the Manage Sales Orders, the Manage Sales Quotations, and the Manage Credit Memo Requests apps. The approval status and the approval request reason are also displayed in the Sales Order object page, the Sales Quotation object page, and the Credit Memo Request object page.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/82db0a77a4ee48cda01f873d5a416bd2.html


The Customizing activities are now available for the key user in Customizing under Sales and DistributionSales Sales Documents Sales Document Approvals .

The BAdIs are available in Customizing under Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) .

Related Information

Manage Sales Document Workflows [page 474]Approval Processes for Sales Documents

8.1.5.3 Manage Sales Documents with Customer-Expected Price

This feature enables you to list sales document items which are locked due to discrepancies between the customer-expected price and the net price.

You can accept the customer-expected price for a sales document item. You will then be automatically redirected to the overview screen of the selected sales document item in a related application, where you can manually adapt the net price. Additionally, you can display contact info that is relevant for the selected sales document item.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BKK (Sales Order Fulfillment Monitoring)

Application Component SD-SLS-GF


Related Information

Manage Duplicate Sales Documents


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/5a5f3f686c06490893a588c99b36adca.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/255cc831e4294b4f95144d8989146e21.html

8.1.5.4 Use Material ID to Search for Sales Documents

With this feature, you can now use the search function in various apps to search for all sales orders, credit memo requests, debit memo requests, sales quotations, or sales orders without charge that contain a specific material by searching for the material ID.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), 1EZ (Credit Memo Processing), 1F1 (Debit Memo Processing), BDA (Free of Charge Delivery), BDG (Sales Quotation), and others



Additional Details

You can use this search criterion in the following apps:

● Manage Sales Orders● Manage Credit Memo Requests● Manage Debit Memo Requests● Manage Sales Quotations● Manage Sales Orders Without Charge● Customer - 360° View

In this app, you can search for open sales quotations, sales orders, sales contracts, customer returns, credit memo requests, debit memo requests, and billing documents using the material ID.

As long as a document contains at least one item with the specified material, it will show up in the search results. Please note that you can only search by material ID, and not by material description.

Related Information

Manage Sales OrdersManage Credit Memo RequestsManage Debit Memo RequestsManage Sales Quotations


https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/ce158e56ba281e5ee10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/6f13d2562f0b327be10000000a44147b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/d361d2562f0b317be10000000a44147b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/eac49356c2968251e10000000a4450e5.html

Manage Sales Orders Without ChargeCustomer - 360° View

8.1.5.5 Payment Data in Sales Documents

When you use the SAP digital payments add-on for payment cards and have set up your system to automatically copy payment card data (the payment card and the authorization) from preceding sales documents into subsequent sales documents, this is now also supported in the returns process. This means that if a customer returns any ordered materials, the payment data is copied into all relevant subsequent documents and the payment is refunded.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), 1Z1 (Digital Payments - Sales), BKP (Accelerated Customer Returns)



Additional Details

This copying process works for all payment cards types that start with DP, for example, DPVI or DPMC.

Related Information

Copying of Payment Card Data into Subsequent Return Documents

8.1.5.6 CDS Views for Sales Documents

Two basic CDS (Core Data Services) views for Sales have now been released. You can use them to construct custom views or apps that need to retrieve data about the process flow of sales documents.


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/5f28cf571fda2e7ce10000000a441470.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/e0907857bdf15c08e10000000a441470.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/307c2da3f8214ca593b93157278e282a.html

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

The following CDS views have now been released:

● I_SDDocumentProcessFlow● I_SDDocumentMultiLevelProcFlow


Related Information

View BrowserSD Document Process FlowSD Document Multi-Level Process Flow

8.1.5.7 Output of Sales Documents

If you use SAP S/4HANA output control, the predelivered form templates for sales orders and sales orders without charge now include information about product compliance.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), BDA (Free of Charge Delivery)



https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/9ea5210c2d8e4a5392d5d7082e85ac02.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/70e40925db934c099a6903f92df54f2f.html



Additional Details

The following form templates have been enhanced:

● SD_SLS_ORDER_CONFIRM: sales order● SD_SLS_ORDER_WO_CHARGE: sales order without charge

The form templates now include dangerous goods data if you use dangerous goods in sales processes.

For sales orders and sales order without charge, the delivery date and the confirmed quantity are now excluded from the output for items that are blocked by a product compliance check (product marketability check, dangerous goods check, or safety data sheet check). Instead, the output now contains the information that further assessment is required before the relevant item can be delivered.


If you have used these form templates to create your own custom form templates before, note that these enhancements are not automatically included in your custom form templates. If you want to use these enhancements, please copy over the changes to your custom form templates or create new ones using the predelivered form templates.

Related Information

Product Compliance in Sales and DeliveryDangerous Goods in Sales ProcessesHow to Create and Use a Custom Form Template

8.1.5.8 Changed Output Customizing Activity Titles

The Customizing activities for the output of changed sales documents were renamed. You can find these activities in Customizing under Sales and Distribution Basic Functions SAP S/4HANA Output ControlOutput Control for Sales Documents Output for Changed Documents .


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/a3c035f6eaef4816b4e43327d8bfb4d1.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/4e405407fc8146cfa66e26fa3ee2054b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/a2b387872d4743989769c432a482008d.html

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component SD-BF (Basic Functions)


Additional Details

The following Customizing activities were renamed:


Assign Output Types Assign Output Types for Changed Documents

Define Message Texts Define Output Texts

Assign Message Texts to Table Fields Assign Output Texts to Document Data

Assign Message Texts to Partner Table Fields Assign Output Texts to Business Partner Data

Assign Message Texts to Document Text Types Assign Output Texts to Document Text Types

8.1.5.9 Transportation Management in Document Flow

In the apps for changing and displaying sales documents, you can now see documents related to transportation management in the document flow on header level (where relevant).

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), 1EZ (Credit Memo Processing), 1F1 (Debit Memo Processing), I9I (Sales Contract Management), BDA (Free of Charge Delivery), BDG (Sales Quotation)




Related Information

Structure and Data in a Sales DocumentTransportation Management (TM)

8.1.5.10 OData API: Sales Order - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)

With this service (API_SALES_ORDER_SRV), you can now also process the following service entities: texts on header level, payment card information on header level, and texts on item level. You can also process external authorizations for payment cards (for example, when a sales order is created in a Web shop and the payment card is also authorized externally) as well as external payments. If you use approval processes for sales orders, you can accept or deny approval requests for sales orders that cannot be processed without the consent of an approver.

Technical Details

Type Changed






If you want to use this service for approving or rejecting sales orders, you must define at least one approval request reason for sales orders in the Define Reasons for Approval Requests and the Assign Reasons for Approval Requests Customizing activities. You can find these activities in Customizing under Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Approvals . This reason must then be flagged as relevant for an external workflow.


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/b364b65334e6b54ce10000000a174cb4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/3dbac2009df0459da845e03e6802817f.html

Related Information

Customizing Activities and BAdIs for Sales Document Approvals [page 475]Sales Order - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)



Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details




Related Information

Sales Quotation - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)Sales Contract - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)





Sales Order - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)Sales Order Without Charge - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)Credit Memo Request - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)Debit Memo Request - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)

8.1.5.12 SOAP API: Sales Order - Replicate (A2A)

When you use this service (SalesOrderBulkReplication_Out) to replicate sales orders, it now reflects status changes due to the creation of follow-up documents (for example, deliveries or billing documents). This means that any changes of the delivery status or the billing status of the sales order in your system trigger another replication to update the status.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

In addition, you can now use the following fields:

● SalesOrderApprovalReason on header level● SalesDocApprovalStatus on header level● OverallTotalDeliveryStatus on header level● OverallOrdReltdBillgStatus on header level● HigherLevelItem on item level● OrderRelatedBillingStatus on item level● DeliveryStatus on item level

Related Information

Sales Order - Replicate (A2A)


Sales





https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/fe62955cd8c34a489b0df6af8d36aa6a.html

8.1.5.13 OData API: Sales Order - Simulate (A2X)

With this synchronous service (API_SALES_ORDER_SIMULATION_SRV), you can simulate a sales order to retrieve information regarding pricing, availability and credit limit. The result is provided synchronously. The simulated sales order is not saved.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

The service offers the following main functions:

● Pricing● Availability check● Credit limit check

Related Information

Sales Order - Simulate (A2X)

8.1.6 Sales Billing

8.1.6.1 Use Material ID to Search for Billing Documents and Billing Document Requests

With this feature, you can now use the search function in the following two apps to respectively search for all billing documents or billing document requests that contain a specific material by searching for the material ID:


https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/b64937ce2692427594ee794ad033b8b3.html

● Manage Billing Documents● Manage Billing Document Requests

As long as a document contains at least one item with the specified material, it will show up in the search results. Unless you use a wildcard (*) operator, the system only shows exact matches. Please note that you can only search by material ID, and not by material description.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), 1MC (Convergent Billing)

Application Component SD-BIL (Billing)


Related Information

Manage Billing DocumentsManage Billing Document Requests

8.1.6.2 Extensibility for Revenue Account Determination

As a key user, you can extend the revenue account determination process with custom fields that you have created in the Custom Fields and Logic app. You can use custom fields that you have created on billing document header level, as well as on billing document item level. This allows you to control revenue account determination more precisely in accordance with your individual business requirements.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock) and other scope items that include the posting of billing documents


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/d2185b549a8c8e4ce10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/44401f6bfb6749c19a843195d3fde816.html

Application Component SD-BF-ACT (Account Determination)


Additional Details

You can extend revenue account determination with custom fields as follows:

1. Create your custom fields in the Custom Fields and Logic app in one of the following two business contexts:○ Sales: Account Determination Header for header-level fields○ Sales: Account Determination Item for item-level fields

2. Add the custom fields that you want to use to the field catalog for revenue account determination.3. Choose these custom fields from the field catalog when you create one or more new condition tables.4. Assign the new condition tables to an access sequence (for example, access sequence KOFI).5. Create condition records to fill the new condition tables according to your business requirements.


For information about the necessary settings in Customizing, see Extensibility for Revenue Account Determination.

Related Information

Extensibility for Revenue Account DeterminationCustom Fields and Logic

8.1.6.3 Billing Process Extensibility and App Extensibility

The apps Create Billing Documents and Manage Billing Document Requests are now extensible with custom fields. In addition, five new business scenarios for the forwarding of custom fields throughout the billing process are now available. Key users can extend the mentioned apps and enable the new scenarios for custom fields of their choosing in the Custom Field and Logic app.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/b2ab113731bc4f57b86c5c6fd31a35af.html



https://help.sap.com/viewer/9a281eac983f4f688d0deedc96b3c61c/201909.000/en-US/57909455bf7c4fdd8bcf48d76c1eae33.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock) and other scope items involving billing document creation



Additional Details

Extensibility of the Billing Due List in the Create Billing Documents AppThe following three business scenarios enable custom header fields in sales documents, billing document requests, and delivery documents to be made visible in the billing due list within the Create Billing Documents app.

● Sales Document Header Level to Billing Due List in business contexts Sales: Sales Document and Sales: Billing Due List

● Billing Document Request Header Level to Billing Due List in business contexts Sales: Billing Document and Sales: Billing Due List

● Delivery Header Level to Billing Due List in business contexts Shipping: Delivery and Sales: Billing Due List

A key user must enable the relevant business scenario for a specific custom field and also enable this field for the Create Billing Documents app. Business users can then use the app's personalization options to add this field to the billing due list as an additional column. They can also use the field as an additional filter and sort criterion.

Filtering the billing due list according to custom fields is useful when you want to create combined billing documents according to custom convergence criteria. For example, the custom header field in a delivery document could be used to identify a specific container in a shipment. A billing clerk that is tasked with creating a combined billing document for all orders that are shipped in the same container could easily achieve this by using the corresponding filter settings to help identify the correct delivery documents to be converged.

Extensibility of the Manage Billing Document Requests AppAs a key user, you can extend the Manage Billing Document Requests app according to your business needs by displaying custom fields of billing document requests (BDRs).

NoteThese custom fields are read-only and can only be filled by enabling a business scenario for process extensibility that copies custom fields from preceding documents to billing document requests (for example, Service Transaction to Billing Document at Header Level). For a complete list of business scenarios for sales and billing documents, see Process Extensibility for Sales Documents and Billing Documents.


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/b36541588ea81f60e10000000a44147b.html

Key users can now enable the following business scenarios in the Custom Fields and Logic app to enable the flow of custom fields from service transactions to billing documents. (BDRs serve as intermediaries between billed service transactions and the final billing document and therefore pass the custom fields along to the billing document when these business scenarios are enabled).

● Service Transaction to Billing Document at Header Level in the business contexts Service Header and Sales: Billing Document

● Service Transaction to Billing Document at Item Level in the business contexts Service Item and Sales: Billing Document Item

Related Information

App Extensibility: Create Billing DocumentsApp Extensibility: Manage Billing Document RequestsCustom Fields and LogicProcess Extensibility for Sales Documents and Billing DocumentsProcess Extensibility for Delivery DocumentsExtensibility

8.1.6.4 Export Document Lists in Billing Apps to Spreadsheets

With this feature, four list-based billing apps can now export their list of documents to a spreadsheet file (*.XLSX format).

The following apps have been enhanced with this feature:

● Create Billing Documents● Manage Billing Documents● Manage Billing Document Requests● Manage Invoice Lists

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), 1MC (Convergent Billing), BKZ (Sales Order Processing with Invoice List and Collective Billing)



https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/0ad9c2ac26144e08a1a4994c13e3b816.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/2b46054a68a548a489b583473aadcd1e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9a281eac983f4f688d0deedc96b3c61c/201909.000/en-US/57909455bf7c4fdd8bcf48d76c1eae33.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/b36541588ea81f60e10000000a44147b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/c7894a248ca14f74aca67f97528e5ad7/1909.000/en-US/f318da0cd18c48aaa28e4d6b0501f76c.html



Additional Details

In each app, you can export all items in the currently displayed list to a spreadsheet file (*.XLSX format). All columns that you have previously configured to be visible on the screen are then included in the spreadsheet. Any filter settings that you have made are also taken into account.

When exporting, you also have the following options:

● You can choose a filename that deviates from the default.● The system can split cells that contain multiple values across separate worksheet columns.● On a second worksheet, the system can list the specific filter settings that you have applied (for reference).

Related Information

Create Billing DocumentsManage Billing DocumentsManage Billing Document RequestsManage Invoice Lists

8.1.6.5 Credit Items in Billing Document Requests

With this feature, standard billing document requests (BDRs) of type BDR1 can now contain credit items (item category G2N). Previously, billing document requests only supported debit items. Billing document requests that contain credit items can be billed to create invoices that contain credit items. Credit items reduce the total net value of an invoice by the specified amount. You can use credit items in invoices to grant discounts and other credits to customers.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1MC (Convergent Billing)



Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/7dc3125477a98c24e10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/d2185b549a8c8e4ce10000000a4450e5.html


https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/c015f5c098a249b58f1180ff6dca4999.html


Additional Details

When you manually create billing document requests by importing billing data in spreadsheet format, this billing data can now also include credit items. The resulting billing document request will then include those credit items. The credit item category G2N is always negative, so no preceding minus sign (-) is needed to signify credit (rather than debit) for the corresponding condition rate value (field CONDITIONRATEVALUE) that is imported.

Please note that the BDR credit item category G2N can only be used for the stand-alone billing of BDRs (with preceding sales document type EO01). This means that BDRs containing credit items cannot be converged with other preceding documents to create combined invoices.

Please also note that you cannot create credit memos on the basis of these billing document requests. You can only create invoices that contain credit items. For information about creating credit memos on the basis of billing document requests, see External Credit Billing Document Requests and External Debit Billing Document Requests [page 491].

Related Information

Billing Document RequestManage Billing Document Requests

8.1.6.6 External Credit Billing Document Requests and External Debit Billing Document Requests

With this feature, the following two new types of billing document request (BDR) are introduced:

● External debit billing document request (BDR type BDRD), used for creating debit memos (billing type L2) based on external billing data

● External credit billing document request (BDR type BDRC), used for creating credit memos (billing type G2) based on external billing data

Technical Details

Type New


https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/946f490447f349448f6872452c6ecf6a.html






Additional Details

The following table provides information about the two new external billing document request types. The standard billing document request (type BDR1) is also included for comparison.

Billing Document Request Type Name Description Billing Type

BDR1 External billing document request

A standard billing document request that contains billing data from an external source (such as an integrated system or a spreadsheet containing billing data). It can contain debit as well as credit items.

This type of BDR can either be billed individually (stand-alone billing) or, if it contains only debit items, can be converged with other billable documents to create a combined invoice.

Invoice type (for example, F2) depends on the chosen convergence use case.

For more information, see Omnichannel Convergent Billing under Related Information below.

BDRD External debit billing Document request

A billing document request that contains only debit items from an external source. It can only be billed individually and therefore cannot be converged with other billable documents.

L2 (Debit memo)

BDRC External credit billing document request

A billing document request that contains only credit items from an external source. It can only be billed individually and therefore

G2 (Credit memo)


Sales

Billing Document Request Type Name Description Billing Type

cannot be converged with other billable documents.

All three billing document request types can be created by using the SOAP API Billing Document Request - Create or the spreadsheet import function in the Manage Billing Document Requests app.

Related Information

Manage Billing Document RequestsCreating External Billing Document Requests ManuallyBilling Document Requests

8.1.6.7 Assign Delivery Blocks to Billing Plan Types

With this feature, you can assign a delivery block to a billing plan type. When you create sales orders with a billing plan type that has been assigned a delivery block, the system automatically blocks deliveries on schedule lines.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BKJ (Sales Order Processing with Customer Down Payment)

Application Component SD-BIL-IV-BP (Billing Plan)


Additional Details

To assign delivery blocks to billing plan types, choose Billing Billing Plan Define and Assign Date Categories Maintain Date Category for Billing Plan Type in Customizing for Sales and Distribution.

Based on the billing plan type, the system determines the delivery block for schedule lines and blocks deliveries accordingly, with the following exceptions:



https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/45c61e0f6e4e4fe28363e51318c01610.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/c20d4537df244743804fad278bfb3344.html

● When both the billing plan type and the schedule line category contain delivery blocks, the system doesn’t determine the delivery block from the billing plan type, but from the schedule line category instead. If you want to use the delivery block from the billing plan type, you must manually remove the delivery blocks from the schedule line category.

● The system doesn’t remove or update the delivery block on schedule lines when you do one of the following:○ Delete the billing plan from the sales order○ Change the sales document item category after sales order creation○ Change the schedule line category after sales order creation

In such cases, you must manually remove the delivery block from schedule lines to process deliveries.

When delivery due list block is selected as the only delivery type for your blocking reason, the system doesn’t block delivery creation on schedule lines.

8.1.6.8 Billing of Freight Costs - Integration with Transportation Management

For transportation management scenarios that are initiated from a sales document, the freight cost of the freight order can be taken into account when the corresponding billing document is created. This requires an integration to be set up between the transportation management, pricing, and billing processes, so that the freight costs can be added to the final amount due.

A typical use case for this scenario is when you want to charge the buyer back for the freight cost incurred for you as the seller. In effect, this allows the costs for delivery that are initially paid by the seller to be passed on to the buyer by adding them to the invoice for the sales transaction.

For more information about billing freight costs to a buyer, see Billing the Freight Cost in TM to a Customer in SD.

Technical Details

Type New






Sales




For information about setting up the integration on the transportation management side, please see Internal TM Component Integration.

Customizing for Sales BillingTo enable the integration on the Sales Billing side, a configuration expert must make settings in the Customizing activity Copying Control: Delivery Document to Billing Document. You can find this activity in Customizing under Sales and Distribution Billing Billing Documents Copying Control for Billing Documents .

In this Customizing activity, the setting for price source for the relevant document types must be set to the value I (order / freight order).

Customizing for Price ManagementTo enable the integration with Price Management in Sales, a configuration expert must make the following settings in Customizing:

● In the activity Define Condition Types in Customizing under Sales and Distribution Basic FunctionsPricing Pricing Control , create new entries with the following details, then save:

Field Value Description

Condition Type <Enter condition type> <Enter a description>

Condition Class A Discount or Surcharge

Calculation Type B Fixed Amount

Condition Category F Freight

Plus/Minus A Positive

Condition Function FCTM Freight Costs fr. TM

Item Condition Select checkbox

Delete Select checkbox

Amount/Percent Select checkbox

● In the activity Define and Assign Pricing Procedures in Customizing under the same path, select the pricing procedure relevant for your business or choose a predefined one to be copied. Add the newly created condition type, then save.

● In the activity Set Pricing Procedure Determination in Customizing under the same path, adjust the settings accordingly so that the newly created pricing procedure is used by the relevant business documents, then save.

Related Information

Freight Costs in Price Management - Integration with Transportation Management [page 465]Internal TM Component Integration





Billing the Freight Cost in TM to a Customer in SD

8.1.7 Solution Billing

8.1.7.1 Product Assistance for Solution Billing

As of the current release, you can find information about omnichannel convergent billing in the Sales product assistance under Order and Contract Management Solution Billing Omnichannel Convergent Billing .

Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Information

Solution Billing

8.1.8 Incentive and Commission Management

8.1.8.1 Incentive and Commission Management

You can use Settlement Management for your incentive and commission management.

Technical Details

Type New


Sales


https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/6b1c5aaab5af46e0977eda74b3bbfa3e.html


Scope Item 2TT (2TT)

Application Component LO-AB (Settlement Management)


Related Information

Incentive and Commission Management

8.1.9 Claims, Returns, and Refund Management

8.1.9.1 Workflow for Credit Memo Requests

Creation and management of approval workflows for credit memo requests, previously available in the Manage Credit Memo Request Workflow app, is now only available in the new Manage Sales Document Workflows app.

Technical Details

Type Changed






Credit memo request workflows, created in previous versions using the Manage Credit Memo Request Workflow app, will be displayed in the new Manage Sales Document Workflows app. As of SAP S/4HANA 1909, you can create credit memo request workflows using the same highly flexible and customizable solution provided for the creation of sales document workflows in the Manage Sales Document Workflows app. The old method of creating approval workflows for credit memo requests is now considered obsolete, and is planned to be deleted in SAP S/4HANA 2009.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/973560b16090481d86bf9d37396b57df.html

Related Information

Manage Sales Document Workflows

8.1.9.2 SOAP API for Customer Return - Replicate (A2A)

With this asynchronous outbound SOAP service (CustomerReturnBulkReplication_Out), you can replicate

customer returns in bulk to external systems. The replication logic is handled by the data replication framework

(DRF). You can apply any of the filters provided or replicate all existing data. This service is extensible.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BKP (Accelerated Customer Returns)

Application Component SD-SLS-RE (Returns)


Related Information

Customer Return - Replicate (A2A)



Technical Details

Type Changed


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/82db0a77a4ee48cda01f873d5a416bd2.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/19d48293097f4a2589433856b034dfa5/1909.000/en-US/67d7dbd3a97a4603b609e97850dcfdf0.html





Additional Details




Related Information


8.1.9.4 OData API: Credit Memo Request - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)

With this service (API_CREDIT_MEMO_REQUEST_SRV), you can now accept or deny approval requests for credit memo requests that cannot be processed without the consent of an approver.








Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1EZ (Credit Memo Processing), BKL (Invoice Correction Process with Credit Memo)




If you want to use this service for approving or rejecting credit memo requests, you must define at least one approval request reason for credit memo requests in the Define Reasons for Approval Requests and the Assign Reasons for Approval Requests Customizing activities. You can find these activities in Customizing under

Sales and Distribution Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Approvals . This reason must then be flagged as relevant for an external workflow.

Related Information

Credit Memo Request - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)

8.1.10 Sales Monitoring and Analytics

8.1.10.1 Terminology Change: Billing Quantity to Sales Volume Quantity

The data element Billing Quantity (MC_UMMENGE) has been changed to Sales Volume Quantity in order to specify that this quantity refers to the total invoiced sales achieved during a specified period, based on invoice items or debit memos that have not been canceled. This key figure originates from the Logistics Information System (LIS), therefore this will affect you if you are still using LIS.


Sales


Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1BS (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Sales)

Application Component SD (Sales and Distribution)


Additional Details

The terminology change affects the following apps:

● Sales Volume - Flexible Analysis● Sales Volume - Check Open Sales

Related Information

Sales Volume - Check Open SalesSales Volume - Flexible Analysis

8.1.10.2 Enhancements to My Sales Overview App

Various enhancements have been implemented to the My Sales Overview app, including the availability of the new Display Currency section in the filter bar and a redesign of the Incoming Sales Orders card (previously called Compare to Month of Previous Year card).

Technical Details

Type Changed




https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/866b3c57af48130ee10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/b1853554e448cb7de10000000a44176d.html



Related Information

My Sales Overview

8.1.10.3 Manage Sales Plans

With this app, you can now do the following:

● Set target quantities in sales plans● Visualize the uploaded plan data in chart views● Share a sales plan with other users by assigning it to a team● Add additional standard fields from sales orders and billing documents as dimensions for planning● As a key user, extend the app with custom dimensions according to your business needs

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1O0 (Planning Apps for Sales)

Application Component SD-ANA-SP (Sales Planning)


Additional Details

To set quantity-based sales targets, you can choose to create a quantity plan. The sales targets in a quantity plan can represent the following:

● Incoming sales orders quantity: Quantity of sales order items that are relevant for delivery or billing● Sales volume quantity: Quantity of invoice items or debit memo items (debits) that have not been

canceled


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/7cafd9570785c024e10000000a44147b.html

To extend the Manage Sales Plans app with custom dimensions, key users need to enable usage of the custom fields for both the Manage Sales Plans app and the Sales Performance – Plan/Actual app at the same time. This allows the business users to compare the plan and actual data for the same custom dimensions.

Related Information

Manage Sales PlansApp Extensibility: Manage Sales Plans

8.1.10.4 Sales Performance – Plan/Actual

With this app, you can now compare planned sales volume to actual net sales volume (sales volume minus credit memos). You can now extend the app with custom dimensions for which you compare the plan and actual data.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1O0 (Planning Apps for Sales)



Additional Details

To make the net sales volume visible for comparison, you need to add the column of net sales volume to the comparison table from the table view settings.

To compare the plan and actual data for the custom dimensions in this app, you must have also enabled the same custom fields for the Manage Sales Plans app as well as for the sales orders and/or the billing documents.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/6a5f5099ff2b49b983ff7646697a2239.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/2e795946c1d040d7a76a4f9a429262ae.html

Related Information

Sales Performance – Plan/ActualApp Extensibility: Sales Performance – Plan/Actual

8.1.10.5 Dimension Sold-to Party Replaces Dimension Customer in Analytical Apps

The dimension Sold-to Party replaces the dimension Customer in some analytical apps within Sales. In these apps, additional business partner functions (such as ship-to party and bill-to party) are now also available as customer-related dimensions for planning and analysis.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

The dimension Sold-to Party replaces the dimension Customer in the following apps:

● Manage Sales Plans● Sales Performance - Plan/Actual


The Manage Sales Plans app no longer supports uploading plan data that contains the Customer dimension. Uploaded plan data that relates to the Customer dimension is now represented by the Sold-to Party dimension automatically.


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/fc824f5d540041b5ac1b76251309d798.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/ddcdf375ce0c4c57ba825960e1ac501a.html

Related Information

Manage Sales PlansSales Performance – Plan/Actual

8.1.10.6 Sales Quotations - Flexible Analysis

With this app, you can analyze sales quotations based on flexible combinations of dimensions. For example, you can get a monthly rolling trend of your quotations and see to what extent they are being referenced by sales orders. You can quickly identify the critical quotations that are close to expiring, have expired, or are rejected.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component SD-ANA (Sales Analytics)


Related Information

Sales Quotations - Flexible Analysis

8.1.10.7 Manage Duplicate Sales Documents

With this feature, you can search for potential duplicate sales documents according to various criteria, such as creation period, sales document, sales document category, sales organization, sold-to party, created by, and overall status.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/6a5f5099ff2b49b983ff7646697a2239.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/fc824f5d540041b5ac1b76251309d798.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/e846f3b7c95a40c2b24c393f942a2855.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component SD-SLS-GF


Related Information

Manage Duplicate Sales Documents

8.1.10.8 Enhancements to Sales Order Fulfillment - Analyze and Resolve Issues

Sold-to party one-time account has been integrated into the Sales Order Fulfillment - Analyze and Resolve app. You can filter on sold-to party one-time account, and display the name in the list.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Information

Sales Order Fulfillment - Analyze and Resolve Issues


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/255cc831e4294b4f95144d8989146e21.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/036d7e70b0814326b582d50f8f256799.html

8.1.10.9 Enhancements to Track Sales Order Details

You can now display information on internal and external contacts in the sales document details in Track Sales Order Details. You can use their contact details to collaborate with them directly.

Internal contacts are contact persons and employees responsible, and external contacts are contact persons for sold-to party and ship-to party.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component SD


Related Information

Track Sales Order Details

8.1.10.10 Enhancements to Delivery Performance

The Key Performance Indicator (KPI) Delivered as Committed is now available for the Delivery Performance app. This KPI considers sales order items delivered on time and for which delivery is complete in terms of the committed delivery date.

A new tile is now available for the Delivery Performance app: Delivery Performance - Delivered as Committed. This tile is preconfigured with the corresponding KPIs for easier use.

Technical Details

Type Changed



https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/33b6ac03b37e493da6ba7e754b0d9236.html




Related Information

Delivery Performance

8.1.10.11 Enhancements to Predicted Delivery Delay

Up till now, it was possible to predict the delivery delay by focusing on the predicted delay of delivery creation. You can now also focus on the predicted delivery processing delay of the planned goods issue date of a delivery.

You can also display the overall predicted delivery delay for both of these predictions, that is, whether the delivery is likely to be late, early, or on time.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2YJ (Predictive Analytics Model Training - Sales)



Related Information

Predicted Delivery Delay

8.1.10.12 App Extensibility: Predicted Delivery Delay

This feature enables you to extend the Predicted Delivery Delay app according to your business needs.


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/9927bac6e2dd446bb2126c0009c9bfdd.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/6dfb21a5472e499aa90233272605754a.html

In the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can add custom fields to the Predicted Delivery Delay app by using the business context Sales: Sales Document Item.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2YJ (Predictive Analytics Model Training - Sales)

Application Component SD

(Sales and Distribution)


Related Information

App Extensibility: Predicted Delivery Delay

8.1.10.13 Customer Returns - Flexible Analysis

With this app, you can analyze the monthly rolling trend of your customer returns based on flexible combinations of dimensions.

Technical Details

Type New






https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/f23f9873a4ec4093b485a2e78505e799.html

Additional Details

You can analyze the following customer-return-related KPIs in multi-dimensional reports:

KPI Description

Customer Returns Net amount of customer return items that are relevant for billing or delivery

Return Item Quantity Quantity of customer return items that are relevant for delivery or billing

No. of Return Items Number of customer return items that are relevant for delivery or billing

Related Information

Customer Returns - Flexible Analysis

8.1.10.14 Customer Returns - Return Rate

With this app, you can analyze the return rate of your incoming sales orders according to various dimensions.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Customer Returns - Return Rate


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/674c2e0995924d37952c7f4bb7e736bb.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/3e3afb8de1b3475fb56c592390c66a63.html

8.1.10.15 App Extensibility: Sales Volume - Check Open Sales

This feature enables you to extend the Sales Volume - Check Open Sales app according to your business needs.

In the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can add custom fields to the Sales Volume - Check Open Sales app by using the business contexts Sales: Sales Document Item, Sales: Billing Document Item, and Shipping: Delivery Item.

Technical Details

Type New




Available As Of ExampleSAP S/4HANA 1909

Additional Details

Note that you can only extend the app to be used with dimensions, not with measures.

Related Information

App Extensibility: Sales Volume - Check Open Sales

8.1.10.16 CDS Views for Data Extraction

The CDS views C_BILLINGDOCUMENTITEMBASICDEX (Billing Document Item Basic Extraction Data) and C_SalesDocumentItemDEX (Data Extraction for Sales Document Item) have now been released for data extraction. These CDS views are app-independent, and are available for all external consumers who want to extract billing document item data or sales document item data to SAP BW or other external systems.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/ad4b7aea84504750b3004c483ca8a12b.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component SAP-ANA (Sales Analytics)


Related Information

Data Extraction for Sales Document ItemBilling Document Item Basic Extraction Data

8.1.10.17 CDS Views for Sales Monitoring and Analytics

New CDS views for Sales Analytics and Monitoring now have been released. Some of the existing CDS views have been updated or deprecated.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details


The following CDS views are now released.


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/7956d1b7a4c743489e4a80f93237ea9b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/73772e73e49f440f8193004c73603853.html

● I_SalesQuotationItemCube_2: Analytics - Sales Quotation Cube● C_SalesQuotationItemQry: Sales Quotations - Flexible Analysis● C_SalesContractItemQry: Analytics - Sales Contract● I_SalesSchedgAgrmtItemCube: Analytics - Sales Scheduling Agreement Item Cube● C_SalesSchedgAgrmtItemQry: Analytics - Sales Scheduling Agreement Item● I_SalesOrderCube: Analytics - Sales Order Cube● C_SalesOrderQuery: Analytics - Sales Order● I_CustomerReturnItemCube_2: Analytics - Customer Return Cube● C_CustomerReturnItemQry_2: Customer Returns - Flexible Analysis● C_SalesDocumentItemDEX: Data Extraction for Sales Document Item● C_BILLINGDOCUMENTITEMBASICDEX: Billing Document Item Basic Extraction Data

These two CDS views have now been released for data extraction. These CDS views are app-independent, and are available for all external consumers who want to extract sales document item data or billing document item data to SAP BW or other external systems.

The following CDS views have been updated.

● I_SalesOrderItemCube: Analytics - Incoming Sales Order Cube● C_SalesOrderItemQry: Analytics - Incoming Sales Orders● C_RevenueFromInvoiceQry: Analytics - Sales Volume Flexible Analysis

The following CDS views have been deprecated.

Deprecated CDS View Replaced With

I_SalesQuotationItemCube (Analytics - Sales Quotation Cube)

I_SalesQuotationItemCube_2 (Analytics - Sales Quotation Cube)

I_CustomerReturnItemCube (Analytics - Customer Return Cube)

I_CustomerReturnItemCube_2 (Analytics - Customer Return Cube)

C_CustomerReturnItemQry (Analytics - Customer Return)

C_CustomerReturnItemQry_2 (Analytics - Customer Return)


CDS view C_SalesQuotationItemQry (Analytics - Sales Quotation) has been renamed to Sales Quotations - Flexible Analysis.

For more information about the mentioned CDS views, choose the relevant view names in the section Sales Monitoring and Analytics under CDS Views for Sales.

Related Information

Data Extraction for Sales Document Item


https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/87fae757dc3bf032e10000000a441470.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/7956d1b7a4c743489e4a80f93237ea9b.html

Billing Document Item Basic Extraction Data

8.1.11 Enhancements to Functionality and Usability in Sales

With these new features and enhancements, you can benefit from improvements in functionality and usability in the area of SAP S/4HANA Sales.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component ● SD-SLS (Sales)

● SD-SLS-GF-AR (Archiving Sales)

● SD-SLS-GF-RE (SD Reporting)

● SD-SLS-SO (Sales Orders)

● SD-SLS-SO-TP (SD Third-party order processing)

● SD-BF-OC (Output Determination)

● SD-BF-PR (Pricing)

● SD-BF-TP (Word Processing)

● SD-BIL (Billing)

● SD-MD-CM (Conditions and Condition Maintenance)


Additional Details

The table below contains an overview of all available improvements for your back-end system. For more detailed information about the availability, delivery and prerequisites of the individual features, consult the indicated SAP Note for each item.

Delivered Improvements

Feature Description SAP Note

You can now modify and preview e-mail subjects and contents in sales and billing transactions.

SAP Note 2786303


Sales

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/73772e73e49f440f8193004c73603853.html



You can now view the invoice and customer master data or business partner information when displaying all billing documents not released to accounting using transaction VFX3.

SAP Note 2769096

With the new user parameter DISPLAY_SDOC_RE_NAVI, you can navigate to sales documents in display mode from transactions for sales document processing.

SAP Note 2761156

With the improved functionality of the Business Add-In BADI_SDOC_WRAPPER, you can now provide additional reference fields for currency and quantity.

SAP Note 2761154

When creating sales orders, you can now attach documents using the GOS service Store Business Document directly.

SAP Note 2739451

With the new transaction VA71, you can now release output for sales documents.

SAP Note 2784287

Read Consulting Note 2750423 to learn how you can manually change conditions on the item overview screen.

SAP Note 2750423

With the new Business Add-In BADI_VKOE, you can sync condition records in source systems and target systems for certain combinations of condition table, condition type, and variable key, effectively avoiding mismatches between condition records in a source system and its target system.

SAP Note 2755370

Read Consulting Note 2791393 to learn how you can effectively use the standard SAP translation tools at your disposal to define your own translations of condition tables for any possible combination of source and target language.

SAP Note 2791393

Read Consulting Note 2739880 to learn how you can change the net value of an order item in a way that results in the desired change to the net price.

SAP Note 2739880

With the new user exit USEREXIT_NUMBER_RANGE, you can define the number ranges for internal document number assignments depending on the required logic.

SAP Note 2753397

Read Consulting Note 2776710 to learn how you can make changes to the delivery relevance in an item category after the time of entry also valid for documents that have already been entered.

SAP Note 2776710

Read Consulting Note 2726768 to learn how you can add condition tables to the definition of an existing pricing report or a condition list.

SAP Note 2726768




















With the new user parameter SD_TEXTID_DISPLAY, you can display the currently selected, active text type in the header and item data of a sales or billing document on the Texts tab. This can help to prevent entering a description for a wrong text type.

SAP Note 2753787

You can now choose to hide specified entries in the input help of organizational units in processing sales transactions.

SAP Note 2781302

With the new Delete billing block button in transaction V23 for mass processing of sales documents, you can now delete header and item billing blocks from sales documents.

SAP Note 2762902

The material description from the material master record is now always being displayed on screen in transactions for sales document processing.

SAP Note 2753355

Read Consulting Note 2772842 to learn how you can influence the content of various standard fields in the two central purchase requisition tables EBAN and EBKN by means of customer programming and how to add customer-defined fields to these tables.

SAP Note 2772842

You can now display a reference document by double-clicking on its document number or item number in the Sales A tab of a sales document item in sales processing transactions.

SAP Note 2753511

Read Consulting Note 2751648 to learn how you can customize the double-click event handler for the document flow of a sales and distribution document.

SAP Note 2751648

When attempting to access a billing document that is locked using transaction VF02, the resulting message displayed by the system now contains the user ID of the user who is currently processing the document.

SAP Note 2779512

When checking the archivability of sales orders, you can now choose to execute all archivability checks for a given document, even if a first reason that prevents the document from being archived is found. Previously, the report always terminated after finding the first issue, even if multiple reasons persisted that prevented the document from being archived.

SAP Note 2765704


Sales












8.2 Sales Force Support

8.2.1 Product Assistance for Sales Force Support Moved From Service to Sales

You can now find the documentation for Sales Force Support under Sales, rather than under Service.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Application Component CRM-S4-SLS (S4CRM: Pre-Sales & Sales)


Related Information

Sales Force Support

8.3 Commodity Sales

8.3.1 Integration with Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench

The integration of the TSW, for nominations and tickets, with Commodity Procurement and Commodity Sales enables oil companies to perform enhanced risk assessments.

The new Risk Object is a generic business object modeled in the Business Object Processing Framework to integrate risk-related data, which cannot be directly derived from pricing procedures or pricing conditions. With this data object, you can use the following features:

● An interface for any application to be integrated with Commodity Management● Flexible pricing with the Commodity Pricing Engine (CPE)● Evaluation of financial risks resulting from commodity positions● Risk data can be assessed by performing reports of Commodity Risk Analytics● Several possibilities to extend the data model and the business logic


https://help.sap.com/viewer/7b24a64d9d0941bda1afa753263d9e39/1909.000/en-US/746ffa3200a54b9ab0bcdf692af81091.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component LO-CMM, SD-SLS-OA-CCO, MM-PUR-OA-CON, CA-GTF-CPE



8.4.1 Predictive Analytics Model Training - Sales (2YJ)

Use


● Updates to the "Delivery Performance / Delivery in Time" use case

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2YJ ( Predictive Analytics Model Training - Sales )




Sales



8.4.2 Convergent Billing (1MC)

Use


● Inclusion of debit and credit memo processes into convergent billing.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1MC ( Convergent Billing )


Application Component SD-BIL



United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Czech Republic, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa



http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2YJ

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1MC

8.4.3 Accelerated Customer Returns (BKP)

Use


● Support return of goods that have been sold via down-payment or free of charge

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BKP ( Accelerated Customer Returns )


Application Component SD-SLS






Sales

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FBKP

8.4.4 Return Order Processing for Non-Stock Material (3TE)

Use

This scope item handles return order processing of non-stock items and corresponding compensation.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3TE ( Return Order Processing for Non-Stock Material )







8.4.5 Dangerous Goods in Sales (3G8)

Use

This scope item describes the dangerous goods transport check in sales order and sales quotation. The check is performed for all compliance-relevant products. For chemical products that are added to sales orders, this ensures that an appropriate dangerous good classification is established.


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3TE

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3G8 ( Dangerous Goods in Sales )







8.4.6 Digital Payments - Sales (1Z1)

Use


● Return orders with electronic payments are now enabled.● PayPal as payment method is now enabled for sales order processing.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Sales

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3G8


Scope Item 1Z1 ( Digital Payments - Sales )





United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Czech Republic, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Romania, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa


8.4.7 Presales Management (41V)

Use

This scope item describes how to set up sales force automation (SFA) support and allow sales employees to manage their activities, leads, and opportunities in a sales cycle.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 41V ( Presales Management )


Application Component CRM-S4


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1Z1





8.4.8 Sales Order Processing with Customer Down Payment (BKJ)

Use


● Support of customer down-payments for service and non-stock material

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BKJ ( Sales Order Processing with Customer Down Payment )





United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Czech Republic, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa


Sales

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F41V


8.4.9 Safety Data Sheets in Sales (3VQ)

Use

Placing chemical products on the market requires an efficient system support for handling mandatory documentation as defined by regulators. This scope item focuses on the maintenance of Safety Data Sheets for products during Sales processes.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3VQ ( Safety Data Sheets in Sales )








http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FBKJ

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3VQ

8.4.10 Chemical Compliance in Sales (31J)

Use


● Integrate marketability checks into sales and order processes, now including outbound delivery● Enhanced support of life-cycle of products: Logistic roles

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 31J ( Chemical Compliance in Sales )





United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Canada, Switzerland, China, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy, Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa





Sales

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F31J

9 Service

9.1 Service Contract Management

9.1.1 Price Adaptation for Service Contracts

With this feature, you can employ flexible pricing with service contract items for price adaptation (SCNA). One method of achieving this is to set a required date (such as billing date, settlement start date, or settlement end date) within a billing request line as the pricing date of a service contract item, so that varying prices can be determined according to varying pricing dates. Alternatively, you can maintain the prices of service contract items manually at billing request line level.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 426 (Service Contract Management)

Application Component CRM-S4-SRV-CTR (Service Contract)



You can enable price adaptation in Customizing for Service under Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories .

Related Information

Price Adaptation for Service Contracts

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Service P U B L I C 527

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ccd297fc53c04ef8b3d7abbfc301c40f/1909.000/en-US/ea2c1a3275f445b884b2ce9ea2ecfbfd.html

9.1.2 Price Agreements in Service Contracts

With this feature, you can now offer your customers lower prices for services and service parts than those defined in service orders. You can create the relevant condition records to maintain these prices or discounts for service contract items by using transaction VK11. When your service orders are assigned to service contracts after service contract determination, those prices in service contracts are copied to the service orders.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CRM-S4-SRV-CTR (Service Contract)


Additional Details

To maintain the condition records, you must use the SD document category CSCT for price agreements in service contracts. You can use the following condition types for service contracts:

● PSC0 (material price in service contract)● DSC1 (material discount in service contract)● DSC2 (group discount of material price in service contract)

Related Information

Price Agreements in Service Contracts

9.1.3 Auto Renewal for Service Contract Items

This feature enables you to automatically extend the duration of service contract items whose validity ends within a certain period.


Service

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ccd297fc53c04ef8b3d7abbfc301c40f/1909.000/en-US/203415c801f847c6b26d6262cccf984c.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CRM-S4-SRV-CTR


Additional Details

To activate the auto renewal of service contract items, you must select the Enable Auto Renewal checkbox for the service contract item. You must also define the auto renewal period and the contract extension.

You can use the program Renew Service Contract Items (CRMS4_SERVICE_CONTRACT_RENEWAL) to select the service contract items that are due and need to be renewed. The program then processes all service contract items whose contract end is found within the auto renewal period that has been defined for the service contract item.


In Customizing for Service in the Customizing activity Settings for the Maintenance Framework (BTMF), the SC_ITEM_RENEW BTMF process must be entered in the Activate Change Process view.

Service contract items that support the pricing adaptation cannot be renewed automatically. In this case, the Enable Auto Renewal checkbox is not displayed. The pricing adaptation is defined in the Customizing activity Define Item Categories in the Customizing Item view for the respective item category.

See Also

For more information, see the product assistance for SAP S/4HANA at http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909 under Product Assistance Enterprise Business Applications Service Service Processes Service Contract Management Service Contracts Change Processes Auto Renewal of Service Contract Items .



9.2 Solution Quotations

9.2.1 OData API for Solution Quotations

With the Web service Solution Quotations - Create, Read, Update, Delete (API_BUS_SOLUTION_QUOTATION_SRV), you can create, read, and update solution quotations. You can delete the header texts and item entities. In addition, you can use the service to accept solution quotations. This triggers the automatic creation of follow-up transactions.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CRM-S4-SOL-SQ (Solution Quotation)


Additional Details

You can also do the following with this service:

● Etag handling● Create and accept solution quotations in a single changeset

Related Information

External References

9.2.2 Subscription-Related Items Enabled in Solution Quotations

With this feature, you can add subscription-related items to solution quotations. To do so, you must have enabled Subscription Order Management. When you accept a solution quotation containing subscription-related items, the system automatically creates a subscription contract as a follow-up transaction.


Service

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ccd297fc53c04ef8b3d7abbfc301c40f/1909.000/en-US/27aed30aadb244deabb152d80cacb848.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CRM-S4-SOL-SQ (Solution Quotation)


Related Information

Solution Quotation in Subscription Order Management

9.3 Business Solution Portfolios

9.3.1 Business Solution Portfolios

This feature enables you to retain an overview of the service contract items and subscription contract items that are referenced to a customer’s business solution.

A business solution portfolio acts as a record of the customer’s business solution and references the respective service contract items and subscription contract items.

You can create business solution portfolios as follows:

● Automatically as a follow-up transaction for a solution quotation● Manually using the app Manage Business Solution Portfolios

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CRM-S4-SOL-BSP


https://help.sap.com/viewer/95ad0cb1c441447888d695da7f3fd3d9/1909.000/en-US/ea4c86b89ae14121b59b230f5e074479.html


Additional Details

Create business solution portfolios from solution quotationsOnce a solution quotation has been accepted, the system automatically creates a business solution portfolio that has been assigned the relevant service contract items and subscription contract items.

To instruct the system to create business solution portfolios automatically, you must implement the API API_BUS_SOLUTION_QUOTATION_SRV. For more information, see the section Effects on System Administration.

Manage business solution portfolios using the appYou can use the app Manage Business Solution Portfolios to do the following:

● Manually create, change, and delete business solution portfolios: You can manually create a business solution portfolio for a customer. You can also change data and delete the business solution portfolio.

● Search, filter, and display business solution portfolios: You can search and filter for specific business solution portfolios and display the respective business solution portfolio.

● Add and remove items: You can add service contract items and subscription contract items to a business solution portfolio and remove items.


In the API API_BUS_SOLUTION_QUOTATION_SRV, make sure that the BusSolnPrtfloReference property has been maintained in the API_BUS_SOLUTION_QUOTATION_SRV - A_BusinessSolutionQuotation entity.

You use this property to transfer the external reference ID (business solution portfolio reference) to the business solution portfolio to be generated. You can only create a business solution portfolio automatically if the external reference ID has been entered for the solution quotation.


In Customizing for Service in the Customizing activity Define Number Ranges, you must define the number intervals that are assigned to the business solution portfolios as IDs.

The automatic creation of business solution portfolios from solution quotations requires you to make the following settings in the Customizing activity Assign Action Profile to the Business Transaction Type for the SRVP (solution quotation) transaction type:

● Assign the SERVICE_QUOTATION_PROD_PKG action profile to the SRVP (solution quotation) transaction type.


Service

● For the SERVICE_QUOTATION_PROD_PKG action profile, define the CRMS4_CREATE_BUSSOLNPRTFLO action definition as a follow-up transaction.

See Also

For more information, see the product assistance for SAP S/4HANA at http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909 under Product Assistance Enterprise Business Applications Service Service Processes Business Solution Portfolios .

9.4 Case Management

9.4.1 Case Management

This feature enables you to consolidate, manage, and process information about a complex problem or issue in a central collection point, the case. Within a case, you can group diverse information, such as business partners, transactions, products, and documents.

You can also use Case Management to process problems and issues that involve multiple processing steps or multiple processors. Case Management therefore supports the processing and communication flow between organizational units.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CRM-CM




9.5 Cross Topics

9.5.1 External References for Service Transactions

With this feature, you can use external references as identifiers for service transactions in external systems. You provide external references when you create service transactions (and service transaction items) through API services. You can check them in the respective user interface (UI) for each service transaction type.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CRM-BTX-BF (Basic Functions for Business Transactions)


Additional Details

You can use external references in the following service transactions:

● Solution quotation● Solution quotation item● Business solution portfolio

Related Information

External References


Service

https://help.sap.com/viewer/ccd297fc53c04ef8b3d7abbfc301c40f/1909.000/en-US/27aed30aadb244deabb152d80cacb848.html

9.6 Integration

9.6.1 Integration with SAP Field Service Management

With this feature, the system automatically optimizes field service processes when a service call is received in SAP Field Service Management. The integration ensures a seamless, fast, and flexible delivery of field services, and helps you to provide more efficient customer services.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 3D2 (Service Order Management and Monitoring)

Application Component CRM-S4-SRV-SVO


Related Information

Integration with SAP Field Service Management

9.7 Subscription Order Management

9.7.1 Solution Quotation

This feature now enables you to manage subscription products in addition to other products, such as sales and service products. You are also able to create solution quotations with reference to master agreements to leverage the predefined terms within these agreements.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/738a456365c0414faba6426d05fd8674/1909.000/en-US/8258ca04f31d4df1b11adeba2aee04a2.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CRM-S4-SOM


Related Information

Solution Quotation in Subscription Order Management

9.7.2 Allowances

This feature enables you to manage the credit given to customers by service providers, for one or more of their services.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You can use allowances to:

● Build customizable allowance definition groups and assign them to specific subscription products.● Activate allowances during order capture and contract distribution.


Service

https://help.sap.com/viewer/95ad0cb1c441447888d695da7f3fd3d9/1909.000/en-US/ea4c86b89ae14121b59b230f5e074479.html

● Display allowance balance in subscription contract.


For more information about contract change processes, refer to Customizing structure under ServiceTransactions Settings for Subscription Transactions Integration Integration with Convergent ChargingBusiness Add-Ins (BAdIs) .

Related Information

Allowances

9.7.3 Variant Configuration

This feature enables you to use characteristics defined in the advanced variant configuration to configure subscription products marked as configurable in the product master.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You can use variant configuration to:

● Model subscription products using characteristics defined in variant configuration.● Configure subscription items within subscription orders and solution quotations.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/95ad0cb1c441447888d695da7f3fd3d9/1909.000/en-US/f81827539df86757e10000000a44538d.html


To allow configuration of subscription items, you must maintain the relevant Configuration data in the Customizing for Service Transactions Basic Settings Define Item Categories

Related Information

Configuring Subscription Items using Variant ConfigurationProduct Configuration

9.7.4 Subscription Item Quantity

This feature enables you to change the quantity of subscription items in subscription orders. The updated quantity is then reflected in the subscription contract on submission of the subscription order.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You can use the quantity change feature to:

● Change the quantity of the parent item in a product bundle. The preconfigured subitems automatically take up the quantity of the parent product. If a subitem is added manually, you can change the quantity for it.


Service

https://help.sap.com/viewer/95ad0cb1c441447888d695da7f3fd3d9/1909.000/en-US/b235a4d687ce44659e2e95d6879b9c12.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/95ad0cb1c441447888d695da7f3fd3d9/1909.000/en-US/56226ae8506c49f991050bed73507cfe.html


To enable maintenance of subscription item quantity, select the Enable Qty flag for the relevant item category. You can do so in the Customizing for Service Transactions Settings for Subscription TransactionsDefine Settings for Item Categories .

Related Information

Item Quantity in Subscription Orders

9.7.5 Account Split

This feature enables you to handle the 1:many relationships between business partners and subscriber accounts in SAP CC, by using the capabilities of a separate alternative subscriber account (aSUAC) associated with each additional provider contract created for a business partner.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details


For more information about contract change processes, refer to Customizing structure under ServiceTransactions Settings for Subscription Transactions Integration Integration with Convergent ChargingBusiness Add-Ins (BAdIs) .


https://help.sap.com/viewer/95ad0cb1c441447888d695da7f3fd3d9/1909.000/en-US/b1173bdc7d02417bb7958ed833b765d1.html

Related Information

Account Split

9.7.6 Master Agreement

This feature enables you to manage terms of a service between a provider and a business partner. These terms can be referred to via solution quotations and subscription orders. Master agreements help to establish long term relationships with business partners, using requirement-specific products and pricing.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You can use master agreements to:

● Adapt product attributes and characteristics (for configurable products) as per customer requirement.● Access the terms defined in the master agreement by creating solution quotations and subscription orders

as call-off documents.● Replicate the master agreement to FI-CA in SAP S/4HANA, Here, you are able to assign agreements such

as invoice agreement and discount agreement.


For more information about contract change processes, refer to Customizing structure under ServiceTransactions Settings for Master Agreement .


Service

https://help.sap.com/viewer/95ad0cb1c441447888d695da7f3fd3d9/1909.000/en-US/b39cc52ebb1949fea9c8c142b2a3cb56.html

Related Information

Master Agreement


9.8.1 Service Order Management (41Z)

Use

This scope item enables the creation, planning, execution, confirmation and billing of service orders.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 41Z ( Service Order Management )








https://help.sap.com/viewer/95ad0cb1c441447888d695da7f3fd3d9/1909.000/en-US/6fa2615160de6658e10000000a423f68.html

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F41Z

9.8.2 Interaction Center Service Request Management (41W)

Use

This scope item enables service request management in the Interaction Center.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 41W ( Interaction Center Service Request Management )







9.8.3 Service Contract Management (426)

Use

This scope item enables service contract management.


Service

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F41W

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 426 ( Service Contract Management )








http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F426

10 Sourcing and Procurement

10.1 Generic Features

10.1.1 Configuration of the Flexible Workflow Made Easy

The product assistance for Sourcing and Procurement has been enhanced with comprehensive information regarding the configuration of the flexible workflow. The flexible workflow is available for documents in Sourcing and Procurement, such as purchase requisitions, purchase orders, supplier invoices and so on. For each of the documents, there is a list of the optional and mandatory configuration steps, including the required settings in Customizing, setup of approver determination, sending of e-mail notifications, workflow definition, and Business Add-ins (BAdIs). In addition, you get detailed information about the apps that can be used for troubleshooting.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item Relevant for all scope items where the flexible workflow is used.

Application Component MM-PUR


Additional Details

This means that documentation for configuring the flexible workflow is now available for the following:

● Requests for quotation● Supplier quotations● Scheduling agreements● Purchase contracts● Central purchase contracts● Purchase requisitions● Centrally managed purchase requisitions


Sourcing and Procurement

● Purchase orders● Centrally managed purchase orders● Service entry sheets for Lean Services● Supplier invoices

Related Information

Flexible Workflow for the Approval of Documents in Sourcing and Procurement

10.2 Value Help Authorizations in Sourcing and Procurement


Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component MM


Additional Details

Please see SAP Note 2798130 and SAP Note 2798128 for a list of the affected applications, transactions and application objects in Sourcing and Procurement.



What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Sourcing and Procurement P U B L I C 545

https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/3ba5a81bc3f749c6af46ec52d072dc53.html




Related Information


10.3 APIs for Integration with Sourcing and Procurement

10.3.1 SOAP APIS for Service Entry Sheets (External Services) - Renamed

The short description of five services formerly referred to as Acknowledgement has been changed to clarify the reference to the business object Service Entry Sheet for external services (MM-SRV). The technical names were not touched.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 22Z (Procurement of Services)

Application Component MM-SRV (External Services Management)


Additional Details

The description of the following services has been changed:

ServiceAcknowledgementERPCreateRequestConfirmation_In

Previous Description: New Description:

ServiceAcknowledgement (Create Service Acknowledgement)

Service Entry Sheet – Receive Creation Conf. (Ext.Srv.)

For more information see Service Entry Sheet – Receive Creation Conf. (Ext.Srv.)

ServiceAcknowledgementERPCreateRequest_In




https://help.sap.com/viewer/1dad2180e6f34b75ac77afce5cb5eda1/1909.000/en-US/556123633bf411db2b24000f20dac9ef.html

ServiceAcknowledgementERPCreateRequest_In

Create Service Acknowledgement based on Acknowledgement Create Request

Service Entry Sheet – Receive Creation Request (Ext.Srv.)

For more information see Service Entry Sheet – Receive Creation Request (Ext.Srv.)

ServiceAcknowledgementERPConfirmation_Out


Notify of Service Acknowledgement Confirmation Service Entry Sheet – Send Creation Confirmation (Ext.Srv.)

Service Entry Sheet – Send Creation Confirmation (Ext.Srv.)

ServiceAcknowledgementERPCreateRequest_Out


Create Service Acknowledgement based on Acknowledgement C...

Service Entry Sheet – Create (External Services)

ServiceAcknowledgementERPNotification_Out


ServiceAcknowledgementERPNotification_Out (Notify of Service Acknowledgement)

Service Entry Sheet - Send Update Notification (Ext.Srv.)

Service Entry Sheet - Send Update Notification (Ext.Srv.)

10.3.2 New SOAP APIs for Supplier Invoice Creation

The following services are now available for the integration of supplier invoices created in SAP S/4HANA with external systems:

● Supplier Invoice - Create (B2B) (SupplierInvoiceCollaborationNotification_Out)● Supplier Invoice - Create (A2A) (SupplierInvoiceS4CollaborationNotification_Out)

Both services enable integration of Evaluated Receipt Settlement (ERS) scenarios with external systems.

Technical Details

Type New




https://help.sap.com/viewer/1dad2180e6f34b75ac77afce5cb5eda1/1909.000/en-US/81eda501b9d511dc2b8d000f20fcb6a9.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1dad2180e6f34b75ac77afce5cb5eda1/1909.000/en-US/3ab4de0bbdbe11dc2b8d000f20fcb6a9.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/1dad2180e6f34b75ac77afce5cb5eda1/1909.000/en-US/0847675a4a1811dc2b24000f20dac9ef.html

Application Component MM-EDI-IV (Invoice Verification)



NoteSuppliers integrated with these services must be classified as subject to ERS in the buyer's S/4HANA system.

Related Information

Supplier Invoice - Create (B2B)Supplier Invoice - Create (A2A)

10.3.3 New SOAP API for Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing

This asynchronous outbound service Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing – Replicate enables you to replicate condition records for pricing that are used in Purchasing to external systems. The data replication uses the Data Replication Framework (DRF).

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item J45 (Procurement of Direct Materials)

Application Component ● SD-BF-PR (Pricing and Conditions)

● MM-PUR-GF (Basic Functions)




https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/370d44444b21401081def4e9685920fe.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/019dc26723fb464280c09539e1996059.html

Additional Details

The service contains nodes that respectively represent condition record, validity of condition record, pricing scale, and condition supplement.

You need to make specific settings in your system before using this service. For more information, see Configuration: Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing – Replicate.

If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component SD-MD-CM.

Related Information

Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing – Replicate

10.3.4 New OData API for Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing

The synchronous inbound OData service Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing – Create, Read, Update, Delete (API_PURGPRICINGCONDITIONRECORD_SRV) is now available for you to create, read, update, and delete condition records for pricing that are used in Purchasing.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component ● SD-BF-PR (Conditions and Pricing)

● MM-PUR-GF (Basic Functions)


Additional Details

The service contains entities for condition record, validity of condition record, pricing scale, and condition supplement.

If you need to create an incident regarding this service, use component SD-MD-CM.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/eb893c29617445c6822cc053eabbbfd3.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/656cc013d89844679a9df204980a8403.html

Related Information

Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing – Create, Read, Update, Delete

10.3.5 Enhancements in OData API for Purchase Requisitions

This API now enables you to:

● Validate a purchase requisition.● Create and update purchase requisitions from external systems. Create multiple account assignments,

include item note texts and perform standalone (non-batch) operations; create, read and update.● Allow external solutions integrated with SAP S/4HANA to enable purchase requisition items for

purchasing, or discard them from purchasing, in SAP S/4HANA.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), 1ZM (Procure-to-Pay with SAP Ariba Buying and Invoicing), 19W (Contingent Workforce Invoice Processing via SAP Fieldglass), BNX (Consumable Purchasing), J13 (Service and Material Procurement - Project-Based Services), J45 (Procurement of Direct Materials)

Application Component MM-PUR-REQ


Related Information

Purchase Requisitions - Read, Create, Update, Delete



https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/039ad90332864c3eba5e65f81875b86f.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/43c43f584eff2160e10000000a44147b.html

10.4 Integration

10.4.1 ALERT: End of Support for SAP Ariba Cloud Integration (CI) Solutions

If you have been using SAP Ariba Cloud Integration (CI) Solutions to integrate SAP S/4HANA with the Ariba Network or with SAP Ariba solutions, please be aware that SAP Ariba announced the retirement of the Ariba Network Adapter for SAP NetWeaver or Cloud Integration (also known as CI) for SAP Ariba strategic procurement and operational procurement applications. We strongly recommend that you transition to SAP Ariba Cloud Integration Gateway before the product retirement date, that is, before December 31, 2021.

Technical Details

Type End of support



Product Retirement Date December 31, 2021

Additional Details

Please contact your SAP Ariba representative to learn more and plan for transition to SAP Ariba Cloud Integration Gateway or connect with an SAP Ariba Cloud Integration Gateway certified partner to plan for the transition.

You will need to be on CI-9, CI9 SP1, or CI9 SP2 to take advantage of the end-of-support planning date of December 31, 2021. Otherwise, the standard SAP Ariba support policy applies (see https://support.ariba.com/item/view/96353?sid=0.9339239754251771 . See also the End of Support FAQ at https://support.ariba.com/item/view/181502

10.5 Customizing and Business Add-Ins for Sourcing and Procurement

This topic gives you an overview of all new or changed Customizing activities and Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) available with SAP S/4HANA 1909.


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Fsupport.ariba.com%2Fitem%2Fview%2F96353%3Fsid%3D0.9339239754251771

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Fsupport.ariba.com%2Fitem%2Fview%2F96353%3Fsid%3D0.9339239754251771

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Fsupport.ariba.com%2Fitem%2Fview%2F181502

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Fsupport.ariba.com%2Fitem%2Fview%2F181502

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), 1XI (Central Requisitioning), 2XT (Central Purchasing), 3UH (Image-Based Buying), J45 (Procurement of Direct Materials), BME (Stock Transfer with Delivery), 43E (Intelligent Approval Workflow), BMD (Purchase Contract), 2ME (Central Purchase Contracts), 1JI (Real-Time Reporting and Monitoring for Procurement), 22Z (Procurement of Services), BNX (Consumable Purchasing)

Application Component MM


Additional Details

New and Enhanced Customizing Activities and Business Add-Ins

Application Area Sub-application Area IMG NodeCustomizing Activity/BAdI What you can do

Materials Management (MM)

Purchasing Central Procurement - Settings

in Hub System > Central Purchase

Contract > Business

Add-Ins

BADI: Maintain Field Control Properties

You can use this BAdI to control the properties of the various UI elements for a contract.




Contract > Business

Add-Ins

BAdI: Check of Central Purchase Contract Before Saving

You can use this BAdI to raise messages when processing central purchase contracts.




Contract > Business

Add-Ins

BAdI: Change of Central Purchase Contract Before Saving

You can use this BAdI to modify header data in central purchase contracts.







Contract > Business

Add-Ins

BAdI: Change of Central Purchase Contract Item Before Saving

You can use this BAdI to modify item data in central purchase contracts.


Purchasing Business Add-Ins for

Purchasing

BAdI: Change of Field Control for Purchase Requisitions

You can use this BAdI to modify the properties of different fields that appear on the user interface of purchase requisition apps.


Purchasing Purchase

Requistion

Activate Intelligent Approval of Purchase Requisitions

You can use this customizing activity to activate intelligent approval scenario for purchase requisitions. You can also configure settings related to the intelligent approval scenario.


Purchasing Purchase Requistion

Flexible Workflow for Purchase

Requisitions

Activate Flexible Workflow for Purchase Requisitions

You can use this customizing activity to adapt the flexible workflow settings for purchase requisitions. The flexible workflow allows you to define approval processes for purchase requisitions according to your requirements.


Purchasing Procurement

Analytics

Setup Analytical Reporting Currencies

You can use this customizing activity to setup two analytical reporting currencies that will be used in various analytical KPIs and queries in procurement apps.


Purchasing Purchase

Requisition Self-

Service Procurement

Define Machine Learning Scenarios

You can use this customizing activity to activate machine learning scenarios and make the corresponding settings in the SAP S/4HANA system.




Purchasing Purchase

Requisition

Define Mapping of Material Groups to Purchasing Group

You can use this customizing activity to map various material groups to a purchasing group if you don't want to allow all the purchasing groups to procure from all the available material groups.


Purchasing Purchase

Requisition Self-

Service Procurement

Business Add-Ins

BAdI: Check Draft Item of a PR in a Self-Service Scenario

You can use this BAdI to implement checks on the data entered in various fields, while a purchase requisition is being created and is in draft state.


Purchasing Purchase

Requisition Self-

Service Procurement

Business Add-Ins

BAdI: Modify PR Data in Self-Service Requisition Scenario with OCI 4.0 Data

You can use this BAdI to perform custom modification of data in a draft purchase requisition created in a self-service scenario with the OCI 4.0 data


Purchasing Purchase

Requisition Self-

Service Procurement

Business Add-Ins

BAdI: Default Delivery Address for PR Items in Self-Service Scenario

You can use this BAdI to auto-populate the delivery address while adding an item to a purchase requisition


Purchasing Purchase

Requisition Self-

Service Procurement

Maintain Requisitioning Groups

You can use this customizing activity to add and maintain requisitioning groups for purchase requisitions


Purchasing Purchase OrderSet up Stock Transport

Order Set Up Stock Transfer Between

Storage Locations

Activate Stock Transfer Between Storage Locations

You can use this customizing activity to enable the function for issuing storage location, stock transport orders, and stock transport scheduling agreements.




Storage Locations

Configure Delivery Type & Availability Check Procedure by Storage Location

You can use this customizing activity to specify the delivery type based on supply plant, storage location, and document type.





Purchasing Partner

DeterminationPartner Settings in Purchasing

Documents

Assign Partner Schemas to Document Types

You can use this customizing activity to assign partner schemas to the various purchasing documents. The partner roles defined for each schema are associated with respective document type.




Storage Locations

Define Shipping Data for Stock Transfers Between Storage Locations

You can use this customizing activity to specify the shipping data for stock transfer between storage locations.


Purchasing Business Add-Ins for

Purchasing

BAdI: Change of Field Control for Purchase Order Items

You can use this BAdI to modify the properties of specific fields for the process controll that appear on the user interface of purchase order apps.


Purchasing Conditions Define Price Determination

Process

Define Schema Determination

You can use this customizing activity to assign calculation schemas to specific purchasing transactions.



in Hub System

Configure Control Plane for the APIs of Central Procurement

You can configure the control plane for the APIs of central procurement to perform several business operations. For example, maintaining the API name for the replication of a purchase requisition.



in Hub System

Define Actions for Configuring the Automation of Business Processes

You can define the actions required for configuring the automation of business processes, such as, assign Business Objects (optional), Action Type, Action Sub Type, and specify if the action is grouping enabled.





in Hub System

BAdI: Check of Documents in Business Process Automation

You can use this BAdI to implement checks for various documents, such as, purchase requisitions or purchase orders, in business process automation.


Purchasing Central Procurement - Settings in Hub System

BAdI: Modify Documents in Business Process Automation

You can use this BAdI to change details of various documents, such as, purchase requisitions or purchase orders in business process automation.



in Hub SystemCentral

Requisitioning

BAdI: Manage Purchase Requisitions During Replication

You can use this BAdI to modify the extensible fields and to check the information about the header, item and the account assignment of self-service purchase requisitions during their replication from hub system to the connected systems.



in Hub System

Central Purchasing

BAdI: Manage Purchase Order Data Centrally During Extraction

You can use this BAdI to check the information about the header and item fields of purchase orders. Additionally, you can also modify this information based on the implementation of the BAdI.



in Hub System

Central Purchasing

BAdI: Determine Agents Centrally for Approving Replicated PR

You can use this BAdI to centrally determine approvers of replicated purchase requisitions. You can also access purchase requisition data by using the corresponding CDS views. You can define a list of approvers based on this data.






in Hub System

Central Purchasing

Activate Overall Release of Centrally Managed Purchase Requisitions

You can release all the items of centrally managed purchase requisitions together and at any time. That is, you can approve or reject all the items of centrally managed purchase requisitions simultaneously.


Purchasing Central Procurement - Settings in Connected Systems

Central Purchase

Order

Activate Central Settings for Purchase Orders

You can activate central approval. This means purchase orders created in the connected systems are sent to the hub system for approval.



Central Purchase

Order

Determine Text Types to Save Release Information of Purchase Orders

You can determine the text types to save release information of purchase orders. This means the flexible workflow release information such as the approval message or rejection message of purchase orders can be saved in the determined text types. This information is then sent to the connected systems.



Central Purchase

Order

BAdI: Change of Text ID for Central Approval of Purchase Requisitions

You can use this BAdI to modify the Text ID for storing the reasons for approval or rejection by the central approver. By default, the approval or the rejection reason texts are mapped to the Text ID B08.



Central

PurchaseRequisition

Maintain Central Settings for Purchase Requisitions

You can maintain the central settings for purchase requisitions that need to be approved centrally. For example, you can maintain document type, document category, and plant.


10.6 Commodity Procurement

10.7 Integration with Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench

The integration of the TSW, for nominations and tickets, with Commodity Procurement and Commodity Sales enables oil companies to perform enhanced risk assessments.

The new Risk Object is a generic business object modeled in the Business Object Processing Framework to integrate risk-related data, which cannot be directly derived from pricing procedures or pricing conditions. With this data object, you can use the following features:

● An interface for any application to be integrated with Commodity Management● Flexible pricing with the Commodity Pricing Engine (CPE)● Evaluation of financial risks resulting from commodity positions● Risk data can be assessed by performing reports of Commodity Risk Analytics● Several possibilities to extend the data model and the business logic

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component LO-CMM, SD-SLS-OA-CCO, MM-PUR-OA-CON, CA-GTF-CPE


10.8 Sourcing and Contract Management

10.8.1 Source Assignment

10.8.1.1 Enhancements in Manage Purchasing Info Records

With this app, you can now create and display purchasing info records for the following procurement types: Consignment, Pipeline, Standard, Subcontracting.



Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BHD (Create Purchasing Info Record)

Application Component MM-FIO-PUR-IR


Related Information

Manage Purchasing Info Records

10.8.1.2 Mass Changes to Purchasing Info Records

This feature enables you to now select and change the values of multiple purchasing info records and purchasing organizations separately. You can select multiple purchasing info records and click Mass Edit to change purchasing info record fields. Similarly, select multiple purchasing organizations and click Mass Edit to change purchasing organization fields. If you select multiple purchasing info records and purchasing organizations at the same time, the Mass Edit dialog displays both fields, which you can change.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BHD (Create Purchasing Info Record)

Application Component MM-PUR-VM-REC


Additional Details

The tree-table structure has been removed and replaced with a two-tab structure – Purchasing Info Records and Purchasing Organization.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/49e387576b49ab76e10000000a441470.html

10.8.1.3 Manage RFQs

With this feature you can display the change log for existing RFQs. When you navigate to the object page of an RFQ, you can choose the History button to view a change log of the RFQ. The log popup displays information about the user who made a change, the date and time of the change, and the content of the change. You can use the search function within the change log to search for actions, users, and old and new values

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1A0 (Sourcing with SAP Ariba Sourcing), 1L2 (Supplier Quote Automation with SAP Ariba Commerce Automation), 1XF (Request for Price)

Application Component MM-PUR-RFQ


Additional Details

The change log doesn't document whether notes or attachments were added, edited or deleted, nor does it provide approval details or process flow information. The search function for entities or items is currently not supported.

NotePlease note that the History popup displays changes on database level. Therefore, it is not a one-to-one representation of the UI changes. For example, if you change the requested quantity of the item, the system logs the changes on schedule line level.


The business role SAP_BR_EXTERNAL_AUDITOR_PRC must be assigned to your user to enable the History function for you.



10.8.1.4 Get Bidder Proposals in the Manage RFQs App

This feature enables you to quickly get a list of possible suppliers for the required materials. Instead of manually typing in the supplier's name or searching for a suitable supplier in the value help, you can now use the Get Bidder Proposals button. The system shows you a list of suppliers that have delivered the required materials for the selected purchasing organization in the past. Suppliers that are used by other purchasers are also included, if applicable.

Technical Details

Type New





10.8.1.5 Manage Supplier Quotations

With this app you can now display a change log for existing supplier quotations. When you navigate to the object page of a supplier quotation, you can choose the History button to view a change log of the supplier quotation. The log popup displays information about the user who made a change, the date and time of the change, and the content of the change. You can use the search function within the change log to search for actions, users, and old and new values.

Technical Details

Type Changed






Additional Details

The change log doesn't document whether notes or attachments were added, edited or deleted, nor does it provide approval details or process flow information. The search function for entities or items is currently not supported.

NotePlease note that the History popup displays changes on database level. Therefore, it is not a one-to-one representation of the UI changes. For example, a change of the quotation submission date on the UI also results in changes of the date of price determination for every item. These changes are shown in the History, but are not visible on the UI of the supplier quotation object page.


The business role SAP_BR_EXTERNAL_AUDITOR_PRC must be assigned to your user to enable the History function for you.

10.8.1.6 Situation Template: Low Number of Quotations Received

This feature enables you to create your own ready-to-use situation template for RFQs. With the predelivered situation template PROC_RFQLOWNUMBEROFQTN you can notify your purchasers about RFQs with the approaching submission deadline and a low number of submitted supplier quotations. The purchasers can keep an eye on such RFQs and contact invited bidders that haven't yet submitted a quotation if necessary.

Technical Details

Type New







Additional Details

This situation template is only available for RFQs of type Int. Sourcing Req..

10.8.2 Purchase Contract Management

10.8.2.1 Enhancements in Manage Scheduling Agreements

With this app, you can now:

● Create notes for scheduling agreements.● Enable the Kanban process for scheduling agreements.● Create and save a new scheduling agreement as a draft using the In Preparation status.● Copy existing scheduling agreements. The newly copied scheduling agreement item opens in the edit

mode, where you can update and save the information based on your requirements.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BMR (Scheduling Agreements in Procurement)

Application Component MM-FIO-PUR-SQ-SCH


Related Information

Manage Scheduling Agreements


https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/8ae073c0bcd544e8ae1ee973b5181485.html

10.8.2.2 Mass Changes to Scheduling Agreements

This feature enables you to select multiple scheduling agreement headers and scheduling agreement items separately on two dedicated tabs. If you select multiple headers and items at the same time, the Mass Edit function conveniently categorizes the fields into header fields, item fields, and partner fields, to help you identify the fields you want to change.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BMR (Scheduling Agreements in Procurement)

Application Component MM-PUR-OA-SCH


Additional Details

The tree-table structure has been removed and replaced with a two-tab structure: Scheduling Agreement Headers and Scheduling Agreement Items.

10.8.2.3 Mass Changes to Purchase Contracts

This feature enables you to now select and change the values of multiple purchase contract headers and purchase contract items separately. You can select multiple purchase contract headers and click Mass Edit to change header-level fields. Similarly, select multiple purchase contract items and click Mass Edit to change item-level fields. If you select multiple headers and items at the same time, the Mass Edit dialog displays both header and item-level fields, which you can change.

Technical Details

Type Changed




Scope Item BMD (Purchase Contract)

Application Component MM-PUR-OA-CON


Additional Details

The tree-table structure has been removed and replaced with a two-tab structure: Purchase Contract Headers and Purchase Contract Items.

10.8.2.4 Enhancements in Manage Purchase Contracts


● Use the situation handling framework to trigger notifications for predicted contract consumption on your home screen. You can navigate to the Purchase Contract Item app from these notifications.

● Create purchase orders directly from a local purchase contract. In the Manage Purchase Contracts app, you can select a valid purchase contract and create a purchase order for all items of the contract. Alternatively, you can open the purchase contract and select the specific items within the contract for which you want to create a purchase order.

● Use the new BAdI MMPUR_CTR_GTS_CHECKS to perform global trade services checks on purchase contracts, such as embargo checks and watch list screening checks, to ensure that the contract complies with international trade laws and restrictions.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BMD (Purchase Contract)

Application Component MM-FIO-PUR-SQ-CON


Related Information

Purchase Contract Management


https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/6d610b569fcc8143e10000000a4450e5.html

Manage Purchase Contracts

10.9 Operational Procurement

10.9.1 Enhancements to Create Purchase Requisition

This app now enables you to:

● Search for catalog items by image, as part of the Image-Based Buying machine learning scenario.● Create purchase requisitions in a connected system other than the one assigned to you. This is applicable

only if you have activated Central Requisitioning scenario in Central Procurement.● Enhance field control properties and maintain custom logic for field values. Assign a requestor based on

the shop on behalf type and requisitioning groups that are assigned to your user.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 3UH (Image-Based Buying), 18J (Requisitioning), 1XI (Central Requisitioning)

Application Component MM-FIO-PUR-REQ-SSP


Additional Details

● A prerequisite for using the Image-Based Buying machine learning scenario is the successful completion of a training job in the app Schedule Export of Catalog Item Images for Machine Learning. This involves exporting a catalog containing a list of image URLs and corresponding product IDs to the SAP Leonardo system.

● You can navigate to the app Default Settings for Users from the app Create Purchase Requisition, where you can change the plant and company code, only if you have the necessary authorizations. This is applicable if you have activated Central Requisitioning scenario in Central Procurement using the customizing activity

Materials Management Purchasing Central Procurement - Settings in Hub System Activate SAP S/4HANA Procurement Hub and Scenarios .

● When adding items to the shopping cart, the purchasing group can be predefined or a selection of purchasing groups proposed, based on the settings in customizing activity Materials ManagementPurchasing Purchase Requisition Define Mapping of Material Groups to Purchasing Group .



https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/91eb9b57aba49f2de10000000a44147b.html

● You can add and maintain requisitioning groups for a user using the customizing activity Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Requisition Self-Service Procurement Maintain Requisitioning Groups

● You can modify the properties of different fields that appear on the user interface of purchase requisitions. You can make the fields hidden, read-only, mandatory, or optional as per your requirements using the app Custom Fields and Logic, and also create and publish custom logic for the fields.


The Image-Based Buying feature is available only if you have activated the Image-Based Buying machine learning scenario in one of the following ways:

● Configure Your Solution app under Sourcing and Procurement Integration Smart Enterprise Intelligence Define Machine Learning Scenarios

● IMG path in the SPRO transaction: Materials Management Purchase Requisition Define Machine Learning Scenarios

Related Information

Create Purchase Requisition

10.9.2 Enhancements to My Purchase Requisitions


● Add items to existing PRs.● View changes made by another authorized user in the connected system, to the attributes of PRs created

by you in the hub system, in the context of Central Requisitioning.● View quick summary of key item information on choosing Number of Items. View external processing

status of PRs. Copy PRs with attachments. View supporting information while copying rejected PRs or rejected PR items.

Technical Details

Type Changed



https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/b210e2575b911270e10000000a44147b.html

Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), 1XI (Central Requisitioning)



Additional Details

● You can now search and filter purchase requisitions using additional filter criteria.● You will also receive a notification requesting confirmation, if you have not confirmed the goods even after

the delivery date.

Related Information

My Purchase Requisitions

10.9.3 Enhancements to Default Settings for Users


● Use Excel-based data exchange to update settings for multiple users with the help of Microsoft Excel.● View and change the connected plant and company code that are assigned to you, provided you have the

necessary authorizations. This is applicable only if you have activated Central Requisitioning scenario in Central Procurement.

● Assign requisitioning groups for users and select the required shop on behalf type.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), 1XI (Central Requisitioning)





https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/b74de85750dd0f70e10000000a44147b.html

Additional Details

Excel-Based Data ExchangeYou can download an Excel file containing the default settings for multiple users based on a range of selection parameters. You can then make your changes in the Excel file and upload it again with your updated settings. An Excel template is also available for download, if you want to define user settings from scratch.

Assignment of Shop on Behalf Type

You can add and maintain requisitioning groups for a user using the customizing activity Materials Management Purchasing Purchase Requisition Self-Service Procurement Maintain Requisitioning Groups .

The types of shop on behalf can be one of the following:

● Group Based – You can shop on behalf of another user who belongs to the same requisitioning group.

● Company Code Based – You can shop on behalf of another user who belongs to the same company code.

● No Shopping on Behalf – You can restrict a user from creating shopping cart on behalf of another user.

The shop on behalf type determines the shop on behalf behavior in the app Create Purchase Requisition.

Related Information

Default Settings for UsersCreate Purchase Requisition

10.9.4 Requirements Processing

10.9.4.1 Create Purchase Requisition - Advanced

With this app, you can now view the approval history of a purchase requisition.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), 2NX (Scheduling Agreement for Subcontracting Procurement), 2NY (Scheduling Agreement for Consignment Procurement)



https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/89575ca1bdb94335b69d05ab8fb6538c.html




Related Information

Create Purchase Requisition - Advanced

10.9.4.2 Manage Purchase Requisitions - Professional

You can now modify the field control properties of different fields that appear on the user interface of the app Manage Purchase Requisitions – Professional.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning)



Additional Details

With this feature, you can make the fields hidden, read-only, mandatory, or optional as per your requirements. You can use the app Custom Fields and Logic to create and publish the custom logic Manage Field Controls for Purchase Requisitions.

Related Information

Manage Purchase Requisitions - Professional



https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/8541219e423043f0bfc7018c4f5361bb.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/4d029b57aba49f2de10000000a44147b.html

10.9.4.3 Manage Workflows for Purchase Requisitions

The existing scenarios for item and header level approval are now renamed to Old - Overall Release of Purchase Requisition and Old - Release of Purchase Requisition Item. It is recommended to use the new scenarios Overall Release of Purchase Requisition and Release of Purchase Requisition Item. For any future releases only the new scenarios will be enhanced. To get benefits of the new features, start using the new scenarios.

You can now create a new item level or header level workflow if you have activated Central Requisitioning scenario in Central Procurement. Note that SAP S/4HANA system can be configured as a hub system and you can activate Central Requisitioning scenario in Central Procurement, where SAP S/4HANA and SAP ERP can be set up as connected systems .

You can now set deadlines for a workflow step. Also, you can now use the precondition Company Code of Purchase Requisition is for the overall release of purchase requisitions. You can also define and manage conditions when to restart the flexible workflow for purchase requisitions. In addition, a comprehensive overview document now explains how to configure the flexible workflow for purchase requisitions.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), BMD (Purchase Contract), 1XI (Central Requisitioning)

Application Component MM-FIO-PUR-REL


Additional Details

Related Information

Manage Workflows for Purchase Requisitions

10.9.4.4 Edit and Approve Purchase Requisiton

With this new app you can, if required, edit specific fields in the purchase requisitions to which you are assigned as an approver before approving them from the app My Inbox.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/5634d5e7a337449c989b632e98f84abf.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), BMD (Purchase Contract), 1XI (Central Requisitioning)



Related Information

Edit and Approve Purchase Requisition

10.9.4.5 Schedule Transfer of Purchase Requisitions for Intelligent Approval

With this app, you can schedule jobs to transfer approval data related to purchase requisitions from SAP S/4HANA system to SAP Cloud Platform.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), 43E (Intelligent Approval Workflow), BMD (Purchase Contract)



Additional Details

SAP Cloud Platform calculates the confidence level for the approval of purchase requisition items based on this transferred data. Confidence level is a percentage which is calculated based on the already approved or



https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/b0aa0849cb3c4df6bd1143e0e2414f71.html

rejected purchase requisition items. Using this percentage, users can judge whether or not to approve purchase requisition items. The calculated confidence level is displayed to the approver in the app My Inbox.

Confidence level is available only for the Release of Purchase Requisition Item workflow scenario.

Related Information

Schedule Transfer of Purchase Requisitions for Intelligent Approval

10.9.5 Purchase Order Processing

10.9.5.1 Mass Changes to Purchase Orders

This feature enables you to now select and change the values of multiple purchase order headers and purchase order items separately. You can select multiple purchase order headers and click Mass Edit to change header-level fields. Similarly, select multiple purchase order items and click Mass Edit to change item-level fields. If you select multiple headers and items at the same time, the Mass Edit dialog displays both header and item-level fields, which you can change.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item J45 (Procurement of Direct Materials), BNX (Consumable Purchasing)

Application Component MM-PUR-PO


Additional Details

The tree-table structure has been removed and replaced with a two-tab structure - Purchase Order Headers and Purchase Order Items.

From the Purchase Order Items tab, you can view and search for delivery schedule lines by selecting purchase order items and clicking Delivery Schedule Line.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/2101a369fdf046a48214e39397ec49f0.html

NoteThe Delivery Schedule Line link is only present in the Purchase Order Items tab.

10.9.5.2 Monitor Supplier Confirmations

With this feature, you can now see confirmations for purchase orders and scheduling agreements. Earlier, we used to show only pending purchase order confirmations. Now, both purchase orders and scheduling agreements are seen as purchasing documents.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2TX (Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery)

Application Component MM-FIO-PUR-PO


10.9.5.3 Situation Template: Pending Supplier Confirmation

You can now use this situation template to inform specific members in your purchasing organization about missing supplier confirmations.

Technical Details

Type New







Related Information

Situation Template: Pending Supplier Confirmation

10.9.5.4 Manage Purchase Orders

With the Manage Purchase Orders app, you can now use several new features, such as the following: You can use the subcontracting process, you can now display the purchase order commitments, you can enter or display supplier contact data, you can display supplier confirmations, and you can select any WBS element as the account assignment object of a purchase order item regardless of whether the WBS element is assigned as a work package or not.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), 1FM (Quality Management in Procurement), 1NB (Ariba - Sales Order to Customer Invoice Integration for Sales), 1W8 (Legal Control), 1ZM (Procure-to-Pay with SAP Ariba Buying and Invoicing), 22K (Contingent Workforce Procurement via SAP Fieldglass), 22Z (Procurement of Services), 2LG (Supplier Consignment), 2R7 (Purchasing Rebate Processing), 2TW (Complementary Procurement Functions), 2TX (Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery), 2XU (Procurement of Materials with Variant Configu-ration), 3UK (Inbound Storage Tank Management - Process Manufacturing), BMY (Subcontracting), BNX (Consumable Purchasing), J45 (Procurement of Direct Materials), J62 (Asset Accounting), J82 (Automated Purchase-to-Pay with SAP Ariba Commerce Automation),

Application Component MM-PUR (Purchasing)


Additional Details

Below you will find more information about the enhancements to the Manage Purchase Orders app:

● Subcontracting Process: Subcontracting is a form of procurement where the required product is manufactured by a supplier (in this case the subcontractor) to whom you provide certain components. You


https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/8563f0db73d143e19baa46f1c146023d.html

can provide these components either directly from one of your plants, or indirectly through one of your suppliers. Using the components you provide, the subcontractor completes the manufacturing process and delivers the required product to the ordering party.

● Purchase Order Commitments: If the account assignment of a purchase order is commitment-relevant, you can now view the commitments in a table. The table displays one line for each combination of purchase order item, account assignment line, and schedule line. The respective amount also includes the commitment for the delivery costs of the item. If the commitment has been reduced, for example, by a goods receipt or an invoice, the system displays the residual commitment.The commitment table considers standard items as well as limit items with a commitment-relevant account assignment (cost centers or WBS elements).

● Supplier Contact Data: You can maintain or view data for a contact person at the supplier, namely an identifier or the name of the Salesperson, the salesperson´s telephone number, and reference data for the contact person.You can use the maintained data for the contact person as a filter for the list of purchase orders displayed in the object list of the Manage Purchase Orders app.

● Supplier Confirmation Control: The new sections Supplier Confirmation Control and Supplier Confirmations on purchase order item level enable you to view supplier confirmations and corresponding control settings.

● Funds Management: If Public Sector Management is active in your system, the new section Funds Management is also available on purchase order item level.In the new section Funds Management, you can enter information for purchase orders without an account assignment category, such as fund, grant, budget period, functional area, cost center, and G/L account. Invoices created with reference to these purchase orders also have no account assignment category and forward the information to Finance.

● If you use the account assignment category Project for your purchase order item, you can select any WBS element as the corresponding account assignment object. The input help of the field WBS element will offer you all the WBS elements, both those that are assigned as a work package and those that are not. Please note that, for a correct determination of the project costs for projects, you have to choose only WBS elements with a work package assignment in such projects.

● In case of missing authorization, the entries of the user in the Manage Purchase Orders app are reset by the system.If a user does not have authorization, for example, for the purchasing group, purchasing organization, or for the plant entered, the system resets the previous entries.

Related Information

Commitments Management (CO)

10.9.5.5 Situation Template: Quantity Deficit in Supplier's Delivery

You can now use this situation template to inform specific members in your purchasing organization about a deficit in the quantity of materials to be delivered by the supplier.



https://help.sap.com/viewer/5e23dc8fe9be4fd496f8ab556667ea05/1909.000/en-US/68cfb9537cceb44ce10000000a174cb4.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component MM-PUR-PO


Related Information

Situation Template: Quantity Deficit in Supplier's Delivery

10.9.5.6 Monitor Purchase Order Items

With this feature, you can now predict delivery dates of the purchase order items and whether they match the expected delivery dates. You can click the predicted delivery date for a purchase order item to display the supplier's delivery reliability for the material and plant over the past 6 months (180 days). This gives you a direct comparison of what percentage of deliveries were early, on-time, and delayed. You can also navigate to the Supplier Evaluation Score History app.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3FY (Prediction of Delivery Date for Purchase Order Items)



10.9.5.7 My Purchasing Document Items - Professional

With this app, you can quickly gain an overview of the items in your purchasing documents for each supplier and keep track of those purchasing documents for which you, as a purchaser, are responsible. Besides the


https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/f1a8c585e3ca4132b3ae595fde3ee58b.html

count of purchasing document items, the app provides separate tabs for purchase requisitions, purchase orders, good receipts, and supplier invoices. The clear and customizable views let you monitor your purchasing document items for each supplier at the level of detail you require.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item J13 (Service and Material Procurement - Project-Based Services)



Additional Details

You can post a goods receipt for a selected purchase order item on the Purchase Orders tab (only if you have the Inventory Manager role). When you choose the Post Goods Receipt button, you are directed to the Post Goods Receipt for Purchase Order app, in which the selected purchase order value is entered automatically.

You can also create purchase orders on the Purchase Orders tab.

This app My Purchasing Document Items - Professional (F0547B) replaces the app My Purchasing Document Items (F0547A).

Related Information

My Purchasing Document Items - Professional

10.9.5.8 Monitor Subcontracting Documents

With this app, you can now view an assembly flow diagram for purchasing document items generated by Material Requirements Planning (MRP). For these MRP-generated items, you can display a flow diagram showing the entire network for the subcontracting process – from the first component through to the final assembly. For example, you can see which components were supplied to the subcontractor from which supplier or plant, which organization is handling the next assembly step, and what components are involved.



https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/266293457a7840d0b05e98b78fc99898.html

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BMY (Subcontracting)



10.10 Central Procurement

10.10.1 Central Purchasing

10.10.1.1 Enhancements in Schedule Import of Purchasing Documents

With this app, you can now use input help for many of the entry fields to help you make valid entries.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2XT (Central Purchasing)

Application Component MM-PUR-HUB-PR


Related Information

Schedule Import of Purchasing Documents


https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/5853c320b10a49228c1ca8bde17e3802.html

10.10.1.2 Enhancements in Manage Purchase Requisitions Centrally


● Create purchase requisitions in the connected systems. Also, you can view the process flow diagram that displays the follow-on documents created for the purchase requisition items. Additionally, you can view, analyze and resolve the replication errors of central purchase requisitions.

● Create central purchase contracts from centrally managed purchase requisition items in draft mode. Also, you can add purchase requisition items to a purchase order. Additionally, you can view the approver's name of the centrally managed purchase requisitions.

● Create central RFQs from purchase requisitions. Additionally, you can defer purchase requisitions, resume deferred purchase requisitions, display deferred purchase requisitions and close them.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Information

Manage Purchase Requisitions Centrally

10.10.1.2.1 Manage Workflows for Centrally Managed Purchase Requisitions

With this app, you can configure workflows for the approval process of centrally managed purchase requisitions as a configuration expert. The app provides options to define preconditions for the release of centrally managed purchase requisitions. It also provides several options to determine the approvers for their release.



https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/9a953d6a23534aa9905862c996c36443.html

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Manage Workflows for Centrally Managed Purchase Requisitions

10.10.1.3 Enhancements in Create Purchase Order Centrally


● Create purchase orders using the expert mode. The expert mode opens SAP GUI for HTML to create purchase orders.

● Create purchase orders using the options Order or Save with Status Held. You can click the purchase order number to view its details in the connected system.

● You can specify various new information for the purchase order.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component MM-PUR-HUB-PO



https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/92f466a6186a4dea91371a63ee18113e.html

Additional Details

On the header level, you can now specify the following information:

● Document Type● Payment Terms● Incoterms● Incoterms Location

On the item level, you can now specify the following information:

● Material Description● Quantity● Price● Tax Code● Delivery Date● Good Receipt

Related Information

Create Purchase Order Centrally

10.10.1.4 Enhancements in Manage Purchase Orders Centrally


● View the process flow diagram that displays the follow-on documents created for purchase orders.● View a notification received for the number of overdue items for the respective purchase order document.

From the notification, you can navigate to the specific item to view its details under the Situations facet. Alternatively, you can dismiss the notification.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component MM-PUR-HUB-PO



https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/90cd224255ca4aa09c9ca69966019af6.html


Related Information

Manage Purchase Orders Centrally

10.10.1.5 Manage Rules for Automation of Business Processes

With this app, you can manage rules that are required to automate various business processes, for example, Procure to Pay.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Manage Rules for Automation of Business Processes

10.10.1.6 Schedule Automation of Business Processes

With this app, you can schedule jobs for the automation of business processes in the hub system, based on the activated rules.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/f533bf51c79f4250b2ccd855e3fbc0ef.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/852a52a67c2c442ead085aa07b9fe8d4.html

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

The rules are activated and configured using the app Manage Rules for Automation of Business Processes.

Related Information

Schedule Automation of Business Processes

10.10.2 Mass Changes to Central Purchase Contracts

With this app, you can apply mass changes to fields at header and item level in your central purchase contracts, including item and header distribution. This allows you to implement changes that affect a large number of your central purchase contracts. With just a few clicks, you can change terms and conditions or validity dates at header level, or target quantities, prices, or tolerance values at item level, in multiple central purchase contracts. You can also edit the distribution percentage maintained at header or item level by specifying a value for all affected headers or items, or by changing the value for individual headers or items in the header distribution or item distribution view.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2ME (Central Purchase Contracts)



https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/fa7c14a6c46f4117919fd5a5843a6eb4.html

Application Component MM-PUR-OA-CON


Related Information

Mass Changes to Central Purchase Contracts

10.10.3 Enhancements in Manage Central Purchase Contracts


● Copy central contracts to use as a basis for creating similar contracts● Use flexible distribution of central contracts to allow your subsidiaries to order a greater or smaller

quantity or value of contract items based on their needs.● Save draft versions of central contracts using the In Preparation status● View the consumption percentage of central contracts● Maintain the info record update code directly from a central contract● Use value help (F4) when selecting a purchasing group

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2ME (Central Purchase Contracts)

Application Component MM-PUR-HUB-CCTR


Additional Details

The following enhancements are also included:

● Create custom fields and define custom logic for fields on the UI, and use the new BAdI MM_PUR_S4_CCTR_FLDCTRL_SIMPLE for managing field controls for central contracts.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/91f4245ba7d04ff79e62ed63cbb17ae1.html

● Use the new BAdIs for checking and changing standard fields in central contracts:○ MM_PUR_S4_CCTR_CHECK○ MM_PUR_S4_CCTR_MODIFY_HEADER○ MM_PUR_S4_CCTR_MODIFY_ITEM○ MM_PUR_S4_CCTR_MOD_DISTR_CTR

● Use the situation handling framework to create custom notifications, for example, when central contracts are about to expire

Related Information

Central Purchase ContractsManage Central Purchase Contracts

10.10.4 Central Procurement Operations Monitor

With this app, you can monitor and diagnose the issues that results in errors in the Central Procurement scenarios. The app displays the overview cards for the scenarios: Central Contract Management, Central Purchasing, and Central Requisitioning. From each card, you can navigate to the detailed application to view the issues and their causes.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1XI (Central Requisitioning ), 2ME (Central Purchase Contracts ), 2XT (Central Purchasing)

Application Component MM-PUR-HUB-MON


Additional Details

Central Contract Management:

● Monitor the number of distributions of central purchase contracts that have failed due to errors.● Monitor the number of release order update jobs that have failed due to errors.

Central Purchasing:



https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/fb8697eea5964302ab99d4770f2325bf.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/f1ed148b14014e5cb68419948788a487.html

● Monitor the number of extraction jobs for purchase requisitions that have failed due to errors.● Monitor the number of extraction jobs for purchase orders that have failed due to errors.● Monitor the number of text extraction jobs that have failed due to errors.

Central Requisitioning:

● Monitor the number of purchase requisition replications that have failed due to errors.● Monitor the number of sources of supply extraction jobs that have failed due to errors.

Related Information

Central Procurement Operations Monitor

10.10.4.1 Central Procurement Interface Monitor

With this app, you can now see more details about why certain actions for scenarios have failed and at what stage during the process. You can then navigate directly to the relevant applications or transaction on the hub system or the connected systems, where you can investigate the problem and begin to fix it.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Central Procurement Interface Monitor


https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/19b0dbba3bea47289a4a29b11f0c5af9.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/4cb67bee6df645b9854a9473f22a87dd.html

10.10.4.2 Central Procurement Job Monitor

With this app, you can now see more details about why certain jobs failed and at what stage during the process. You can then navigate directly to the relevant application in which you can investigate the problem, attempt to fix it, and then restart the job.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Central Procurement Job Monitor

10.10.5 Central Purchasing Analytics

10.10.5.1 Central Purchase Requisition Item Types

With this new app, you can display the number of purchase requisition items that were created in the SAP S/4HANA system (which acts as a hub system), and the number of purchase requisition items that were extracted from the connected systems. SAP S/4HANA, SAP S/4HANA Cloud, or SAP ERP act as connected systems

Technical Details

Type New




https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/63c6e8893ba24e9ab02831ad91545b7f.html

Scope Item 1JI (Real-Time Reporting and Monitoring for Procurement), 2XT (Central Purchasing)

Application Component MM-FIO-PUR-ANA


Related Information

Central Purchase Requisition Item Types

10.10.5.2 Monitor Purchase Requisition Items Centrally

With this new app, you can monitor purchase requisition items that were created in the SAP S/4HANA system (which acts as a hub system), and purchase requisition items that were extracted from the connected systems. SAP S/4HANA, SAP S/4HANA Cloud, or SAP ERP act as connected systems.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1JI (Real-Time Reporting and Monitoring for Procurement), 2XT (Central Purchasing)



10.10.6 Manage Central RFQs

This feature enables you to display, create and manage central RFQs in the SAP S/4HANA system that acts as a hub system. You can create central RFQs from purchase requisitions that are created in the hub system, or from items that have been extracted from the connected systems and imported to the hub system.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/423c3e87f2ac40ce808dab8c1dfccc5d.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3ZF (Central Sourcing)

Application Component MM-PUR-HUB-RFQ


Additional Details

You create central RFQs from the Manage Purchase Requisitions Centrally app.

10.10.7 Manage Central Supplier Quotations

This feature enables you to display all central supplier quotations in the SAP S/4HANA system that acts as a hub system.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You create central supplier quotations from the Manage Central RFQs app.



10.10.8 Create Purchase Order from Central Supplier Quotation

This feature enables you to create purchase orders from the central supplier quotations.

Technical Details

Type New





10.11 Invoice Management

10.11.1 Manage Supplier Invoices

With this feature you can now restrict the release authorization for blocked supplier invoices. For a blocked invoice, you can also display detailed data. For completed invoices for which a workflow is running, you can display the Approval Details. You can reference documents to which multiple accounts are assigned, and you can now search by the service performer and the performance date to identify the most relevant service entry sheet items. If the goods receipt is not valuated, the account assignment fields are ready for input, depending on the G/L account. The purchase order type Subcontracting can now be posted in the invoice.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Scope Item BH1 (Corrective Maintenance), BMY (Subcontracting), 18J (Requisitioning), 19O (Automated Dynamic Discounts with SAP Ariba Discount Management), 22Z (Procurement of Services), 2Q2 (Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from Staging), 2NV (Guided Buying Capability with SAP Ariba Buying), 2TX (Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery), 2R7 (Purchasing Rebate Processing), 2TW (Complementary Procurement Functions), BD3 (Sales Processing using Third-Party with Shipping Notification), BJK (Production Subcontracting - External Processing), BMD (Purchase Contract), BMK (Return to Supplier), BMR (Scheduling Agreements in Procurement), BNX (Consumable Purchasing), J45 (Procurement of Direct Materials), J60 (Accounts Payable), J82 (Automated Purchase-to-Pay with SAP Ariba Commerce Automation), 1XI (Central Requisitioning), 2MB (Integration of Payment Advice with Buyers and Suppliers), 2XU (Procurement of Materials with Variant Configuration)

Application Component MM-FIO-IV (Fiori UI for Invoice Verification)


Additional Details

The following functions are now available:

● New Release AuthorizationThe authorization object M_RECH_BUK has been extended with the new release activity. You can now define that the account payable accountant is only responsible for posting and/or releasing supplier invoices.

● Detailed View for Blocked InvoicesIf a supplier invoice is blocked for payment, you can navigate to a separate view containing an overview of facts and statistics for the blocked invoice.

● Approval Details for Completed InvoicesIf a workflow was triggered for a parked supplier invoice that was saved as completed, you can check the approval steps on the Approval Details tab

● Multiple Account AssignmentYou can reference documents (for example, purchase orders or service entry sheets) to which multiple accounts are assigned.

● Search by Service Performer and Performance DateYou can choose among several assignment options depending on the reference document category. To identify the most relevant service entry sheet items, you can now search by the service performer and the performance date.

● Field Selection for Account Assignment of Purchase Order Reference ItemsIf the goods receipt is not valuated, the account assignment fields are ready for input, depending on the G/L account. They are available as optional or required fields, depending on the field control settings of the G/L account defined in the G/L Account Master Data app.



● Purchase Order Type SubcontractingThe purchase order type Subcontracting can now be posted in the invoice.

● New Header FieldsWith this app, you can use new header fields (Reporting Country, EU Triangular Deal, Payment Method Supplement, and Invoice Receipt Date).

● Enterprise SearchThe Enterprise Search is available for supplier invoices.

10.11.2 Create Supplier Invoices - Advanced

With this feature, you can now choose a Special Period and post a supplier invoice directly to a G/L account within this special period. In addition, you can use the service order accounting fields for G/L account postings.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), BKP (Accelerated Customer Returns), 1Z3 (Accelerated Third-Party Returns), BDK (Sales Processing using Third-Party without Shipping Notification), BDN (Sales of Non-Stock Item with Order-Specific Procurement), BEI (Period-End Closing - Plant), J45 (Procurement of Direct Materials), J60 (Accounts Payable), J62 (Asset Accounting), 2UQ (Future Delivery - Materials Management), 2UT (Complementary Invoice – Pricing), 2UU (Returnable Packaging to Vendor), 3ZF (Central Sourcing), 2NX (Scheduling Agreement for Subcontracting Procurement)



Additional Details

Special Periods

A special period is used to divide the last regular posting period into sections for closing operations. For example, if you have 12 posting periods for a company code that match the calendar year, you can divide the posting period 12 (December) into the special periods 13, 14, 15, and 16. Then you can post an invoice directly to one or more G/L accounts, for example into the special period 14. This is not possible for invoices that contain


items with reference to a purchase order. In addition, special periods are not available, if you perform prepayments.


The company code settings must enable the special period posting. As a further prerequisite, you must have selected the check boxes Display Periods, and Posting Special Periods in the Edit Options for Journal Entries app.

10.11.3 Edit Supplier Invoices Settings

With this new app, you can select the parameter Display Journal Entry. If the parameter is selected, and you post or park a supplier invoice, the invoice number and the journal entry are displayed.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BNX (Consumable Purchasing)



Additional Details

NoteTerminology: Journal Entry vs. Accounting Document

Please note that the following information applies only to English.

The term journal entry replaces accounting document following a change in the underlying financial architecture. While the basic concept – the accounting record for a business transaction – is the same, journal entries enable a truly integrated accounting system.

You may notice that you still see the terms document or accounting document on the user interface and in the documentation. Nevertheless, these accounting documents are journal entries since they are based on the new architecture.



10.11.4 Park Supplier Invoices

With this app, you can hold or park invoices or credit memos. This means that you enter the invoice data or credit memo data in the system and save it in a document, but the system does not post this invoice initially.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

You can change a parked document as often as you wish, for example, by adding or correcting data. The changes are logged. When you have finished changing the document, you can post the parked document. Only when you post an invoice or credit memo, does the system carry out the normal account movements and make the necessary updates. The Park Supplier Invoices app offers the following functions:

● Hold:○ The document is saved in its current status.○ Only minimal checks are performed, for example, to check if the company code exists.○ No updates take place.

● Park:○ Information required to post the invoice document is still missing and you do not want to have to re-

enter the data entered so far.○ The balance is not zero.○ Updates take place, for example:

○ Information purchase order history○ Log of document changes

● Save as complete:○ No more changes should be made to the invoice document.○ The balance is zero.○ The invoice document is flagged for posting but is not to be posted yet.○ Updates take place, for example

○ Information purchase order history○ Controlling documents


○ Log of document changes

10.12 Supplier Management

10.13 Obsolete Backend Roles

The standard technical roles for Supplier Management that were delivered by SAP are obsolete and are not supported any more.

Technical Details

Type Deleted


Scope Item 19C (Activity Management in Procurement), SL4(Supplier Evaluation and Performance Monitoring), 19E(Supplier Classification and Segmentation)

Application Component SLC-ACT, SLC-EVL, SLC-CAT


Additional Details

The following standard roles are obsolete:

Role Description

/SRMSMC/CATEGORY_MANAGER Category manager

/SRMSMC/DNB_REQUESTOR Role for requesting reports from D&B

/SRMSMC/EVALUATION_APPRAISER Appraiser

/SRMSMC/ACTIVITY_MANAGER Activity manager

/SRMSMC/ACTIVITY_PARTICIPANT Participant in Activity



Role Description

/SRMSMC/QUESTIONNAIRE_MANAGER Questionnaire manager

/SRMSMC/TRANSLATOR Translator

/SRMSMC/DISPLAY_ALL Display role for all objects in Supplier and Category Management

/SRMSMC/REPORT_EXEC_ADMIN Technical role with authorization to start reports in Supplier and Category Management

/SRMSMC/BG_SUP_EVAL_BUYSIDE RFC background processing in Supplier Evaluation


You can continue to use the standard SAP roles, however they are not supported any more. If you want to change to the standard SAP procedure for user management and authorizations, see UI Technology Guide

User Management and Authorization .

10.14 Procurement Analytics

10.14.1 Supplier Evaluation Score History

With this new app, you can view the history of supplier evaluation scores. You can persist the supplier evaluation scores by scheduling a job.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1JI (Real-Time Reporting and Monitoring for Procurement)




Additional Details

Jobs can be scheduled by using the app Schedule Persistency of Supplier Evaluation Scores in the Purchasing Scheduling business catalog.

Related Information

Supplier Evaluation Score HistorySchedule Persistency of Supplier Evaluation Scores

10.14.2 View Document Type and Item Category Attributes in Analytics Apps

You can now display the document type and item category details in analytical apps.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

The Document Type and Item Category can be viewed in the following apps:

● Purchase Order Value and Schedule Agreement Value● Purchasing Spend● Overdue Purchase Order Items● Quantity Contract Consumption● Off-Contract Spend● Contract Leakage



https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/b8a3631a11094af4a363a9aa85c67ed2.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/5e41c4132adb4e178088f95bce5f47bd.html

In the following apps, only the Document Type can be displayed:

● Contract Expiry● Value Contract Consumption

10.14.3 Operational/Overall Supplier Evaluation by Top/Bottom 10 Suppliers

You can now view overall and operational supplier scores for the top and bottom 10 suppliers. The 10 suppliers who got the highest score among the suppliers are listed under the Top 10 Suppliers view. Similarly, you can view the 10 suppliers who got lowest scores in the Bottom 10 Suppliers view.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

This feature is applicable to the following apps:

● Operational Supplier Evaluation● Overall Supplier Evaluation

10.14.4 Purchase Order Changes

With this new app, you can view the number of changes made in the purchase orders.


Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

This app can be used to find the total number of changes for multiple attributes in purchase orders, such as suppliers, price, purchasing groups, etc.

Related Information

Purchase Order Item Changes

10.14.5 Purchase Requisition Average Approval Time – Flexible Workflow

You can use this new app to identify the average time taken to approve a purchase requisition from the time of its creation. This app only considers purchase requisitions for which the approval process is based on the flexible workflow. By default, the app calculates the average approval time from the previous year to date. The average approval time is shown in days.

Technical Details

Type New






https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/62f42d5fcf7f4535987fedfcba1a5f7b.html


Additional Details

The average approval time is calculated for different cost ranges; low, medium, high, and very high. You can specify the cost ranges in the following filters:

● Price Low-Cost● Price Mdm-Cost● Price High-Cost

Related Information

Purchase Requisition Average Approval Time - Flexible Workflow

10.14.6 Situation Handling for Purchase Contract Item

You can now get notifications for contract consumption prediction details on your home screen. You can navigate to the app Purchase Contract Item from these notifications.

Technical Details

Type Changed





10.14.7 Request for Quotation Types

With this new app, you can display RFQs that have been created in the SAP S/4HANA system by type.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/de077187a57442ae997bce3bdfc19a11.html

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You can see the following RFQ types:

● Ext. Price Requests: RFQs for which pricing is extracted from external systems for example, SAP Ariba.● Ext. Sourcing Requests: RFQs for which bidding and awarding takes place externally. The RFQs that are

created in SAP S/4HANA, and then sent to the SAP Ariba system where the bidding process takes place. The awarded quotations are then sent back to SAP S/4HANA.

● Int. Sourcing Requests: RFQs for which all the processes happen internally within SAP S/4HANA.

You can also view the target amounts for all the above RFQ types in this app.

Related Information

Request for Quotation Types

10.14.8 Performance Optimization for Analytics Apps

You can now optimize performance for some of the purchasing analytics apps by migrating the purchasing data (purchase orders and scheduling agreements).

Technical Details

Type New




https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/c63a1fca5f6d46d7b0e0de97680bce3d.html




Additional Details

To achieve performance optimization, do the following:

1. Set up reporting currencies: Use the new configuration step Setup Analytical Reporting Currencies in the configuration app Procurement Analytics to set up reporting currencies. These reporting currencies will be used in various analytical KPIs and queries in the procurement apps.

2. Schedule migration: Use the new app Schedule Migration of Purchasing Data for Analytics to schedule migration of data.

As an existing user you can choose one of the following migration options:

● Initial Load: Migrates all the purchasing records.● Reprocess Records: Migrates the remaining purchasing records which failed to migrate during Initial Load.● Delta Load: Migrates selective purchasing records. Purchasing records can be filtered for purchase order

date, suppliers, and purchase orders.

As a new user, you must use the option Activate Performance Optimization to enable performance optimization. If the app Schedule Migration of Purchasing Data for Analytics is not executed with Activate Performance Optimization option, then performance for analytics apps won’t be optimized.

Related Information

Schedule Migration of Purchasing Data for Analytics


https://help.sap.com/viewer/af9ef57f504840d2b81be8667206d485/1909.000/en-US/b0e3176c132440ca89ad2576feccc617.html


10.15.1 Contingent Workforce Procurement via SAP Fieldglass (22K)

Use


● Enable timely and automated payment while reducing the cost and risk of outstanding payments.● Increase productivity with integrated creation of purchase requisition, purchase order, service entry sheet,

and supplier invoice.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 22K ( Contingent Workforce Procurement via SAP Fieldglass )







http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F22K

10.15.2 Procurement of Materials with Variant Configuration (2XU)

Use


● You can perform variant pricing configuration and use variant pricing based on characteristics in the sales order at the time of creation of purchase orders for the multi-level BOM.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2XU ( Procurement of Materials with Variant Configuration )








http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2XU

10.15.3 Central Purchase Contracts (2ME)

Use


● A search for materials directly from the connected back-end system.● A check for errors and triggering of redistribution of the contract to the back-end systems.● Storage location is maintained based on the plant when defining the distribution criteria (storage location

is copied to the local contract in the back-end system).● Existing central contract can be copied to create a central contract.● Indication that a certain central contract header or item has flexible distribution. In this case, a back-end

system can consume quantities in excess of the specified target quantity in the distributed central contract item, if another back-end system is not consuming the quantity in same contract.

● View of the aggregated quantities in the hub system from goods receipts created for local purchase orders or scheduling agreements that reference the distributed central contract.

● Situation alerts in the hub regarding expiring central contracts and the consumption percentage.● "In Preparation" status can be assigned to a central contract in the hub system. Contracts with this status

cannot be approved or consumed.● A purchasing info record in the connected system can be created or updated at the point of distributing the

central contract.● Multiple central contracts can be updated at the same time using the mass update functionality.● Custom validations for the header, item, item conditions and distribution data of a central contract can be

performed using the Check and Change BAdIs.● Field controls for standard fields in a central contract can now be changed. You can then use the data in a

central contract to dynamically control the field properties at runtime.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2ME ( Central Purchase Contracts )









10.15.4 Request for Price (1XF)

Use


● Situation management: you can create situation type for Low Number of Received Quotations, then take action when a request for quotation (RFQ) approaches the submission deadline with a low number of quotations

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1XF ( Request for Price )





United Arab Emirates, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Brazil, Canada, Switzerland, China, Czech Republic, Germany, Denmark, Spain, Finland, France, Great Britain, Hong Kong, Hungary, Indonesia, Ireland, India, Italy,


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2ME

Japan, South Korea, Luxembourg, Mexico, Malaysia, Netherlands, Norway, New Zealand, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Sweden, Singapore, Thailand, Turkey, Taiwan, United States of America, South Africa


10.15.5 Analytics - Purchase Order Visibility and Procurement Spend (2QU)

Use


● New CDS view "C_PurOrdServiceSpendQuery" covering the Service PO orders spend functionality is now available.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2QU ( Analytics - Purchase Order Visibility and Procurement Spend )







http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1XF

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2QU

10.15.6 Legal Content Management (1XV)

Use


Enhancements in Manage Legal Transactions: With this app, you can use Situation Handling in Legal Content Management. You can define situations to notify the legal counsel when the health synchronization of a legal transaction has failed and should be processed to ensure successful synchronization.

1. You can now link objects from an external system using the Linked Objects feature.2. You can also use the Open Issues hyperlink to view the missing or wrong attributes that affect the health of

the legal transaction.3. Use the Create with Reference functionality to create a copy of an existing legal transaction, by defining a

relationship with the source transaction. Defining a relationship provides traceability between the source and target transactions. You can also copy the required header attributes and facets from the source legal transaction. You can use this reference transaction as a template and define other attributes and facets according to your business needs.

4. You can even copy task group templates defined in the source legal transaction to the target transaction.5. You can view comments added by the task approver in the My Inbox app, under the Task Group in Progress

facet.6. Define relationships between multiple legal relationships. You can view all mandatory documents specified

in the related transactions, in the sub-facet Related Mandatory Documents. If configured, you can view Notifications when the health of related legal transactions is synchronized. You can define renewal and termination of legal transactions in the new facet called Life Cycle. You can use the Copy functionality to create a copy of an existing legal transaction.

7. While adding a new task step, you can select additional recipient assignments and roles to assign workflow tasks to specific teams and users. The teams can be configured using Responsibility Management functions in the Manage Teams and Responsibility app.

8. You can select preconditions and add alternative preconditions to be fulfilled, before a workflow task is triggered.

9. You can now define how to handle exceptions for rejected workflow tasks, by selecting the required action and the action result.

10. While defining the renewal and termination clauses for legal transactions in the Life Cycle facet, you can also select relevant date types in the All Dates sub facet.

Enhancements in Legal Content Overview: With this app, you can use the new cards to analyze the most important tasks to be processed by you. You can also analyze the pending tasks of your legal transaction, average processing time taken by each task, and task completion of different types of tasks.

Categories: With this app, you can now add description to the node category.

Enhancements in Manage Legal Documents: With this app, you can filter all the legal documents using five new filters Main Organization Type, Main Organization, Stamps, Main Entity Type, and Main Entity. You can also assign a Reference Number to the legal document, under the Basic Details section of the Document Information facet in the legal document.

The corresponding fields for the new filters are available under specific groups in the Manage Legal Document application. The groups are Content Details, Basic Details, and Related Details.


Manage Legal Tasks: With this feature, you can manage tasks that are linked to different legal transactions by forwarding tasks to other agents and notifying agents about pending tasks. You can see all the tasks grouped under the legal transaction from where these workflow tasks were triggered. You can filter the tasks based on task types and agent roles, in addition to all the other common filter types.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1XV ( Legal Content Management )


Application Component LCM



10.15.7 Intelligent Approval Workflow (43E)

Use

This scope item analyzes past approval patterns for purchase requisitions and provides recommendations for automated approval.

Technical Details

Type New




http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1XV

Scope Item 43E ( Intelligent Approval Workflow )





10.15.8 Prediction of Delivery Date for Purchase Order Items (3FY)

Use

With this scope item, you can predict the supplier delivery delay to avoid delaying raw material availability or production rescheduling.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3FY ( Prediction of Delivery Date for Purchase Order Items )






http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F43E

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3FY

10.15.9 Central Sourcing (3ZF)

Use

Procurement departments for all company sizes continue to centralize their procurement processes globally or regionally. There is a trend to establish Shared Service Centers where buying is built over a centralized sourcing and procurement system.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3ZF ( Central Sourcing )





10.15.10 Procurement of Services (22Z)

Use


● Enable multi-accounting in Create Supplier Invoice app● Enable attachments in service entry sheet● Display service entry sheet attachments in My Inbox app



http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3ZF

● Import service entry sheets from Excel● Send mail notifications for approved and rejected service entry sheets● Display Supplier Contact Data in Manage Purchase Orders● Monitor log for service entry sheet generation

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 22Z ( Procurement of Services )







10.15.11 Blockchain-Verified RFQ Processing (3DT)

Use

With this scope item, you can strengthen the fairness and efficiency of your business transactions by identifying and preventing fraudulent activities in the tenders and request for quote (RFQ) process.


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F22Z

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3DT ( Blockchain-Verified RFQ Processing )





10.15.12 Supplier Evaluation and Performance Monitoring (SL4)

Use


● You can now schedule a job to determine the operational and overall supplier evaluation score by supplier, material group and timeframe.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item SL4 ( Supplier Evaluation and Performance Monitoring )




http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3DT






10.15.13 Central Purchasing (2XT)

Use


● You can navigate to the backend purchase order document from the Hub system● In the hub system, you can view the availability of notes and attachments in the backend purchase

requisitions and purchase orders● You can view and process service purchase requisitions and purchase orders in the Hub system● You can now approve purchase requisitions in the hub system that were created in the back-end system

and extracted into the hub system● Along with full extraction of purchase orders from back-end systems in the hub system, you can also

extract selectively by specifying parameters like Company Code, Purchasing Organization, Purchasing Group, and creation date

● You can now be notified through situation alerts in the hub about the number of overdue purchase order items, replicated from the back-end system.

● Maintain additional data in a purchase order (from centrally managed purchase requisitions) before it is created in the connected system

● Add a central purchase requisition item to an existing purchase order in the connected system.● You can now import central purchase requisitions that are relevant for processing in the hub system.● You can Create central purchase contracts from purchase requisitions in draft mode.● You can create central RFQs from purchase requisitions.● You can now display central purchase requisitions that are processed in the hub system.● You can Add purchase requisitions to an existing purchase order with an enhanced UI.


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FSL4

● You can defer purchase requisitions, resume deferred purchase requisitions, display deferred purchase requisitions, and close them.

● You can now create purchase orders from central purchase requisitions that are processed in the hub system without replicating the Purchase Requisitions to the connected systems.

● You can now manage rules and schedule jobs to automate various business processes in the hub system● BAdIs for checking and modifying documents like purchase requisitions and purchase orders, in business

process automation.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2XT ( Central Purchasing )





10.15.14 Central Requisitioning (1XI)

Use


● A Hub user can create Local Purchase Requisitions in the Create Purchase Requisition app by changing the local plant and company code in the Default settings for users app.

● You can create Local Purchase Requisitions without maintaining Plant and Company code in the Default settings for users app.

● You can now search for Central Purchase Requisitions and filter on the back-end system while listing your Purchase Requisitions.

● You can now configure workflow and approve Central Purchase Requisitions.



http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2XT

● You can edit or delete a Central Purchase Requisition in the backend. A notification would then be sent to the user in the Hub system informing them of the change in the back-end system.

● Enhanced and improved search for suppliers at the time of creating purchase requisitions.● Centrally monitor all operations related to the Purchase Requisitions hub.● Diagnose, identify, and resolve the issues where they occur.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1XI ( Central Requisitioning )





10.15.15 Purchase Contract (BMD)

Use


● Create Purchase Order Directly from Local Purchase Contract: With this feature, you can create a purchase order directly from a local purchase contract. In the Manage Purchase Contracts app, you can select a valid purchase contract and create a purchase order for all items of the contract. Alternatively, you can open the purchase contract and select the specific items within the contract for which you want to create a purchase order.


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1XI

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BMD ( Purchase Contract )







10.15.16 Image-Based Buying (3UH)

Use

Order items based on an Image

Technical Details

Type New




http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FBMD

Scope Item 3UH ( Image-Based Buying )








http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F3UH

11 Supply Chain

11.1 Inventory

11.1.1 CDS Views for Inventory

For technical reasons, the technical name of the Current Stock Quantity and Value (Consumption) CDS view has changed from C_StockQuantityCurrentValue to C_StockQtyCurrentValue_2. Functionally, nothing has changed. The consumption view C_StockQuantityCurrentValue is deprecated.

You can use the CDS view to obtain information about the current stock quantities and values.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component MM-IM


11.1.2 API for Material Stocks (Replicate)

A new service for material stock is based on the Simple Object Access Protocol (SOAP) and can be consumed in apps and other user interfaces:

● Material Stock - ReplicateThis asynchronous outbound service enables you to replicate material stock quantity information for external systems such as SAP Hybris Commerce.


Supply Chain

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BMC (Core Inventory Management)

Application Component MM-IM-GF


Additional Details

This interface is available on the SAP API Business Hub (https://api.sap.com )


Note that to consume the SOAP service, you have to create a communication arrangement for scenario SAP_COM_0447 - Material Stock Quantity Replication Integration.

11.1.3 Output Management for Inventory

With this feature, you can define output types for further standard fields of a material document. You can control which standard fields are relevant for output management and you can also choose when to issue their output.

Technical Details

Type New





What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Supply Chain P U B L I C 621

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Fapi.sap.com

11.1.4 Extensibility for Adobe Output Forms of Material Documents

With this feature, you can extend the Adobe® output forms of various material documents according to your business needs.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component MM-IM-GF-PRNT (IM Output Determination)


Additional Details

You can extend the Adobe® output forms of the following material documents according to your business needs:

● Goods Issue Individual Slip● Goods Issue Individual Slip with Inspection Text● Goods Receipt Label● Goods Issue SC Individual Slip● Goods Issue SC Individual Slip with Inspection Text● Goods Issue Collective Slip● Goods Receipt for PO Individual Slip● Goods Receipt for PO Individual Slip with Inspection Text● Goods Receipt for PO Collective Slip● Goods Receipt for PO Email Message● Goods Receipt for Order Individual Slip● Goods Receipt for Order Individual Slip with Inspection Text● Goods Movement Transfer Posting Individual Slip with Inspection Text● Goods Movement Transfer Posting - Collective Slip● Subcontracting Transfer Posting Collective Slip● Physical Inventory Count List


Supply Chain

Related Links

● Extensibility for Adobe Output Forms of Material Documents

11.1.5 Goods Movement

11.1.5.1 Post Goods Receipt for Purchase Order

With this feature, you can post the receipt of goods with reference to the purchase order with which you ordered the goods. If a material is delivered for a purchase order, it is important for all the departments involved that the goods receipt entry in the system references this purchase order.

In the Post Goods Receipt for Purchase Order app, you can now do the following:

● You can now display detailed information about the level on which a material is stored: plant, storage location, and storage bin. Note that the availability of these fields depends on your configuration settings.

● You can now use an optimized visual control for marked or unmarked line items to improve handling the selection of the desired material document items.

● You can use optimized, predefined output forms in the output management, such as collection slips. You can copy and adapt these forms for your needs.

● You can now define printing presettings (Default Values) in the Application Settings in this app. This allows you to specify if the app should print in the posting process and if so, what kind of documents (for example, individual slip with inspection text).

● You can now use optimized settings for data determination to support time-zone-specific needs for the posting date.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component MM-FIO-IM-SGM


Related Links

● Post Goods Receipt for Purchase Order


https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/8cb87e93017d450d851ec6fc8bb94338.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/9ddf815494758c4ce10000000a4450e5.html

11.1.5.2 Post Goods Receipt for Production Order

With this feature, you can post the receipt of goods with reference to a production order. If a material is delivered for a production order, it is important for all the departments involved that the goods receipt entry in the system references this production order.

In the Post Goods Receipt for Production Order app, you can now do the following:





Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BJE (Make-to-Order Production - Finished Goods Sales and Final Assembly)



Related Links

● Post Goods Receipt for Production Order

11.1.5.3 Post Goods Receipt for Inbound Delivery

With this feature, you can post the receipt of goods with reference to the inbound delivery. The app proposes a selection of inbound deliveries and advanced shipping notifications from the supplier that can be posted.

In the Post Goods Receipt for Inbound Delivery app, you can now do the following:



Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/819c7ae2d9754969a865280f0e9ec5ca.html




Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BME (Stock Transfer with Delivery)

Application Component MM-FIO-IM


Related Links

● Post Goods Receipt for Inbound Delivery

11.1.5.4 Post Goods Receipt without Reference

With this feature, you can post the receipt of goods without reference to an order.

This situation occurs when you want to handle the procurement process of consignment stocks. The cause lies in the special ordering principle of consignment stocks, in which the supplier has already contractually agreed in advance to deliver materials in a specific quantity and time to the customer depending on demand and without an explicit order.

In the Post Goods Receipt without Reference app, you can now do the following:





https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/4c2ebb48c8044502acf588e14783bbc8.html

Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Links

● Post Goods Receipt without Reference

11.1.5.5 Manage Stock

With this feature, you can perform stock changes.

In the Manage Stock app, you can now do the following:

● You can use an optimized selection option to select a cost center for stock transfer postings (scrapping).A combo box allows you to select an item from a predefined list of available cost centers. There is an editable input field for filtering the list, and a dropdown menu with a list of the available options.

● Adjustment of documentation: The app supports the initial entry of stock balances. Alternatively, based on your authorization, you can use the Post Goods Movement app for the initial entry of stock balances (movement type 561). If you do so, you can also consider the special stock indicators E (project stock) and W (customer consignment stock).

● You can use an optimized fuzzy search that includes the search for batches.● The application settings option is enhanced with two batch selection criteria. You can now decide if you

want to exclude batches from the search result that have a deletion flag and/or that have a shelf life expiration date that has been exceeded.

● To prepare the posting (initial entry or scrapping), you can provide additional free texts for an individual material document header and an individual material document item.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/27e934093191466789640551e9d4686b.html




Related Links

● Manage Stock

11.1.5.6 Transfer Stock – In Plant

With this feature, you can make transfer postings within a plant.

In the Transfer Stock – In Plant app, you can now do the following:

● You can use the print function for a stock transfer of storage location to storage location in one step (that is, movement type 311: Valuated Unrestricted-Use Stock to Valuated Unrestricted-Use Stock).

● You can use an optimized fuzzy search that includes the search for batches.● The application settings option is enhanced with two batch selection criteria. You can now decide if you

want to exclude batches from the search result that have a deletion flag and/or that have a shelf life expiration date that has been exceeded.

● To prepare the transfer posting, you can provide additional free texts for an individual material document header and an individual material document item.

Technical Details

Type Changed






https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/31be7e548af58e4ce10000000a4450e5.html

Related Links

● Transfer Stock – In Plant

11.1.5.7 Transfer Stock – Cross Plant

With this feature you can make the transfer postings from one plant (issuing plant) to another plant (receiving plant). The app supports you in finding the transfer postings that are allowed and to personalize the control presettings of storage locations and visible columns.

In the Transfer Stock – Cross Plant app, you can now do the following:

● You can use an optimized fuzzy search that includes the search for batches.● When using batches, the app can sort according to the same batches in different plants in the results table.● The application settings option is enhanced with two batch selection criteria. You can now decide if you

want to filter for batches with a deletion flag and/or batches with a shelf life expiration date that has not been exceeded.

● To prepare the transfer posting, you can provide additional free texts for an individual material document header and an individual material document item.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1P7 (Cross-Plant Transfer Posting)



Related Links

● Transfer Stock – Cross Plant


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/724f8054884f415be10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/6f35e156ff2cf777e10000000a4450e5.html

11.1.6 Inventory Analytics and Control

11.1.6.1 Material Documents Overview

With this feature you can display a list of material document items and display the material document details of a selected material document item. In addition, you can reverse a material document.

In the Material Documents Overview app, you can now do the following:

● You can extend the Material Documents Overview app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.

● You can use optimized, predefined output forms in the output management, such as collection slips. You can copy and adapt these forms for your needs.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Links

● Material Documents Overview● App Extensibility: Material Documents Overview

11.1.6.2 Stock - Single Material

With this feature you can get an overview of your material stock. You can review your stock by the plants and storage locations for which you are responsible. The app can display the stock information as a table or a diagram.

The following new features are now available with the Stock – Single Material app:

● The search option is extended for batches.● The table header now keeps its position even when you are scrolling through an extensive result table.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/ae0d1256f22c792de10000000a44538d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/b955545b28214c59bfed717c6dfd693e.html

Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Links

● Stock - Single Material

11.1.6.3 Stock - Multiple Materials

With this feature, you can get an overview of your material stocks. You can review your stock by the plants and storage locations for which you are responsible:

● Display a stock overview of one or multiple materials.● Display the value of your stocks.● Display the stock information as a table.

In the Stock – Multiple Materials app, you can now do the following:

● You can now calculate the stock values based on the stock quantity of the selected reporting date multiplied by the current material price. This means that the app always calculates using the current material price, irrespective of the reporting date you have selected. This calculation method for the stock value is common to all Fiori apps in Inventory Management.

● You can use optimized authorization handling to turn off the display of the values in the stock value fields.In other words, you can hide this type of financial information that should only be available to a specific group of users.

● You can use enhanced filter options for a refined search with the additional fields Batch, Shelf Life Expiration Date, and Production Date.

● You can use optimized, predefined filter grouping for an easier filter selection. The filter criteria with reference to the display currency have been renamed and grouped in the areas Stock Value in Display Currency and Current Stock Value in Display Currency.

● You can extend the Stock – Multiple Materials app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/8917e2576941bc12e10000000a4450e5.html

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1IU (Customer Consignment)



Related Links

● Stock - Multiple Materials● App Extensibility: Stock - Multiple Materials

11.1.6.4 Overdue Materials - Stock in Transit

With this feature, you can get an overview of the overdue materials for which a stock transport order has been created. You can identify these materials to complete the stock transfer process or investigate potential problems.

In the Overdue Materials - Stock in Transit app, you can now do the following:

● You can use optimized authorization handling to turn off the display of the values in the stock value fields. In other words, you can hide this type of financial information that should only be available to a specific group of users.

● You can extend the Overdue Materials - Stock in Transit app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.

● You can use the optimized tooltip in the bullet micro chart.● You can use the new variant Group by Purchase Order / Purchase Order Item to optimize the result table.● You can use a new situation template to create your own ready-to-use situation for overdue stock transport

order items using the Manage Situation Types app.With the predelivered situation template MAN_MATLOVERDUESITSITN you can immediately inform responsible team members about delayed stock transport order items. These team members can monitor overdue stock transport order items according to the conditions defined in the situation and can take further action if necessary. These conditions can be changed. The predelivered conditions are just proposals.

● You can now access a detailed screen showing more information about the stock transport order item. A timeline now visualizes the sequence of posted documents. In the timeline section it is also possible to filter only selected documents which excludes canceled and referenced documents. Referenced documents refer to other line items in the result table for the same selected stock transport order item. Open situations can be resolved in the situations section on the detailed screen. This section is only visible if this stock transport item triggered a situation.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/177e7b572f5f6d2be10000000a441470.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/789da7bfb8bb4dacabfcb59d6363a6e6.html

● A new Complete Delivery button has been introduced for open stock transport order items where the total goods issue quantity equals the total goods receipt quantity.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BMH (Stock Transfer without Delivery)



Additional Details

You have to create your own team with team type SINVOVDUEM using the Manage Teams and Responsibilities app. You can add members of your organization to the created team and assign member functions that are also predelivered such as warehouse clerk or inventory manager.

NoteThese predelivered member functions are different to the existing business roles Warehouse Clerk, Plant Manager, or Inventory Manager. The member function allows a more granular assignment for special team members. For example, it is possible to use one team for different situation types.

If you want to differentiate between different teams, you can do so with the responsibility definitions for Issuing Plant, Receiving Plant and Receiving MRP Controller. Only notifications about stock transport order items that fulfill the responsibility definitions of a team will be available for this team.

Related Links

● Overdue Materials - Stock in Transit● Situation Template: Stock Transport Order Overdue● Situation Handling → klären!!!● App Extensibility: Overdue Materials - Stock in Transit


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/8917e2576941bc12e10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/9169d427cba44c8e8bd9490d005d2b9f.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/804db70e919f4c40a459c7835ee06643.html

11.1.6.5 Overdue Materials - GR Blocked Stock

With this feature, you can get an overview of the overdue materials that were already posted into the non-valuated goods receipt blocked stock with movement type GR into blocked stock (103) or GR from blocked rev. (106). You can identify these materials to complete the goods receipt process or investigate potential problems.

In the Overdue Materials – GR Blocked Stock app, you can now do the following:


● You can extend the Overdue Materials - GR Blocked Stock app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Links

● Overdue Materials - GR Blocked Stock● App Extensibility: Overdue Materials - GR Blocked Stock

11.1.6.6 Slow or Non-Moving Materials

With this feature, you can monitor and make time-dependent investigations of the slow or non-moving materials in your stock. Based on these results you can react immediately with follow-on activities such as scrapping or stock transfers.

In the Slow or Non-Moving Materials app, you can now do the following:

● You can now train two new predictive models to predict the Slow-Moving Indicator for a material for a selected time period. With this information, you get an impression if a material may deviate from the previous consumption and stock values (displayed with the Predicated Slow-Moving Indicator).


https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/819c7ae2d9754969a865280f0e9ec5ca.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/363fe585bcb14a9785c0fd8e29894491.html


● You can use a standard structured filter bar where the priority of the filter criteria has changed. You can still adapt the filter bar by customizing various filter criteria for your individual needs.


● You can extend the Slow or Non-Moving Materials app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.

● You can now use an optimized structured filter bar with new and changed filter criteria. This supports you in determining more easily and more accurately the materials with their different inventory turnovers according to your business needs:○ The filter Days w/o Consumption has been renamed Days with Low Consumption and its function has

been extended. When entering the number of days, you define the time period for the analysis.○ You can now determine the use of a material in a bill of material (BOM) as a filter option (Use in BOMs).○ You can now determine slow-moving materials based on the consumption to stock ratio (Slow-Moving

Indicator). The Slow-Moving Indicator represents the percentage of consumption quantity per year with respect to the total stock quantity on the reference date. Setting the filter with a value of 0, you can search directly for non-moving materials. This corresponds to the behavior of the app in the last release.

○ The result table has been adapted according to the filter criteria.● The Inventory Consumption Group filter is new. This filter considers only those material documents as a

consumption-relevant goods movement when the related movement types are defined and marked as a consumption. This can be done using the corresponding SSC UI Define Inventory Consumption Groups.

● The Slow or Non-Moving Material Details page (object page) is new. You can now obtain more information here on material / plant level for the selected material. The Slow-Moving Indicator over Time graphic visualizes the evolution of the monthly slow-moving indicator for the past 12 months.

Technical Details

Type Changed






Supply Chain

Related Links

● Slow or Non-Moving Materials● App Extensibility: Slow or Non-Moving Materials● Extensibility

11.1.6.7 Inventory Analysis Overview

With this feature, you can monitor the most important information and tasks relevant for you as an inventory analyst right now. The information is displayed on a set of actionable cards:

● Stock Value Increase despite Consumption● More than 100 Days without Consumption● Monitor Batches by Longest Time in Storage● Monitor Batches by Earliest Expiration Date

You can therefore focus on the most important tasks, enabling faster decisions and immediate action.

For example, you can now do the following:

● You can use the list card More than 100 Days without Consumption with a chart visualization. The chart displays values and the number of materials grouped in intervals of 50 days for days without consumption.

● You can use the two list cards Monitor Batches by Longest Time in Storage and Monitor Batches by Earliest Expiration Date with an optimized navigation feature:○ You can navigate from the list card header to the Stock Multiple Materials app with the corresponding

parameters.○ You can navigate from the item to the Stock Multiple Materials app, which displays the selected

material in more detail.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BGG (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Inventory and Warehouse Management)

Application Component MM-FIO-IM-OVP



https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/276b1b645ec64e808e430b363d6efd6b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/6a05a6480d4c44d1adc6dcd18ab92ffa.html


Related Links

● Inventory Analysis Overview

11.1.6.8 Dead Stock Analysis

With this feature, you can monitor and make time-dependent investigations of your dead stock. The Dead Stock Analysis app supports you in your daily work, for example, as an inventory manager, to achieve maximum inventory accuracy and subsequently to optimize the inventory situation in your stock.

For example, you can now do the following:



● You can extend the Dead Stock Analysis app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Links

● Dead Stock Analysis● App Extensibility: Dead Stock Analysis


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/2deffbe9d21f4b5fb1f998e9834019d1.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/c4b9c2547a464c538b92509f43c34453.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/15bf6244a1674e85bb40d4e8dcbac1b1.html

11.1.6.9 Inventory KPI Analysis

With this feature, you can monitor inventory key performance indicators (KPIs) effectively to ensure forecast and inventory accuracy in a timely manner and visualize this in a meaningful way. This app supports you, for example, as an inventory analyst in your daily work. You can identify critical KPIs to monitor the inventory flow or investigate potential problems.

You can check, for example, stock values as a time series for comparable periods in order to identify potential outliers that could affect the fixed capital situation. Furthermore, you can filter for these outliers and display only these particular stocks. Outliers can be identified as major changes at stock identifier level of a certain KPI in compared time periods. The app offers various KPI filters that display potential outliers in a frequency distribution chart.

You can extend the Inventory KPI Analysis app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Links

● Inventory KPI Analysis

11.1.6.10 Goods Movement Analysis

With this feature, you can analyze the goods movements in your company.

In the Goods Movement Analysis app, you can now do the following:

● You can extend the Goods Movement Analysis app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/e130f15007c94eae9d65f8af9d541d00.html

Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Links

● Goods Movement Analysis● App Extensibility: Goods Movement Analysis

11.1.7 Physical Inventory

11.1.7.1 Create Physical Inventory Documents

With this feature, you can display lists of materials and choose to create physical inventory documents for selected materials or groups of materials. These documents are used as the basis for planning and performing a physical inventory, for recording count data, and for posting any differences revealed by the count. The app helps you find and select materials due to be counted, and you can create physical inventory documents for the materials directly from the detail list.

In the Create Physical Inventory Documents app, you can now do the following:

● You can extend the Create Physical Inventory Documents app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BML (Physical Inventory - Inventory Count and Adjustment)



Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/58bd1c58a0699144e10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/37262208b7294da294ec4f26e6a11a47.html


Related Links

● Create Physical Inventory Documents● App Extensibility: Create Physical Inventory Documents

11.1.7.2 Physical Inventory Analysis

With this feature, you can analyze physical inventory in your company to identify opportunities for process improvement.

In the Physical Inventory Analysis app, you can now do the following:

● You can extend the Physical Inventory Analysis app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Links

● Physical Inventory Analysis● App Extensibility: Physical Inventory Analysis

11.1.7.3 Inventory Turnover Analysis

With this feature, you can analyze the turnover of materials in a selected plant for which you are responsible.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/41fb067a30f94279ab5f5f299f02f615.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/4bea72c5faff44909674fbd6399332f6.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/eac456f95b65469d8943bd5b8ce3d021.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/28311cc80d954a4e820521e06c6227de.html

The app provides you with detailed information about materials that could have turnover problems according to your turnover definition, depending on the time period you select.

In the Inventory Turnover Analysis app, you can now do the following:


Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Links

● Inventory Turnover Analysis

11.1.7.4 Physical Inventory Document Overview

With this feature, you can use different kinds of physical inventory strategies, such as annual counts, continuous counts, and cycle counts. You can use specific criteria such as storage location, materials, or physical inventory document numbers. The app provides an overview of a physical inventory document and all its related detailed information.

In the Physical Inventory Document Overview app, you can now do the following:

● You can extend the Physical Inventory Document Overview app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/457c7b572f5f6d2be10000000a441470.html

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component MM-FIO-IM-PI


Related Links

● Physical Inventory Document Overview● App Extensibility: Physical Inventory Document Overview

11.1.7.5 Performance Improvements for Physical Inventory Process

The physical inventory process has been improved in performance and locking concept in the processing of large amounts of data. This feature allows an optimized performance of calculation and posting processes and ensures consistency in the handling across all physical inventory steps.

The optimization of material document processing doesn’t affect the posting of inventory differences.

The improvements to the optimization of the physical inventory process are separated into several parts:

● Optimization of database accesses to material data● Separation of material master data and material stock quantity● Calculation of stock quantity only if the stock quantity is required for the current inventory process● Locking behavior of materials when posting the inventory difference is changed from exclusive locking on

plant level to fine granular (situation-based) locking

The Create Physical Inventory Documents app benefits from the improvements.

Technical Details

Type New



https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/24177b5796d40322e10000000a44147b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/405796b4a0e74d81acd3fc2d583eec26.html




Related Links

● Performance Improvements for Physical Inventory Process

11.1.8 Batch Management

11.1.8.1 Value Help Authorizations in Batch Management


Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BLF (Batch Management)

Application Component LO-BM


Additional Details

Please see SAP Note 2803691 for a list of the affected transactions in Batch Management.




Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91b21005dded4984bcccf4a69ae1300c/1909.000/en-US/8cb87e93017d450d851ec6fc8bb94338.html



Related Information


11.2 Warehouse Management

11.2.1 Pack Warehouse Stock

With this app, you can quickly pack warehouse stock from one handling unit (HU) or storage bin into another HU. You can use this app for the purpose of internal movements for your warehouse.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3BW (Warehouse Internal Repacking)

Application Component SCM-EWM-FIO


Related Information

Pack Warehouse Stock

11.2.2 Process Warehouse Tasks - Picking

With this app, you can process the warehouse tasks destined for picking. In the overview screen, you can view all relevant information about the pick warehouse tasks in your warehouse. You can directly choose one or multiple warehouse tasks for confirmation or cancellation. You can print a pick list with this app. You can also view the details of a warehouse task or handle an exception.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/94228258297c4ed69d33f3fb7f5355aa.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3BS (Warehouse Outbound Processing)



Related Information

Process Warehouse Tasks - Picking

11.2.3 Process Warehouse Tasks - Putaway

With this app, you can process the warehouse tasks destined for putaway. In the overview screen, you can view all relevant information about the putaway warehouse tasks in your warehouse. You can directly choose one or multiple warehouse tasks for confirmation or cancellation. You can print a putaway list with this app. You can also view the details of a warehouse task or handle an exception.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3BR (Warehouse Inbound Processing)



Related Information

Process Warehouse Tasks - Putaway


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/5c2fdcb218d04bac85a64169b05bb357.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/c0d239ddaca44d13adc44e5f539b5e7d.html

11.2.4 Warehouse KPIs - Operations

With this app, you can view an overview of key performance indicators (KPIs) relevant to your warehouse operations, for example, the total number of open warehouse tasks to be processed on the current date. On the overview page, you can see different types of KPI cards. As a warehouse clerk, these cards help you to better manage and process your daily tasks.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Warehouse KPIs - Operations

11.2.5 CDS Views for Warehouse Orders, Warehouse Tasks, and Outbound Delivery Orders

You can use the following new CDS views:

● Warehouse Order Query (C_EWM_WarehouseOrderQ)● Warehouse Task Query (C_EWM_WarehouseTaskQ)● Outbound Delivery Order Query Without Mandatory Parameters (C_EWM_OutbDelivOrdNoParamQ)

Technical Details

Type New



https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/9576ccb7c6b44c16afc20c3df7a28101.html


Application Component SCM-EWM-WOP, SCM-EWM-DLP


Related Information

Outbound Delivery Order Query Without Mandatory ParametersWarehouse Order QueryWarehouse Task Query

11.2.6 Warehouse Billing in Decentralized EWM

In decentralized Extended Warehouse Management (EWM), you can record the quantity of warehouse services used for the services agreed upon in an agreement in Transportation Management (TM). You can subsequently send this quantity information back to the TM for charge calculation and settlement based on the charges you have agreed to in the agreement. This enables you to perform the following:

● Sell warehouse services to customers and bill the customers periodically based on the services used for a time period.

● Purchase warehouse services from external service providers and periodically pay the service provider based on the warehouse services used for a time period.

The features are the same for Warehouse Billing both in decentralized EWM and EWM embedded in SAP S/4HANA.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component SCM-EWM-WB



Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/8bc167c52c9a427283f0167ca29f5b64.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/58820941599542d5aaf59c64e0fc8558.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/f38d1ed376204875bef5c01e6ce2dc3d.html

Related Information

Warehouse Billing

11.2.7 Enhancements to Physical Inventory

The following enhancements for physical inventory (PI) are available:

● When performing a PI recount on a radio frequency (RF) device, you can avoid the recount being assigned to the original counter.

● When performing a PI recount on a RF device or a desktop, you can define a queue for recounting.● When you find a new handling unit (HU) in a PI count on a RF device or a desktop, you can enter the

packaging material and HU type.In the Count Physical Inventory – Paper-Driven Counting app, you can enter an HU type for a newly found HU in a PI count.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component SCM-EWM-PI



These enhancements affect the Customizing activities in the following ways:

● A Queue for Recounting field was added to the Customizing activity Define Queues for Physical InventoryYou can find this activity in the Customizing for Define Queues for Physical Inventory in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Cross-Process Settings Resource Management Define Queues .

● A checkbox Different User to Recount Physical Inventory Documents was added to the Customizing activity Specify Physical-Inventory-Specific Settings in the WarehouseYou can find this activity in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Internal Warehouse Processes Physical Inventory Warehouse-Number-Specific Settings .


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/5ad63855b04c6a38e10000000a174cb4.html

Related Information

Processing of Physical Inventory Documents

11.2.8 Distribution of Packing Instructions as Packaging Specifications

If you want to use packing instructions from an enterprise management system, for example, SAP S/4HANA or SAP ERP as packaging specifications in decentralized Extended Warehouse Management (EWM) based on SAP S/4HANA, you can distribute these instructions to the decentralized EWM system. When warehouse workers perform packing in EWM, they can refer to the proposals provided, such as the materials and packaging materials to be packed in a handling unit.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component SCM-BAS-PAK-PS


Related Information

Distribution of Packing Instructions as Packaging Specifications

11.2.9 Enhancements to the Warehouse Management Monitor

Use

With this feature, you can access more information about your warehouse directly in the warehouse management monitor, from inspection lot information to change documents, and in new ways, such as using the kanban container ID.


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/4cb4e7d94c1f1921e10000000a15822b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/b2477860ea40462b97a9093f95f1197c.html

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component SCM-EWM-MON


Additional Details

● You can access the Physical Stock node under Documents Inspection to display the physical stock for inspection lots with no usage decision yet.You can also display the inspection lot from the Inspection node.

● You can display logged changes made to storage bins under Stock and Bin Storage Bin .● You can display logged changes made to fixed bin assignments under the following nodes:

○ Stock and Bin Storage Bin Fixed Bin Assignment

○ Stock and Bin Fixed Bin Overview Fixed Bins Fixed Bin Assignment

○ Product Master Data Warehouse Attribute● You can search for warehouse tasks via the kanban container ID in the warehouse management monitor

under Documents Warehouse Tasks . You can also find the kanban container ID in the detailed fields of the warehouse task.

● You can search for warehouse tasks via the material document under Documents Warehouse Taskswhen the tasks are associated with the receipt of finished products in repetitive manufacturing or with the goods issue of consumed components. You can also find the material document, the material document item, and the material document year in the warehouse tasks.


You can activate change documents for storage bins and for fixed bin assignments in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Master Data Storage Bins Activate Change Documents .

Related Information

Warehouse Management Monitor


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/51cdcb53ad377114e10000000a174cb4.html

11.2.10 Warehouse Kanban Supply into Production

Use

A new replenishment strategy is available for stock transfer via Kanban. With this replenishment strategy, warehouse tasks to replenish a kanban container are automatically created when you set the kanban container to empty. You can confirm the warehouse tasks either in a kanban app or in Extended Warehouse Management.

This feature is only available for Extended Warehouse Management embedded in SAP S/4HANA.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component SCM-EWM-WOP-REP


Related Information

Set Kanban Container StatusManual Confirmation of Warehouse TasksProcess Warehouse Tasks - Picking

11.2.11 Change Documents for Control Cycle in Warehouse Management

Use

With this feature, change documents are written when you create, change, or delete a control cycle in Extended Warehouse Management.


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/49d0972a760b4646918ce9fddb034d64/1909.000/en-US/bfd0f863bb1c4598a262a4fa10b46765.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/fdf6ba4109584a96944fbdb849cbb41c.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/5c2fdcb218d04bac85a64169b05bb357.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component SCM-EWM-MD


Additional Details

The change documents can be displayed from the following apps:

● Assign Bin to PSA – Warehouse

Related Information

Assignment of Storage Bins to a Production Supply Area (PSA)

11.2.12 Change Documents for Fixed Storage Bin Assignments

Use

With this feature, you can display change documents that are written when fixed storage bin assignments are created, changed, or deleted.

Technical Details

Type New




https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/b1fa39091ff843ec9520553932a1357f.html



Additional Details

The change documents can be displayed from the following apps:

● Assign Fixed Bins● Display Storage Bins● Change Storage Bins● Warehouse Monitor, nodes Stock and Bin > Storage Bin● Warehouse Monitor, nodes Stock and Bin > Storage Bin > Fixed Bin Assignment● Warehouse Monitor, nodes Stock and Bin > Fixed Bin Overview > Fixed Bins > Fixed Bin Assignment● Warehouse Monitor, nodes Product Master Data > Warehouse Attribute

Related Information

Warehouse Management Monitor

11.2.13 Automatic Replication of Production Supply Area / Control Cycle Harmonization

Use

When a production supply area (PSA) that is relevant to Extended Warehouse Management is created in Production Planning, or if the production supply area is used in a control cycle supplied by Extended Warehouse Management, it’s automatically replicated to Extended Warehouse Management.

Now when you maintain a control cycle in Production Planning, you can navigate directly to the dependent control cycle in Extended Warehouse Management to maintain it as well.

This feature is only available for Extended Warehouse Management embedded in SAP S/4HANA.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/51cdcb53ad377114e10000000a174cb4.html





11.2.14 Stock Consolidation: Maximize Number of Free Bins

Use

With this feature, you maximize the number of free storage bins and improve the utilization of occupied bins.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component SCM-EWM-WOP


Additional Details

This new strategy for stock consolidation proposes ad hoc warehouse tasks to move stock items from storage bins with a lower level of usage to bins with a higher level of usage.

The usage level can be measured by weight, volume, capacity, or number of handling units.

This strategy considers storage type settings. It works with bulk storage and regular storage types.

Related Information

Consolidation to Free up Storage Bins / Bulk Bin Consolidation


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/8e0242139a21491a8e272d06364eaeb9.html

11.2.15 Stock Consolidation: New Selection Criteria

Use

With this feature, you can select stock to be consolidated on a more fine-grained basis.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component SCM-EWM-WOP-AHM


Additional Details

New selection criteria are available in the Consolidate Stock app:

● Storage Bin Type● Aisle

Using these criteria, you can narrow the search for stock to be consolidated. For example, you can limit the search to storage bins that can fit cartons, or select dedicated aisles to limit travel distance when consolidating stock.

Related Information

Consolidation to Reach Full Quantities

11.2.16 Stock Consolidation: Batch Consolidation

Use

Stock consolidation allows you to form full stock-keeping quantities from partial quantities of stock. With this feature, you can consolidate stock of the same material but with different batch numbers.


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/9b973a9a4cec44e89287552f54249628.html

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component SCM-EWM-WOP-AHM


Additional Details

You select the batch criteria that you want to match, and then you get proposals of partial stock to consolidate.

You can choose from the following batch criteria:

● Country of Origin● Best-Before Date (BBD) or Shelf Life Expiration Date (SLED)● Vendor Batch● Manufacturing Date● Next Inspection Date● Status of Batch

You can use the fields in the batch master or, if you define your own batch classification, you can include the standard SAP characteristics in your custom class.

Related Information

Consolidation of Different Batches

11.2.17 Migration Objects for Scenario 'SAP EWM to Decentralized EWM'

Use

With this feature, you can migrate data for a set of migration objects that belong to the SAP EWM to decentralized EWM scenario that is now available in the SAP S/4HANA migration cockpit.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/51883e7f134b4f8d9288e3f0735b20b5.html

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

The following migration objects are available:

● Warehouse Stock● Warehouse Product● Storage Bin● Storage Bin Sorting● Fixed Bin Assignment

Related Information

Transferring Data Directly from an SAP System

11.2.18 EWM-QM Integration Without Inspection Rules

With this feature you can integrate quality management in Extended Warehouse Management (EWM) without inspection rules for the warehouse-dependent inspection object types 4 and 5.

NoteQM without inspection rules is only possible in EWM embedded in SAP S/4HANA . It does not apply to decentralized EWM based on SAP S/4HANA.

For the integration of quality management you can define that the inspection setup data of the Quality Management view in the material master is used. An inspection rule is no longer required. In EWM the inspection types 01 (Goods receipt insp. for purchase order), 04 (Goods receipt inspection from production), 08 (Stock transfer inspection) and 09 (Recurring inspection of batches) are supported.

● When using process Acceptance Sampling you specify the inspection type in the quality info record for the material.


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/29193bf0ebdd4583930b2176cb993268/1909.000/en-US/7a62b59726ce42e7a10770b06940f934.html

● When using process Presampling in Production you specify the inspection type in the Quality Management view of the material master.

If you want to change your settings from inspections with inspection rules to inspections without inspection rules, see SAP Note 2787302 .

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item



Additional Details

You can use quality inspection without inspection rule in the following processes:

● Acceptance sampling● Inspections after goods receipt● Presampling in production● Stock inspections● Recurring inspections


You define that you use QM without inspection rules in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Cross-Process Settings Quality Management Basics and Integration Define and Activate Warehouse-Dependent IOTs :

● For Origin of the Inspection Lot Setup, you specify that no inspection rule is used and that the inspection lot setup originates from the Quality Management tab of the material master.

● Under Insp. Planning w/o Rules, you specify the inspection settings and the quality inspection process.

Related Information

Configure Quality Management Without Inspection Rules



https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/61e7cbe2aee54f1ca0e63533f2402e49.html

11.2.19 Enhancement to the Counting of Inbound Deliveries (IOT 2)

With this feature, the system can determine the destination bin when putting away unpacked stock during the counting of received goods using inspection object type (IOT) Counting Inbound Delivery (IOT 2). To enable this, you assign an external step to the inspection rule you use for IOT 2. Note that to use this feature, you must use decentralized Extended Warehouse Management based on SAP S/4HANA.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Information

Counting

11.2.20 Scenario-Based Authorization Check for Enhanced Warehouse Number Checks and Activity Checks

Use

With this feature, you can restrict user roles more precisely based on warehouse numbers, warehouse products, and authorization activities. For example, you can restrict a user role to display-only access to warehouse product maintenance, or you can restrict write access to only one warehouse number.

In addition, the scenario affects authorization checks for certain warehouse processes.


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/46c453aa323f416a819899d55126bab2.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component SCM-EWM-AUT


Additional Details

By default, the scenario isn’t activated. If you want to use the enhanced authorization restriction options, activate the scenario definition /SCWM/WHSE_ACTIVITY_CHECK.

NoteYou must update user authorizations for the Manage Product Master Data app with the new authorization object /SCWM/PROD, even if you don’t activate the scenario. The authorizations for this object are delivered active.

Prerequisites

Before you activate the scenario, enhance your user roles for the following processes:

● For product maintenance, enhance user roles with authorizations for the new authorization object /SCWM/PROD.

● For warehouse order processing and warehouse task processing, enhance user roles with the activity value 02 for the authorization object /SCWM/TOHA. For warehouse orders with physical inventory documents, enhance the roles with the activity value 02 for the authorization object /SCWM/PIPR.

● For difference analyzer processing, enhance user roles with authorizations for the authorization object /SCWM/PIPR.


Refer to SAP Note 2792677 and its referenced documents to activate the scenario definition.



See Also

For more information about the upgrade process, see the Upgrade Guide for SAP S/4HANA at http://help.sap.com/S4HANA_OP_1909.

11.2.21 Authorization Object for Warehouse Requests with Warehouse Number

Use

With this feature, you can implement an authorization check for warehouse requests using a warehouse number. This authorization object is the successor to authorization object /SCWM/DLV. The ability to perform a check based on the warehouse number brings the authorization object into alignment with most of the other authorization objects in Extended Warehouse Management.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component SCM-EWM-AUT


Additional Details

If you replace /SCWM/DLV with /SCWM/DLV2, you see that most of the authorization fields are the same. The main differences are in how the warehouse number and the organizational unit are used:

● In the original authorization object /SCWM/DLV, the fields /SCWM/ORG (location organizational unit) and /SCWM/ROLE (partner role organizational unit) are used to check for the warehouse (WH), the shipping office (SO), and the receiving office (RO).

● In the new authorization object /SCWM/DLV2, the field /SCWM/ROLE is no longer necessary. The fields /SCWM/LGNU (warehouse number) and /SCWM/ORG are used:○ You can enter a warehouse number in field /SCWM/LGNU.○ You can enter an organizational unit in field /SCWM/ORG, but this is now optional. The system will

automatically use the organizational unit in the warehouse request header. For inbound deliveries, the


Supply Chain

http://help.sap.com/S4HANA_OP_1909

http://help.sap.com/S4HANA_OP_1909

organizational unit is the receiving office (role RO), and for outbound delivery orders, this is the shipping office (role SO).


With the original authorization object /SCWM/DLV, it is not possible to perform a check based on a warehouse number directly. Instead, the warehouse number is checked indirectly by checking the location of the warehouse. Most of the other authorization objects in Extended Warehouse Management check the warehouse number directly, though. For this reason, a new authorization object, /SCWM/DLV2, was created to allow the warehouse number to be checked directly.

The new authorization object /SCWM/DLV2 is the successor to the authorization object /SCWM/DLV and can be used instead of it. Only one of the two authorization objects should be used in an authorization profile.

If you are implementing a new project, we recommend that you use only /SCWM/DLV2.

If you are implementing an upgrade project, it is possible to continue to use /SCWM/DLV, for compatibility reasons. There is a fallback logic that allows both authorization objects to be used.

Related Information

Warehouse Request

11.2.22 Distribution Equipment

This feature enables you to supply goods to, for example, production supply areas (PSAs). The goods are picked into handling unit (HU) compartments, then loaded onto the distribution equipment. After picking and loading, the warehouse worker moves the goods on the distribution equipment to their respective PSAs, where they are unloaded. You can also change loading and unloading details after you've loaded the distribution equipment, if required.

The warehouse worker uses a radio frequency (RF) presentation device throughout this process.

Technical Details

Type New




https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/64c8cb53ad377114e10000000a174cb4.html

Application Component SCM-EWM-RF

SCM-EWM-WOP


Additional Details

The distribution equipment process comprises the following steps:

● Picking: Using an RF presentation device, the warehouse worker either picks goods into mobile HU compartments to load onto the distribution equipment or picks full pallets to load directly onto the distribution equipment. They can optionally record positions within the HU compartment for the picked items.

● Staging for loading: When picking is finished, the system determines the destination of the goods based on process-oriented storage control, and the warehouse worker moves them there, ready for loading.

● Loading: The warehouse worker loads onto the distribution equipment either HU compartments that have been picked upfront or complete HUs. They can also specify the position of the HU compartment in the distribution equipment, either manually or automatically.

● Unloading: The warehouse worker unloads full pallets, HU compartments, or sub-HUs from the distribution equipment into the specified production supply area or destination bin.

● Changing loading and unloading details: For example, you may need to remove some goods that have already been loaded onto distribution equipment (reverse loading) or to load more HUs onto already loaded distribution equipment (extending it).

If you need to create an incident regarding the RF logic of this feature, use component SCM-EWM-RF and its subcomponents.

If you need to create an incident regarding the processing of warehouse orders and warehouse tasks, use component SCM-EWM-WOP and its subcomponents.


● New category of warehouse order creation rule: I – Distribution Equipment Picking.You find this in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Cross-Process SettingsWarehouse Order Define Creation Rule for Warehouse Orders .

● New internal process steps:○ DDST distribution equipment: staging○ DDLD distribution equipment: loading○ DDUL distribution equipment: unloading

You find these process steps in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Cross-Process Settings Warehouse Task Define Process-Oriented Stage Control .

● Assign external process steps for DDST (staging for loading) and/or DDLD (loading) to the respective storage type and specify automatic creation of warehouse tasks. Set up the storage type of the PSAs to finish process-oriented storage control.


Supply Chain

You do this in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Master Data Define Storage Type .

Related Information

Distribution Equipment Process

11.2.23 Display Change Documents for Inspection Rules

With the feature you can display change documents for inspection rules in order to display the change history of the inspection rule master data. You can display what has been changed, when it was changed, and who made the change.

Technical Details

Type New





11.2.24 Synchronous Goods Movements from Repetitive Manufacturing into EWM embedded in SAP S/4HANA

With this feature, you can have a seamless integration between repetitive manufacturing and warehouse management.

Technical Details

Type New


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9832125c23154a179bfa1784cdc9577a/1909.000/en-US/8928e1ed4fdb4c61b6ce39ba7d63e19b.html



Application Component SCM-EWM-IF-ERP-GM


Additional Details

Synchronous goods movement allows you do to the following

● Keep manual posting effort to a minimum● Improve visibility and control in your warehouse operations● Perform synchronous updates of stock in inventory management and in warehouse management● Post goods receipt from repetitive manufacturing into a bin-managed storage location without delivery and

warehouse request documents● Post goods issue for consumption by backflush from a bin-managed production supply area without

delivery and warehouse request documents

When the finished product is confirmed by repetitive manufacturing, the system automatically posts goods issue of the consumed materials from stock with the goods receipt of the finished product into the warehouse. The system posts the goods receipt and goods issue in one material document.

You can specify whether you want to create warehouse tasks for putaway automatically or manually for different products:

● For products where you want to move the products from the goods receipt bin to the final storage bin, you can use automatic warehouse task creation to create the warehouse tasks during goods receipt posting.

● For products where you want to pack the product into a handling unit before putaway, you can create the warehouse tasks manually after you have packed the handling unit.


The following Customizing activities must be maintained or updated for synchronous goods movement:

● Activate synchronous goods receipt in Customizing for Production under Repetitive ManufacturingControl Define Repetitive Manufacturing Profiles

● Activate automatic warehouse task creation in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Cross-Process Settings Warehouse Task Determine Warehouse Process Type and Master Data

Define Storage Type .● Create entries without document type and item type but with the process indicator Receipt of Unpacked

Items (Synchronous Goods Movement) in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Cross-Process Settings Warehouse Task Determine Warehouse Process Type .


Supply Chain

11.2.25 Integration of Quality Inspection Engine to Multiple Enterprise Management Systems

With this feature you can connect decentralized EWM based on SAP S/4HANA to multiple enterprise management systems (for example, SAP ERP or SAP S/4HANA) as external quality management (QM) systems for the quality inspection engine (QIE). The system dynamically determines the correct external QM system in the background by using the warehouse and entitled to dispose information.

Technical Details

Type New





11.2.26 Automatic Master Data Synchronization to Control QM Processes

With this feature, you can automatically generate inspection rules in decentralized Extended Warehouse Management (EWM) based on SAP S/4HANA from the connected enterprise management system (for example, SAP ERP or SAP S/4HANA).

Technical Details

Type New






Additional Details

When you connect decentralized EWM to an enterprise management system, you can enter the inspection setup data in the Quality Management view of the material master in the enterprise management system and establish an ALE distribution of the inspection setup data to the decentralized EWM system. The system then creates, updates, or deletes the inspection rules in the decentralized EWM system based on the inspection setup data in the enterprise management system.

11.2.27 Decentralized EWM - Routes and Batches

With this feature, you can use the following features of decentralized Extended Warehouse Management (EWM) based on SAP S/4HANA:

● SCM routes and the routing guide● Batch on plant level and the SAP S/4HANA global batch concept

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component SCM-EWM


Additional Details

SCM routing allows you to perform staging area and door determination.


The Customizing activity Map Routes and Route Schedule from ERP System to EWM is now available in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Interfaces ERP Integration ERP Integration for Decentralized EWM Map Routes and Route Schedule from ERP System to EWM .


Supply Chain

The following Customizing activities are available for route determination in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Goods Issue Process Goods Issue Process for Decentralized EWM Route Determination :

● Activate or Deactivate Route Determination● Define Scheduling Within Route Determination

The following Customizing activities are available for route determination in Customizing for SCM Basis under Master Data Master Data for Decentralized EWM :

● Calendar Maintain Planning Calendar (Time Stream)

● Calendar Maintain Factory Calendar

● Transportation Lane Maintain Transportation Mode

● Transportation Lane Maintain Means of Transport

● Transportation Lane Set Usage of GIS Tool

● Transportation Lane Activate Change Documents

● Transportation Lane Transportation Service Provider Profile Define Freight Code Sets, Freight Codes, and Determination

● Transportation Lane Transportation Service Provider Profile Define Product Freight Groups

● Transportation Lane Distance and Duration Determination Configure Process Controller for Distance and Duration Determination

● Transportation Lane Distance and Duration Determination Define GIS Zone

● Transportation Lane Distance and Duration Determination Assign Country to GIS Zone

● Transportation Lane Distance and Duration Determination Define Strategy for Distance and Duration Determination

● Transportation Lane Distance and Duration Determination Maintain Global Settings for Buffering of DDD

● Transportation Lane Distance and Duration Determination Set Usage of GIS Tool

The following Customizing activities are available for route determination in Customizing for SCM Basis under Routing Guide for Decentralized EWM:

● General Settings for Route Determination● Define Request Types for Routing Guide● Define Mode of Transport at the Border

The following Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) are available for route determination in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Extended Warehouse Management Goods Issue Process Goods Issue Process for Decentralized EWM Route Determination :

● BAdI: Filter Method in Route Determination● BAdI: Cost Determination in Route Determination● BAdI: Dangerous Goods Enhancements for Route Determination (EHS)● BAdI: Input Help for Means of Transport in Routing Guide● BAdI: Enhancements for Scheduling in Routing Guide

● Enhancement Spot for Route Master Data BAdI: Enhancements to Route Master Data


The following BAdIs are available for route determination in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Extended Warehouse Management Master Data Master Data for Decentralized EWM :

● BAdI: Enhance Route Search Help With External Data● BAdI: Enhancement of Departure Calendar/Route Schedule Value Help

The following BAdIs are available for route determination in Customizing for Extended Warehouse Management under Business Add-Ins (BAdIs) for Extended Warehouse Management Cross-Process Settings Cross-Process Settings for Decentralized EWM Delivery - Warehouse Request :

● BAdI: Route Determination and Route Check● BAdI: Route Release

11.2.28 Decentralized EWM - Integration Features

With this feature. you can use integration features for decentralized Extended Warehouse Management (EWM) based on SAP S/4HANA to connect to different aspects of the connected enterprise management system (for example, SAP ERP or SAP S/4HANA) or to SAP Manufacturing Integration.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component SCM-EWM


Additional Details

You can integrate decentralized EWM to the enterprise management system in the following ways:

● Integrate decentralized EWM with a single SAP ERP system with active Customer Vendor Integration (CVI)● Replicate packing instructions in the enterprise management system to the SCM packing specification in

EWM● Integrate decentralized EWM with SAP ERP 6.0 EHP3 or higher


Supply Chain

11.3 Delivery and Transportation

11.3.1 Delivery Management

11.3.1.1 CDS Views for Delivery Management

With this release, new CDS (Core Data Services) views for Delivery Management have been released. You can use them to construct custom views or apps that need to retrieve data about delivery documents.

Technical Details

Type New



2TX (Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery)

BKP (Accelerated Customer Returns)

Application Component LE-SHP


Additional Details

The following CDS views for Shipping have now been released:

Generic CDS Views for Delivery Documents

● Packaging Material Type● Packaging Material Type Text● Warehouse Number● Warehouse Number Text

CDS Views for Inbound Delivery Documents

● Putaway Status● Putaway Status Text

CDS Views for Outbound Delivery Documents

● Picking Confirmation Status● Picking Confirmation Status Text


● Picking Control● Picking Control Text● Delivery Items Shipped as Planned - Cube● Delivery Items Shipped as Planned - Query

CDS Views for Customer Returns Delivery Documents

● Returns Reason● Returns Reason Text● Returns Refund Codes● Multi-step Returns - Returns Refund Text

CDS Views for Delivery Analytics

● Analytics - Delivery Cube

Related Information

CDS Views for Delivery Management

11.3.1.2 Enhancements for CDS Views for Delivery Management

With this release, enhanced CDS (Core Data Services) views for Delivery Management have been released. You can use them to construct custom views or apps that need to retrieve data about delivery documents.

Technical Details

Type Changed



2TX (Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery)

BKP (Accelerated Customer Returns)




Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/db617599caf04ddb9295f0e2a6a1076b.html

Additional Details

The following CDS views for Delivery Management have now been enhanced:

● Customer Returns Delivery Document Item● Inbound Delivery Document Item● Outbound Delivery Document Item● Delivery Document● Delivery Document Item

Related Information


11.3.1.3 Inbound Deliveries - Read, Create, Update, and Delete

You can now use this service to read inbound delivery header and item texts.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

For customer messages, use the more accurate application component LE-SHP-API.

Related Information

Inbound Deliveries - Read, Create, Update, and Delete



https://help.sap.com/viewer/2f36056ae9a044bba55bcbad204b7bc5/1909.000/en-US/d10ec16c462a44a7be6c6721c9bb0a93.html

11.3.1.4 Outbound Deliveries - Read, Create, Update, and Delete

You can now use this service to read outbound delivery header and item texts.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

For customer messages, use the more accurate application component LE-SHP-API.

Related Information

Outbound Deliveries - Read, Create, Update, and Delete

11.3.1.5 Analyze Delivery Performance - Shipped as Planned

With this app, you can monitor the current delivery performance within your organization to keep track of customer satisfaction and retention. If delivery performance is below what you expect it to be (meaning if planned dates for issuing goods to internal and external customers are not observed properly), you can drill down to individual outbound deliveries that were processed with delay and navigate to the related sales orders or stock transport orders for more detailed information. You can then use this information to help to resolve the issues that caused these delays in the first place.


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/2f36056ae9a044bba55bcbad204b7bc5/1909.000/en-US/4bec9116ac56435ca1332e4a75998d51.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), BME (Stock Transfer with Delivery)



Additional Details

For customer messages, use the more accurate application component LE-SHP-FIO-ANA.

Related Information

Analyze Delivery Performance - Shipped as Planned

11.3.1.6 Value Help Authorizations in Delivery Management


Technical Details

Type Changed






https://help.sap.com/viewer/c7894a248ca14f74aca67f97528e5ad7/1909.000/en-US/039b8b0b916346e880c208c335378273.html

Additional Details

For customer messages, use the more accurate application component LE-SHP-IAM.

Please see the following SAP Notes for the value help authorizations of the respective areas:

● For LO-ARM, see SAP Note 2796071 .● For LO-SPM, see SAP Note 2796047 .● For LE-SHP, see SAP Note 2795979 .



Related Information


11.3.1.7 Changes to Shipping Specialist Role

The launchpad for the SAP_BR_SHIPPING_SPECIALIST role has been restructured to provide a more compact and business-related overview: The apps are now grouped by business use cases, major apps are displayed as tiles, other apps as links, and apps less important in daily business are not displayed at all in standard delivery. The technical configurations, for example, the business catalog assignments of the apps, and the app content have not been changed. In general, these changes have no impact on your user roles created on basis of your own Z-catalogs or Z-groups.

Technical Details

Type Changed






Supply Chain





Additional Details

For customer messages, use the more accurate application component LE-SHP-FIO.

11.3.1.8 Product Marketability

With this feature, you can check the marketability of products that are marked as Product Compliance Relevant, during delivery processing. This helps you determine whether a product can be sold in a particular country or region. This feature enables you to check all compliance-relevant products to determine whether outbound delivery processing is allowed from a product marketability point of view, block post goods issue if the marketability status does not allow for further processing, and use the new Product Marketability Status functionality to filter for items that have marketability issues.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 31J (Chemical Compliance in Sales)

Application Component LE-SHP-DL


Related Information

Product Marketability in Delivery Processing

11.3.1.9 Dangerous Goods Checks in Outbound Delivery Processing

With this feature, you can use dangerous goods checks for transport checks. In addition, dangerous goods data can be printed on delivery documents.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/df47c0e5e53842159db00e18f0fa4fb1.html

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Dangerous Goods in Delivery Processing

11.3.1.10 Safety Data Sheet Checks

With this feature, you can check the safety data sheet status of products that are marked as Product Compliance Relevant, during delivery processing. This feature enables you to check all compliance-relevant products to determine whether outbound delivery processing is allowed from a safety data sheet point of view.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 3VQ (Safety Data Sheets in Sales)

Application Component LE-SHP-GF


Related Information

Safety Data Sheet Management in Delivery Processing


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/b28cabe5624147a2a4fd537c17d69762.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/35751be3d6ee423197492574e016a512/1909.000/en-US/b196df0d3d05494fa3f9494f759cb716.html

11.3.1.11 Read Access Logging for CDS Views

Read Access Logging (RAL) to monitor and log read access to sensitive data is now enabled for CDS views in Delivery Management.

Technical Details

Type New



BD9 (Sell from Stock)

BDD (Customer Returns)



Additional Details

RAL is available for the following CDS views:

● I_DELIVERYCATEGORY● I_DELIVERYRELATEDBILLGSTATUS● I_ITEMGDSMVTINCOMPLETIONSTS● I_ITEMPACKINGINCOMPLETIONSTS● I_ITEMPICKINGINCOMPLETIONSTS● I_LOADINGGROUP● I_PACKINGSTATUS● I_PICKINGCONFIRMATIONSTATUS● I_PICKINGCONTROL● I_PICKINGSTATUS● I_PROOFOFDELIVERYSTATUS● I_REQDDELIVDATECALWEEK● I_RETSMGMTCOMPNPROCGSTATUS● I_RETSMGMTPROCGSTATUS● I_RETURNSDOCUMENTTYPE● I_RETURNSREFUNDPROCGMODE● I_RETURNSREFUNDPROCGMODEACTIVE● I_RETURNSREFUNDTYPE


● I_SLSORDERTOTRANSPMGMT● I_STOCKCATEGORY● I_WAREHOUSEACTIVITYSTATUS● I_WAREHOUSEGATE● I_WAREHOUSESTAGINGAREA● I_ADVNCDRETURNSMGMTPROCESS● I_DELIVERYDOCUMENTITEMAMOUNT● I_DELIVERYDOCUMENTITEMCUBE

Related Information


11.3.1.12 New Navigation Option in the "Create Outbound Deliveries - From Sales Orders" App

With this feature, you can now easily navigate to the Schedule Delivery Creation app from within the Create Outbound Deliveries - From Sales Orders app. This saves you time if you realize you need to use the Schedule Delivery Creation app to schedule the mass processing of sales orders while you are in the Create Outbound Deliveries - From Sales Orders app.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

For customer messages, use the more accurate application component LE-SHP-FIO.


Supply Chain


Related Information

Create Outbound Deliveries - From Sales Orders

11.3.2 Transportation Management

11.3.2.1 Authorization to Edit Released Freight Agreements

With this feature, you can restrict the editing of released freight agreements, local calculation sheets, and local rate tables only to super users if you set up authorizations using authorization object T_AGR_FRS. This restriction helps to avoid inconsistencies for freight orders using the released freight agreements. Note that the editing of reference calculation sheets and rate tables is allowed irrespective of the authorization object.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component TM-FRA



If you upgraded from a lower release of SAP S/4HANA to SAP S/4HANA 1909 or higher, you're using authorization object T_AGR_FR instead of T_AGR_FRS. Then, as a default, all users with edit authorization can edit released freight agreements. To avoid any disruption for existing users, you can run XPRA SAP S/4HANA 1909: Editing of Released Freight Agreements (/SCMTMS/XPRA_1909_FAG_AUTHOBJ) to allow all users with edit authorization for freight agreements to also edit released freight agreements.


You can allow all users to edit released freight agreements in Customizing for Transportation Management under Basic Functions General Settings Define General Settings for SAP TM .


https://help.sap.com/viewer/c7894a248ca14f74aca67f97528e5ad7/1909.000/en-US/e8d92fa5bee0415c8a33f6a602385611.html

Related Information

Freight Agreement Maintenance

11.3.2.2 Package Unit

The transportation unit category Package Unit and the corresponding planning functions have been enhanced. After you have consolidated freight units in package units to transport them together across several transportation stages and freight documents, you can now deconsolidate the packages again on the last stage of your route.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component TM-FRM, TM-PLN


Additional Details

Order Management

The following features have been added to the package unit:

● You can create the route of a package unit in a way that packages are transported together across several transportation stages and are deconsolidated on the last stage of a tour called "delivery tour". The route then contains a special (virtual) stage which represents a group of distributions stops. These stops are displayed as sub-stops of the virtual stage. The sequence, however, is not fixed.

● If you create package units from a freight order, the system can assign freight unit items to several package units. This means that items and sub-quantities of the items in a freight unit can be distributed over several package units.If the multiple package units to which a freight unit is assigned are transported with the same freight documents, the freight unit does not have to be split. Otherwise the freight unit is split by the system and distributed accordingly to the freight documents.

You have the following additional options to create package units:

● Creation from a Forwarding Order or its Successor Documents


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/c0094c52d6416a67e10000000a441470.html

You can create package units directly from the user interface of a forwarding order or its successor documents such as freight units or transportation units. To do so, specify the type of transportation unit that will be created for a stage in Customizing (see below).

● Creation from a Freight OrderAfter you create local packages in your freight order and set the load plan status (packaging) to "finalized", you can let the system create package units for these packages.Furthermore, if certain prerequisites are met, you can cancel the package units and merge the packages back into the item hierarchy of the freight order.

In the Origin of Package Unit field on the General Data tab page of a package unit document you can see where and how the package unit has been created.

Transportation CockpitYou have the following additional options:

● You can display and plan package units with distribution stops on the geographical map and in manual planning. For example, scheduling-relevant information like the unloading start and end date/times is displayed for the distribution stops in a detail area. On the geographical map, the distribution stops are displayed in a star-like shape.

● VSR optimization also considers package units with distribution stops. Scheduling only considers them if the package units are assigned to another business document, for example a freight order.

● If a freight unit is assigned to several package units, you can see this in the Assignment to Package Units area. This information is also available in the freight unit user interface in the stage details.

● You can create package units from a freight order in the freight order list, in the freight order hierarchy, on the geographical map, and in the load plan hierarchy. You can also cancel package units. For more information, see Creation from a Freight Order above.

● In the package unit stage hierarchy, for example, you can now group package unit stages according to the execution document (for example a freight order) of a stage or the subsequent stage. To use this new grouping option, you need to define a hierarchical level for stages with the standard grouping attribute Execution Document of Stage or Execution Document of Subsequent Stage in Customizing (see below). This new grouping option is only available for consumer Transportation Cockpit - Requirement Document Stages. Note that you need to implement SAP Note 2786778 to use the grouping of stages according to the execution document of a subsequent stage.


● You can define a default package unit type in the package unit type and also in the freight order type. For more information, see Customizing for Transportation Management under Planning Transportation Unit Define Transportation Unit Types .

● To model a delivery tour, you can specify in Customizing of the transportation unit type that the package unit contains a special stage with distribution stops. In field Seq. Typ of Stages (Sequence Type of Stages) choose Linear with Distribution. This setting is required if you want to create package units from freight orders.

● In Customizing of the transportation unit type you can also specify that freight units can be assigned to several package units. In field Assgnmt of Pred.Docs (Assignment of Predecessor Documents) choose Partially or Completely. This setting is required if you want to create package units from freight orders. It can only be used for this function.



● To create package units directly from the user interface of a forwarding order or its successor documents, you can specify the type of transportation unit that is to be created for a stage. For more information, see Customizing for Transportation Management under Forwarding Order Management Forwarding OrderDefine Default Capacity Document Types for Stages . Please note that the title of this Customizing

activity has been adjusted to this enhancement. This feature is also available in SAP S/4HANA 1809.Moreover, new specific Customizing activities for defining default capacity document types for stages are available for delivery-based transportation requirements and order-based transportation requirements. For more information, see Customizing for Transportation Management under Integration Logistics Integration External TM System Integration .

● In your freight order type (Package Unit Creation Rule field), you can indicate whether a package unit will be created per package item (default setting) or for all package items of a freight order. As a prerequisite, you must have defined a default package unit type in the freight order type. For more information, see Customizing for Transportation Management under Freight Order Management Freight Order Define Freight Order Types .

● To group package unit stages according to the execution document, you need to define a hierarchical level for stages. For more information, see Customizing for Transportation Management under PlanningGeneral Settings Define Hierarchical Views for Business Documents .

Related Information

Package UnitCreating a Package UnitTransportation Planning with Mixed Packages and DeconsolidationUse of Package Units in PlanningPlanning with Distribution Stops

11.3.2.3 Utilization and Outer Volume

In Transportation Management (TM) you can display the utilization of capacities that are in a capacity document. By doing so, you can get a rough overview about the capacity utilization for the whole freight order, for a stage, or for a specific item. This overview is shown on a dedicated tab page of a capacity document or the transportation cockpit. The tab page has been enhanced with SAP S/4HANA 1909.

Technical Details

Type New



Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/37f4f7e69749408989230de6363a7381.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/ed6b14207c0f4d878b2226658ca34142.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/70c404d87b7746bdadd81bea3debb742.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/9a2f27bfe9c149df9d934d1dbc63bc5a.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/10b9512a570f495d9a06f02391a74d36.html


Application Component TM-FRM, TM-PLN


Additional Details

In some cases, the outer volume needs to be considered when the system calculates the utilization. The outer volume indicates the space that a package, for example a pallet or a carton, consumes on a capacity, for example a truck. In some cases, the outer volume is calculated based on the products in the package. In other cases, it is independent from the products. New fields are available in SAP S/4HANA 1909 to display the outer volume.

Utilization and Utilization Overview Tab PagesOn the Utilization tab page of a capacity document or the Utilization Overview tab page of the transportation cockpit you can display the utilization of the capacities that exist in a capacity document, such as vehicle resources, containers, and packages. The utilization is displayed in a hierarchical view for the transportation stages. SAP provides two default views: Utilization and Utilization with Complete Context (the latter shows not only the physical objects but also sub-documents, such as container units and package units). In addition to the hierarchical view, you can also display a graphical view of the utilization.

The system displays, for example, the following capacity information for the individual stages and objects: Total capacity, consumed capacity, and remaining capacity (for mass and volume).

The system calculates the utilization using the capacity information and load (for example, the load of the package units and freight units in a container).

General Data Tab Page of a Freight OrderOn the General Data tab page of a freight order document you can display the maximum utilization as well as the total, consumed, and remaining capacity for the truck and trailer separately. You can also display the combined utilization of the truck and trailer.

Utilization Information on Additional Tab PagesThe maximum utilization is also displayed on the Overview tab page of a freight order and the General Data tab pages of transportation unit documents. Capacity information such as total and consumed capacity is displayed in all lists and hierarchies for capacity documents as well as in the load plan hierarchy.

When calculating the maximum utilization, the system considers the tare weight of packages and containers as well as the outer volume of packages (see below).

Outer VolumeThe outer volume is determined and considered for package items only. It is determined automatically in the following cases:

● during package building● when you manually create a package unit


Vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimization and scheduling consider the outer volume.

The outer volume is displayed in the package unit on the Items tab page. Moreover, it is displayed in a number of lists and hierarchies in the transportation cockpit, for example, in the package unit list and in the freight unit stage list.

Related Information

UtilizationOuter Volume

11.3.2.4 Normalized Quantities and Capacities

With this feature you can use normalized load consumption quantities and normalized capacities in a road scenario to optimize the usage of loading space. For example, you can convert europallets and pallet cages into loading meters and specify the capacity of a truck as a normalized capacity.

You have the following options:

● You can let the system determine the normalized load consumption quantity (normalized quantity) during freight unit building using the package building function. The result is also used later in the planning process by manual and automatic planning (VSR optimization).

● You can let the system determine the normalized quantity during capacity-document-based package building.

● You can display load consumption quantities and normalized quantities in the item details of a freight unit, transportation unit (that is, trailer unit, container unit, or package unit), or freight order. Further, you can view the aggregated values of these quantities in the header data of these documents.

● You can convert the unit of measure (UoM) of a normalized quantity to the UoM of an additional normalized quantity, such as loading meters.

● You can view the capacity of a resource with regard to the normalized quantity in the header data of a freight order. This capacity is also considered by the system when calculating the maximum utilization of the resource.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component TM-FRM, TM-PLN, SCM-BAS-PAK-PB


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/86bca4bdfec840b0b622b21b5537a6b0.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/e646bb8b70d9447399478c0cacb65d15.html


Additional Details

The normalized quantity is used to allow the comparison of different packaging materials that are used within the same scenario. The different UoMs of the packaging materials are converted to a standard UoM to facilitate comparison.

During package building, the system determines the normalized quantities for products based either on the entries in the package type assignment transaction (Normalized Quantity Definition tab page) or the conversion factor between the base UoM and the UoM for the normalized quantity that you have defined for each product in the material master data. If you have also defined such a conversion factor for your packaging materials, the system also determines normalized quantities for package items.


Normalized Quantity DefinitionThe Change Package Type Assignment app has been enhanced with a new tab page Normalized Quantity Definition. It allows you to enter normalized quantities for your products and UoMs or to upload them with an Excel upload function. In addition, the new Determine Normalized Load Consumption Quantity app allows you to have the system determine the normalized quantity per product and UoM.

Display of Normalized QuantitiesNormalized quantities are displayed in the user interfaces for freight orders, transportation units, and freight units as well as in the corresponding lists and hierarchies of the transportation cockpit and in the Gantt chart (see "Effects on Customizing"). They are also displayed on the geographical map as well as for trucks, trailers, and containers in the transportation cockpit, if you have indicated the default UoM for the normalized quantity in the Create Planning Profile app.

Packaging Material OverviewYou can view the aggregated values of the unpackaged and packaged load consumption quantities on a new tab page of a freight unit, transportation unit, or freight order (Packaging Material Overview). Further, the remaining capacity is displayed on this tab page for a freight order. Depending on your Customizing settings, the system also considers the remaining capacity of the individual packages when calculating the remaining capacity of the freight order.

A condensed view of this information is displayed in your personal worklist (POWL) as well as in the lists and hierarchies of the transportation cockpit and in the Gantt chart (see "Effects on Customizing").

Normalized CapacityThe capacity of a resource with regard to the normalized quantity is displayed in the header data of a freight order for a truck and trailer separately as well as for the vehicle-resource combination. When calculating the maximum utilization of the resource, the system considers the most critical transportation stage and UoM (mass, volume, or normalized quantity).



● To activate the determination of the normalized quantity and the display of the corresponding values in the freight unit, transportation unit, and freight order, you must enter a default UoM for the normalized quantity in the package building profile as well as in the freight unit type, transportation unit type, and freight order type. Further, you can enter a default UoM for an additional normalized quantity (such as loading meters) in the Customizing of the document type. For more information, see Customizing for Transportation Management under the following Customizing activities:

○ Planning Package Building Define Package Building Profile

○ Planning Freight Unit Define Freight Unit Types

○ Freight Order Management Transportation Unit Define Transportation Unit Types

○ Freight Order Management Freight Order Define Freight Order Types● If you want to display additional fields related to the normalized quantity in the transportation cockpit, you

need to implement SAP Note 2782304 .● If you work with schedules, you need to indicate the default UoM for the normalized quantity in your

schedule type. To do so, in Customizing for Transportation Management choose Master DataTransportation Network Schedule Define Schedule Types .

● In addition, you can enter in the Customizing for Transportation Management under Freight Order Management Define Conversion Between Normalized Qty and Additional Normalized Qty UoMs , a conversion factor between the UoM of normalized quantities and the UoM of additional normalized quantities.

● To activate the display of the Packaging Material Overview tab page and the calculation of the corresponding data, you can use the Aggregate Load Consumption Quantities option in the Customizing of the document type.To activate the condensed view in the lists and hierarchies of the transportation cockpit, you have to implement SAP note 2789943 .To activate the condensed view in the Gantt chart, you need to assign the corresponding fields to the specific lists. For more information, see Customizing for Transportation Management under Basic Functions Gantt Chart Define Field Lists and Label Schemes for Gantt Chart .

● If you want the system to consider the remaining capacity of the individual packages when calculating the remaining capacity of the freight order, you can use the Consider Package Utilization for NLQ Consumption option in the NLQ Utilization Rule field in the Customizing of the freight order type.

Related Information

Use of Normalized Quantities and CapacitiesDetermination of Normalized Load Consumption Quantities


Supply Chain


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Flaunchpad.support.sap.com%2F%23%2Fnotes%2F

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/8766684f1c884168839cd2887fa299d6.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/c199c92de7de477ebcc4a8a39f51f4fa.html

11.3.2.5 Enhancements for Planning

With this feature you can define capacity adjustment factors in the planning profile. Moreover, you can use new fields in the Customizing activity for defining hierarchical views. And finally, you can display capacities while assigning schedules.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component TM-PLN


Additional Details

The following new features are available:

● In the constraints and costs settings of the planning profile, you can define capacity adjustment factors for mass, volume, and normalized quantity. These factors indicate by how much the vehicle capacity that is effectively available for planning can be decreased or increased. These factors are taken into account during vehicle scheduling and routing (VSR) optimization and creation of transportation proposals. They are not taken into account by the following:○ Manual planning○ Schedules○ Load consolidation○ Decreasing capacities○ Compartments○ Vehicle-resource combinations

Capacity adjustment factors are also displayed in the explanation tool (under vehicle capacity).● When defining hierarchical views, you can now indicate that only directly assigned documents are to be

displayed in a hierarchy. For this, a new field Related Documents has been introduced in Customizing (see below).This feature is also available in SAP S/4HANA 1709 as of Support Package 5 and SAP S/4HANA 1809 as of Support Package 3.

● When defining hierarchical views, you can now control the editability of fields in hierarchies. For this, a new field Editability has been introduced in Customizing (see below).This feature is also available in SAP S/4HANA 1709 as of Support Package 5 and SAP S/4HANA 1809 as of Support Package 3.


● When you assign a schedule in the transportation cockpit, for example, capacities (weight, volume, and normalized load consumption quantities) are now displayed in the Select Schedule Departure dialog box.


The Planning Costs Settings tab page of the planning profile has been renamed to Constraints and Costs Settings.

In the constraints and costs settings of the planning profile, new fields for defining capacity adjustment factors for mass, volume, and normalized quantity are available.


To indicate that only directly assigned documents are to be displayed or to control the editability of the fields in a hierarchy, in Customizing for Transportation Management choose Planning General Settings Define Hierarchical Views for Business Documents .

Related Information

Normalized Quantities and Capacities [page 684]

11.3.2.6 Enhancements for Package Building and Load Planning

Package building and load planning have been enhanced.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component TM-PLN-LP, TM-PLN-PB, SCM-BAS-PAK-PB, SCM-BAS-PAK-PB-OPT, TM-FRM


Supply Chain


Additional Details

The following new functions are available:

● Physical positions of each item in the package can be determined during package building. If necessary, you can adapt these positions by changing their coordinates in the load plan hierarchy.

● You can inform the warehouse about physical positions, orientations, and the loading sequence of product items in packages by sending loading or unloading appointment requests (LDAP requests) (see Effects on Data Transfer).

● Manual load planning○ In the 3D load plan, you can now adjust a load plan manually. You can do this by moving objects within

a truck using the reposition buttons or the keyboard shortcuts. The system moves the objects in increments that you can define in Customizing. Statuses and axle weights are automatically adjusted. To enable manual load planning, a new field has been added in Customizing (see below).

○ You can define keyboard layouts for manual load planning. For each keyboard layout, you can assign specific keys to key codes. Defining keyboard layouts is recommended if you want to use your own keyboard shortcuts in manual load planning. You define keyboard layouts and keyboard shortcuts in Customizing (see below).

● In your freight order type and package unit type, you can specify if the system updates the load plan when items are changed after you perform package building based on a freight order or package unit of this type.

● The load plan status has been enhanced. You can now set a status value, which indicates that you have finalized packaging in a road freight order. This status value is set automatically when package building is performed during freight unit building.When packaging is finalized, the corresponding items are automatically fixed. This fixing indicator is visible in the road freight order and in the load plan hierarchy in the transportation cockpit.In your road freight order, you can also fix the assignment of requirements manually. That means, the assigned freight units can't be removed and no new freight units can be assigned.You can also set a status value that indicates that you have finalized load planning in a road freight order.In the transportation cockpit, you can also set these status values for several freight orders.

● To improve performance, you can now perform package building for several capacity documents in parallel. To do so, you need to assign a parallel processing profile to your planning profile. Moreover, you can run package building in the background.

● You can see who has created or changed a profile and when. This administrative information is available in the following profiles and transactions:○ Package building profile○ Package type assignment transaction○ Product relationship profile○ Profile for package building optimizer○ Rule profile for package building optimizer

● You can simulate the creation of packages and analyze the results. You can also display and analyze the currently entered master data for products and display products or reference products in the product hierarchy.To start the product-based simulation of package building from the SAP Easy Access menu, choose

Transportation Management Administration Package Building Test Report for Package Building .


To start the document-based simulation of package building from the SAP Easy Access menu, choose Transportation Management Administration Package Building Test Report for Package Building

(Document-Based) .


The loading/unloading appointment request message (LDAP) has been enhanced with load plan details, that is, physical positions, orientations, and the loading sequence of product items in packages.


● For more information about triggering an update of the load plan, see Customizing for Transportation Management under Freight Order Management Freight Order Define Freight Order Types and

Freight Order Management Transportation Unit Define Transportation Unit Types .● For more information about enabling manual load planning in the 3D load plan, see Customizing for

Transportation Management under Basic Functions Load Planning Define Layouts for 3D Load Plan . In this Customizing activity, you can also define movement increments for manual load planning.

● For more information about defining keyboard layouts, see Customizing for Transportation Management under Basic Functions Define Keyboard Layouts .

● For more information about defining keyboard shortcuts, see Customizing for Transportation Management under Basic Functions Define Layouts for 3D Load Plan .

Related Information

Package Building in TMPackage BuildingTest Report for Package Building in TM

11.3.2.7 Creation of Package Units Based on Package Building

You can create package units that contain products for one specific customer only. The system first builds packages for your freight units. Then the system creates package units for these packages. Note however, that the system only takes into account freight units for which you have selected Exclusive Package for Customer.


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/b24914550f4f3d6ae10000000a44176d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/b254503ad9834791a2b4c5d1cc1a32ff.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/793a6dce653f420ea54d73ca44abf76b.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component TM-PLN


Additional Details

To use this function, select Create PUs Based on PB (Create Package Units Based on Package Building) in the transportation cockpit (freight unit stage list and freight unit stage hierarchy). Alternatively, you can use this function in the background, that means, a background report is available.

This function can also be used in parallel processing mode.

As a prerequisite, you need to indicate a default package unit type and a package building profile in your planning profile. Optionally, you can indicate a package unit creation rule.

Related Information

Use of Package Units in PlanningCreation of Package Units Based On Package Building for Freight Units

11.3.2.8 Delivery Creation and Split for Package Units with Multiple Assignments

This feature enables you to prevent early delivery splits or updates, if you have allowed the multi-assignment of freight units. Delivery splits are prevented until load planning is finalized. This helps to avoid issues associated with early splitting of deliveries such as unnecessary delivery splits, unnecessary freight unit splits, or unnecessary single deliveries.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/9a2f27bfe9c149df9d934d1dbc63bc5a.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/7a4a505b5499436e9ecf3396a3e4f37e.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component TM-ERP


11.3.2.9 Integration of MM Scheduling Agreements with TM

This feature enables you to integrate scheduling agreements from Materials Management (MM) with Transportation Management (TM).

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component TM-ERP


11.3.2.10 Billing the Freight Cost in TM to a Customer in SD

This feature enables you, when billing your customers, to include the freight costs, along with the price for the products sold. When you sell product to your customer you may undertake the responsibility of delivering these products to your customer. For this you incur cost for transportation, for example, through a carrier. You can pass on these costs to your customer.


Supply Chain

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component SD-BIL, TM-FRM

Available As Of S/4HANA 1909

Additional Details

You use integration of sales orders and deliveries to facilitate transportation planning and execution in Transportation Management (TM). The TM component creates or updates freight units directly for sales orders or deliveries. You plan transportation for these freight units by creating freight orders that you then subcontract to the carrier. The freight order determines the freight costs to be paid to the carrier. You configure TM to distribute the freight costs in the freight order according to delivery items. You can then add the distributed costs for each delivery item to the final amount in the billing document that you send to your customer.

This involves integration of the following processes:

● Sales orders and deliveries to TM● Freight orders in TM● Pricing in SD● Billing in SD

You must distribute the freight cost in TM. You can then add the distributed costs to the final amount in the billing document.

11.3.2.11 Enhancements for Scenario Builder

With this feature you can create scenario templates in the Scenario Builder from scratch. This means that a scenario template can be based on data that doesn't exist in the Transportation Management system yet. In addition, you can let the Scenario Builder create sample data for your scenario template that shows the data format used in the Scenario Builder.

Technical Details

Type Changed




Application Component TM


Additional Details

If you don't want to use existing system data as a basis for your scenario template, but want to create the scenario template from scratch, you can now create a scenario template including all Excel files. Optionally, the Excel files can already contain sample data that shows the data format used in the Scenario Builder.

The column titles of the Excel file contain information about the number of characters that you are allowed to enter for your system objects.


When creating a scenario template, you can now select the checkbox Sample Data in the New Scenario Template dialog box. The system then adds sample data to your scenario template.

Related Information

Creating a Scenario Template

11.4 Advanced Order Promising/ATP

11.4.1 Configure Substitution Strategy

The Configure Substitution Stragey app has been enhanced with functionality for defining the best alternative plant when multiple plants can fulfill a requirement and for evaluating alternatives according to the posting status of each individual line item. New functionality has also been added for displaying alternative controls.


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3dc5400c1cc41d1bc0ae0e7fd9aa5a2/1909.000/en-US/fd8e004c874a4175bb67cdf29557a698.html

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1JW (Advanced Available-to-Promise Processing)

Application Component CA-ATP-ABC (ATP: Alternative-Based Confirmation)


Additional Details

● If multiple plants can fulfill a requirement equally (for example, multiple plants can confirm the requested quantity fully on the requested date), the system now calculates the most appropriate plant by location automatically and independently. For more information, see Alternative Determination.

● When you create a new strategy in the Configure Substitution Strategy app, you can use the Consider Alternative dropdown to decide if alternatives are always to be considered or if they are to be considered for new requirements only or when existing requirements are changed. For more information, see Consider Alternative.

● The Strategies table in the Configure Substitution Strategy app has been enhanced to allow you to display and navigate to alternative controls that are using the same substitution strategy.

● ABC now supports all confirmation strategies used in backorder processing (BOP). For more information about confirmation strategies, see Confirmation Strategies.

11.4.2 Data Configuration for Backorder Processing

The technology used to create segments and sort sequences for backorder processing (BOP) in the Configure BOP Segment and Configure Custom BOP Sorting apps has changed.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component CA-ATP-BOP (ATP: Backorder Processing)


https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/21afef7a7724417daa91a26b6d071e5e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/a5fa0196c0fc4662818c1b02fc0d7764.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/a5fa0196c0fc4662818c1b02fc0d7764.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/1ba3a457ef816b10e10000000a441470.html



The technology used previously for segment creation in advanced Available-to-Promise (aATP), SAP HANA Rules Framework, has been replaced by Select Option Tool (SOT). As a result, the process and user interface for creating segments have changed: you now maintain selection criteria on the basis of document type and using a combination of selection conditions and, if required, optional exclusion conditions.

In addition, the Configure BOP Variant and Monitor BOP Run apps support and display segment and sequence data created and maintained with SOT.


Data created previously with SAP HANA Rules Framework is converted automatically to the new technology when it is edited. For more information, see SAP Note 2800374 and/or Filtering Requirements with Select Option Tool (SOT).

Related Information

How to Configure a SegmentHow to Configure a Custom SortingConfigure BOP SegmentConfigure Custom BOP Sorting

11.4.3 Configure Custom BOP Sorting

The Configure Custom BOP Sorting app has been enhanced to log when a custom sort sequence was used when a backorder processing run was executed.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Supply Chain

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Flaunchpad.support.sap.com%2F%23%2Fnotes%2F2800374

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/30acee313da54b30b650f4d56a58b50d.html


https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/a667c04200964ab9b7d2cabfe1885781.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/983d1df447b14425afdbe5507202e4c2.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/0c317357f1b1ac6be10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/2e140d4e50674be0a94be1a8576d11aa.html





To display the logged data in the Configure Custom BOP Sorting app, go to Settings and activate the Used On column for display in the Sequences table.

Related Information

Configure Custom BOP SortingHow to Configure a Custom Sorting

11.4.4 Monitor BOP Run

The Monitor BOP Run app has been enhanced to indicate if plant substitution has taken place during backorder processing.

Technical Details

Type Changed






https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/2e140d4e50674be0a94be1a8576d11aa.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/983d1df447b14425afdbe5507202e4c2.html

Additional Details

If Alternative-Based Confirmation (ABC) is active when a backorder processing run takes place and results in the requirement supplying plant for a requirement being substituted by an alternative plant, this is displayed graphically. If the line item is selected, an additional dialog displays the original and substituted plant.

Related Information

Alternative-Based Confirmation (CA-ATP-ABC)Configure Substitution StrategyHow to Activate Plant SubstitutionMonitor BOP RunHow to Monitor the Results of a Run

11.4.5 Data Configuration for Release for Delivery

The technology used to create order fulfillment responsibilities for manual backorder processing in the Release for Delivery app has changed.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

The technology used previously for responsibility definition in advanced Available-to-Promise (aATP), SAP HANA Rules-Based Framework (HRF), has been replaced by Selection Option Tool (SOT). As a result, the process and user interface for defining order fulfillment responsibilities have changed: you now define responsibilites on the basis of selection conditions and, if required, optional exclusion conditions.


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/61ce286def63461487ee039b7c375070.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/86403677a55b4f238e1bbccc42d337dd.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/29b11dd995eb4d27beb408ea759fee7d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/4a247e573452a96be10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/ad0b433f156443f1a5980392a9a155c8.html


Order fulfillment responsibilities created previously with HRF are converted automatically to the new technology when they are edited. For more information, see SAP Note 2800374 and/or Filtering Requirements with Select Option Tool (SOT).

Related Information

How to Configure Order Fulfillment ResponsibilitiesConfigure Order Fulfillment Responsibilities

11.4.6 Configure Order Fulfillment Responsibilities

The Configure Order Fulfillment Responsibilities app has been enhanced with configuration functionality that enables the order fulfillment manager to define if and how the order fulfillment specialist's worklist in the Release for Delivery app is updated when changes are made to the requirements in underlying sales and/or stock transport orders.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Information

Configure Order Fulfillment ResponsibilitiesHow to Configure Order Fulfillment ResponsibilitiesRelease for Delivery


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Flaunchpad.support.sap.com%2F%23%2Fnotes%2F2800374



https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/cc4197ab4bdf4a80a87d976922427496.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/36e46c5791ff0322e10000000a44147b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/36e46c5791ff0322e10000000a44147b.html


https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/aa1e635779d88467e10000000a4450e5.html

11.4.7 Release for Delivery

The Release for Delivery app has been enhanced with functionality for dynamically updating the order fulfillment specialist's worklist when changes are made to the requirements in underlying sales and/or stock transport orders.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Related Information

How to Configure Order Fulfillment ResponsibilitiesRelease for Delivery

11.4.8 Schedule Deletion of ATP Results Logs

The Schedule Deletion of ATP Results Log app is deprecated as of SAP S/4HANA 1909. The app will not be replaced.

Technical Details

Type Deleted





Supply Chain


https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/aa1e635779d88467e10000000a4450e5.html


Additional Details

To perform the activities previously executed in the Schedule Deletion of ATP Results Log app, use data destruction object ATP_CHECK_LOG_DESTRUCTION Destruction of ATP Check Logs in aATP instead.

Related Information

How to Schedule the Deletion of ATP Results LogsSchedule Deletion of ATP Results LogData Destruction for aATP

11.4.9 Manage Characteristic Catalogs

This new app enables you to adapt characteristic catalogs to suit your business needs for checking the availability of materials for sales and/or stock transport orders against product allocation and for backorder processing.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-ATP-PAL (ATP: Product Allocation)



The Manage Characteristic Catalogs app is available if the business role Internal Sales Rep (R0080) is assigned to your user. Furthermore, note that before you can use the app, business catalog ATP - Characteristic Catalogs (SAP_SCM_BC_ATPPAL_CTLG_PC) must be included in the business role(s) created from the template


https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/eb145e7fb20b4c38b8642ed169fbed66.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/6017fc3053444caeaa307c4eacbcaf88.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/f83dd14950164ebfbac5c84f58ca743b.html

SAP_BR_INTERNAL_SALES_REP. Failure to do so will result in the app not appearing on the SAP Fiori launchpad.

Additional Details

● You can use the Value Existence Check Type configuration option to define if and how you would like to be notified when a group value chosen for use in, for example, planning data, contains incorrect data (for example, you have maintained a group value that does not exist in your planning data). You can select one of the following configuration options:

Option System Behavior

Check with Error An error message is displayed the next time you save a group value containing incorrect data and prevents the saving of data in the corresponding app. You can navigate to the offending data.

Check with Warning A warning message is displayed the next time you save a group value containing incorrect data. You can navigate to the offending data.

No Existence Check You are not notified of incorrectly maintained group values.

● You can use the Folder column to identify the node under which a characteristic is positioned in the characteristic tree structure, as displayed in the Select Characteristics dialog.

Related Information

Manage Characteristic CatalogsExample: Defining Characteristic Value GroupsKey Concepts in Product Allocation

11.4.10 Manage Product Allocation Sequences

The Manage Product Allocation Sequences app has been enhanced with functionality for using multiple product allocation objects as alternative sources of supply, combining the quantity from constraints in a sequence group to enable a common confirmation based on strictly aligned consumption periods, consuming quantity exclusively from periods that overlap and modeling and maintaining capacity allocations in addition to sales allocations.


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/8bf77409f9c9420b8fca1e2de6309bd2.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/df7c8d104e1c4914a5d01682bf9d8173.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/39f6a957d5c86d10e10000000a441470.html

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

● When checking availability against product allocation, the product allocation objects in a sequence group are now automatically connected as sources of supply if more than one product allocation object is valid for the checked requirement. Possible alternative sources of supply include those product allocation objects whose periodicities and check date time types differ. For more information, see Multiple Sequence Constraints in a Sequence Group.

● By maintaining different consumption parameters for a product allocation object in a sequence group, the same product allocation object can be checked for required quantity more than once within the same sequence group, ideally leading to earlier confirmation dates for the required quantities in order documents. For more information, see Alternative Consumption Strategies in Product Allocation Sequences.

● You can now combine the quantity from constraints in a sequence group to enable a common confirmation based on strictly aligned consumption periods. This ensures that when an availability check against product allocation is executed, confirmation dates are aligned and quantity is only consumed from those periods that overlap all constraints of the group. In the Manage Product Allocation Sequences app, you can set the Consume Overlapping Quantities Only indicator in the consumption strategy for a sequence group, thus ensuring that only the quantities from constraints whose quantities overlap are used to confirm requirements. For more information, see Using Overlapping Quantities.

● The Manage Product Allocation Sequences app has been enhanced to offer the possibility of modeling and maintaining capacity allocations in addition to sales allocations. The Manage Product Allocation Sequences app includes a new business object, the capacity sequence group, that enables you to execute an availability check against product allocation after a product availability check has taken place. The new check against capacity is executed on the basis of the results of the preceding product availability check: the confirmation from the preceding product availability check is used as the request (date and quantity) for the product allocation check against capacity. This enables you to react to changes (for example, the requested date is pushed back by one week) as a result of the product availability check which could render any previous allocation results invalid.The change means that you can now combine both product allocation checks within one availability check:○ Check product allocation based on sales constraints.○ Check product availability.○ Check product allocation based on capacity constraints.

The Product Allocation: Confirmation Calculation screen now clearly differentiates between allocations for sales and allocations for capacity.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/da2927df848e4aa98818ec1aa737c35e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/da2927df848e4aa98818ec1aa737c35e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/5c61c8f15c4748fc9f1bd3882cac6fd4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/5c61c8f15c4748fc9f1bd3882cac6fd4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/a7465e01b15d439d89b5e7d815d93f10.html

Related Information

Manage Product Allocation Sequences

11.4.11 Product Allocation Overview

With this feature, you can perform data aging for product allocation data. Furthermore, you can display aged product allocation data subsequently on the Product Allocation Overview overview page.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

You can use data aging object AATP_PROD_ALLOC_PLNG_DATA_DAG to perform data aging for allocation periods and their quantity assignments. The Aged Product Allocation Data card lists allocation periods aged before a specific date. By clicking on the allocation period name, you can display the aged quantity data in the Monitor Product Allocation Periods app.


Use the Manage Cards function in the Me Area to show the Aged Product Allocation Data card on the Product Allocation Overview overview page in the SAP Fiori launchpad.

Related Information

Data Aging for Product Allocation Planning DataProduct Allocation Overview


Supply Chain

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/a0be09cacb524b11917408e6fd6137b9.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/604117faec1f4ed3826c886ea43c5435.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/0507e58a73574cf8b79a96b35d1f0df7.html

Monitor Product Allocation Periods

11.4.12 OData APIs for Product Allocation

The OData application programming interfaces (API) for product allocation (PAL) have been extended.

Technical Details

Type Changed





Additional Details

The business objects for product allocation (PAL), product allocation object and product allocation sequence now support the business events CREATED, CHANGED and DELETED.

Furthermore, the OData API for product allocation objects, API API_PRODUCT_ALLOCATION_OBJECT, can now:

● Read or change the activation status of the characteristic value combination● Read or change the constraint status of the characteristic value combination● Delete characteristic value combinations and periods● Delete single periods of characterstic value combinations

The OData API for product allocation sequences, API API_PRODUCT_ALLOC_SEQUENCE, can now delete product-location assignments.

Related Information

Product Allocation ObjectProduct Allocation Sequence


https://help.sap.com/viewer/f132c385e0234fe68ae9ff35b2da178c/1909.000/en-US/fc4a36efced84058b3951f4b7049143e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/15f9e51998a945cc82545cb6b4dbe5c2/1909.000/en-US/ac8316e52e5347b0b5259757b7faf2e4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/15f9e51998a945cc82545cb6b4dbe5c2/1909.000/en-US/889b662a6a7f489a88e0113d1a86bb96.html


11.5.1 Procurement of Direct Materials (J45)

Use


● Enhancements in purchase order mass change capabilities● Provides direct link to monitor mass change view after execution of mass change for purchase orders● Enablement of approval details for supplier invoices (saved as completed) in supplier invoice list● Enhanced filter options for purchase order search● Display journal entry and supplier invoice number after posting supplier invoice● Time dependent tax● Display Supplier Contact Data in Manage Purchase Orders● New Header Fields in Mange Supplier Invoices

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item J45 ( Procurement of Direct Materials )







Supply Chain


11.5.2 Subcontracting (BMY)

Use


● Creation of subcontracting purchase orders with the Manage Purchase Orders app● Enablement of subcontracting supplier invoices in the Create Supplier Invoice app● Addition of a visualization for the subcontracting material flow in the Monitor Subcontracting Documents

app● Supplier Contact Data now displayed in Manage Purchase Orders● Commitments now displayed in Manage Purchase Orders

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BMY ( Subcontracting )









http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FBMY

11.5.3 Supplier Consignment (2LG)

Use


● Display Supplier Contact Data in Manage Purchase Orders

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2LG ( Supplier Consignment )








Supply Chain

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2LG

11.5.4 Complementary Procurement Functions (2TW)

Use


● Display the journal entry and supplier invoice number after posting the supplier invoice● Time dependent tax● Display the Supplier Contact Data in Manage Purchase Orders● New Header Fields in Manage Supplier Invoices

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2TW ( Complementary Procurement Functions )





Germany, Portugal, United States of America



http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2TW

11.5.5 Quality Management for Complaints against Suppliers (2F9)

Use


● Using the Record Defects app, you can record defects and generate an automatic display of defects found during quality inspections, including a flexible worklist and a graphical representation.

● A new category for production-related issues which helps by manually recording the production-related defects that need to be documented and rectified.

● Enhanced processing of defects and tasks by follow-up action. Follow-up action enabled for quality tasks including parameters, separate statuses, actions and application logs. An example follow-up function: Post to Blocked Stock.

● Efficient defect recording with code recognition based on the text, supported by machine learning capabilities.

● A quality task can be forwarded via workflow. Processing of quality tasks is embedded into the unified inbox called My Inbox.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2F9 ( Quality Management for Complaints against Suppliers )







Supply Chain


11.5.6 Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery (2TX)

Use


● Get proactive notifications for supplier delivery deficit● Monitor purchase orders with supplier confirmations in the Manage Purchase Order app

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2TX ( Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery )








http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2F9

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2TX

11.5.7 Consumable Purchasing (BNX)

Use


● Display the journal entry and supplier invoice number after posting the supplier invoice.● Enablement of multi-accounting in Create Supplier Invoice app.● Enablement of approval details for supplier invoices (saved as completed) in the supplier invoice list.● Time dependent tax.● Display Supplier Contact Data in Manage Purchase Orders.● Display Commitments in Manage Purchase Orders.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BNX ( Consumable Purchasing )








Supply Chain

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FDE%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FBNX

12 Sustainability




Sustainability

13 Integration


13.1.1 Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from Staging (2Q2)

Use

Customers can migrate data into SAP S/4HANA from legacy systems, using a staging area with staging tables as a source for the SAP S/4HANA Migration Cockpit.


● Additional data migration business objects● Updates to some existing migration objects

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 2Q2 ( Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from Staging )





What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Integration P U B L I C 715

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2Q2

13.1.2 Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from File (BH5)

Use

This scope item describes data migration to SAP S/4HANA for customers coming from any legacy system using a file-based approach.


● Additional data migration business objects● Updates to some existing migration objects

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item BH5 ( Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from File )





13.1.3 Responsibility Determination (1NJ)

Use


● A new feature in the Manage Teams and Responsibilities app perform upfront checks on team members to ensure they have proper authorizations to carry out assigned business functions. The Business Process


Integration

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2FBH5

Specialist will see a warning message when a team member lacks the authorization to carry out assigned business functions.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1NJ ( Responsibility Determination )





13.2 SAP S/4HANA Migration Cockpit – Transfer Data Directly from SAP Source System

This feature enables you to transfer data directly from an SAP source system. This new migration approach allows an automated selection and extraction of business data from SAP source systems and facilitates a direct data migration to SAP S/4HANA without using files or staging tables. With SAP S/4HANA 1909, approximately 100 migration objects are available for the data migration from SAP ERP, and additional migration objects are available for the data migration from SAP AFS and SAP EWM.

Technical Details

Type New



What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Integration P U B L I C 717

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1NJ

Application Component CA-LT-MC


Additional Details

Similar to the other migration approaches, the approach "Transfer Data Directly from SAP System" follows a guided migration process and the migration object modeler can also be used to address custom requirements.

This new SAP Fiori app enables the user to:

● Manage migration projects with the readily consumable SAP Fiori user experience (UX).● Select data from a source system, transform this data, and load it to SAP S/4HANA.● Transfer business data using preconfigured migration objects.● Specify mapping rules.● Simulate the migration.● Execute the migration.● Monitor and control the migration by using the comprehensive SAP Fiori UX.● Automate data extraction from an SAP source system, rather than writing custom data extraction

programs.● Save effort by using preconfigured migration objects, rather than writing custom load programs.● Specify mapping values to consistently transform the full data set across different migration objects.● Navigate intuitively through the migration process.● Monitor and control the migration process for the entire project from one central application.● Simulate the migration and learn from the results before you migrate the data.● Get a comprehensive overview about error situations from extensive process logs.

For more information about this new migration approach, see the Data Migration landing page on the SAP Help Portal.




Integration

https://help.sap.com/S4_OP_DM

14 Cross Components

14.1 Master Data Maintenance

14.1.1 New Features in Mass Maintenance

Mass Maintenance is offering the new features listed below:

● Summary of changes to access change documents after activation step● Extended data model coverage:

○ Business Partner: Credit Mgmt., Unloading Points, Long Texts○ Product: PRT (Production Resources & Tools)

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component LO-MD-MM


14.2 Master Data Governance, Consolidation and Mass Processing

14.2.1 New Features in Consolidation

Consolidation offers the new feature listed below:

● Enhanced address validation with review capabilities for ambiguous address data using Fiori App F3989● Handling of cross references when loading data from source systems● Support of mass creation scenarios without using key mapping● Extended data model coverage:

○ Business Partner: Credit Mgmt., Unloading Points, Long Texts

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Cross Components P U B L I C 719

○ Product: PRT (Production Resources & Tools)

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-MDG-CMP


14.2.2 New Features in Mass Processing

Mass Processing offers the new features listed below:

● Summary of changes to access change documents after activation step● Extended data model coverage:

○ Business Partner: Credit Mgmt., Unloading Points, Long Texts○ Product: PRT (Production Resources & Tools)

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-MDG-CMP



Cross Components

14.3 Master Data Governance, Central Governance

14.3.1 New Features for Master Data Governance for Business Partner

We have added several new features to Master Data Governance for Business Partner. For example, the Change Request Tracker is now available to help processors track the progress of workflow steps. For details on all new features, please see the Additional Details section.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-MDG-APP-BP


Additional Details

Change Request Tracker

Any processor assigned to a change request can now view the current workflow step, all previously executed dialog workflow steps, as well as all future steps needed until the change request is successfully approved.

The change request tracker can be called up via the new What’s Next link, which is displayed in the change request UIBB next to the entry for the current work item.

Improved Error Message Handling for MDG-BP/C/S

Message error handling in the MDG business partner area has been greatly improved and optimized, allowing processors to see for example which segments, customers or vendors a message is referring to. Messages are now grouped according to the corresponding object segment (e.g. ERP Customer, ERP Vendor, Company Code, Sales Area, Purchasing Organization).

If a processor is currently on a UI that contains the field to which an error message refers, the message shown in the Message Area will be clickable, taking the processor directly to the field they need to maintain.

NoteFor direct clicking to work properly, users must be in the right screen, subscreen, and in Edit mode. Furthermore, the UIBB must be expanded (not collapsed).


14.3.2 New Features for Master Data Governance for Customer

We have added several new features to Master Data Governance for Customer. For example, the Change Request Tracker is now available to help processors track the progress of workflow steps. For details on all new features, please see the Additional Details section.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-MDG-APP-CUST


Additional Details









Cross Components

14.3.3 New Features for Master Data Governance for Supplier

We have added several new features to Master Data Governance for Supplier. For example, the Change Request Tracker is now available to help processors track the progress of workflow steps. For details on all new features, please see the Additional Details section.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-MDG-APP-SUPPL


Additional Details









14.3.4 New Features for Master Data Governance for Financials

We have added new features to Master Data Governance for Financials. The Change Request Tracker is now available to help processors track the progress of workflow steps. For details on this new feature, please see the Additional Details section.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-MDG-APP-FIN


Additional Details




14.3.5 New Features for Master Data Governance for Material

We have added several new features to Master Data Governance for Material. For example, the Change Request Tracker is now available to help processors track the progress of workflow steps. For details on all new features, please see the Additional Details section.

Technical Details

Type New


Cross Components



Application Component CA-MDG-APP-MM


Additional Details




Price Unit Editable

Processors such as master data stewards can now change the price unit for plants with material ledger active or not active, and the corresponding prices are recalculated automatically.

The price unit field is now maintainable and related prices (for example Standard Price, Moving Price, Future (Standard) Price, Future Planned Price, Planned Price 1, Planned Price 2, Planned Price 3, Costing Lot Size) are also recalculated.

Production Resource/Tool (PRT)

SAP MDG delivers the most commonly used fields as part of its predefined data models. To enable master data stewards to maintain data for Production Resource/Tools directly within MDG governance, Production Resource/Tool fields are now available in the MDG-M data model in SAP S/4HANA 1909.

Technically, the fields have been added to the new entity MARCPRT. A set of new UI configurations with suffix ‘_09’ have been created (for example, BS_MAT_OVP_09).

SCM fields at MRP Area Level

To enable master data stewards to maintain the most commonly used fields from the MRP area in Supply Chain Management (from the Advanced Planning tab) as part of master data governance, these fields are now available as part of the MDG-M data model in SAP S/4HANA 1909.

From a technical perspective, the fields have been added to entity MDMABASIC. A set of new UI configurations with suffix ‘_09’ have been created (for example BS_MAT_OVP_09).

Enabling Master Data Governance for Inbound Product SOA Service

Users of SAP MDG are now able to process change requests that were created using SOA service ProductMDMBulkReplicateRequest.

They can configure the system to create a change request automatically when an SOA service is received, trigger a consolidation process, or post directly to the active area.


From a technical perspective, the new business activities MATI and MATU and new the change request types MATL0I (SOAP Product Inbound: Create Material) and MATL0U (SOAP Product Inbound: Change Material) are now delivered with BC Set MDGM_MDG_MATERIAL_CR_SOAP_09 and used as follows:

● If the material doesn't exist yet, the default change request type for the new business activity MATI with logical action CREATE_DX is used.

● If the material exists already, the default change request type for the new business activity MATU with logical action CHANGE_DX is used.

● If multiple materials are sent, the default change request type for the new business activity MATB with logical action LOAD is used.

14.3.6 New Features for Master Data Governance Application Framework

We have added several new features to Master Data Governance Application Framework (sometimes referred to as Generic Functions). For example, the Change Request Tracker is now available to help processors track the progress of workflow steps. For details on all new features, please see the Additional Details section.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-MDG-AF


Additional Details




Additional Steps After Activation

A user responsible for the governance processes, such as a master data steward, can now define additional workflow steps after the activation step, if necessary. In other words, the workflow no longer has to end after a change request has been activated successfully.


Cross Components

Instead, after a change request has been activated, further actions can be performed to trigger additional dialog workflow steps. These may include additional steps related to the object of the change request itself, and could also result in a follow-up change request as well. A workflow item for these additional steps can then be found in the workflow inbox of the user who has been assigned accordingly.

Example: You may need to create purchasing info records after creating or changing (i.e. activating) a supplier.

NoteSAP recommends that customers define their own actions for additional steps. However, if customers need to use the standard actions that are delivered, they must only use actions that do not have a Note or Reason set for them. The Check setting however is irrelevant for this situation.

Search Change Requests by Business Data

From within any of the MDG search result lists, processors can now select one or more business objects and find all change requests in the system that are related to these objects, by choosing the new button that is available. They navigate to the list of all open and past change requests and can review those over time, including information of explicit previous and follow-up change requests.

This new feature gives the processor an overview of how often certain business objects have been changed, when the last change was performed, and who actually performed the changes. Where edition-dependent business objects are chosen by the processor, change requests for all relevant editions are displayed.

Follow-Up Change Request

Master data stewards can define additional follow-up processes that are not part of the original change request due to technical or organizational reasons. New links on the Change Request UI and on the My Change Requests screen now allow them to call up previous change requests and follow-up change requests directly.

For example, if such a user needs to create a business partner as quickly as possible, they can do this and then trigger the link to a contact person as part of a follow-up change request.

Pre-Set Data Model / URL Parameter USMD_MODEL

System administrators can now configure change request processes limited to one data model – while still allowing for all business activities (assuming users have the required authorization). Data stewards or power users such as a “Master Data Help Desk” can efficiently trigger changes for the defined data model.

The new solution temporarily overwrites the data model in the user parameter settings, meaning it works for all MDG Web Dynpro applications that consider this parameter (Creation of a Change Request, Mass Change, File Download, File Upload, Where-Used List, Collective Processing).

Using Data Quality Rules in Central Governance

Users such as master data stewards can now use existing data quality rules for their processes within SAP MDG, central governance. The new check type 07 Validation Rules (Data Quality) within Customizing allows them to define the change request types and change request steps in which these rules are used.

Please note that you can only enable the use of Validation Rules (Data Quality) for change requests of the data model BP and for custom objects data models that use a re-use active area.


14.4 Master Data Governance, Data Quality Management

14.4.1 Enable Automation with Rule Mining for Master Data Quality Management

This feature enables you to use machine learning for data analysis and mining of data quality rules. The feature offers collaboration options to enhance the creation process for new data quality rules. Rule mining is enabled for business partners, products, and custom objects.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-MDG-ADQ


14.4.2 Enable Data Quality Management for Business Partner Data

This feature enables you to manage the quality of key master data objects including the ability to define, enforce, monitor, and improve quality. This includes the ability to manage data quality rules and data quality for business partners. You can use data quality rules in change requests for business partners in the SAP Master Data Governance application. Data quality rules can be shared between SAP S/4HANA systems using the import and export apps.

Technical Details

Type New




Cross Components



14.4.3 Extend Scope in Data Quality Management for Product Data

This feature enables you to import and export data quality rules. Rules from rule mining can be added to the rule repository and implemented as data quality rules.

Technical Details

Type New





14.4.4 Deprecated and Successor Apps

The app Configure Score Calculation for Products (F3412) has been deprecated. The following replacement apps are available:

● Configure Data Quality Scores for Product (F4090)

The app Data Quality Rules for Products (F3337) has also been deprecated. The following replacement app is available:

● Manage Master Data Quality Rules (F3820)

Technical Details

Type Deleted






14.4.5 Enable Data Quality Management for Custom Object Data

This feature enables you to manage the quality of key master data objects including the ability to define, enforce, monitor, and improve quality. This includes the ability to manage data quality rules and data quality for custom objects. You can also use data quality rules in change requests for custom objects in the SAP Master Data Governance application. Data quality rules can be shared between SAP S/4HANA systems using the import and export apps.

Technical Details

Type New





14.5 Display Search Models

With this app, you can view a seach model's technical details in a unified way. You can view the artifacts belonging to the search model, such as the CDS view on which the search model is built. fields, ranking, relationship, technical details, hierarchy of the CDS views, and a preview of the search results in raw format.


Cross Components

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-GTF-HSB


Related Information

Display Enterprise Search Models

14.6 Shifted Gregorian Calendar Date

This CDS view enables you to shift the Gregorian calendar by time units.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item J58

Application Component CA-GTF-VDM


Related Information

Shifted Gregorian Calendar Date


https://help.sap.com/viewer/90b263323d0a4976bcda415e6bd20ea4/1909.000/en-US/0f58c1ae4d804b6ea4e00649aa356438.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/30ac3dc617a74510b3de3704a69872e0.html

14.7 Analytics

14.8 Manage KPIs and Reports

With this app, you can create groups, KPIs, reports, and applications to launch directly from the Fiori Launchpad. You can configure metrics to the KPIs and visualize the data either in chart or table format.

The Reports feature has both Generic and Analytical list page visualization. This data analyzation helps the organization to analyze data from different perspectives, investigate root causes, and act accordingly to improve the quantity and quality of the business unit.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CA-GTF-SB-S4H-DT

CA-GTF-SB-S4H-RT



This app replaces these apps in the following catalogs:

● KPI Design○ Create Evaluation○ Configure Drill-Down○ Manage KPI Associations○ KPI Workspace○ Create Tile○ Create KPI

● Report Design○ Create Report○ Create Report Evaluation○ Configure Report Drill-Down○ Report Workspace


Cross Components

○ Publish Report

The above-mentioned apps will be deleted with SAP S/4HANA 1909 FPS02.

Related Information

Manage KPIs and Reports

14.9 Responsibility Management

14.10 Manage Teams and Responsibilities

This feature enables you to group responsible members, who perform specific functions in a business process, as a team. You can refer to these teams, members, and functions in frameworks, such as workflows or situation handling as responsible members to receive focus about specific circumstances or business situations. For example, end users receive a notice about upcoming deadlines, warnings about delays, or are informed about tasks that need to be completed as soon as possible.


● Use the Teams search model and search for teams based on team names and descriptions from the SAP Fiori launchpad.

● Edit inherited responsibility definition values in subteams.● Maintain team owners that are responsible for a team header, responsibility definitions, team members,

and their associated functions● Assign functions to a set of team members at a time.● See the authorization status for functions assigned to team members.● Find and replace a member (Business Partner ID) and associated functions with another member across

teams.If required, you can assign only one of the functions of a selected member to another member across teams. This removes the function from the selected member. You have to choose the category and type to see the list of functions.

● See a list of potential subteams with responsibility definitions that exactly match those of the selected parent team while viewing its hierarchy.

● See changes (old and new values) made to a team definition. However, hierarchical changes are not captured.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/6b356c79dea443c4bbeeaf0865e04207/1909.000/en-US/c00cbf7fe8464663aee830fb6e7eec13.html

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1NJ (Responsibility Determination)

Application Component CA-GTF-RM



● To classify functions for standard team categories, you can configure Classify Functions for Standard Team Category ( Responsibility Management Teams and Responsibilities SAP Delivered Team Categories ).

● To see the authorization status for functions assigned to team members you can configure these ( Responsibility Management Teams and Responsibilities SAP Delivered Team Categories Validate Team Members ):○ Map Functions to Template Roles○ Map Authorization Fields to Responsibility Definitions○ Override Authorization Field Mappings

Related Information

Responsibility Management

14.11 Situation Handling

14.12 New Features for Situation Handling

With these features for Situation Handling, you can now:

● Use many functional and usability enhancements of the Manage Situation Types app, such as using a date picker to delete monitored data, getting previews of the in-app situation messages and notifcations including e-mail, comparing the filter criteria used or available for conditions, and so on.

● Depending on the use case, decide to capture the data context from business situations and to extract it with the Business Situation – Read API for advanced analytics.


Cross Components

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/a4a31dc3e2824cb1afc7be8eafc07f5c.html

● Use rules for determining notification recipients with a reuse component from Responsibility Management.● Use the new My Situations app with which end users can see a list of all the open situations that are

assigned to them, navigate to detail pages with the situation messages, and close situations.● Choose from many new use cases from various business areas, such as Finance, Manufacturing, Sourcing

and Procurement, and so on.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 31N

Application Component CA-SIT



As of SAP S/4HANA 1909, Situation Handling requires a new notification provider. If you have used Situation Handling in a former version, you need to change this configuration setting. For more information, see Notifications.

Related Information

Situation HandlingManage Situation TypesBusiness Situation – ReadResponsibility ManagementMy SituationsConfiguration Settings for Situation Handling


https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/acbd82a011c049f4b133c899c03b33ad.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/516c8ecb7462453ca430a42481cc33ec.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/60748ea9f37d4692912578b698aaefee.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/e31831d5c0934e34a982039cfd389211.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/a4a31dc3e2824cb1afc7be8eafc07f5c.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/67439c313b834f7ca2048da985824faa.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/4333c9a9009e4dad8783cf224a399048.html

14.13 Legal Content Management

14.13.1 Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform Legal Content Assembly

This integration of SAP S/4HANA Cloud Platform Legal Content Assembly with SAP S/4HANA for Legal Content Management enables you to integrate with all core business processes, assemble all types of documents based on templates, text blocks, rules, and simultaneously store all documents in a central online repository. As a legal counsel, you can create and manage legal content that is generated out of various business scenarios in a company, such as procurement processes, sales, policies or intercompany agreements.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2OQ (Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform)

1XV (Legal Content Management)

Application Component LCM-INT


Additional Details

● You can use the Create from Template feature to assemble a virtual document. This feature is available in both Manage Legal Transactions, Request Legal Content and Manage Legal Documents apps.

● You can use the Discard Content feature to delete all the assembled content from a legal document, without deleting the document itself. This feature is available in the Manage Legal Document app.

● You can retry assembly if the assembly of a virtual document fails. This feature is available in both Manage Legal Transactions and Manage Legal Documents app.

● You can edit a virtual document if it is in the In Process status, using the Edit Content button.● You can use the Generate Word File feature to work in a word document that is generated out of the virtual

document.● You can use the Upload File feature to upload a file to the legal document.● You can also filter the virtual documents using two new filters Content Export Status and Assembly Status.● You can restore an existing version of a virtual document to edit the same document. You can either

Restore with the old version of the template or re-generate the document with the latest version of the template.


Cross Components

● You can edit or download a virtual document from the Open Documents card in the Legal Content Overview app.

Related Information

Integration with SAP Cloud Platform Legal Content AssemblyDocumentsRequest Legal ContentManage Legal Transactions

14.13.2 Enhancements in Manage Legal Transactions

With this app, you can define renewal and termination dates for legal transactions in the new facet called Life Cycle. The other new feature is to use Situation Handling in Legal Content Management. You can define situations to notify the legal counsel when the status synchronization of a legal transaction has failed and should be processed to ensure successful synchronization.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Used in Scope Item (Legal Content Management) 1XV

Application Component LCM-LT


Additional Details

● You can now link objects from an external system using the Linked Objects feature.● You can also use the Open Issues hyperlink to view the missing or wrong attributes that affect the status of

the legal transaction.● Use the Create with Reference functionality to create a copy of an existing legal transaction, by defining a

relationship with the source transaction. Defining a relationship provides traceability between the source and target transactions. You can also copy the required header attributes and facets from the source legal transaction. You can use this reference transaction as a template and define other attributes and facets according to your business needs.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3ab5c17f17e48a8b02372ab747f5358/1909.000/en-US/5982ce562df64e2ead6dd4599329a7b7.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3ab5c17f17e48a8b02372ab747f5358/1909.000/en-US/50b9baf5eaf04c7eaba229329ac2418d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3ab5c17f17e48a8b02372ab747f5358/1909.000/en-US/f7879f66905d4d4f90b7706622ebef70.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3ab5c17f17e48a8b02372ab747f5358/1909.000/en-US/b4da421bbb96434dbe199a34bd5ce025.html

● You can even copy task group templates defined in the source legal transaction to the target transaction.● You can view comments added by the task approver in the My Inbox app, under the Task Group in Progress

facet.● Define relationships between multiple legal relationships. You can view all mandatory documents specified

in the related transactions, in the sub-facet Related Required Documents. If configured, you can view Notifications when the status of related legal transactions is synchronized.

● You can use the Copy functionality to create a copy of an existing legal transaction.● While adding a new task step, you can select additional recipient assignments and roles to assign workflow

tasks to specific teams and users. The teams can be configured using Responsibility Management functions in the Manage Teams and Responsibilities app.

● You can select preconditions and add alternative preconditions to be fulfilled, before a workflow task is triggered.

● You can now define how to handle exceptions for rejected workflow tasks, by selecting the required action and the action result.

● While defining the renewal and termination clauses for legal transactions in the Life Cycle facet, you can also select relevant date types in the All Dates sub facet.

Related Information

Manage Legal Transactions

14.13.3 Enhancements in Legal Content Overview

With this app, you can use the new cards to analyze the most important tasks to be processed by you. You can also analyze the pending tasks of your legal transaction, average processing time taken by each task, and task completion of different types of tasks.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item (Legal Content Management) 1XV

Application Component LCM-OVP



Cross Components

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3ab5c17f17e48a8b02372ab747f5358/1909.000/en-US/b4da421bbb96434dbe199a34bd5ce025.html

14.13.4 Enhancements in Categories

With this app, you can now add description to the node category.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component LCM-CAT


14.13.5 Enhancements in Manage Legal Documents

With this app, you can filter all the legal documents using five new filters Main Organization Type, Main Organization, Stamps, Main Entity Type, and Main Entity. You can also assign a Reference Number to the legal document, under the Basic Details section of the Document Information facet in the legal document.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component LCM-DOC


Additional Details

The corresponding fields for the new filters are available under specific groups in the Manage Legal Document application. The groups are Content Details, Basic Details, and Related Details.


14.13.6 Enhancements in Manage Contexts

With this app, you can use the Life Cycle facet to predefine renewal and termination of legal transactions and select the relevant date types. You can predefine relationships between two or more legal transactions and specify the relationship type. You can use enhanced attributes of task steps under recipients, preconditions, and exception handler sub facets.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1XV (Legal Content Management)

Application Component LCM-CTX


Additional Details

● While defining relationships, you can already specify the type of relationship between multiple legal transactions.

● While adding a new task step, you can select additional recipient assignments and roles to assign workflow tasks to specific teams and users. The teams can be configured using Responsibility Management functions in the Manage Teams and Responsibilities app.

● You can select preconditions and add alternative preconditions to be fulfilled, before a workflow task is triggered.

● You can now predefine how to handle exceptions for rejected workflow tasks, by selecting the required action and the action result.

Related Information

Manage Contexts

14.13.7 Enhancements in Request Legal Content

With this app, you can use the Create from Template feature to assemble a virtual document. You can use the Upload File feature to upload a file to the legal document.


Cross Components

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3ab5c17f17e48a8b02372ab747f5358/1909.000/en-US/4cad2a496cb448cba468cc52a5b1020e.html

Technical Details

Type Changed




Application Component LCM-LT


Related Information

Request Legal Content

14.13.8 Manage Legal Tasks

With this app, you can manage tasks that are linked to different legal transactions by forwarding tasks to other agents and notifying agents about pending tasks. You can see all the tasks grouped under the legal transaction from where these workflow tasks were triggered. You can filter the tasks based on task types and agent roles, in addition to all the other common filter types.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component LCM-TSK



https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3ab5c17f17e48a8b02372ab747f5358/1909.000/en-US/f7879f66905d4d4f90b7706622ebef70.html

14.13.9 Customizing and Business Add-Ins for Legal Content Management

New Customizing Activities and Business Add-Ins are available in the SAP Implementation Guide. These configurations enable you to integrate with SAP S/4HANA Cloud Platform Legal Content Assembly.

Technical Details

Type New



2OQ (Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform)



Additional Details

New and Enhanced Customizing Activities and Business Add-Ins


Legal Content Management

Integration Basic Settings

Integration with Legal Content

Assembly

● Assign RFC Destinations

● Enable Switch for Legal Content Assembly

● Define Areas

You can enable the switch for legal content assembly to activate the scope item 2OQ. You can also assign RFC destinations and define areas required to map with the legal content management attributes - Profile, Entity Type (Main Organization Type), and Entity ID (Main Organization).


Cross Components



Integration Variables Define Document Variables

You can define the variable mapping, source CDS Views, and aliases for the document variables.


Business Add-Ins● Integration

Linked Objects

● IntegrationIntegration with Legal Content

Assembly

Variables

● Modify URL for External Linked Objects

● Calculate Custom Linked Objects

● Calculate Custom Variable Fields

● Calculate Custom Variables

use this BAdI to modify the URL for external linked objects, during runtime.

14.13.10 APIs for Integration with Legal Content Management

With these services, you can enable the integration scenario Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform.

Technical Details

Type New




Application Component LCM-INT


Related Information

Legal Document Content Types - ReadLegal Document Access Levels - Read


https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3ab5c17f17e48a8b02372ab747f5358/1909.000/en-US/e34f03bcc967468cb7e4e7f82ddd2476.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3ab5c17f17e48a8b02372ab747f5358/1909.000/en-US/13d3a2eeb9d9431fac2b6173d0d669b2.html

Legal Categories - Read


14.14.1 Situation Handling (31N)

Use

Situation handling recognizes business situations by evaluating conditions (rules) on business facts. A business situation occurs when a business object changes a status relevant to a user, when critical deadlines are passed, or a KPI passes a threshold.

● Situation Handling now supports use cases across LOBs (for example, Procurement, Idea, production, Finance, Cross-Applications and so on)

● Situation Handling can leverage Responsibility Management to determine notification recipient(s) based on responsibility definition and/or business functions.

● Users can navigate from a notification to the affected object to resolve underlying issue.● Inform users about their new situations via e-mail. From the e-mail, end users can navigate to the situation

message, where they can view relevant details.● New My Situations app that serves as single point of entry for displaying all open situations.● New Monitor Situations app that provides insights into the handling of situation instances.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 31N ( Situation Handling )






Cross Components

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e3ab5c17f17e48a8b02372ab747f5358/1909.000/en-US/11df771f86d34a54b3eb2fb1ce146752.html

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F31N

14.14.2 Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform (2OQ)

Use

This scope item describes integration of both applications (Legal content management and Legal content assembly) that can be used to automate creation and assembly of legal content.

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 2OQ ( Legal Content Creation with SAP Cloud Platform )





14.14.3 Output Management (1LQ)

Use


● Output with attachments (print, email)● Merging attachments of type PDF with the rendered form template


http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F2OQ

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1LQ ( Output Management )





14.15 Access Protection for Value Helps

Many additional applications now support to distinguish between granting Display permission to data (usually associated with activity value 03 in authorizations) and granting value help access (usually associated with activity value F4).

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component CA (Cross Applications)




Cross Components

http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https%3A%2F%2Frapid.sap.com%2Fbp%2F%23%2Fbrowse%2Fcategories%2Fsap_s%25254hana%2Fareas%2Fon-premise%2Fpackageversions%2FBP_OP_ENTPR%2FS4HANA%2F1909%2FXX%2F6%2FEN%2Fscopeitems%2F1LQ

Additional Details

While activity Display permits to access the full scope of the respective business object (including access to value helps) activity value F4 only permits access to a value selector and the limited subset of information displayed in the value selector. To achieve this, access protection to value helps were introduced and enhanced authorization proposals for the affected applications are delivered.


Users who neither have Display authorization (usually encoded as activity 03) nor value help access authorization (activity value F4) are no longer permitted to see the value help content.


Default authorization values are delivered by SAP to support the refinement of the authorization concept. Please refer to SAP Note 2792518 and its referenced documents and perform the postprocessing steps as described in SAP Note 1539556 (question 2).

You can omit this activity temporarily by applying SAP Note 2606478 . This introduces the role SAP_NEW_F4 which can be used to grant unrestricted access to value helps.

See Also

For more information about the upgrade process, see the Upgrade Guide for SAP S/4HANA at http://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909.

14.16 SAP CoPilot Skills

Additional skills are available that you can use to interact with SAP CoPilot by simply typing in what you need to accomplish certain tasks.

Technical Details

Type New









Application Component CA (Cross Applications)


Additional Details

For a complete list of skills available in this release, see SAP Note 2818565 .

The types of skills available to you depend on which SAP CoPilot subscription you have. For example, SAP S/4HANA customers that are subscribed to the paid version of SAP CoPilot can use the out of box SAP CoPilot skills that SAP has built for them. If you type Help, SAP CoPilot displays all the skills that are available for you.

Additional Details

For more information about skills, see the SAP CoPilot user help at https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_COPILOT under Digital Assistant.

14.17 Touch Enablement of the Classic UIs (SAP GUI for HTML, Web Dynpro)

With SAP S/4HANA 1909, SAP has started to enable applications running on classic UI technologies (SAP GUI for HTML or Web Dynpro) for usage on touch devices like tablets. This means that you will get access to some additional applications in the SAP Fiori Launchpad when using tablets.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component BC-WD-UR Unified Rendering


Cross Components


https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_COPILOT

https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SAP_COPILOT


Additional Details

As not all applications that are based on classic UI technologies are enabled for touch devices yet, you can get an overview of the enabled applications in the SAP Fiori apps reference library (https://fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com/sap/fix/externalViewer/). To get a list of all relevant applications, proceed as follows:

1. In the SAP Fiori apps reference library, go to All apps and choose the Filter icon at the bottom of the screen.2. Choose the following selection criteria and confirm your selection with OK:

○ Product Suite: SAP S/4HANA○ UI Technology: SAP GUI and Web Dynpro○ Form Factor: Tablet○ Product Version: SAP S/4HANA 1909 (optional)

You get a list of all applications that are already enabled for touch devices.3. Choose List View at the bottom of the screen to get a sorted list, grouped by business roles. You can also

download this list by choosing Download at the bottom of the screen.

NotePlease consider that some user interface controls will work differently when used on a tablet, compared to a desktop application.

For more information on touch-enabled applications and on the supported devices and browsers, see the following SAP Note: 2700517



14.19 What's New in ABAP Platform

ABAP platform is the basis of the SAP S/4HANA product line. To find out what's new in ABAP platform, see the what's new viewer for the ABAP platform.


https://fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com/sap/fix/externalViewer/

https://fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com/sap/fix/externalViewer/


Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component BC


Related Information

ABAP Platform - What's New Viewer


Cross Components

https://help.sap.com/doc/34796706f38646f68d51a0fa0d4636e4/100/en-US/2d00eb02542547dca636bd7f3ea1b917.html

15 Country/Region Specifics

15.1 Austria

15.1.1 Finance

15.1.1.1 Update in VAT Return

You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to create XML files that contain the necessary data to submit your periodical advance return (U30) and your annual return (U1) for tax on sales/purchases. You do so by using the Advanced VAT Return - U30 and the Annual VAT Return - U1 reports. This means that the Create Advance Tax Return File app is no longer supported.

Technical Details

Type Changed

Functional Localization Localized for Austria

Scope Item 1J2 (Advance Compliance Reporting )

J58 (Accounting and Financial Close )

Application Component FI-LOC-FI-AT


Additional Details

If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, you can also use component XX-CSC-AT-FI.

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Country/Region Specifics P U B L I C 751


The Run Compliance Reports app replaces the Create Advance Tax Return Fileapp. We recommend that you switch to the successor app as soon as possible.


Please note that as of release SAP S/4HANA 1909 the Create Advance Tax Return File app will be deleted from the General Ledger - Reporting for Austria (SAP_FIN_BC_GL_REPORTING_AT) business catalog.

15.2 Argentina

15.2.1 Finance

15.2.1.1 Sales and Purchase Print Format

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for Argentina

Scope Item 1J2

Application Component FI-LOC-FI-AR


Additional Details

The government of Argentina by the means of AFIP (Administración Federal de Ingresos Públicos) requires that companies report on demand the amounts of VAT (value-added tax) generated in their sales and purchase operations.

To help companies to effectively report the amounts of VAT generated in their sales and purchase operations, SAP delivers the Sales and Purchase Print Format report (AR_VAT_PRINT), that extracts information from the SAP S/4HANA system and organizes this data in a PDF file that you can submit to AFIP.


Country/Region Specifics

You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the Sales and Purchase Print Format.


● Before you run the Sales and Purchase Print Format, go through the steps of setting up your compliance reporting. To do so, make the required changes in Customizing for Financial Accounting under Advanced Compliance Reporting Setting Up Your Compliance Reporting .

● Check if any other setting or configuration shall be completed for using the Manage Tax Items activity in Manage Tax Items for Legal Reporting .

Related Information

Sales and Purchase Print Format

15.2.1.2 Value Help Authorizations in Argentina


Technical Details

Type Changed

Functional Localization Localized for Argentina

Scope Item 1J2

Application Component FI-LOC-FI-AR


Additional Details

See SAP Note 2801214 for a list of the affected transactions in Argentina.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/3cc1da1e1e364fadb9b1af653a9597d2/1909.000/en-US/003643c406a44c259f0be085f4deb6dd.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/238f821691174c1d9df721487e44deb0/1909.000/en-US/a1aef1b6639a439aa648deb957af3790.html


To ensure that the system works well for your users, we strongly recommend that you perform the postprocessing steps as described in SAP Note 1539556 (question 2) during the upgrade of your system.

Related Information


15.3 Belgium

15.3.1 Cross-Application Functions

15.3.1.1 eDocuments

This feature enables you to use create electronic documents in the eDocument Cockpit (EDOC_COCKPIT transaction) for Belgium.

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for Belgium


Application Component CA-GTF-CSC-EDO-BE



To use the eDocument solution for Belgium, you carry out some of the Customizing activities in Customizing for Cross-Application Components under General Application Functions eDocument . For more information see the product assistance mentioned in the See also section.



Additionally, you carry out Customizing activities specific for Belgium in Customizing for Cross-Application Components under General Application Functions eDocument Country-Specific Settings BelgiumSettings for PEPPOL.

Related Information

eDocument for Belgium

15.4 Brazil

15.4.1 Integration

15.4.1.1 Customizing Activities for Tax Service

You can customize what sales materials and sales and purchase services are relevant or not relevant for Contribuição Previdenciária sobre Receita Bruta (CPRB) contribution.

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for Brazil

Scope Item 43D

Application Component FI-LOC-TXS



Find the new Customizing activities in the following paths:

● Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings BrazilIntegration with SAP Localization Hub, tax service Tax Configurations for Sales Pricing ProceduresDetermine Relevant Sales Materials for CPRB Contribution


https://help.sap.com/viewer/5127da8a114f4f3eb134546b9f1722d0/1909.000/en-US/f36e7b5301704e28a58983c2d4e1f4dd.html

● Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings BrazilIntegration with SAP Localization Hub, tax service Tax Configurations for Sales Pricing ProceduresDetermine Not Relevant Sales Material for CPRB Contribution

● Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings BrazilIntegration with SAP Localization Hub, tax service Tax Configurations for Sales Pricing ProceduresDetermine Relevant Sales Services for CPRB Contribution

● Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings BrazilIntegration with SAP Localization Hub, tax service Tax Configurations for Sales Pricing ProceduresDetermine Not Relevant Sales Services for CPRB Contribution

● Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings BrazilIntegration with SAP Localization Hub, tax service Tax configurations for Tax Procedures Determine Relevant Purchase Services for CPRB Contribution

● Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings BrazilIntegration with SAP Localization Hub, tax service Tax configurations for Tax Procedures Determine Not Relevant Purchase Services for CPRB Contribution

Related Information

SAP Localization Hub, Tax Service

15.4.2 Finance

15.4.2.1 Value Help Authorization in CIAP

SAP has refined the access protection of value helps, resulting in modified authorization proposals for the applications in CIAP.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1J2

Application Component FI-LOC-FI-BR



https://help.sap.com/viewer/p/SLH_tax_service


Additional Details

See SAP Note 2817149 for a list of the affected transactions in CIAP.


To ensure that the system works well for your users, we strongly recommend that you perform the postprocessing steps as described in SAP Note 1539556 (question 2) during the upgrade of your system.

Related Information


15.4.2.2 Enter Bar Code in Supplier Invoices

With this feature, you can display or enter the bar code into journal entries at line item level in the Manage Journal Entries app when you use a company code specific to Brazil. The country-specific extension affects the app on the SAP Fiori launchpad.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-LOC-FI-BR (Financials Brazil)



Related Information

Entering Bar Code in Supplier Invoices

15.4.2.3 EFD-Reinf Report

This feature enables you to collect all the required data for the EFD-Reinf report to generate XML files that you need to submit to the tax authorities through the Run Advanced Compliance Reports app.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1J2



Additional Details

Now you can generate three new EFD-Reinf file categories to the tax authorities:

● EFD-Reinf Periodic Files● EFD-Reinf Closing Files● EFD-Reinf Exclusion Files


Now you can assign tax type and tax code to the EFD-Reinf files in Customizing for Financial Accounting under General Ledger Accounting Periodic Processing Report Statutory Reporting: Brazil Company Settings

EFD-Reinf .



https://help.sap.com/viewer/c5e66d2df826499d9b8c76b8355601c3/1909.000/en-US/9e0b124a517b436bb9f8f94dabd7b0eb.html

Related Information

EFD-Reinf Report

15.4.2.4 EFD Contribuições Report

This feature enables you to collect all the required data for the EFD Contribuições report to generate TXT files that you need to submit to the tax authorities through the Run Advanced Compliance Reports app.

Technical Details

Type Changed


Scope Item 1J2




Now you can define automatic determination to report your nota fiscal through the EFD Contribuições report in Customizing for Financial Accounting under General Ledger Accounting Periodic Processing ReportStatutory Reporting: Brazil Company Settings EFD Contribuições .

Related Information

EFD Contribuições Report


https://help.sap.com/viewer/c5e66d2df826499d9b8c76b8355601c3/1909.000/en-US/5237ab31dac649d193adf54734a16f55.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/c5e66d2df826499d9b8c76b8355601c3/1909.000/en-US/fdaff099805a42e9bc103b369e1001a4.html

15.5 China

15.5.1 Finance

15.5.1.1 Balance Sheet / Income Statement - China

This app has been renamed from Display Financial Statements - China to Balance Sheet / Income Statement - China.

Technical Details

Type Changed

Functional Localization Localized for China


Application Component FI-LOC-FI-CN (Financials China)


Related Information

Balance Sheet / Income Statement - China

15.6 Denmark

15.6.1 Finance

15.6.1.1 VAT Return

You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to create XML files for the VAT Return that fulfill the requirements of the tax authorities in Denmark.



https://help.sap.com/viewer/48b1ed26c54c440abd913f4a174d7b4d/1909.000/en-US/cdd06a5687ebc259e10000000a441470.html

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for Denmark


Application Component FI-LOC-FI-DK


Related Information

VAT Return

15.7 France

15.7.1 Finance

15.7.1.1 VAT Return

The ouput of the VAT Return using the Run Compliance Reports app has been changed to reflect the format provided by the tax authorities:

● The report generates two lists: one with the necessary data for the Form 3310CA3 and another one for the 3310A (Annex) part A.

● These lists show all lines and their descriptions, even the ones for which there is no data.● The lines on these lists are sorted and grouped to match the official ones.● The subtotals are calculated and shown according to the official forms.

Technical Details

Type Changed

Functional Localization Localized for France



https://help.sap.com/viewer/288bed65b624490b9e3f4b14befc67e3/1909.000/en-US/5326a2a15f7c4e2c954e00e746230094.html

Application Component FI-LOC-FI-FR


Additional Details

If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, you can also use component XX-CSC-FR-FI.


In order to generate the output mentioned above, you have to perform the following customizing steps:

1. Go to Customizing (SPRO transaction) under Financial Accounting Advanced Compliance ReportingSetting Up Your Compliance Reporting .

2. In the Set Properties of Reporting Activity activity, limit the validity of the FR_VAT_DCL_V0_S activity key. You do this by changing the Use Until date to 31.03.2019 (or a later date). After this date the new activity (FR_VAT_DCL_V1_S) will be used. Yo do not need to explicitly enter this in the configuration.

15.8 Germany


15.8.1.1 eDocuments

This feature enables you to use create electronic documents in the eDocument Cockpit (EDOC_COCKPIT transaction) for Germany.

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for Germany




Application Component CA-GTF-CSC-EDO-DE




Additionally, you carry out Customizing activities specific for Belgium in Customizing for Cross-Application Components under General Application Functions eDocument Country-Specific Settings GermanySettings for PEPPOL.

Related Information

eDocument for Germany

15.9 India

15.9.1 Finance

15.9.1.1 Bills of Exchange Receivable

With this feature, you can use the following apps for the purpose of processing bills of exchange receivable in India:

● Receive Bills of Exchange● Bill of Exchange List● Bill of Exchange Transactions● Reverse Bills of Exchange Transactions● Printout of Transaction Records


https://help.sap.com/viewer/7abc5246a77344b79ec1b1550d94cf92/1909.000/en-US/073df97f956a47e696233f48624e8742.html

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for India

Scope Item 1WQ (Bill of Exchange)

Application Component FI-LOC-FI-IN


Additional Details

If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-CN-CM-BOE.

Related Information

Receive Bills of ExchangeBill of Exchange ListBill of Exchange TransactionsReverse Bill of Exchange TransactionsPrintout of Transaction Records

15.10 Italy

15.10.1 Finance

15.10.1.1 CUP/CIG Code and MGO ID Extensions

With this feature, you can enter CUP/CIG codes to incoming and outgoing invoices and to journal entries, and the MGO ID to incoming invoices and journal entries when you use a company code specific to Italy. The country-specific extensions affect apps on the SAP Fiori launchpad.



https://help.sap.com/viewer/240fcdcc71c640ea9aa9691500b34889/1909.000/en-US/a233fc861e0c4b24b720e6ddf8bc1476.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/240fcdcc71c640ea9aa9691500b34889/1909.000/en-US/a8e0bd6eca454c7fb7ed3302b09eb4f6.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/240fcdcc71c640ea9aa9691500b34889/1909.000/en-US/2a143229569546f49bb273f26da9b34a.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/240fcdcc71c640ea9aa9691500b34889/1909.000/en-US/15c7ff64de354473adcf153199e06e4e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/240fcdcc71c640ea9aa9691500b34889/1909.000/en-US/2bb7facd940a457cbf02fe4dca798f76.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-LOC-FI-IT (Financials for Italy)


Additional Details

When you enter a company code that is specific to Italy, the following apps on the SAP Fiori launchpad display the CUP, CIG, MGO country-specific fields on their screen where you can enter the codes directly:

● Manage Journal Entries● Create Incoming Invoices● Create Outgoing Invoices

After that, you can insert these data into the RIBA and CGI_CT payment formats.

Related Information

Managing CUP, CIG Codes and MGO IDManaging CUP and CIG Codes

15.11 Japan

15.11.1 Finance

15.11.1.1 VAT Return

Apart from the existing outputs, you can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the Form 3-(1) report that does not generate legal form directly but provide you with the necessary figures when legal declaration forms are prepared.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/f1e4c38694304790ae0dd85345edc05f/1909.000/en-US/866e52aaa96141449733929c0343d26e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f1e4c38694304790ae0dd85345edc05f/1909.000/en-US/c495fd0d03204c4f9b73d1a1a290ec97.html

Technical Details

Type Changed

Functional Localization Localized for Japan


Application Component FI-LOC-FI-JP (Financials Japan)


Related Information

VAT Return

15.12 Mexico

15.12.1 Finance

15.12.1.1 Compensation UUID for Electronic Accounting

The Mexico Compensation UUID for Electronic Accounting (FIGLMX_UUID) field was added to the following apps:

● Post Incoming Payment● Post Outgoing Payment● Manage Journal Entries● Create Incoming Invoices● Create Outgoing Invoices

Technical Details

Type Changed

Functional Localization Localized for Mexico

Scope Item 1J2



https://help.sap.com/viewer/26b08c9979fa435faafcf6033ca0cf93/1909.000/en-US/f620566b54894a83ba03f97b3faf6bf1.html

Application Component FI-LOC-FI-MX


Additional Details

The addition of the Mexico Compensation UUID for Electronic Accounting (FIGLMX_UUID) field to these apps enables you to report the UUID number (unique identifier number of the Comprobante Fiscal Digital por Internet) of your journal entries to Mexican tax authorities through the Journal Entries Details (MX_JE_DETAILS) report in ACR (Advanced Compliance Reporting).

For more details, go to help.sap.com/viewer/product/SAP_S4HANA_ON-PREMISE/ and choose Product Assistance Country/Region Versions Americas Mexico Financial Accounting (FI) Apps for Finance in Mexico Advanced Compliance Reporting for Mexico eAccounting Mexico Compensation UUID for Electronic Accounting .

For more information, refer to 2798781 .

15.13 Netherlands


15.13.1.1 eDocuments

This feature enables you to use create electronic documents in the eDocument Cockpit (EDOC_COCKPIT transaction) for the Netherlands.

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for the Netherlands


Application Component CA-GTF-CSC-EDO-NL



http://help.sap.com/viewer/product/SAP_S4HANA_ON-PREMISE/




Additionally, you carry out Customizing activities specific for Belgium in Customizing for Cross-Application Components under General Application Functions eDocument Country-Specific Settings Netherlands

Settings for PEPPOL.

Related Information

eDocument for the Netherlands

15.14 Norway

15.14.1 Finance


You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to create a list to prepare the VAT return that fulfills the requirements of the tax authorities in Norway.

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for Norway


Application Component FI-LOC-FI-NO




https://help.sap.com/viewer/1975ab970cee4897b52e94c18247466e/1909.000/en-US/45c24f42b31e401d8ed414880bb07369.html

Additional Details

If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, you can also use component XX-CSC-NO-FI.

Related Information

VAT Return

15.14.1.2 Line Items Reports

You can use the Run Advanced Compliance Reports app to generate files that show the details of your G/L account line items, your customer line items and your supplier line items. You can generate these files in a PDF and in a TXT format.

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for Norway


Application Component FI-LOC-FI-NO


Additional Details

If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-NO-FI.

Related Information

G/L Account Line ItemsCustomer Line ItemsSupplier Line Items


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9da51938e0a54f708ebda0b1f44aff05/1909.000/en-US/93cddbe1b6f74e328431c21ea34b566b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9da51938e0a54f708ebda0b1f44aff05/1909.000/en-US/eeab063f92634577b71c36d55a9b1452.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9da51938e0a54f708ebda0b1f44aff05/1909.000/en-US/f423c54f87c8457091655a898c79108a.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9da51938e0a54f708ebda0b1f44aff05/1909.000/en-US/82563b8c00e24e36994d1e48e1278c4d.html

15.15 Poland

15.15.1 Finance

15.15.1.1 Cash Flow Statement

You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the cash flow statement that fulfill the requirements of the government in Poland. You can use the direct method and submit it by year to the tax authorities.

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for Poland


Application Component FI-LOC-FI-PL

(Financials Poland)


Related Information

Cash Flow Statement



https://help.sap.com/viewer/80a58aef89b3425f8c334dc588567789/1909.000/en-US/29a029c2a0d949c3b50b80220a086a4f.html

15.16 South Korea


15.16.1.1 eDocument

15.16.1.1.1 Creation and Sending of Electronic Customer Tax Invoices in XML Format

With this feature, you can create and send electronic customer tax invoices in XML format to an integrated external system, such as another system of your company or a third-party application service provider. Then you use this external system to forward tax invoice XML files to the National Tax Service (NTS) of South Korea.

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for South Korea


Application Component CA-GTF-CSC-EDO-KR (eDocument South Korea)


Additional Details

You can create tax invoices in XML format for the following types of source documents:

Source Document Type Source Application

Invoice, credit memo, cancelation document for invoice Sales and Distribution

Invoice, credit memo, reversal document for invoice Financial Accounting

The following reports are used in processing tax invoices in XML format for South Korea:

Report Function

eDocument Cockpit (transaction code EDOC_COCKPIT) Create, submit, and cancel tax invoices in XML format, including consolidated tax invoices


Report Function

Create Consolidated eDocuments (transaction code EDOC_KR_SUMMARY)

Create consolidated eDocuments, based on which consolidated tax invoices in XML format can be created


When a tax invoice has been validated by the NTS successfully, the system fills the following South Korea-specific fields of the corresponding accounting document in the Manage Journal Entries app, on the Header tab:

● Approval Number: Indicates the electronic tax invoice ID, which is approved by the NTS.● Transfer Date: Indicates the date on which an electronic tax invoice is transferred to and validated by the

NTS.

You can use this data in advanced compliance reporting for South Korea.


You need an external forwarding system to act as a bridge between SAP S/4HANA and the NTS. This external system should be able to communicate with both SAP S/4HANA and the NTS. SAP S/4HANA sends tax invoice XML files to the external system. Then the external system forwards the XML files to the NTS for validation and forwards validation statuses back to SAP S/4HANA. You can integrate SAP S/4HANA and your forwarding system using SOA Manager.


The following authorization objects are required to perform actions on eDocuments:

● EDO_BUK (eDocument: Authorization for Company Code)● EDO_PROC (eDocument: Authorization for Process & Process Step)


You should carry out the following Customizing activities:

● Define Interface Type for eDocument under Cross-Application Components General Application Components eDocument General Settings

● Activate Source Type Documents for Company Code under Cross-Application Components General Application Components eDocument General Settings



● Assign eDocument Type to Accounting Document Type under Cross-Application Components General Application Components eDocument General Settings

● Determine Values for Tax Code under Financial Accounting (New) Financial Accounting Global Settings (New) Tax on Sales/Purchases Basic Settings South Korea Tax Invoices

In addition, you can implement your own logic for eDocument processing by using the Business Add-In Enhancements for eDocument (EDOC_ADAPTOR). You can find it in Customizing for Cross-Application Components under General Application Functions eDocument General Settings Business Add-Ins .

Related Information

eDocument for South Korea

15.16.2 Finance

15.16.2.1 Value-Added Tax (VAT)

You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the Value-Added Tax (VAT) reports that fulfill the requirements of the government in South Korea. Apart from the existing features, the report also generates a new file Acquisition Statement of Depreciation Assets in TXT format. This file classifies the depreciation asset categories into Buildings and Structures, Machinery, Vehicles, and Others. It includes the information of number of acquisition item, net amount of each asset category, tax amount of each asset category, and total of all the categories.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component FI-LOC-FI-KR

(Financials South Korea)



https://help.sap.com/viewer/91ff4cde197c4db0b4a322f74b1cd6c8/1909.000/en-US/b4a3a7c436594ac5abbd112aaca926c8.html

Related Information

VAT Declaration

15.16.2.2 Cash Flow Statements

You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the cash flow statements that fulfill the requirements of the government in South Korea. You can use the direct method or indirect method and submit it by year to the tax authorities.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FI-LOC-FI-KR

(Financials South Korea)


Related Information

Cash Flow Statements

15.17 Spain

15.17.1 Finance

15.17.1.1 Update in Tax Registers

Real Decree 596/2016 in Spain approved a new VAT system called Suministro Inmediato de Información(SII). Therefore, the Modelo 340 form is no longer required. This means that the Generate Form 340 app is no longer supported.



https://help.sap.com/viewer/91ff4cde197c4db0b4a322f74b1cd6c8/1909.000/en-US/21b3991474d4458daacb5659619dbd62.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/91ff4cde197c4db0b4a322f74b1cd6c8/1909.000/en-US/b331e2f4e04645c7aa92103431538d4a.html

For the tax register books for Spain, the Electronic Tax Register Books with SII solution is available. We recommend that you switch to this solution as soon as possible.

Technical Details

Type Changed

Functional Localization Localized for Spain


J58 (Accounting and Financial Close )

Application Component FI-LOC-FI-ES


Additional Details

If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, you can also use component XX-CSC-ES-FI.


The Electronic Tax Register Books with SII solution replaces the Generate Form 340 app. The Generate Form 340 app is no longer supported and will be removed from the system in one of the next Feature Packs of release SAP S/4HANA 1909. We recommend that you switch to the successor solution as soon as possible.


Please note that as of release SAP S/4HANA 1909 the Generate Form 340 app will be deleted from the General Ledger - Reporting for Spain (SAP_FIN_BC_GL_REPORTING_ES) business catalog.


15.18 Switzerland

15.18.1 Finance


The VAT return functionality for Switzerland has been enhanced by providing the following reporting activities:

● Manage Tax Items● Post Tax Payables

The VAT Return report generates now an XML file to comply with the newest legal requirements.

Furthermore, corrections to an already completed VAT return have been enabled by creating a new correction run phase.

You generate the VAT Return for Switzerland using the Run Compliance Reports app.

Technical Details

Type Changed

Functional Localization Localized for Switzerland


Application Component FI-LOC-FI-CH


Additional Details

If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, you can also use component XX-CSC-CH-FI.


In order to generate the XML file mentioned above, you have to perform the following customizing steps:

1. Go to Customizing (SPROtransaction) under Financial Accounting Advance Compliance ReportingSetting Up Your Compliance Reporting

2. In the Set Properties of the Reporting Activity activity, limit the validity of the CH_VAT_DCL_2018_V0_S activity key. You do this by changing the Use Until date to 31.12.2018.



NoteThe CH_VAT_DCL_2018_V0_S activity key corresponds to the old output version with PDF.

3. In the Enter Parameters Specific to Reporting Entity activity, enter a parameter, for example, CH_VAT_COMPANY_NAME.

Related Information

VAT Return

15.18.1.2 QR-Bill in Accounts Payable

With this feature, you can use a new payment slip type that replaces the inpayment slips (ISR). This new payment slip contains not only billing data, but also integrated payment details, a QR code, and a receipt. This new payment slip type is called QR-bill. The current solution is available in the purchase-to-pay process (in the Accounts Payable component) only.

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for Switzerland


Application Component FI-LOC-FI-CH (Financials Switzerland)


Additional Details

The QR-bill contains the QR-IBAN number: the International Bank Account Number (IBAN) that identifies the vendor’s international bank account number that is used during a payment transaction. The QR-IBAN contains the QR-IID (bank identification) in positions 5-9, using a number range from 30000 through 31999. QR-IBAN must be used for payments with a structured reference. The formal structure of this IBAN corresponds to the rules defined in ISO 13616.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/74742d945db64478beba8da532dd9291/1909.000/en-US/8444b6a74f19449fba8136e954bfc378.html

Related Information

Processing QR-Bills

15.19 Thailand

15.19.1 Finance

15.19.1.1 Branch Code

In Thailand, a customer or supplier may have many branches depending on the various locations from where they operate from. A branch code is typically a 4-digit or a 5-digit code assigned by the Revenue Department in Thailand to uniquely identify each branch of a customer or supplier.

The Branch code can be maintained for each business partner master data and the system displays this code at the time of posting sales order, MM invoice, or FI invoice. In case a customer or supplier does not have a branch you can maintain 00000 or 0000 which represents a head office.

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localization for Thailand


Application Component FI-LOC-FI-TH


Additional Details

The Branch Code and Branch Code Description fields have been enabled for the following apps:

● Clear Incoming Payments● Clear Outgoing Payments● Display Customer List● Display Supplier List● Manage Customer Down Payment Requests



https://help.sap.com/viewer/74742d945db64478beba8da532dd9291/1909.000/en-US/a0c3d1301c8f49169d8432392df639dc.html

● Manage Customer Line Items● Manage Journal Entries● Manage Supplier Down Payment Requests● Manage Supplier Line Items● Post General Journal Entries● Post Incoming Payments● Post Outgoing Payments● Reprocess Bank Statement Items

Effects On Data Transfer

You need to maintain branch codes in the master data in the Maintain Business Partner app or in Master Records for accounts receivable or accounts payable in SAP Easy Access menu. Alternatively, you can migrate the brands codes using the migration template in the Migration Cockpit.

Related Information

Branch Code

15.19.1.2 Withholding Tax Report - 50BIS

The Thailand Withholding Tax - PND50BIS report has been enhanced to provide you the ability to generate a report with the information collected from payment documents for business partners. You use the Run Advanced Compliance Reports (tile title Run Compliance Reports) app to generate Thailand withholding tax report.

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for Thailand


Application Component FI-AP-AP-Q1



https://help.sap.com/viewer/7340a09096454b7abf4379f926a21567/1909.000/en-US/498669d6e1484ae89ac1608006b8ab17.html

Related Information

Withholding Tax - 50BIS Report

15.19.1.3 Withholding Tax Report - PND2

The Thailand Withholding Tax - PND2 report has been enhanced to provide you the ability to generate a report with the information collected from payment documents for business partners. You use the Run Advanced Compliance Reports (tile title Run Compliance Reports) app to generate Thailand withholding tax report.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Withholding Tax - PND2 Report



Technical Details

Type New



https://help.sap.com/viewer/7340a09096454b7abf4379f926a21567/1909.000/en-US/2121b45b1cd34d81ab1484ef3233df69.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7340a09096454b7abf4379f926a21567/1909.000/en-US/2a0320f19f1c4fe7a0e95020dd3a0873.html





Related Information




Technical Details

Type New





Related Information



https://help.sap.com/viewer/7340a09096454b7abf4379f926a21567/1909.000/en-US/132573b957b14d108f26ecb80ab857f6.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7340a09096454b7abf4379f926a21567/1909.000/en-US/5812638c16074506974fdd3425da581c.html



Technical Details

Type New





Related Information


15.19.1.7 VAT Return - PP30 Report

With this feature, you no longer have to enter operator's name every time you generate the Thailand VAT Return report (P.P.30 Value Added Tax Return) in the Run Compliance Reports app. Instead, the operator's name can be maintained for once as the value of the parameter FITH_OPERATOR_NAME (Name of VAT Operator) of the reporting entity. This parameter supports 30 characters.

Technical Details

Type Changed






https://help.sap.com/viewer/7340a09096454b7abf4379f926a21567/1909.000/en-US/74a923413bf74f6b8d89201ff9dc6364.html



To maintain the operator's name for the reporting entity, use the Customizing activity Setting Up Your Compliance Reporting under Financial Accounting under Advanced Compliance Reporting .

Related Information

VAT Return - PP30Configuration for VAT Return - PP30

15.19.1.8 VAT Return - PP36 Report

With this feature, you can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the Thailand PP36 VAT Return report (P.P.36 Value Added Tax Return).

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

VAT Return - PP36Configuration for VAT Return - PP36


https://help.sap.com/viewer/7340a09096454b7abf4379f926a21567/1909.000/en-US/38484d7cd13e4b1dae476e5f59411385.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7340a09096454b7abf4379f926a21567/1909.000/en-US/5df3e25333014770bf2611079c1ebadb.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7340a09096454b7abf4379f926a21567/1909.000/en-US/916470b3f9fd4edb83ddc2d514f6ec5c.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/7340a09096454b7abf4379f926a21567/1909.000/en-US/11140f40ee054283bce93113e1f9b882.html

15.19.1.9 Bills of Exchange Receivable

With this feature, you can use the following apps for the purpose of processing bills of exchange receivable in Thailand:

● Receive Bills of Exchange● Bill of Exchange List● Bill of Exchange Transactions● Reverse Bill of Exchange Transactions● Printout of Transaction Records

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1WQ (Bill of Exchange)



Additional Details

If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-CN-CM-BOE.

Related Information

Receive Bills of ExchangeBill of Exchange ListBill of Exchange TransactionsReverse Bill of Exchange TransactionsPrintout of Transaction Records



https://help.sap.com/viewer/46c35b6efea0474d9133479214d4b076/1909.000/en-US/11ce983ecc704e1ebeb78ee495d271b5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/46c35b6efea0474d9133479214d4b076/1909.000/en-US/5e11946f489c42b1bafa635b1b4413ff.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/46c35b6efea0474d9133479214d4b076/1909.000/en-US/673a303abbbe4291ad1953616b26bf80.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/46c35b6efea0474d9133479214d4b076/1909.000/en-US/83596ddfa86945de92291aecc921fdf3.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/46c35b6efea0474d9133479214d4b076/1909.000/en-US/32cf22da82c346b6b0af750931599390.html

15.20 Turkey

15.20.1 Finance

15.20.1.1 E-Ledger

This feature enables you to electronically generate the ledger report in a TEXT file. You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the report.

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for Turkey


Application Component XX-CSC-TR-FI


Related Information

E-Ledger Report

15.21 #United States

15.21.1 Finance

15.21.1.1 Bank Accounting

15.21.1.1.1 Check Management

15.21.1.1.1.1 Reprocess Lockbox Items

You can now reprocess lockbox items in the Reprocess Lockbox Items app.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/7ac703762bba431eb5c0eb915780da8c/1909.000/en-US/399ce3338b414541bf6991d1973e2d9b.html

Technical Details

Type New


Scope Item 1JT



Related Information

Reprocess Lockbox Items



https://help.sap.com/viewer/8999cee59b7c44fdb53fbbb4d703f8e6/1909.000/en-US/f7a097eae71e4393b5d5b1a0180c5eb5.html

16 Industries

16.1 Consumer

16.1.1 Retail and Fashion

16.1.1.1 Value Help Authorizations in Retail

SAP has refined the access protection of value help, resulting in modified authorization proposals.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component LO-RFM (Retail and Fashion)



Additional Details

For a list of the affected applications (transaction codes) in SAP S/4HANA Retail for merchandise management and SAP S/4HANA for fashion and vertical business, please see SAP Note 2588746 .


To ensure smooth system operation for business users, during the upgrade of your system, we strongly recommend that you perform the postprocessing steps described in SAP Note 1539556 .

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Industries P U B L I C 787



Related Information


16.1.1.2 Retail for Merchandise Management

16.1.1.2.1 Advanced Planning in Article Master Records

With this feature you can specify the settings used for advanced planning processes in article master records.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component LO-RFM-MD-ART (Article)

LO-RFM-PP (Production Planning for Fashion)


Additional Details

In earlier releases, it was only possible to enable advanced planning and specify the corresponding settings in the applications used for material management. It is now possible to do this during article master record processing.

If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component LO-RFM-MD-ART.


In the article maintenance apps Create Article (MM41), Change Article, Maintain Article app (MM42), and Display Article (MM43), the following screen sections and fields are now available.


Industries

Basic Data 2Under Advanced Planning: Shelf Life and Storage, you can specify the following settings:

● Maturation Time● Required Maximum Shelf Life● Preferred Alternative UoM for Warehouse Operations

Logistics:DC 2Under Advanced Planning: Control, you can enable advanced planning. Furthermore, you can specify the settings to be used in advanced planning processes in the following screen sections:

● Advanced Planning: PP/DSFor example, you can assign a planning procedure to each article assigned to a specific distribution center (location product) that you want to plan in Production Planning and Detailed Scheduling (PP/DS).

● Advanced Planning: DemandFor example, you can specify which pegging strategy is to be used in demand planning.

● Advanced Planning: Lot SizeFor example, you can specify the target days' supply and the reorder day's supply in the planning of standard lots.

● Advanced Planning: Goods Receipts and Goods IssuesFor example, you can specify the processing times of good receipts and goods issues.

● Advanced Planning: Location-Dependent Shelf LifeYou can specify whether the shelf life of a product should be dependent on its location in planning processes.

16.1.1.2.2 Batch Management in Article Master Records

With this feature you can activate and deactivate batch management for articles at site level in article master records.

Technical Details

Type Changed




LO-BM (Batches)


SAP S/4HANA 1809 FPS03


Additional Details

In earlier releases, it was only possible to activate and deactivate batch management for articles in the basic data of article master records. It is now possible to activate and deactivate batch management for articles at site level in article master records.

If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component LO-RFM-MD-ART.


In the Create Article app (MM41) and the Change Article, Maintain Article app (MM42), in the Logistics: DC view and the Logistics: Store view, you can now set and change the Batch management requirement indicator. In these views, the indicator is set by default in the following cases:

● Batch management is activated in the Basic Data view for an article● Batch management is activated for the corresponding reference site● Batch management has not been deactivated for a site in Customizing

If the level at which batch numbers are unique is specified in Customizing as either Batch unique at material level or Batch unique at client level for a material, in article maintenance, you can now do the following:

● Activate and deactivate batch management in the Basic Data view by using the Batch management requirement indicator.This setting is applied to reference distribution centers and stores when they are assigned to an article master record.

● Activate and deactivate batch management in the Logistics: DC or Logistics: Store view for a reference site.This setting is applied later when distribution centers or stores are assigned to articles based on a reference site.

● Activate and deactivate batch management in the Logistics: DC or Logistics: Store view for a specific distribution center or store.

If the batch level specified in Customizing is Batch unique at plant level, the same logic applies; however, it is not possible to activate batch management in the Basic Data view.


The behavior described is also reflected in ALE data transfer, that is, the same logic is applied to reference handling or considering the default batch settings at plant level.


You specify the level at which batch numbers are unique in Customizing for Logistics – General under Batch Management Specify Batch Level and Activate Status Management .


Industries

You can specify that batch management is deactivated for a site by default in Customizing for Logistics – General under Batch Management Specify Batch Management Default by Plant by setting the Batch Management Not Active by Default indicator. If this indicator is set for a site, this site will not inherit the batch management setting from the article basic data or the article/reference site data. However, users can manually override this Customizing setting in article maintenance by setting the Batch management requirement indicator at site level.

More Information

● SAP Note 2758033● SAP Note 2774749● SAP Note 2787153● SAP Note 2793371

16.1.1.2.3 Enterprise Search for Retail Business Objects

With this feature you can search for sites (stores and distribution centers), promotions, and allocation tables. From the search results area, you can then navigate to a detailed overview of a specific retail business object.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component LO-RFM-MD-ESH (Enterprise Search)

LO-RFM-MD-PR (Seasonal / Promotion Planning)

LO-RFM-MD-SIT (Sites)

LO-RFM-PUR-AL (Allocation)







Additional Details

The SAP Fiori launchpad offers an enterprise search function that searches across all apps and business objects. The search icon is displayed at the top of the screen. When you click the search icon, the type selector and the search field appear.

You can search all objects or use the type selector to search only for objects of a particular type. You then enter your search query in the search field. The search results area lists all objects that match your search query. You can expand and collapse the display area of search results to view more or fewer details.

If you need to create an incident with regard to using enterprise search to search for retail business objects, use component LO-RFM-MD-ESH.


You can now use the type selector to restrict the search to the following retail business objects:

● Stores and distribution centers (objects of type Site)● Promotions (objects of type Promotion)● Allocation tables (objects of type Allocation table)

From the search results area, you can navigate to the object page of a particular retail business object. Depending on the authorization roles to which you are assigned, navigation shortcuts to apps that can handle the business object are also displayed. Furthermore, you can change the sort order, or switch to a table representation with the option to show or hide specific columns.

NoteIf you are not authorized to view a business object in the system, you will not be able to find it by using any search functions. Furthermore, you might need specific permissions or roles to access certain objects.


For information about configuring the enterprise search function, see Setting up Enterprise Search.

16.1.1.2.4 List Product: Exclude Local Assortments

With this feature you can exclude local assortments from listing in the front-end of List Product. This enables master data specialists to decide whether to list local and/or general assortments.


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/90b263323d0a4976bcda415e6bd20ea4/1909.000/en-US/8588b6c3499949149c08e2163e78ca9a.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component LO-MD-RFM-LST



On the user interface of List Product, the List Also Local Assortments checkbox was added. This enables the user to decide whether to exclude local assortments for listing.

If the List Also Local Assortments checkbox is set, local assortments are listed. If the checkbox is not set, local assortments are excluded from listing.


The default value for the checkbox on the front-end is specified in the back-end with the Local Assortments Listing checkbox in Customizing for Logistics General under Basic Data Retail General Control, Retail Master Data .

Related Information

List Product

16.1.1.2.5 Manage Season Completeness: Shared Strategy

By using shared strategy, articles that are common between different seasons and that are ordered, will be considered for season completeness of all seasons they are shared between (under the same grouping rule value) and the details of shared orders will be displayed in the Shared tab.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/fa5cd38f31ab4469a8efbf896375a1c7.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component LO-RFM-CA-SE



The SAP Fiori app Manage Season Completeness is assigned to the predefined role SAP_BR_ORD_FULLFILMNT_SPE_R for the SAP Fiori launchpad.

For information about assigning roles, please see the UI Technology Guide for SAP S/4HANA at https://help.sap.com/s4hana_op_1909 under Product Documentation.

16.1.1.2.6 Mass Season Processing: Automation of Season Data Change

For mass season processing, season data change must be captured. With this feature, relevant order documents will be updated based on season data change.

Technical Details

Type New






Industries




For example, a season that was valid for a list of customers (ex: CUST01, CUST02), is extended for an additional customer (for example CUST03). In Mass Season Processing, you can select the option to update all the order documents which will be affected by this season change. In the sense, all the order documents for the customer (CUST03) will be considered for season redetermination and the relevant document items will be updated (items where seasons are applicable, must be considered).

Similarly, if sales area, region, article assignment etc. are changed for an existing season, then those will be considered for redetermining appropriate seasons.


You have activated the change pointers for message types (RFM_SEASON_PO, RFM_SEASON_PUR_CNTRT, RFM_SEASON_SD) in Customizing for Cross-Application Components under Predefined ALE Business Processes Logistics Logistics <-> External Systems External Transportation Planning Systems Activate Change Management for Master Data .

16.1.1.2.7 Move Products with RFID

With this feature you can move RFID tagged products from one storage location to another storage location, identify the collected products and adjust the stock immediately in both storage locations. The SAP Fiori app Move Products with RFID simplifies all steps involved in moving products between two storage locations by the use of radio frequency identification (RFID) technology. This enables store associates to move products in a store more efficiently.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component LO-RFM-STO-FIO



Additional Details

The app can only be used with an RFID reader as the hardware input device. For more information about how to configure your RFID reader, see RFID Reader under Related Links.


You make the basic settings for Move Products with RFID in Customizing for Logistics – General under Store Operations In-Store Merchandise and Inventory Management – UI5 Apps Move Products with RFID .

Related Information

Move Products with RFIDRFID Reader

16.1.1.2.8 RFID Reader: Signal Strength

With this feature you can adjust the signal strength of an RFID reader that is used in combination with the following RFID-enabled SAP Fiori apps: Transfer Products, Count Products with RFID, and Move Products with RFID. You can select three different signal strengths for RFID reader and adapt them to the specific use cases of the apps.

Technical Details

Type New






You can adapt the default signal strength of RFID readers that are used in combination with RFID-enabled apps on the user interface of the apps in a popover under Signal Strength. You can select the following signal


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/06502acfa9664e3f8d9db6527c1cae32.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/58eefae922ce4f6c81052452c4f57d48.html

strengths: Low, Medium, or High. If the signal strength was adapted successfully, a message toast appears. The signal strength selected on the front-end of the app overrides the default signal strength selected in the back-end until the app is restarted.


You can select a default signal strength for RFID readers that are used in combination with RFID-enabled SAP Fiori apps in the basic customizing settings of the apps under RFID Reader Signal Strength. For Transfer Products, for example, you can select the default signal strength in Customizing for Logistics General under

Store Operations In-Store Merchandise and Inventory Management - UI5 Apps Transfer Products Define Basic Settings for Transfer Products Transfer Products Basic Customizing Settings .

Select one of the following signal strengths in RFID Reader Signal Strength: Low, Medium, or High.

The default signal strength will be used when you start RFID-enabled SAP Fiori apps. After that you can change the signal strength on the user interface of the app. The signal strength selected on the front-end of the app overrides the default signal strength selected in the back-end of the app until the app is restarted.

If you do not change the signal strength in Customizing of the apps, the following default signal strengths will be used:

● Transfer Products: Low● Count Products with RFID: Medium● Move Products with RFID: Low

Related Information

RFID ReaderTransfer ProductsMove Products with RFIDCount Products with RFID

16.1.1.2.9 Schedule Season Completeness

With the apps Schedule Season Completeness - Sales Documents and Schedule Season Completeness - Stock Transport Orders, you can create and schedule background jobs to update the sales documents or the stock transport orders for season completeness for which the season completeness indicator is set. The apps monitor the current status of jobs and notify users when a job is completed. You can view the results of the season completeness check in the application logs.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/58eefae922ce4f6c81052452c4f57d48.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/71f63b716dfd4c239ab42dcb778da021.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/06502acfa9664e3f8d9db6527c1cae32.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/73e55bb7cf714ee29deac4519e0438a9.html

Technical Details

Type New




Available As Of SAP S/4HANA1909


The SAP Fiori apps Schedule Season Completeness - Sales Documents and Schedule Season Completeness - Stock Transport Orders are assigned to the predefined role SAP_BR_ORD_FULLFILMNT_SPE_R for the SAP Fiori launchpad.


Related Information

Schedule Season Completeness - Sales DocumentsSchedule Season Completeness - Stock Transport Orders

16.1.1.2.10 Schedule Season Processing

With this app, you can create and schedule background jobs to redetermine the assigned seasons in existing sales documents, purchase documents and stock transfer documents. The season redetermination reflects any changes made to the current season master data since the previous season determination for a given article. You can view the status and results of the season redetermination in the application log.

Technical Details

Type New



Industries



https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/f31e3f655ad842868d8dbca99c472b32.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/c5cdf0c6a9fc4c6eacc8993470c0fc8f.html





The SAP Fiori app Schedule Season Processing is assigned to the predefined role SAP_BR_ORD_FULLFILMNT_SPE_Rfor the SAP Fiori launchpad.


Related Information

Schedule Season Processing

16.1.1.2.11 Season Master Data: Season Category

With this feature, you can specify a Season Category while creating and/or changing seasons. The Season Category will be used as filtering criteria and as additional information in documents and reports. However, the Season Category is not used in season determination

Create and/or change time periods with the following additional fields: Partner Function and Preferred Delivery Date.

The value specified under customer field will be considered based on the partner function. By default, it will be considered as Sold-To party.

Technical Details

Type New







https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/df76f7a7839a495382ce26a7b323f029.html


Related Information

Season Master Data

16.1.1.2.12 DRFOUT Outbound Implementation for POS

You can use new outbound implementation via transaction DRFOUT (instead of WES outbound implementation or transaction WESOUT) to transfer the product merchandize master data from SAP S/4HANA system to point-of-sale (POS) systems. The data replication framework (DRF) configuration offers a new business object ProductMerchandiseView. Using DRFOUT transaction you to create one or more outbound messages and send them in bulk to the target POS systems.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component LO-RFM-IFC-OUT


Additional Details

If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component LO-RFM-IFC.


If you have more than one POS systems in your system landscape, you need to define a new replication model in DRF customizing. It is possible to send the master data to different business systems within one replication model; however, we recommend installing different POS servers for a different group of stores. This means you need to define a replication model per target POS system.


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/4fe1ea57875cbd12e10000000a4450e5.html

As an administrator you can define the replication model directly in the corresponding IMG or by using maintenance transaction /DRFIMG.

Related Information

Merchandize Data Replication in POS SystemSOAP API for Product Merchandise View [page 801]

16.1.1.2.13 SOAP API for Product Merchandise View

With the asynchronous outbound service Product Merchandise View – Replicate (ProductMerchandiseViewReplicationBulkRequest_Out), you can send product master data, sales price information, and additional information, such as purchase price information and bills of material, to point-of-sale (POS) systems.

The bulk structure of the message type allows you to transfer a larger number of product instances in one message. The replication process needs to be triggered by a corresponding outbound implementation from an outbound replication framework such as the Data Replication Framework (DRF).

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Product Merchandise View – Replicate


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/7bf5f26f1072434e9d323d68e2e5fe9d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/089fa77326cd4dcab06f9dfb8599c50d.html

16.1.1.2.14 Transfer Products: External IDs for Handling Units

With this feature, store associates can provide external IDs for handling units (Boxes) in Transfer Products when sending products from a store to another store or distribution center.

Technical Details

Type New






Store associates can specify an external handling unit ID on the user interface of Transfer Products. The external handling unit ID is displayed on the user interface of the app in a popover under Handling Unit.


To specify an external handling unit ID on the front-end of Transfer Products, implement controller extension point extHookGetExternalHandlingUnitNumber. For more information, see the SAP Fiori apps reference library at https://fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com/sap/fix/externalViewer/index.html?appId=F2449 under Implementation Information Extensibility UI Controller Extensions .

Related Information

Transfer Products

16.1.1.2.15 Transfer Products: Multiple Storage Locations

With this feature, store associates can specify in Transfer Products from which storage location in a store products will are sent to another store or distribution center.


Industries

https://fioriappslibrary.hana.ondemand.com/sap/fix/externalViewer/index.html?appId=F2449


Technical Details

Type New






You specify a sending storage location on the user interface of Transfer Products when you create a new transfer under Sending Storage Location. If a store has only one storage location, this storage location is used as sending storage location per default. If a store has at least two storage locations, you must specify one of the storage locations as sending storage location. The sending storage location is displayed in the header of a transfer.

Related Information

Transfer Products

16.1.1.3 Fashion and Vertical Business

16.1.1.3.1 VAS Plant Capability

With this feature you can define all the possible plants for a VAS service-subservice combination which can cater to these services during the order lifecycle process. This feature allows you to maintain the valid plant details for VAS Service – VAS Subservices, that is, whether a plant can cater to this VAS service-subservice combination within the documents.

Technical Details

Type New





Application Component LO-RFM-SD

LO-RFM-PUR


Additional Details

You can activate the verifiability of the valid plant details in the sales order and stock transport order documents and issue a corresponding warning message.

Creating a delivery is not allowed for sales orders and stock transport orders that contain non-capable value-added services.


To use this feature, you need to activate the business function ISR_RETAILSYSTEM.

For more information on the business function, see Retail.


The Enable VAS Plant Capability Check checkbox allows you to validate VAS capability for a plant when VAS is entered manually or during VAS determination.

For sales documents, select the Enable VAS Plant Capability Check checkbox in Customizing for Sales and Distribution under Sales Sales Documents Sales Document Header Maintain Sales Document Types for Fashion Management .

For deliveries, select the Enable VAS Plant Capability Check checkbox in Customizing for Logistics Execution under Shipping Deliveries Define Delivery Types for Fashion Management

Related Information

VAS Plant Capability


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/77c07c8d30664260a0b3ff864e6b5e78/1909.000/en-US/d8968357e4879f2de10000000a44147b.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/d8eb0eada126448b9936a8715133a39b.html

16.1.1.3.2 Purchase Order Generation

With this feature you can transform or procure the total sales demand of seasonal products for the wholesale and retail channel by generating one or more purchase orders based on the rules.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component LO-RFM-PUR


Additional Details

The Purchase Order Generation Tool is a mass procurement tool to generate purchase orders based on actual demand coming from sales events or sales campaigns and assortment planning.





To use the Purchase Order Generation Tool, on the SAP Easy Access Retailing (transaction W10M) menu, choose Cross-Application Functions Purchase Order Generation Purchase Order Generation Tool .

You can directly access the report using the transaction FSH_POGT.

The Purchase Order Generation related configuration is available in Customizing for Logistics – General under Fashion Management Cross-Applications Purchase Order Generation .



Related Information

Purchase Order Generation

16.1.1.3.3 Alignment of Account Assigned Purchase Requisitions to Purchase Orders

With this feature you can assign open account assigned purchase requisitions to available purchase orders in the system. You enable the system to consume existing purchase orders efficiently to fulfil the demand of open account assigned purchase requisitions instead of creating new account assigned purchase order items every time.

Technical Details

Type New









You can use the PO Workbench to align open account assigned purchase requisitions to freely available POs based on the configured business rules defined in the system.

To use PO Workbench, on the SAP Easy Access Retailing (transaction W10M) menu, choose Cross-Application Functions Materials Management Purchase Order Mass Maintenance .

You can directly access the report using the transaction FSH_PWB.


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/8a6892706d114bbcab052d498a28b010.html


Related Information

Alignment of Account Assigned Purchase Requisitions to Purchase Orders

16.1.1.3.4 Multi-Level Contract Enablement

With this feature you can create multiple purchase contracts with reference to a purchase contract.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

With this feature, you can create multi-level contracts with various levels of detail for an article in various planning phases. With this capability, you can reserve capacity of vendor early in the planning phase, with the visibility of very few details like the generic article and the quantity in a referenced contract.





You can enable the multi-level contract feature in Customizing for Materials Management under PurchasingContract Maintain Document Types for Fashion .


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/1319458c31c0429dbed1f9ec733c171b.html


Related Information

Multi-Level Contract Enablement

16.1.1.3.5 Contract Consumption of Structured Article Components

With this feature, you can enable the system to consume structured article components present inside the purchase order from the reference purchase contract items.

Technical Details

Type New









The Allow Consumption of Contract checkbox in Customizing for Materials Management under PurchasingPurchase Order Maintain Purchasing Document Types for Fashion Management allows the structured

article components to consume the reference contract items.

The Allow Determination of Contract checkbox in Customizing for Materials Management under Purchasing Purchase Order Maintain Purchasing Document Types for Fashion Management enables the

automatic determination of relevant purchase contract items for the components of structured articles.


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/59984e7a04994ef3a6f922d1c333e69b.html


Related Information

Contract Consumption of Structured Article Components

16.1.1.3.6 OData Service for Alignment of Purchase Requisition Item to Purchase Order Item

With this feature you can use API_ALIGN_PURREQN service interface to align an account assigned third-party order (TPO) or individual purchase order (PTO) purchase requisition item to an existing purchase order item.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You must provide the necessary input details such as purchase requisition, purchase requisition item, purchase order and purchase order item in the interface. Before saving, the service validates the information to ensure the consistency of the parameters.

You can also use this service to align multiple purchase requisition items to a single or multiple purchase order items.





https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/bb18fc9720004dca8972a4170113f650.html


Related Information

OData Service for Alignment of Purchase Requisition Item to Purchase Order Item

16.1.1.3.7 VAS Enhancement in OData API for Deliveries

With this feature you can use the properties added pertaining to value-added services related to inbound and outbound deliveries for SAP S/4HANA for fashion and vertical business in Delivery APIs.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component LO-RFM-CA


Additional Details

Value-added service has been added to the following Delivery APIs:

● API_INBOUND_DELIVERY_SRV_0002● API_OUTBOUND_DELIVERY_SRV_0002




Related Information

Inbound Deliveries - Read, Create, Update, and DeleteAPI_INBOUND_DELIVERY_SRV - A_InbDeliveryValAddedSrvc


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/5fdc3663bb454b8f94430c58b8f4fa26.html


https://help.sap.com/viewer/2f36056ae9a044bba55bcbad204b7bc5/1909.000/en-US/d10ec16c462a44a7be6c6721c9bb0a93.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/2f36056ae9a044bba55bcbad204b7bc5/1909.000/en-US/9697fd79c6ea4e9eb6ca3b237969aa90.html

Outbound Deliveries - Read, Create, Update, and DeleteAPI_OUTBOUND_DELIVERY_SRV - A_OutbDeliveryValAddedSrvc

16.1.1.3.8 Schedule Alignment

With this transactional application you can schedule jobs to execute the alignment runs based on the predefined alignment business rules.

Technical Details

Type New






Use the following business catalog, group, and role to access the corresponding apps from SAP Fiori home page:

Business Group Business Catalog Business Role

SAP_RFM_BCG_PURCHASER SAP_RFM_BC_PURCHASER SAP_BR_PURCHASER_RFM

Related Information

Schedule Alignment

16.1.1.3.9 Monitor Alignment

With this transactional application you can view and analyze the results of background alignment runs that were scheduled using the Schedule Alignment application.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/2f36056ae9a044bba55bcbad204b7bc5/1909.000/en-US/4bec9116ac56435ca1332e4a75998d51.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/2f36056ae9a044bba55bcbad204b7bc5/1909.000/en-US/de8c933a22c9433189952152da1b2f8e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/817f2018bfb14180ba5a98b825282333.html

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

The Monitor Alignment application provides you all the information relevant to the above alignment run of different purchase requisition documents.





Related Information

Monitor Alignment

16.1.1.3.10 Schedule Deletion of Alignment Run Logs

With this transactional application you can create and schedule jobs to delete the logs of different alignment runs.


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/89bd17c813a84305bcbcf160f9bbd607.html

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

Once the logs have been deleted, the results for these runs are not displayed in the Monitor Alignment and Schedule Alignment applications.





Related Information

Schedule Deletion of Alignment Run Logs

16.1.1.3.11 Workflow Events Handling in Supply Assignment

Use workflow events to trigger the tasks when the orders are unassigned or partially unassigned in cross applications. Additionally, system triggers the workflow events when the orders are deviated from the exception rule triggered in the background mode of Insight to Action (ITA) tool in supply assignment.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/47f3ae9cf7e54dd08697e47de15dd736.html

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component LO-RFM-ARN


Additional Details

If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component LO-RFM-ARN.


Workflow events are part of SAP Business Workflow.


Activate Supply Assignment (ARun) (SUPPLY_ASSIGNMENT_01) business function to use this feature.

Related Information

Workflow Events

16.1.1.3.12 Configure Supply Sort Rules

This transactional application allows you to create static or dynamic sort attributes for a supply sort rule. The supply sort rules defined using this app are used during supply assignment in backorder processing (BOP), insight to action (ITA), or immediate assignment processes.


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/77c07c8d30664260a0b3ff864e6b5e78/1909.000/en-US/8f5e14e242b74d42bada1c39c57fe291.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/657baf890741413aaa3508b930b4e4a2.html

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You can access these apps from SAP Fiori launchpad using the following business catalog, group, and role.

● Business Catalog: SAP_RFM_BC_ORDR_FF_MNGR● Business Group: SAP_RFM_BCG_ORDR_FF_MNGR● Business Role: SAP_BR_ORDER_FULFILLMNT_MNGR or SAP_BR_ORDER_FULFILLMNT_MNGR_R


Using ARUN_STKSORT transaction, you used to create static supply sort rules. The user interface for transaction ARUN_STKSORT has been reworked for usability reasons and the new Configure Supply Sort Rule app allows you to create both static and dynamic sort rules.

Related Information

Configure Supply Sort Rule

16.1.1.3.13 Dynamic Supply Prioritization

You can use this feature to prioritize different supply types so that the supply with the highest priority is assigned first. Dynamic supply prioritization is applicable to the physical supply and the future supply.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/b719be2856844285b1c53ecfb7d3f5f9.html

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details


Related Information

Supply Sorting Rules

16.1.1.3.14 Supply Demand Overview for All Documents

With this analytical application you can view and analyze the overall situation of all the supply and demand documents.

Technical Details

Type New






Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/6ea64ba8dfc54c03babe5818797c2365.html

Additional Details


● Business Catalog: SAP_RFM_BC_SUPPDEMNDOVW● Business Group: SAP_RFM_BCG_SUPPDEMNDOVW● Business Role: SAP_BR_ORDER_FULFILLMNT_MNGR_R


Related Information

Supply Demand Overview - All Documents

16.1.1.3.15 Schedule Temporary Assignments

With this transactional app you can configure and schedule jobs for temporary assignments.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details


● Business Catalog: SAP_RFM_BC_SUPPDEMNDOVW● Business Group: SAP_RFM_BCG_SUPPDEMNDOVW● Business Role: SAP_BR_ORDER_FULFILLMNT_MNGR_R



https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/d5587f3cca4f42ac90e6d4b807cf75b5.html

Related Information

Schedule Temporary Assignments

16.2 Discrete Manufacturing

16.3 Energy & Natural Resources

16.3.1 Oil & Gas

16.3.1.1 Logistics Cost

With this feature you can calculate the logistics costs by simulating a shipment cost document. Additional customizing is provided so that:

● If relevant partners are not known, a default pricing procedure can be assigned per shipment cost item.● Fields related to partners in the nomination can be mapped to shipment cost partner roles.

The logistics cost is integrated with the Scheduling Assistant, Inventory Planning Workbench (IPW) and Supply Chain Visualization applications.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component IS-OIL-DS-TSW



You can make the settings for logistics cost in Customizing under:

● Industry Solution Oil & Gas (Downstream) TD (Transportation and Distribution) TD Bulk ShipmentShipment Costs- Maintain item category with pricing procedure for logistics cost calculation.


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/9905622a5c1f49ba84e9076fc83a9c2c/1909.000/en-US/8cc25aa2d5dd4bac8284ab0eaddc29dd.html

● Industry Solution Oil & Gas (Downstream) TSW (Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench) Basic Functions Defaulting Fields to Partner Functions for Logistics Cost Simulation.

16.3.1.2 Scheduling Assistant

With this feature you can fulfill any given demand either a nomination or simulation. This app presents the scheduler with a list of the feasible sources of supply. The list shows whether the source is from own stock or from a purchase, the material or purchase price, the associated simulated logistics costs, the duration based on mode of transport and the proposed loading date. The list is ranked by cost. The scheduler can make the final decision by selecting from the sources of supply suggested by the app to fulfill the demand and complete the respective nomination or simulation in the backend system.

The feature is also integrated with Inventory Planning Workbench (IPW), where the same functions can be invoked by selecting a nomination demand line or simulation.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

You can also use this app to perform following functions

● To view the list of open demands from various sources.● Provides an option to capture a new demand line


You make settings in Customizing for Scheduling Assistant under Industry Solution Oil & Gas (Downstream) TSW (Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench) Nomination Fiori Apps for Trader's and Scheduler's

Workbench Scheduling Assistant Define Load/Discharge Movements.


The BAdI can be implemented in Customizing under Industry Solution Oil & Gas (Downstream) TSW (Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench) Nomination Fiori Apps for Trader's and Scheduler's WorkbenchScheduling Assistant Business Add-Ins.

To use Scheduling Assistant the following configuration must be maintained:

● Maintain Default Pricing procedure for each item category underIndustry Solution Oil & Gas (Downstream) TD (Transportation and Distribution) TD Bulk Shipment

Shipment Costs Maintain Item Category with Pricing Proc. for Logistics Cost Calculation● Maintain Default fields for Partner function under

Industry Solution Oil & Gas (Downstream) TSW (Trader's and Scheduler's Workbench) Basic Functions Defaulting Fields to Partner Functions for Logistics Cost Simulation

16.3.1.3 Laytime and Demurrage

With this feature you can initiate the accrual process for the calculated demurrage amount. Once the demurrage amount is calculated in the system ,negotiation starts for settlement of demurrage amount. During the negotiation phase, accruals will be done for the amount calculated as demurrage. The process is integrated with the standard accrual engine. An accrual object is created based on the trip header and item number. The accrual process begins based on the predefined set of rules for the accrual object.

A claims object OIT01_CLAIM is provided to capture the demurrage claims and correspondence.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component IS-OIL-DS-CMH



You can make the settings for Accruals in Customizing under, Financial Accounting (New) General Ledger Accounting (New) Business Transactions Accruals Management Accruals Mangement with the Accrual Engine


Industries

16.3.1.4 Supply Chain Visualization

This feature enables you to view:

● The inventory graph of Heel, Capacity, Target and Safety Inventory● Inventory calculation per valuation type● Open purchase and sale contract at location and their breakdown as per quantity schedule● Handling rebrand materials and its intergation with IPW● Shipment cost● Combined view of nomination and simulation

Technical Details

Type Changed





16.3.1.5 Mobile Event Data Capture

With this feature you can use the hybrid mobile application to capture the details of actuals events for a nomination line item. This app is useful to the terminal operator who captures actual event for load or discharge line item and sends the information to backend system where it gets updated in the corresponding nomination line item. This has offline features where the nominations downloaded when online is captured with the details of actual events even as the mobile device is offline in the field.

Technical Details

Type New






Additional Details

You can use this fetaure to perform the following functions:

● To update the existing event with actual details.● Create new events for selected nomination line item.

16.3.1.6 Integration of Pricing based Exchange Fees with SAP Commodity Management

This feature enables you to set-up the exchanges fees within standard pricing conditions in sales and purchasing documents. It provides an integration option into Commodity Management (CM) and the optional usage of the Commodity Pricing Engine (CPE) for stock-market related exchange fees. When using CPE, Exchange Fees conditions are referenced to a statistical CPE condition in regular pricing and ExchangeAgreements are marked as pricing based fee in the Exchange Header.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component IS-OIL-DS-EXG



Industries

16.3.2 Utilities

16.3.2.1 Customer Management

16.3.2.1.1 Utilities Sales Contract Overview

This feature enables you to display a list of utilities sales contracts for a business partner and a premise as follows:

● Visualize all utilities sales contracts as well as the respective contract details such as contract data and product information.

● Visualize all items of a utilities sales contract in a hierarchical tree.● Create new utilities sales contracts.● Use sort orders to sort a current result list.● Use filters to filter a current result list.● Start guided processes with one-click actions:

○ Move to another premise○ Change product○ New contract item○ End contract item

● Sorts, filters and one-click actions are fully configurable in Customizing without additional coding.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component CRM-S4-IU



You make the basic settings for guided processes in Customizing under SAP Utilities Customer Management Utilities Sales Contract Management General Process Definition .

You can change and configure the sorts, filters and one-click actions in the utilities sales contract overview in Customizing under SAP Utilities Customer Management Settings for the Object Workbench Define Object Hierarchy and Object Attributes .


Related Information

Utilities Sales Contract ManagementUtilities Product Integration Layer

16.3.2.1.2 Utilities Sales Contract Management: Start Contract

This feature enables you to start a new contract as follows:

● Select a business partner and a premise.● Start the guided process New Contractin utilities sales contract overview.● Select a contract start date an and a point of delivery.● If the point of delivery is occupied, perform a forced move-out by selecting the flag for the checkbox Forced

Move-Out.● Select a product.● If it is a configurable product, then configure the product.● Select a contract account.● Check the entered data in a summary view.● Save your entries and create a utilities sales contract. In addition, the system automatically creates an IS-U

contract and a move-in is performed.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Start ContractUtilities Product Integration Layer


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/021b182b0c47416c8fafed67ebfd78a9/1909.000/en-US/f007af538a704be786a85f96cd4fc80d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5369e276f6a44dc59cc84eef461146e1/1909.000/en-US/7dacf1a1cce046a9855a29c2bf998719.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/021b182b0c47416c8fafed67ebfd78a9/1909.000/en-US/0cb72772e4be474682dc39794615046d.html


16.3.2.1.3 Utilities Sales Contract Management: Move to Another Premise

This feature enables you to end contracts for a confirmed premise and then start contracts for a new premise as follows:

● Select a business partner and a premise.● Select a utilities sales contract in utilities sales contract overview and start the guided process via one-click

action.● Select a contract end date for the current utilities sales contract.● Search for the new premise with HANA Free Text search.● Select a contract start date and a point of delivery.● If the point of delivery is occupied, perform a forced move-out by selecting the flag for the checkbox Forced

Move-Out.● Select a product.● If it is a configurable product, then configure the product.● Select a contract account.● Check the entered data in a summary view.● Save your entries and create a new utilities sales contract item with the new end date.

In SAP IS-U a move-in and a move-out with all changes are performed automatically.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Move to Another PremiseUtilities Product Integration Layer


https://help.sap.com/viewer/021b182b0c47416c8fafed67ebfd78a9/1909.000/en-US/765e05fb115041a4b6fdaee3e349f333.html


16.3.2.1.4 Utilities Sales Contract Management: Change Product

This feature enables you to change the product assignment as follows:

● Select a business partner and a premise.● Select a utilities sales contract in utilities sales contract overview and start the guided process via one-click

action.● Select a new product and a product change date.● Check the entered data in a summary view.● Save your entries and create a new utilities sales contract item which includes the changed product and

the new contract start date.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Change ProductUtilities Product Integration Layer

16.3.2.1.5 Utilities Sales Contract Management: End Contract

This feature enables you to end a contract as follows:

● Select a business partner and a premise.● Select a utilities sales contract item in utilities sales contract overview and start the guided process via

one-click action.● Select a contract end date.● Check the entered data in a summary view.● Save your entries and end the utilities sales contract item. The IS-U contract is terminated automatically

and a move-out is performed.


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/021b182b0c47416c8fafed67ebfd78a9/1909.000/en-US/a52afb0b98f44abcb25e6e38bbcfdc66.html


Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

End Contract

16.3.2.1.6 Utilities Sales Contract Management: Simplified Guided Procedure Configuration

This feature enables the administrator to configure the guided processes for utilities sales contract management as follows:

● Create and define the necessary process steps for utilities sales contract management.● Define the sequence of the individual steps.● Flag the steps as mandatory or optional.● Define dependencies by setting the requirements for individual steps.● Guided procedures can be set up by Customizing without additional coding.

Technical Details

Type New






https://help.sap.com/viewer/021b182b0c47416c8fafed67ebfd78a9/1909.000/en-US/0199c06f92af42c381b190e5c4f8f709.html


You make the basic settings for guided procedures in Customizing under SAP Utilities Customer Management Utilities Sales Contract Management General Process Definition .

Related Information

Guided Procedure Configuration

16.3.2.1.7 Utilities Sales Contract Management: Summaries

This feature enables you to have a Customer 360° overview and process summaries during utilities sales contract management which provides:

● Configurable Customer 360° BOL trees● Business partner summary● Process summary● Content is dynamically generated during process● Content is fully configurable without additional coding

Technical Details

Type New






The summary content is dynamically generated during a process and is configurable in Customizing under SAP Utilities Customer Management Utilities Sales Contract Management General Process

Definition .

The summaries are configurable in transaction SO10 and can be assigned in the process Customizing settings for Utilities Sales Contract Management.


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/021b182b0c47416c8fafed67ebfd78a9/1909.000/en-US/e3b7fd5dbf3a4ba29cd9be6fd38b1da7.html

You can change and configure the Customer 360° BOL trees in the utilities sales contract overview in Customizing under SAP Utilities Customer Management Settings for the Object Workbench Define Object Hierarchy and Object Attributes .

Related Information

Summaries

16.3.2.2 Contract Billing

16.3.2.2.1 Product Integration

16.3.2.2.1.1 Utilities Product Integration Layer

This feature enables you to use an interface to the SAP S/4HANA Utilities solution to automate the translation of a commodity product defined in an external system into billing master data and sales master data in SAP S/4HANA Utilities. Customers can use their existing rate category and billing schema by way of a framework that enables flexible mapping between SAP S/4HANA Utilities rate operands and the attributes of the product. The mapped product attributes are stored as operand values.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component IS-U-BI-PI (Utilities Product Integration Layer)


Additional Details

● Enables product managers to create commodity products without dependency on IT billing experts● Shortens the time-to-market for new commodity products by automating the manual steps required in

SAP S/4HANA Utilities


https://help.sap.com/viewer/021b182b0c47416c8fafed67ebfd78a9/1909.000/en-US/75fe3d7d0d7d4a9eadc224bf2f8df16a.html

● Enables intuitive integration of external products tools into SAP S/4HANA Utilities


In Customizing, you can define the mapping of commodity product attributes to billing master data. For more information, see Customizing for Define Mapping of Commodity Product Attributes to Billing Master Data under

SAP Utilities Contract Billing Product Integration .

Related Information

Utilities Product Integration Layer

16.3.2.2.1.1.1 OData APIs – Utilities Product Integration Layer

With this feature you can use a service that enables operations for commodity product definition and billing simulation.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Utilities Product Integration Layer API


Industries


https://help.sap.com/viewer/40896f4c8dbb4105afe517381a62eded/1909.000/en-US/6db82361f0b1446fb04ce1f56ac48eff.html

16.3.2.2.1.1.2 CDS Views for the Utilities Product Integration Layer

CDS (Core Data Services) views are released for the Utilities Product Integration Layer.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

● C_UtilitiesProductYou can use this CDS view to obtain information about a utilities product.

● C_UtilsReferenceProductYou can use this CDS view to obtain information about a reference product.

Related Information

C_UtilitiesProductC_UtilsReferenceProduct

16.3.2.3 Customer Service

16.3.2.3.1 S/4HANA Utilities Multichannel: Managing Utility Contracts

This feature has been changed to enable the customer to manage their utilities sales contracts in the following ways:

● Start a sales contract


https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/3991c047868c4f7e8e2cd06da088c088.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/57b24bc776ad4733943166638e1dec47.html

● End a sales contract

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component IS-U-CS-MC


Related Information

SalesContractEndSalesContract

16.3.3 Machine Learning for Implausible Meter Readings

This product feature provides specific capabilities to enable machine learning-based processing for implausible meter readings. It is seamlessly integrated in meter reading processing in IS-U, learns from the meter reading and consumption history, and provides the capability to determine a machine learning release confidence used to automate the release of implausible meter readings.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component IS-U-DM-MR



Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f4a255a5de524e3992155767996fb1fd/1909.000/en-US/b4e174514f5c4acea3a63a1e254341f7.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/f4a255a5de524e3992155767996fb1fd/1909.000/en-US/e195a824a54a427593c829254f633b21.html

Additional Details

The predictive analytics scenario UTI_MR_IMPLAUSIBLE can be trained on your data and will produce a consumable machine learning model. You can execute the prediction and release meter reading documents automatically with a release confidence above a provided threshold. Several filters to search and limit the processed meter readings can be applied, to manage the risk and meter reading segments to be included or excluded. The release confidence is also provided in the Fiori app Resolve Implausible Meter Readings (F2185).

Roles and Business Catalog

The role Analytics Specialist (SAP_BR_ANALYTICS_SPECIALIST) is required to access the predictive scenario and model, and for training and model evaluation using the predictive analytics apps.

The Fiori app Resolve Implausible Meter Readings is available for the role Meter Data Specialist (Utilities) (SAP_BR_METERDATA_SPEC_ISU) and is assigned to the business catalog Utilities - Meter Reading (SAP_ISU_BC_MTRD_SPECIALIST).

Related Links

For more information about this feature and the FIORI apps in the SAP Utilities area, see

● Machine Learning for SAP Utilities● Resolve Implausible Meter Readings

16.3.4 Machine Learning for Outsorted Billing Documents

This product feature provides specific capabilities to enable machine learning-based processing for outsorted billing documents. It is seamlessly integrated in the billing process in IS-U, learns from the billing document history, and provides the capability to determine a machine learning release used to automate the release of billing documents.

Technical Details

Type New




https://help.sap.com/viewer/021b182b0c47416c8fafed67ebfd78a9/1909.000/en-US/b851f6579d3ebd12e10000000a4450e5.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e688c39484924d11961e87616f8338fa/1909.000/en-US/93361926b09241f7ab14832e14b0265a.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/021b182b0c47416c8fafed67ebfd78a9/1909.000/en-US/b851f6579d3ebd12e10000000a4450e5.html

Application Component IS-U-BI


Additional Details

The predictive analytics scenario UTI_BI_OUTSORTED can be trained on your data and will produce a consumable machine learning model. You can execute the prediction and automated release after billing is finished. Several filters to search and limit the processed contracts can be applied, to manage the risk and customer segments to be included or excluded. The release confidence is also provided in the Fiori app Resolve Outsorted Billing Documents (F2986).

Roles and Business Catalog

The role Analytics Specialist (SAP_BR_ANALYTICS_SPECIALIST) is required to access the predictive scenario and model, and for training and model evaluation using the predictive analytics apps.

The Fiori app Resolve Outsorted Billing Documents is available for the role Billing Specialist (Utilities) (SAP_BR_BILLING_SPECIALIST_ISU) and is assigned to the business catalog Utilities Billing (SAP_ISU_BC_BIL_SPECIALIST).

Related Links

For more information about this feature and the FIORI apps in the SAP Utilities area, see

● Machine Learning for SAP Utilities● Resolve Outsorted Billing Documents


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/021b182b0c47416c8fafed67ebfd78a9/1909.000/en-US/e668f657772ebc12e10000000a4450e5.html


https://help.sap.com/viewer/e688c39484924d11961e87616f8338fa/1909.000/en-US/93361926b09241f7ab14832e14b0265a.html


16.4 Financial Services

16.4.1 Banking

16.4.1.1 Reserve for Bad Debt (FS-RBD)

16.4.1.1.1 Realization of Legal Requirements (POCI, Novation, Modification)

This function fulfills the following legal requirements according to IFRS9:

● Purchased or originated credit-impaired assets (POCI)● Novation● Modification

For more information, see Additional Details.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FS-RBD, FS-RBD-IPX


Required Business Functions /IBX/EAFS_RBD, /IBX/EAFS_RBD_IPX

Additional Details

● Purchased or originated credit-impaired (POCI) indicates financial transactions that were already depreciated at purchase. These transactions need to be considered separately in their own risk provision step. As a result of the retroactive implementation of the POCI handling, there are financial instruments in the position from RBD and RBD-ipx that are not yet assigned to the correct risk provision step. A potential risk provision position is cleared via the new flow type "Outflow Due to POCI", so that it is handled in the POCI risk provision step. If a contract is assigned to the POCI risk provision step, it will no longer leave this step, even if it fulfills the assignment criteria for another step.

● In the valuation of a financial instrument, if the present values of the cash flows differ by more than 10%, or the currency changes, we speak of novation. A retirement of the risk provision due to novation is posted,


and an acquisition due to novation takes place. The acquisitions can take place in the same or a different risk provision step. Since the contracts affected by the novation should be handled as new contracts, the imported initial comparative data (initial rating and initial default probability) is redefined.

● In the valuation of a financial instrument, if the present values of the cash flows differ by 10% or less, we speak of modification. A modification amount calculated outside of RBD is cleared with the imported time slices, and so represents the change to the risk provision due to the modification. A reduction or increase of the risk provision due to modification is posted.

16.4.1.2 Loans Management (FS-CML)

16.4.1.2.1 Customizing Structure

The structure of Customizing for Loans Management (FS-CML) has changed. To transfer these changes to the project Customizing, you need to re-generate the project Customizing.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component FS-CML (Loans Management)


New Customizing Activities

● SAP Banking Loans Management Functions Rollover:○ Assign Rollover Tables to Cluster for Rating Procedure

● SAP Banking Loans Management Tools Intelligent Loans Management:○ Define Internal Keys○ Creation of Grouping Procedure and Object Settings○ Default Setting For Grouping Procedure

● SAP Banking Loans Management BAdIs for Enterprise Services BAdIs for Business Object LoanContract:○ BAdIs for Interface Loan Contract In_V2

○ BAdI for CreateLoanContractAsBulk


Industries

○ BAdI for UpdateLoanContractAsBulk○ BAdIs for Interface Loan Contract Out_V2

○ BAdI for ConfirmLoanContractCreationAsBulk○ BAdI for ConfirmLoanContractUpdateAsBulk

○ BAdIs for Interface Manage Loan Contract In_V1○ BAdI for RetrieveLoanContract○ BAdI for CheckLoanContractCreation○ BAdI for CheckLoanContractUpdate

● SAP Banking Loans Management BAdIs for Enterprise Services BAdIs for Business Object LoanContractProlongationQuotation○ BAdIs for Interface Manage Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation In_V1

○ BAdI for Check Quotation Creation○ BAdI for Check Quotation Variant Creation○ BAdI for CheckQuotationVariantUpdate○ BAdI for Retrieve Prolongation Quotation

○ BAdIs for Interface Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation Action In_V1○ BAdI for CheckQuotationAcceptance○ BAdI for CalculateQuotationVariant○ BAdI for Check Quotation Variant Rejection○ BAdI for CheckQuotationRejection○ BAdI for Retrieve Prolongation Quotation

○ BAdIs for Interface Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation In_V1○ BAdI for CreateQuotationAsBulk○ BAdI for CreateQuotationVariantAsBulk○ BAdI for UpdateQuotationVariantAsBulk○ BAdI for AcceptQuotationAsBulk○ BAdI for RejectQuotationAsBulk○ BAdI for RejectQuotationVariantAsBulk○ BAdI for CancelQuotationAsBulk

○ BAdIs for Interface Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation Out_V1○ BAdI for ConfirmQuotationCreationAsBulk○ BAdI for ConfirmQuotationVariantCreationAsBulk○ BAdI for ConfirmQuotationVariantUpdateAsBulk○ BAdI for ConfirmQuotationAcceptanceAsBulk○ BAdI for ConfirmQuotationRejectionAsBulk○ BAdI for ConfirmQuotationVariantRejectionAsBulk○ BAdI for ConfirmQuotationCancellationAsBulk

For more information, see the documentation for the Customizing activities.

Customizing Activities moved from CMS to CML

The following Customizing activities were moved from Collateral Management to SAP Banking Loans Management Basic Settings Integration with Collateral Management :


● Define RFC Destination● Assign RFC Destination to Default Implementation● Map Product Category to Product Class● Map Loan Attributes to Product● Map Company Code to Receivable Organizational Unit● Map FS Business Partner Roles to CM Partner Function● Assign Access Mode to Credit System

16.4.1.2.2 Area Menu Structure

The SAP Easy Access menu for Loans Management has changed.

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component FS-CML (Loans Management


New Transactions

From the SAP Easy Access screen, choose Loans Management Environment Intelligent Loans Management :

● Generate Machine Learning Objects● Train Model

Related Information

Tailor-made Rollover Offer


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/99fb46a79ab241d5984df80fe7a9aa32/1909.000/en-US/dcda238cfaf24d58bdf808d9e7ba4ced.html

16.4.1.2.3 Using Machine Learning in Mass Rollovers to Tailor Rollover Offers

In SAP Loans Management for Banking, SAP S/4HANA edition, you can now use machine learning to offer your customers tailored loan contract rollovers at the end of a fixed interest period after you have processed the rollovers in a mass run. Although you can process a rollover individually, the mass run can also be used for individual rollovers to save time and avoid manual processing. Since a mass rollover may not reflect the status of the borrower in terms of rating, credit standing and payment behavior, two new reports are available that use predictive analytics to help you make rollover offers based on these criteria.

These reports enable you to cluster borrower data and to analyze past payment behavior of a borrower, for example, by looking at the number of dunning cases. This can support your bank's decision-making process in determining whether a customer with excellent credit standing and payment behavior can be offered better conditions; likewise it is easier to determine whether a customer needs to pay a surcharge as a result of poor credit standing or previous bad payment behavior. Additionally, the intelligent mass run capabilities can help you to reduce the number of individual rollovers that need to be processed.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

To call these reports, choose Accounting Bank Applications Loans Management Environment Intelligent Loans Management Generate Machine Learning Objects and Train Model from the SAP Easy Access screen.

For more information about the SAP HANA Predictive Analytics Library, see the SAP Help Portal at https://help.sap.com/ and search for SAP HANA Predictive Analysis Library.


To configure this function, you need to make settings in Customizing for SAP Banking by choosing the following:


https://help.sap.com/

https://help.sap.com/

● Loans Management Tools Intelligent Loans Management

● Loans Management Functions Rollover Assign Rollover Tables to Cluster for Rating Procedure

Related Information

RolloverTailor-made Rollover Offer

16.4.1.2.4 CDS Views for SAP Loans Management for Banking, SAP S/4HANA edition

Core Data Services (CDS) views for SAP Loans Management for Banking, SAP S/4HANA edition have now been released.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

The following CDS views are now available:

● Planned Items for Loan Contract (I_LoanContrPlndItm)● Condition Header for Loan Contract (I_LoanContrCndnHdr)● Change Pointer for Loan Contract (I_LoanContrChgPointer)● Business Partner Relationship Data for Loan Contract (I_LoanContrBusPartRelshp)● Loan Master Data with Business Partner Details (I_LoanContrBP)● Actual Document Item for Loan Contract (I_LoanContrActlDocItm)● Actual Document Header for Loan Contract (I_LoanContrActlDocHdr)



Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/99fb46a79ab241d5984df80fe7a9aa32/1909.000/en-US/dda7e253d5e1424de10000000a174cb4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/99fb46a79ab241d5984df80fe7a9aa32/1909.000/en-US/dcda238cfaf24d58bdf808d9e7ba4ced.html

Related Information

View BrowserPlanned Items for Loan ContractCondition Header for Loan ContractBusiness Partner Relationship Data for Loan ContractChange Pointer for Loan ContractLoan Master Data with Business Partner DetailsActual Document Item for Loan ContractActual Document Header for Loan Contract

16.4.1.2.5 Enterprise Services

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FS-CML


New Enterprise ServicesNamespace: http://sap.com/xi/FS-CML/Global2

The following new Enterprise Services are available:

● Loan Contract (business object)○ Loan Contract In_V2 (service interface)

○ Create Loan Contract As Bulk○ Update Loan Contract As Bulk

○ Loan Contract Out_V2 (service interface)○ Confirm Loan Contract Creation As Bulk○ Confirm Loan Contract Update As Bulk

○ Manage Loan Contract In_V1 (service interface)○ Retrieve Loan Contract○ Check Loan Contract Creation○ Check Loan Contract Update

● Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation (business object)○ Manage Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation In_V1 (service interface)

○ Check Quotation Creation○ Check Quotation Variant Creation



https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/7d6ddaf1df8148fa97dc7a84d944376d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/faa0a262f5f446b9b4789428236008cf.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/c2ae1085bd19481992d064e2e9b94ab3.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/00eff85e15464e5d8bb15c60f639c8ac.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/cf22886a71d84e51afb46d3ab35ae71e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/b219f63527f94b21b4593ca1f8513408.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/8308e6d301d54584a33cd04a9861bc52/1909.000/en-US/07de91e34b8f487eb6663fdb92a80ce9.html

○ Check Quotation Variant Update○ Retrieve Prolongation Quotation

○ Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation Action In_V1 (service interface)○ Check Quotation Acceptance○ Calculate Quotation Variant○ Check Quotation Variant Rejection○ Check Quotation Rejection○ Check Quotation Cancellation

○ Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation In_V1 (service interface)○ Create Quotation as Bulk○ Create Quotation Variant as Bulk○ Update Quotation Variant as Bulk○ Accept Quotation as Bulk○ Reject Quotation as Bulk○ Reject Quotation Variant as Bulk○ Cancel Quotation as Bulk

○ Loan Contract Prolongation Quotation Out_V1 (service interface)○ Confirm Quotation Creation as Bulk○ Confirm Quotation Variant Creation as Bulk○ Confirm Quotation Variant Update as Bulk○ Confirm Quotation Acceptance as Bulk○ Confirm Quotation Rejection as Bulk○ Confirm Quotation Variant Rejection as Bulk○ Confirm Quotation Cancellation as Bulk

16.4.2 Insurance

16.4.2.1 Policy Management

16.4.2.1.1 End-to-End Scenarios for International Auto Insurance Product

16.4.2.1.1.1 RFM Calculating an Anonymous Quotation in New Business

You can use the new remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_NBQUOTE_CALCULATE to calculate a premium for a New Business quotation.

The user enters his or her data for a New Business quotation in an external system, such as an insurance comparison portal. FS-PM returns a premium calculation in the new RFM without the need to have the master data for business partner, insurance object or commission contract, or commission role stored on the database. The user only needs to enter the premium-relevant data in the external system, such as the age of


Industries

the driver for a vehicle quotation, but no further business partner data, such as name and address. This allows premiums to be calculated quickly and efficiently.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FS-PM-BP-NB


Effects On System Administration

Note the following for the RFM /PM0/ABT_SVC_NBQUOTE_CALCULATE:

● The import parameters of the function module indicate which data is potentially relevant for the premium calculation.Depending on the contract for which a premium calculation is to be performed, less data may be required. For example, reported data only needs to be specified for contracts that support reported values.

● To enable a fast premium calculation, in the standard delivery the following functions are deactivated in the RFM:○ Correspondence○ Charges○ Reinsurance○ Interfaces (Organizational Management, Portfolio Assignment)○ Checks (such as cardinality checks)○ Derivations

If you want to use the functions mentioned above for your premium calculation, you must implement the Business Add-In (BAdI) /PM0/ABP_DEACTIVATOR_BADI (see below "Effects On Customizing " -> "Activating Deactivated Functions (BAdI /PM0/ABP_DEACTIVATOR_BADI").

For more information about the RFM and the difference to the already existing RFM , see the documentation of the /PM0/ABT_SVC_NBQUOTE_CALCULATE function module.



Activating Deactivated Functions (BAdI /PM0/ABP_DEACTIVATOR_BADI)

In Customizing for SAP Insurance, choose Policy Management Integration Services Remote-Enabled Function Modules New Business BAdI: Reactivate Functions for New Business Quotation Calculation .

NoteSAP tests the RFM only with deactivated components. Therefore you must check yourself if activating components with the BAdI would lead to conflicts with customer-specific developments or BAdI implementations.

Deactivating Check and Derive Rules

Check if you use Check&Derive rules for business partner data, insured object, or commission contract and commission roles for the New Business business process. Since Check&Derive rules generally access stored master data, you need to deactivate these rules.

To do so, in Customizing for SAP Insurance under Policy Management In-Force Business ManagementBasis Business Processes Business Rules Check&Derive , execute the Customizing activities Deactivate Check&Derive Rules for Business Transactions and Deactivate Check&Derive Rules for Entities. For the required rules, select the Deactivate Quotation Calculation checkbox.

Further Import Parameters for Premium Calculation

If you require further data for the premium calculation (in addition to the import parameters defined in RFM /PM0/ABT_SVC_NBQUOTE_CALCULATE), implement the Business Add-In /PM0/ABT_SVC_INPI_CREATE_BADI (BAdI: Create Application/Policy (Extension In/Out)) (Customizing path:

SAP Insurance Policy Management Integration Services Remote-Enabled Function Modules New Business BAdI: Create Application/Policy (Extension In/Out) .

Further Return Parameters from Premium Calculation

If the function module /PM0/ABT_SVC_NBQUOTE_CALCULATE is to return additional data from the premium calculation, implement the Business Add-In /PM0/ABT_SVC_INPI_CREATE_BADI (BAdI: Create Application/Policy (Extension In/Out)) (Customizing path: SAP Insurance Policy Management Integration Services

Remote-Enabled Function Modules New Business BAdI: Calculate New Business Quotation (Extension Out)

16.4.2.1.1.2 New Sample Sales Product "Auto International"

A new sample sales product "Auto International" is available, which is based on the product engine SAP Product Lifecycle Management for Services Industries (FS-PRO). This sample product supports the object type "Passenger Vehicle International".


Industries

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FS-PMA


Additional Details

If you use FS-PRO as your product engine and wish to use the sales product "Auto International", you can create your own products based on this sample product.

You can create and process a policy for this sales product using the standard business transactions and remote function modules (RFMs) of FS-PM Auto line of business.

You can use the following business processes for the international sales product:

● New Business● Change● Inquiry● Reversal● Reset

You can use the following business transactions and corresponding remote-enabled function modules (RFMs) for the international sales product:

● Change Payment Frequency (RFM /PM0/ABT_SVC_PMD_CHANGE)● Change Premium Payer (RFM /PM0/ABT_SVC_PPY_AMD)● Edit Insured Object (RFM /PM0/ABT_SVC_SBJ_AMD)

16.4.2.1.1.3 Improved Reusability of the Product Engine Adapter for FS-PRO

The adapter that is used by the interface for calling the rating service of FS-PRO can now be reused more easily for more than one line of business, in particular for Auto.

This improvement enables the faster implementation of a new FS-PRO adapter for a line of business (such as Auto) and the faster addition of customer fields to FS-PM entities.


Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component FS-PM-IT-PE


Additional Details

The adapter converts the data from the business object (policy) in FS-PM to a different format. For each business object entity (such as a coverage) for which data is being converted, the adapter provides SERIALIZE-methods for the forward path from the business object to the rating engine and GET_RESULTS-methods for the return path. Through the new inheritance concept of the adapter, you can now reuse the relevant parts of the P&C implementation of the adapter for other lines of business such as Auto.

The mapping class maps the data to the payload of the webservice provided by FS-PRO. This part is now generic through using dynamic typization. Therefore, it can still be used if the structure of the payload changes or if customers add new fields to FS-PM entities according to the enhancement guide.

The name of the proxy and its input structure are now configurable in FS-PM, meaning that you can replace them with customer-specific content.

16.4.2.1.1.4 Integration of FS-PM Auto Line of Business with Product Engine FS-PRO

You can use this function to rate a product of the Auto line of business in SAP Product Lifecycle Management for Services Industries (FS-PRO). You can rate entities in the functional scope of the sample product "Passenger Vehicle International".

Technical Details

Type New




Industries



16.4.2.1.1.5 Specification of Named Drivers in Insured Object

You can use this function to enter one or more named drivers in an insured object of the object category 44401 - Vehicle. For each named driver, you can enter the following additional information:

● Driver category (main driver/occasional driver)● Driver's license number● Driver's license date

You can add, remove, and change named drivers with the business transaction Edit Insured Object and also with the corresponding remote-enabled function module (RFM) (/PM0/ABT_SVC_SBJ_AMD).

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

Edit Insured Object - Auto

16.4.2.1.1.6 Insurable Object for Object Type "Passenger Vehicle International"

You can use the new object type "Passenger Vehicle International" to create an insurable object.


https://help.sap.com/viewer/5bec6e0df6b549258e7ae381fedd4066/1909.000/en-US/e1ac2d530eeff963e10000000a4450e5.html

Technical Details

Type New

Functional Localization Localized for all countries apart from DE/AT




Additional Details

You can define the following information in the sample dialog for the object type "Passenger Vehicle International":

● License Plate● Vehicle Identification Number● Make● Category● Construction Year● Usage

The following functions are available for the Auto line of business in the dialog of Object Management:

● Create Insurable Object● Change Insurable Object● Shift Start Date of Insurable Object● Reverse Insurable Object

You can also use the remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_IO_CREATE to create an insurable object of the object typ "Passenger Vehicle International" (see the section RFMs for Auto Line of Business).

Related Information

RFMs for Auto Line of BusinessRFMs for Insurable ObjectCreating Insurable Objects (Auto)Specification of Named Drivers in Insured Object [page 847]


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5bec6e0df6b549258e7ae381fedd4066/1909.000/en-US/c03f9a21f8074abca225e6d69522575d.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5bec6e0df6b549258e7ae381fedd4066/1909.000/en-US/95242335e99d4600b0db8211a6d73fa4.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/5bec6e0df6b549258e7ae381fedd4066/1909.000/en-US/7da92d530eeff963e10000000a4450e5.html

16.4.2.1.1.7 Joint Customizing for Make, Model, Category, and Rating Year

To define a vehicle in Policy Management (FS-PM), you can now use the same criteria used in Claims Management (FS-CM): make, model, category, and rating year.

You can use the rating year to further differentiate a vehicle. This allows an external system, such as SAP Product Lifecycle Management for Services Industries (FS-PRO), to set a different rating for different rating years.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FS-PM



You enter the rating year in Customizing for SAP Insurance under Claims Management Claim Business Settings Damaged and Insured Objects/Diagnoses Damaged and Insured Objects/Injured Persons Define Makes and Models . Choose Make Model Category Year .

16.4.2.1.1.8 Reversal as a Reaction to Dunning

With this feature you can schedule and execute the automatic reversal of a contract without a surrender value if a dunning level (determined by FS-CD) has been reached in Collections & Disbursements (FS-CD). The new time model function DUNCANCEL is available to enable you to do this.

You can schedule the reversal, thereby specifying the input data and effective date of the reversal, by implementing the Business Add-In (BAdI) /PM0/ABP_CD_REACTINFOCONTAINER (BAdI: Reaction to FS-CD Dunning Through Info Container).

If there is a surrender value for the contract, it cannot be reversed and Policy Management (FS-PM) creates a claim for the current effective date.


Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FS-PM-IT-CD



● You need to assign the time model function DUNCANCEL to the required product components. In Customizing for SAP Insurance choose Policy Management In-Force Business Management BasisUpdate Time Model Define Execution Criteria for Time Model Functions .

TipWe recommend that you do not define a second, conflicting reaction such as time model function DUNLEVEL to reached dunning levels.

● If the time model function DUNCANCEL is to be assigned for products in the Life line of business, the system needs to check whether the contract has a surrender value. In such cases, a claim is created. To enable this check and the creation of a claim, you need to assign loss event type and cause of loss for this claim with this time model function. In Customizing for SAP Insurance choose Policy Management In-Force Business Management Basis Update Time Model Assign Time Model Functions to Loss Event Type and Cause of Loss .

● You need to specify the dunning procedure. In Customizing for SAP Insurance choose Collections and Disbursements Business Transactions Dunning Dunning by Dunning Procedure Configure Dunning Procedure .

16.4.2.1.2 Integrated Change Business Process with Underwriting Capabilities

16.4.2.1.2.1 Stateful RFC Communication for Change Requests

Remote-enabled function modules (RFMs) that are used for change requests can now process change request sessions. The RFMs can now open change request sessions and transfer an ID for the change request session.


Industries

Technical Details

Type Changed



Application Component FS-PM-BP-CH


Additional Details

This enables you to do the following:

● Simulate the execution of multiple business transactions for the same change request● Execute this simulation faster because you do not need to save the intermediate results in the database

NoteA change request session can be kept open in one RFC session only. It is not possible for two RFC sessions to access the same change request session.

16.4.2.1.2.2 External Change Options

External change options are created in external systems. With this feature you can use remote-enabled function modules (RFMs) to create and manage external change options from Policy Management (FS-PM).

Technical Details

Type New






Additional Details

You can use an external change option as a preliminary step for creating a standard change request. It is possible to have more than one external change option for a policy, which enables you to provide alternatives to the customer. As this is not the case for a standard change request, only one of these external change options can be converted to a standard change request for further processing. All other external change options are implicitly cancelled or refused.

You can also postdate external change options, which is useful, for example, if you want to execute a business transaction such as shifting funds but do not yet know the fund prices.

There are two new policy status values in the application journal to denote external change options:

● 170 (External Change Option)● 180 (Postdated External Change Option)

These are also included in the application statuses in the results list of the business process Central Access.

Stateful RFC communication is supported for external change options.

The following new RFMs are available:

● /PM0/ABT_SVC_CHGOPTREQ_CRT (Create External Change Option)● /PM0/ABT_SVC_CHGOPTREQ_SIMEXEC (Simulate Release of External Change Option)● /PM0/ABT_SVC_CHGOPTREQ_ACCEPT (Accept External Change Option)


Existing RFMs have also been updated to enable you to process external change options.


In Customizing for SAP Insurance, the following new Business Add-Ins (BAdI) are available for customer enhancements under Policy Management Integration Services Remote-Enabled Function ModulesChange :

● BAdI: Create an External Change Option (ExtensionOut)● BAdI: Request Simulation of CBC Amount for External Change Options

16.4.2.1.2.3 RFM Returning List of Business Transactions for Change Business Process

You can use the remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_CHGBTXLIST_GET to find out which remote-enabled business transactions are available for an application in the Change business process when you change an application outside of Policy Management (FS-PM) and to evaluate the executability of those


Industries

business transactions. There are many factors that need to be considered in this evaluation. This RFM makes it easier to evaluate what is possible in the Change business from outside of FS-PM.

Technical Details

Type New






The Business Add-In (BAdI) /PM0/ABT_SVC_CHGBTXLIST_BADI BAdI: Determine Business Transactions for a Change Request) enables you to change the list of business transactions returned by the system for a business transaction in the Change business process. In Customizing for SAP Insurance, choose Policy ManagementIntegration Services Remote-Enabled Function Modules Change BAdI: Determine Business Transactions for a Change Request .

16.4.2.1.2.4 RFM Returning Properties of Business Transactions in Change Business

The new remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_CHGBTXPROPS_GET (Get Properties for Remote-Enabled Change Business Transactions) enables you to access settings for the Change business process in Developer Customizing (transaction /PM0/CUST_INT) from outside of Policy Management (FS-PM).

Technical Details

Type New






Additional Details

This RFM enables improved integration of external systems. External systems such as a quotation management system (for example, FS-QUO) can use these settings to decide the following:

● Which input fields are potentially available for a given business transaction● What the name of the related RFM for a given business transaction is and the names of the input

parameters● Which business transactions in FS-PM are needed to make the same changes that were made on an

external UI. For example, on the external UI, the sum insured was changed. In FS-PM, the equivalent business transaction is Change Benefit Premium. The external UI knows that this is the correct business transaction because it knows that the Sum Insured field is an input field for that business transaction.The RFM can be called at design time, meaning that the business transaction properties can be stored in the external system and accessed locally at run time.Alternatively, the external system calls the RFM at run time with a caching mechanism, meaning that only the properties for a limited number of business transactions need to be read.The RFM returns the following data:○ Basic properties of the required remote-enabled business transactions○ Properties of input fields for all entities that can be changed by those business transactions


You can restrict the amount of data returned by using a filter for the business transaction ID or the line of business. The RFM returns data for your specified business transactions and a list of input fields for your specified line of business. In Customizing for SAP Insurance, choose Policy Management IntegrationServices Remote-Enabled Function Modules Remote-Enabled Function Modules Change BAdI: Return Properties of Change BTXs (ExtensionOut) . For more information, see the documentation of the remote-enabled function module.

16.4.2.1.3 New RFMs for LoB Auto

16.4.2.1.3.1 RFMs for New Business for Auto Line of Business

You can call the following remote-enabled function modules (RFMs) from the New Business Process for Auto policies:


Industries

● Create and Process New Business Application● Read New Business Application● Change New Business Application● Calculate New Business Application● Change and Calculate New Business Application

Technical Details

Type New





Remote-Enabled Function Modules

You can use the following RFMs to create, process, and change New Business applications of an Auto policy:

RFM Technical Name

Create and Process New Business Application /PM0/ABT_SVC_INPI_CREATE

Read New Business Application /PM0/ABT_SVC_INPI_RETRIEVE

Change New Business Application /PM0/ABT_SVC_INPI_CHANGE

Calculate New Business Application /PM0/ABT_SVC_INPI_CALCULATE

Change and Calculate New Business Application /PM0/ABT_SVC_INPI_CHANGE_CALC

Related Information

RFMs for New BusinessRFMs for Auto Line of Business


https://help.sap.com/viewer/5bec6e0df6b549258e7ae381fedd4066/1909.000/en-US/6f7bc8a896184b5c9bed285bf0f7f7b0.html


16.4.2.1.3.2 RFM Create and Process Contract for Auto Products

You can use the remote-enabled function module (RMF) /PM0/ABT_SVC_POLPR_CRT to create Auto contracts for an existing policy in the Change business process

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information

RFMs for Auto Line of Business

16.4.2.1.3.3 RFM Create and Process Coverage Packages for Auto Products

You can use the remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_BTX_COVPAC_AMD to create coverage packages for an Auto contract in the Change business process.

Technical Details

Type New





Industries



Related Information


16.4.2.1.3.4 RFM Create and Process Coverage for Auto Products

You can use the remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_SCV_ICL to create coverages for an Auto contract in the Change business process.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information


16.4.2.1.3.5 RFM Policy/Contract Reversal for Auto Products

You can use the remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_CANCEL to reverse an Auto policy, and also to reverse single or multiple contracts of it, specifying various parameters.




Technical Details

Type New





Related Information


16.4.2.1.3.6 RFM Read Reversal Request for Policies for Auto Products

You can use the remote-enabled function module (RFM) /PM0/ABT_SVC_CANCREQ_RTRV to read the data of a reversal request for an Auto policy.

Technical Details

Type New





Related Information



Industries



16.4.2.1.4 New Business Transactions for LoB Auto

16.4.2.1.4.1 Change Duration Business Transaction for Auto Products

With this function, you can use the Change Duration business transaction in the Change business process for Auto contracts in order to adjust the contract end. The main due date is derived from the new contract end.

You can execute the business transaction either in dialog mode or in the background. The business transaction can be executed with postdating, and it can be reimplemented.

Technical Details

Type New





Additional Details

The adjustment of the main due date as a result of the Change Duration business transaction derives the bonus-malus rating, if required.

Restriction

The system does not offer the Change Duration business transaction for Auto contracts if the contract is suspended, or if it contains an insured object with a season indicator, or if the extension variant is set to "No Extension".


16.4.2.1.5 Group Insurance

16.4.2.1.5.1 Sample Application Processing via Master Policy

This feature enables you to directly handle sample applications from within a master policy itself.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FS-PMG


Additional Details

Tab page Sample Application is provided in programs related to processing of master policies (transactions /PM0/ABC_MPO_G*) for executing the following actions on sample applications, such as

● Create● Change● Display● Copy● Lock● Unlock

16.4.2.2 Claims Management

16.4.2.2.1 Rating Year of a Vehicle

You can use this function to enter the rating year for a vehicle in addition to the manufacturer, model, and category. You can use the rating year to further differentiate a vehicle. For example, this enables an external system such as SAP Product Lifecycle Management for Services Industries (FS-PRO) to set a different rating for the different rating years.


Industries

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FS-CM



You enter the rating year in Customizing for SAP Insurance under Claims Management Claim Business Settings Damaged and Insured Objects/Diagnoses Damaged and Insured Objects/Injured Persons Define Makes and Models . Choose Make Model Category Year .

16.4.2.3 msg.PMQ

16.4.2.3.1 Switch to Eclipse 2018-12

With this feature the development platform Eclipse 2018-12 is the new technological base of PMQ.Designer . This ensures full Java 11 support.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component FS-MPM (msg.PMQ)



16.4.2.3.2 Object Extensions for Internal Tables

With this feature extensions for internal tables are now supported by msg.PMQ. In msg.PM 3.x classes, templates and product modules can also be extended. In msg.PMQ, however, inheritance mechanisms are used for this purpose. Now all essential object extensions are also available in msg.PMQ. Extensions allows you to customize delivered standard content according to your needs.

The title of the editor is indicated in the case of an extension by the addition "-extended". With the help of the

new button in the table editor, a new extension object can be created. The buttons and allow navigation between the objects of an extension chain.

The extension of internal tables is only supported for the Content mode. The Layout of an internal table cannot be changed.

In addition the following functionalities have been added to the extensions of internal tables:

● If a table extension has unnecessary overwrites in its data, these are now also found and can also be corrected.

● In the editor for the extension of tables in the view "Contents" it is now possible - as already in the editor for tables - to sort and filter the data of the individual columns.

Technical Details

Type New





16.4.2.3.3 Content Filter

This feature enables you to create content for a specific application system. The new headless command SearchAndDelete allows filtering and deleting elements from an existing workspace. This searches for named elements using a user-defined OCL query. These and their references can then be deleted by refactoring. As a result, the deployment is reduced to the number of required elements.


Industries

Technical Details

Type New





16.4.2.3.4 Downstream Refactoring

.

NoteThe function "Downstream Refactoring" has beta status. Only some of the changes to product module types and structure types are currently recognized and processed. Therefore, the function is currently not recommended for productive use. The function will be completed in the next release

Standard contents from suppliers are inevitably subject to changes over time. In the course of maintenance and further development, parts of a standard content can be adapted, extended, renamed, moved or even deleted. This also applies to product components that are already part of customer products. Sometimes changes in the standard cannot be made downwards compatible. The result is then partly extensive manual reworking of the customer contents. PMQ.Designer provides quick fixes to assist in troubleshooting customer content, but manual intervention is required.

With this new feature all changes made by the supplier to the standard content is automatically determined and then the customer content will be reworked using the existing refactoring mechanisms of PMQ.Designer so that it meets the requirements of the standard content.

In this release, the new functionality is initially only offered in the form of a batch command: PMQDesignerBatch.bat <workspace path> UpdateContent -baselineFolder=<folder path> | -baselineConfig=<file path> [-dryRun]

The -baselineFolder and -baselineConfig parameters can be used to specify the path (absolute file system path) to the folder where the files (QAR file or library configuration file) of the previously used version are located. These two parameters cannot be defined simultaneously. The comparison takes place with the active, new version of a standard content, which is located in the workspace.

For the time being, only changes to product module types and structure types are recognized and processed.

In the future, the aim is to detect and process all changes to a delivered content.


Technical Details

Type New





16.4.2.3.5 Comparison and Merging of Product Module Types and Structures

With this new feature you can compare historized data of product module types and structures (in the version management system or local protocol) with the current data of the object and, if desired, selectively integrate (merge). In this way, changes made by other users can be integrated into the version control system before the commit and thus preserved.

A new comparison editor is available for product module types and structures, which displays the separate elements in a similar way to the standard editor. Functions are now available for data integration that can integrate the entire element as well as separate properties of an element.

Technical Details

Type New





16.4.2.3.6 Support of Working Sets

In this feature the Eclipse integrated possibility to define working sets has been extended. With the help of the new working set type PMQ Working Set you can now use working sets sensibly in the PMQ.Designer environment. Thus, projects and project contents can be better structured and mapped in subsets. Independently of this, the existing resource working set is supported in the best possible way.


Industries

The working sets are managed with the functions Select Working Set / Edit Active Working Set (open the

view-specific menu in the PMQ explorer). With the function Deselect Working Set, the user-defined selection of projects and contents can be cancelled again.

Technical Details

Type New





16.4.2.3.7 Batch Scripts for the Workspace Creation with Git

This feature enables you to use the Git version control system. Previously, the automatic workspace creation with subsequent import of projects was only supported for the SVN version control system. This functionality has now been extended to support the Git version control system. As of this release, a Git configuration script (PMQWorkspaceSetupConfig_Git.bat) and a Git execution script (PMQWorkspaceSetupWorker_Git.bat) are also provided. Both scripts are located in the installation directory in the folder …/batch.

Technical Details

Type New






16.4.2.3.8 Data Version per Object Type

It is recommended to update all product data to the latest version with each release (performance improvement). This product data update results in changes to each content file. For distributed or larger teams, it is organizationally difficult to perform such a data migration once per release, as all content developers should first check in their local changes. When checking the updated product data into a version control system, it is difficult to manually check which changes have actually been made because each content file is affected.

With this feature, information about the data version is maintained for each object type. The current data version of an object type corresponds to the version of the msg.PMQ release in which the last change was made to its data format.

Technical Details

Type New





16.4.2.3.9 Integration and Development of Business Interface

As of this release, the Business Product Editor (BPE) is an integral part of PMQ.Designer and is therefore available for productive use for the first time. With this feature the view and editing of single product modules is facilitated by the special prepared form in the new editor.

With a corresponding configuration (*.pmbpecfg) you can adapt your relevant contents to your needs.

The following functionalities of the BPE are included in the productive version:

● Support of a storage functionality● Wizard for selecting PMQ objects to be deleted during the storage process● Wizard for selecting the editor scope● Wizard for creating new time slices● Wizard for defining new time slices● Wizard for connecting business-oriented product modules● Wizard for creating new business-oriented product modules● Wizard for unlocking business-oriented product modules


Industries

● Wizard for setting BPE settings● Various other actions in the main window (Open, Expand subtree, Minimize subtree, Delete)● Drag and Drop in the main window to move business-oriented product modules

In the course of this integration, PMQ.Designer has a new perspective PMQ for Business Users (Menu Window Perspective Open Perspective Other PMQ for Business Users ) and a new view Product

Explorer (Menu Window Show View Product Explorer ) at its disposal.

With the Product Explorer, only business-oriented entry points into the BPE are displayed. Objects such as formulas, product module types and tag types are not displayed.

Technical Details

Type New





16.4.2.3.10 Consolidation of Overrides of Mathematical Object Extensions

With this feature the functionality Search for redundant overrides has been extended. Unnecessary overwrites to extensions of structures, formulas, includes and functions are now also found and removed.

Technical Details

Type New






16.4.2.3.11 Insert in Comparison Editor

This feature enables you to insert copied entries in the comparison editor of product module types and product modules. The prerequisite for inserting entries is that the cells can be edited in the comparison editor. Cells that correspond to an inherited property can also include copied content using implicit overwriting.

Technical Details

Type New





16.4.2.3.12 Jump to Instance/Message in the Debugger

This feature enables you to display instances or messages in the view PMQ Product Module Instances / PMQ Messages:

● View Debug: Call stack entries within methods / calculated attributes● View PMQ Variables: Scalar variables of type Object or Message with value not equal to zero● View PMQ Variables: Elements of values of multidimensional variables of type Object with value not equal

to zero● Views PMQ Instance Details and PMQ Instance Watches: Product module instances● Debug hover (Introducing a new toolbar): Variables of type Object or Message or elements of

multidimensional variables of type Object

To jump to this option, select the context menu option Display Instance / Display Message. The new toolbar of the debug hover also contains the options Open Definition and Watch.

Technical Details

Type New




Industries



16.4.2.3.13 Support of new CAIMAN Versions

With this feature you can select the current CAIMAN versions in the SAP edition of PMQ.Designer.

The following table illustrates the new assignment of the integrated binary versions of CAIMAN:

Component Technical name CAIMAN version

FS-PM 5.3 FSPM_53 34101.50.1 'Shortcuts'

FS-PM 5.4 FSPM_54 34130.53 'My Generation'

S/4HANA 1709 INSURANCE_802 34140.53 'My Generation'

S/4HANA 1809 INSURANCE_803 34140.53 'My Generation'

Technical Details

Type New





16.4.2.3.14 Detail Improvements

The following features describe detail improvements:

● PMQ.Designer○ Improvements for Breakpoints

The PMQ.Designer debugger now also supports breakpoints for creating and deleting product module instances, relation instances, structure instances and messages.In addition, the following functions have been added to the existing breakpoints:○ Condition at exceptions○ Using breakpoints as trace points (console output instead of pausing)○ Using breakpoints as trigger points (preventing hitting of breakpoints until more trigger

breakpoints hit)


○ Freely selectable names for context variables in conditions and console outputs of watch points, exception breakpoints and instance breakpoints.

○ Deleting Objects via Search ViewIt is now possible to delete objects from the Search view in the view type Tree and List. The deletion takes place in the same way as deleting in other views and editors, that means, references to the object to be deleted are also removed.

○ Improvements for the Legacy ModeThe PMQ name check can be (de)activated using the project setting Legacy mode (context menu

Project Properties PMQ Settings Project Settings in the group Compability). The name check of msg.PMQ is more restrictive than in msg.PM 3.x. Only the letters A-Z, the numbers 0-9 and underscores are allowed.The project settings Legacy mode and C runtime support can now be switched independently. Customers who use C runtime as their runtime environment can now also use PMQ name validation. Problems in downstream application systems due to the use of special characters in names can thus be avoided.The legacy mode contains further validations. These validations have been fundamentally revised.For more information, refer to the PMQ.Designer User Guide, section 'Legacy Mode (Compatibility to msg.PM 3.x)'

○ Improvements for the Product Data UpdateThe dialog for updating the product data (context menu Project Update Product Data ) has been adapted. The previous options○ Update old product data to the current data version (including add/update GUIDs for stable object

referencing)○ Reformat all product data XMLs○ Delete history in the product data

are an integral part of the product data update as of this release. The user now has the possibility to update either all files or only files with outdated data versions. The option Activate automatic naming for product module relations is retained and can only be activated in connection with updating all files.Furthermore, a new headless command UpdateProductData is introduced. In the course of this a new flag -allFiles is provided, which extends the scope of the update to all files.The parameter -updateProductData can now be set for the already existing headless command ImportExistingContentProject - as for the headless command ImportContentArchive. If the parameter -updateProductData is specified, the data version of the imported objects is updated to the data version used by PMQ.Designer, otherwise the data version is not adjusted.For the command ImportExistingContentProject, the original boolean parameter -ignoreExisting was renamed to -skipExisting and converted to a flag. If the flag -skipExisting is specified, existing projects are skipped during import. If the option is not set, the import of an existing project is terminated with an error.

Technical Details

Type New



Industries




16.4.2.3.15 Error Corrections and Usability ImprovementsThe following features fix smaller issues:

● PMQ.Designer○ Until now, all available columns could be displayed in all views of an editor. Now you can only select

columns that make sense for the respective view.○ When searching for the use of enumeration entries, the system only checked whether the content

project was included in the scope of the search when assigning the search results. Content libraries were not checked. This has been fixed.

○ The behavior for displaying and hiding folders in the test result editor has been adapted to the behavior of the test structure editor. Folders can now be shown or hidden in the list and detail view using the

button .○ The selection of an aggregated product module in the product module editor is now retained when

switching between different views. Newly created relations are preselected. In this context, a "Template" column has been added in which the template of an aggregated product module is displayed.

○ The formulation of various validation messages, some of which were very technical and general, have now been adapted to make them easier for the user to understand. For example, checkings have been adapted in the following context:○ Value to data type check○ Cardinalities of relations check○ String length restriction check

○ The number of errors and warnings, if any, is displayed in the title bar of an editor. All available quick fixes were displayed individually via a corresponding context menu. Similar quick fixes are now grouped into the entry.

○ The coloring of the line number column in the source code editor has been improved. It now adapts to a dark color scheme even if it is selected. The color scheme for M10 identifiers has also been improved.

○ When switching to the properties view of a product module via the button in the upper area of the editor, the associated type comment was sometimes not displayed correctly. This has been fixed.

○ When editing the condition of breakpoints in the debugger, null pointer exceptions could occur that were logged in the error log. This has been fixed.

○ In M10 formulas, autocompletion was unintentionally activated when a point was entered in a string literal. This has been fixed.

○ If Reset and Rebuild All PMQ Projects are executed in the Project menu, already running build jobs are aborted promptly and all new projects are created afterwards.

○ If a formula was debugged in PMQ.Designer which contains a call of the built in functions exp or rnd, the result value of the built in function was not displayed correctly in the hover. This has been fixed.

○ When PMQ.Designer was started, a full build was always executed if GUIDs were missing from subordinate objects (e.g. relations) in the projects of the workspace. This has been fixed.


○ The product data update via context menu was not executed for deployment an POTATO projects. This has been fixed.

○ The value of an attribute, which was set to <NULL> during calculation, was displayed incorrectly in the test result editor after test execution. This has been fixed.

○ Customer-specific validation messages cause QAR archives to be marked as incorrect when they are deployed.

○ The generated Java code of formulas has been optimized for better just-in-time compilability in the Java VM. However, this optimization is at the expense of calculations that generate many exceptions in formulas.

○ The generation of cache keys of the function result cache in connection with calculated input variables of methods or calculated attributes was corrected.

○ The display in the Technical Schema Diagram was not updated correctly when changes were made to relation cardinalities.

○ The size of the window for creating a variable assignment in test cases is now dynamically adapted to the resolution. This behavior has been applied to all wizard windows in PMQ.Designer.

○ In editors that contain columns with numeric values, a comparison by numeric value is now performed by default and sorted accordingly.

○ Packages and folders could no longer be moved. This has been fixed.○ When performing the deployment in headless mode, a validation of the projects to be deployed in a

workspace is performed at the beginning. If errors occur, the details are now also listed at the end of a terminated deployment process.

○ Renaming a template resulted in an error that caused the new name to be incorrectly written to the reference. This has been fixed.

○ Using the command SearchAndDelete in the batch process of PMQ.Designer could lead to aborts without a concrete error message. This has been fixed.

○ The culture az-AZ (Azerbaijani) has been added to the list of supported cultures. Cultures with more than two segments (e.g. az-AZ-Latn and az-AZ-Cyrl) have been removed from the list of supported cultures.

○ During C runtime generation, the package and folder structure of the underlying projects is no longer checked. This allows C runtime compilations of any complexity to be generated. When importing into PM.Designer 3.x, only PM3-compatible structures are supported.

○ The inheritance in connection with the derivation hierarchy for structure types was incorrect. This has been fixed.

○ An empty XML tag <transportrule> was created in the XML data in the following situations:○ when importing internal tables using POTATO○ when creating new internal tables○ when updating the product data version from internal tables to the version 1903

This tag is not needed and is therefore no longer generated.○ The Java code generation of the Iterate statement in M10 has been corrected. The final value is now

determined only once at the beginning, as in msg.PM 3.x.○ The Java code generation for Goto statements in Switch statements with multiple case brances has

been corrected.○ The generation of Java code from formulas with Continue statements in Switch statements has been

corrected. Sometimes the Continue statement jumped to the beginning of the Switch statement.○ The behavior of the M10 build in function copy() has been adapted to the behavior of msg.PM 3.x.

When copying product module instances to structure instances, attributes without a value (null) now generate an exception. Previously, such attributes were ignored in msg.PMQ.


Industries

○ In result files of test case executions the data version was corrected.○ The check of compilation IDs in the deployment only contains the error message "The compilation ID is

invalid. It must be 10 characters long and may only contain the characters 0-9 and A-Z." Other messages in this context are not technically necessary and have therefore been removed.

● POTATO○ The POTATO export may hava terminated with a null pointer exception (Error on searching element by

name "PMQGenericProduct") if only selected projects of the workspace were specified in the selection filter. This has been fixed.

Technical Details

Type Changed





16.5 Public Services

16.5.1 Defense & Security

16.5.1.1 Force Element

You can use this feature to create, update, delete, and delimit organizational units (force elements) or templates for the organizational units (reference force elements). You can also use it to visualize relevant parts of the organizational structure.

Technical Details

Type New




Application Component IS-DFS-OF-FE


Additional Details

Force ElementFour apps are used to work with force elements:

● Manage Force Element● Manage Force Element - Capabilities● Manage Force Element - Authorized Material● Manage Force Element - Maintenance

The app Manage Force Element is the main app. The other three apps are variants of the main app. All of the apps have nearly the same structure. They differ to meet the needs of different roles.

App Usage Link

Manage Force Element Enables the organizational planner to create, update, delete and delimit organizational units (force elements)

see Manage Force Element

Manage Force Element - Capabilities Enables the capability planner (Organizational Planner – Capabilities) to add or update capability-relevant information in existing organizational units (force elements), specifically by managing assignments between the force element and capabilities and mission essential task lists

see Manage Force Element - Capabilities

Manage Force Element - Authorized Material

Enables the material planner (Material Planner – Authorized Materials) to add or update authorized material-relevant information in existing organizational units (force elements), specifically by managing assignments between the force element and flexible material planning objects or products

see Manage Force Element - Authorized Material

Manage Force Element - Maintenance Enables the maintenance planner (Maintenance Planner – Force Element) to add or update maintenance-relevant information in existing organizational units (force elements)

see Manage Force Element - Maintenance


Industries

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e08e0da88aa64d9095334cdb5fa3b25d/1909.000/en-US/cb66d3df12bc4cd0b935f1ffc2bffe3e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e08e0da88aa64d9095334cdb5fa3b25d/1909.000/en-US/19ad45d5229c438a821c31d800f75aef.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e08e0da88aa64d9095334cdb5fa3b25d/1909.000/en-US/19ad45d5229c438a821c31d800f75aef.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e08e0da88aa64d9095334cdb5fa3b25d/1909.000/en-US/08dbb787151043369b24d95feacb0b86.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e08e0da88aa64d9095334cdb5fa3b25d/1909.000/en-US/08dbb787151043369b24d95feacb0b86.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e08e0da88aa64d9095334cdb5fa3b25d/1909.000/en-US/883e8c9a27dd45d08e6dbea0d5df003e.html

https://help.sap.com/viewer/e08e0da88aa64d9095334cdb5fa3b25d/1909.000/en-US/883e8c9a27dd45d08e6dbea0d5df003e.html

Each app provides detailed information about an organizational unit, such as:

Overview of Detailed Information in Each Force Element App

InfomationApp Manage Force Element

App Manage Force Element - Capabilities

App Manage Force Element - Authorized Material

App Manage Force Element - Maintenance

Name, detailed description, organizational characteristics, tactical symbol

x x x x

Hierarchical command and control relationships

x x x x

Readiness / preparedness

x x x x

Maintenance-specific data

x x

Assigned authorized material

x x

Assigned capability information

x x

Assigned documents x x x x

Additional categorization using customer-defined classification attributes

x x x x

The following activities can be performed using all available apps for force elements:

● Creation of a root force element● Creation of subordinate force elements● Add, update and delete the data mentioned above● Status changes to force elements and their dependent data● Copy force elements to force elements● Copy force elements to reference force elements● Search, filter and list display for force elements

Reference Force Element

Manage Reference Force Element is an application that enables the Organizational Planner - Force Element to create, update, delimit, and delete the templates for organizational elements within the organizational structure of a defense & security organization. The app is closely related to the "Manage Force Element" app. However, it only contains a subset of data.

The app provides detailed information about the template organizational unit, such as

● Name, detailed description, organizational characteristics, tactical symbol● Hierarchical command & control relationships to other units● Readiness data● Support relationships (supply, maintenance) to other units


● Maintenance-specific data● Assigned authorized material (flexible material planning objects, products)● Assigned capability information (capabilities, mission essential task lists)● Assigned documents● Additional categorization by using customer-defined classification attributes

The following activities can be performed using the app:

● Creation of a root force element● Creation of subordinate reference force elements● Add, update and delete the data mentioned above● Status changes to reference force elements and their dependent data● Copy reference force elements to force elements● Copy reference force elements to reference force elements● Search, filter and list display for reference force elements

Force Structure

Manage Force Structure is an application that enables the organizational planner – and other related roles – to visualize relevant parts of the organizational structure of a defense & security organization.

Functions provided by the app are:

● Search for a force element or reference force element as starting point for the structure display● Display (parts of) either the force element or reference force element structures● Display hierarchical command & control relationships between the elements of a structure● For force elements: Display structure type-dependent relationships (such as the administrative chain of

command, wartime establishment)● Display superior or subordinate elements● Expand or collapse (sub-)structures● Display selected detailed data for a specific element● Navigate to the corresponding app used to manage an individual force element or reference force element.

16.5.1.2 Flexible Material Planning Object

You can use this feature to maintain and manage authorized materials (consumable and non-consumable goods) for force elements. The flexible material planning object is an enhanced material planning object that you can use more flexibly. You can also use this feature to get a clear hierarchical view of the flexible material planning objects.

Technical Details

Type New


Industries



Application Component IS-DFS-OF-FMP


Additional Details

App Manage Flexible Material Planning ObjectManage Flexible Material Planning Object is an application that helps the Master Data Specialist - Authorized Material Data to maintain and manage authorized materials (consumable and non-consumable goods).

Using the application you can,

● Maintain flexible material planning objects (FMPOs)● Maintain variants for the FMPO along with the details, such as models, accompanying parts-FMPOs,

accompanying parts-products, and so on.● Display FMPO assignments to force elements and reference force elements● Add another FMPO as a parent FMPO and create a parent-child relationship between FMPOs

16.5.1.3 Capability

You can use this feature to manage the scope of capabilities and related associations to various defense areas to serve a directive in the defense capability. You can also use it to maintain capability statements and mission essential tasks (METL). METLs show the tasks for which military units need to train and then execute in missions. METLs are structured hierarchically and are used in conjunction with capabilities to describe the abilities of armed forces.

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component IS-DFS-OF-CAP



Additional Details

App Manage Capability

Manage Capability is an application that helps the Organization Planner - Capabilities to manage the scope of capabilities and related associations to various defense areas to serve a directive in the defense capability.

● It provides a hierarchy view of the capability structure.● It allows you to maintain a detailed description of a capability (code, owner, name, symbol, status).● It allows you to maintain a capability (code), the capability hierarchies, and capability variant groups.● It allows you to link a capability to capability statements, (reference) force elements, and mission essential

tasks.● You can add customer-defined fields to capabilities.

App Manage Capability Statement

Manage Capability Statement is an application that helps the Organization Planner - Capabilities to maintain capability statements.

● It allows you to maintain a detailed description of a capability statement.● It is possible to define different capability types and select different capability categories.● A capability statement can be linked to one or more capabilities.● You can add customer-defined fields to capability statements.

App Manage Mission Essential Task

Manage Mission Essential Task is an application that enables the Organizational Planner - Capabilities to manage the different mission essential tasks and task lists (METL). METLs reflect the tasks for which military units need to train and then execute in missions. METLs are structured hierarchically and are used in conjunction with capabilities to describe the abilities of armed forces.

● It provides a hierarchy view of the METL structure● It allows you to maintain the detailed description of a METL (name, description, tasks, owner, status)● It is possible to link METLs to capabilities and (reference) force elements● You can add customer-defined fields to METLs.

16.5.2 Public Sector

16.5.2.1 Public Sector Management

16.5.2.1.1 Multi-Level Budget Structures in Funds Management Budgeting

With this feature you can define rules for budget distribution and validation based on funds management master data hierarchies with multi-level budget structures.

You can use:


Industries

● Time-dependent feature activation (fiscal year) by funds management area.● Flexible definition of the hierarchical role played by a master data in the multi-level budget structure.● Multilevel-related checks can be activated for changes to hierarchies and for the budget distribution

process.● Budget maintenance with multi-level budget structures is supported in the budgeting workbench

(transaction FMBB) and in the multiple budget entry tool (transaction FMPEP).

Technical Details

Type New



Application Component PSM (Public Sector Management)



Maintain the Multi-Level Bugdet Struture-Customizing under Public Sector Management Funds Management Government Master Data Use of Account Assignment Elements Budget Structure (BCS)Multi-Level Budget Struture .

16.5.2.1.2 US Federal Government Data Included in Universal Journal

The following features integrate the SAP US Federal Government data in the universal journal. The journal integration involves the US Federal attributes, general ledger splitting characteristics, display and simulation in FI documents, and an embedded analytics concept.

Technical Details

Type Changed

Functional Localization Localized for the United States



Application Component PSM-FG (Functions for U.S. Federal Government

Available As Of S/4HANA 1909

Additional Details

US Federal Attributes in Universal Journal

This feature enables the following US Federal attributes in the universal journal:

● Attributes for GTAS reporting, such as federal/ non-federal indicator, reimbursable indicator, agency treasury account symbol components (TAS).

● PAM and IPAC attributes (agency and trading partner TAS and business event type code (BETC), agency location code (ALC) and payment office)

● Commitment string● Object class for US Federal

US Federal-Specific General Ledger Splitting Characteristics

This feature enables document splitting and balancing characteristics to be added to the universal journal as GL split characteristics and as fields:

● Object Class for US FederalThe commitment item that was entered in the revenue and expenditure lines in the initial document posting is moved to the universal journal field. The field should be configured as a splitting and balancing characteristic for both the receivable, liability, and subsequent cash accounts.

● Commitment StringThe commitment string represents the original document where budget consumption occurs (such as the purchase order/line item (LI), earmarked funds/LI, sales order/LI, or FI document/LI) and should be configured as a splitting and balancing characteristic for the update to the relevant document line items in the universal journal.This supports reporting across process chains, the US federal payment update (delivered paid/undelivered paid), and the trading partner treasury account symbol being entered in the original document (such as the purchase order, sales order, earmarked funds) and being subsequently updated in follow on documents, making these attributes available for GTAS, PAM and IPAC.

FI Document Display and Simulation including US Federal Attributes

This feature enhances the FI document display and simulation in the SAP GUI:

● Display US federal attributes in the 'ledger view' of 'Display Document' (transaction FB02)● Display the budgetary ledger document in 'Display Document' (transaction FB02)● Simulate federal attribute derivation in the 'Simulate General Ledger' function for:

○ Enter G/L Account Document (transaction FB50)○ Enter Vendor Invoice (transaction FB60)○ Enter Customer Invoice (transaction FB70)○ Post Document (transaction FB01)

Embedded Analytics to Analyze Universal Journal with US Federal Attributes


Industries

This feature enables the display of US Federal attributes in the following financial accounting queries:

● C_TrialBalanceQ0001● C_GLLineItemsQ0001


Migration from US Federal ledger to the universal journal is not currently supported. This needs to be addressed on a project basis.


Public Sector Management account assignments as document splitting characteristics are included in the FI Customizing under Financial Accounting General Ledger Accounting Business Transactions Document Splitting .

16.6 Services


Important Disclaimers and Legal Information

HyperlinksSome links are classified by an icon and/or a mouseover text. These links provide additional information.About the icons:

● Links with the icon : You are entering a Web site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, you agree (unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP) to this:

● The content of the linked-to site is not SAP documentation. You may not infer any product claims against SAP based on this information.● SAP does not agree or disagree with the content on the linked-to site, nor does SAP warrant the availability and correctness. SAP shall not be liable for any

damages caused by the use of such content unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct.

● Links with the icon : You are leaving the documentation for that particular SAP product or service and are entering a SAP-hosted Web site. By using such links, you agree that (unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP) you may not infer any product claims against SAP based on this information.

Beta and Other Experimental FeaturesExperimental features are not part of the officially delivered scope that SAP guarantees for future releases. This means that experimental features may be changed by SAP at any time for any reason without notice. Experimental features are not for productive use. You may not demonstrate, test, examine, evaluate or otherwise use the experimental features in a live operating environment or with data that has not been sufficiently backed up.The purpose of experimental features is to get feedback early on, allowing customers and partners to influence the future product accordingly. By providing your feedback (e.g. in the SAP Community), you accept that intellectual property rights of the contributions or derivative works shall remain the exclusive property of SAP.

Example CodeAny software coding and/or code snippets are examples. They are not for productive use. The example code is only intended to better explain and visualize the syntax and phrasing rules. SAP does not warrant the correctness and completeness of the example code. SAP shall not be liable for errors or damages caused by the use of example code unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct.

Gender-Related LanguageWe try not to use gender-specific word forms and formulations. As appropriate for context and readability, SAP may use masculine word forms to refer to all genders.


Important Disclaimers and Legal Information

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909Important Disclaimers and Legal Information P U B L I C 883

www.sap.com/contactsap

© 2019 SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.

Some software products marketed by SAP SE and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. National product specifications may vary.

These materials are provided by SAP SE or an SAP affiliate company for informational purposes only, without representation or warranty of any kind, and SAP or its affiliated companies shall not be liable for errors or omissions with respect to the materials. The only warranties for SAP or SAP affiliate company products and services are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services, if any. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.

SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies.

Please see https://www.sap.com/about/legal/trademark.html for additional trademark information and notices.

THE BEST RUN

https://www.sap.com/about/legal/trademark.html

What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909

Documents

Transcript of What's New in SAP S/4HANA 1909